Ielts Academic Writing Task 1 Samples Over 450

Text Copyright © by Rachel Mitchell
All rights reserved. No part of this guide may be reproduced in any form
without permission in writing from the publisher except in the case of brief
quotations embodied in critical articles or reviews.
Legal & Disclaimer
The information contained in this book and its contents is not designed to
replace or take the place of any form of medical or professional advice; and is
not meant to replace the need for independent medical, financial, legal or
other professional advice or services, as may be required. The content and
information in this book have been provided for educational and
entertainment purposes only.
The content and information contained in this book have been compiled from
sources deemed reliable, and it is accurate to the best of the Author's
knowledge, information, and belief. However, the Author cannot guarantee
its accuracy and validity and cannot be held liable for any errors and/or
omissions. Further, changes are periodically made to this book as and when
needed. Where appropriate and/or necessary, you must consult a professional
(including but not limited to your doctor, attorney, financial advisor or such
other professional advisor) before using any of the suggested remedies,
techniques, or information in this book.
Upon using the contents and information contained in this book, you agree to
hold harmless the Author from and against any damages, costs, and expenses,
including any legal fees potentially resulting from the application of any of
the information provided by this book. This disclaimer applies to any loss,
damages or injury caused by the use and application, whether directly or
indirectly, of any advice or information presented, whether for breach of
contract, tort, negligence, personal injury, criminal intent, or under any other
cause of action.
You agree to accept all risks of using the information presented inside this
book.
You agree that by continuing to read this book, where appropriate and/or
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
necessary, you shall consult a professional (including but not limited to your
doctor, attorney, or financial advisor or such other advisor as needed) before
using any of the suggested remedies, techniques, or information in this book.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir
Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION
BOOK 1
BOOK 2
BOOK 3
BOOK 4
BOOK 5
BOOK 6
BOOK 7
BOOK 8
BOOK 9
BOOK 10
CONCLUSION
CHECK OUT OTHER BOOKS
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
INTRODUCTION
Thank you and congratulate you for downloading the book “IELTS Academic
Writing Task 1 Samples: Over 450 High Quality Samples for Your Reference
to Gain a High Band Score 8.0+ In 1 Week (Box set).”
This book is well designed and written by an experienced native teacher from
oomm
the USA who has been teaching IELTS for over 10 years. She really is the
expert in training IELTS for students at each level. In this book, she will
provide you over 450 high quality sample essays to help you easily achieve
.c.c
an 8.0+ in the IELTS Writing Task 1 (Academic), even if your English is not
rrss
excellent. These samples will also walk you through step-by-step on how to
develop your well-organized answers for the Task 1 Writing.
ttttee
As the author of this book, I believe that this book will be an indispensable
reference and trusted guide for you who may want to maximize your band
aa
score in IELTS academic task 1 writing. Once you read this book, I guarantee
you that you will have learned an extraordinarily wide range of useful, and
MM
practical IELTS WRITING TASK 1 sample essays that will help you become
a successful IELTS taker as well as you will even become a successful
SS
English writer in work and in life within a short period of time only.
LLTT
Take action today and start getting better scores tomorrow!
Thank you again for purchasing this book, and I hope you enjoy it.
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

Ielts Academic Writing Task 1 Samples
Over 35 High Quality Samples for Your Reference to Gain a High Band
Score 8.0+ In 1 Week (Book 1)
-- By Rachel Mitchell –
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Legal & Disclaimer
o mm
o
.c.c
ss
rr
ttttee
aa
M
SS M
TT
LL
IIEE
cause of action.
book.
www.zandienglish.ir

www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION
SAMPLE 1
SAMPLE 2
SAMPLE 3
oomm
SAMPLE 4
.c.c
SAMPLE 5
SAMPLE 6
rrss
SAMPLE 7
ttttee
SAMPLE 8
SAMPLE 9 aa
SAMPLE 10
SSMM
TT
SAMPLE 11
SAMPLE 12
LL
IIEE
SAMPLE 13
SAMPLE 14
SAMPLE 15
SAMPLE 16
SAMPLE 17
SAMPLE 18
SAMPLE 19
SAMPLE 20
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 21
SAMPLE 22
SAMPLE 23
SAMPLE 24
SAMPLE 25
SAMPLE 26
SAMPLE 27
SAMPLE 28
SAMPLE 29
SAMPLE 30
SAMPLE 31
SAMPLE 32
SAMPLE 33
SAMPLE 34
SAMPLE 35
SAMPLE 36
CONCLUSION
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
INTRODUCTION
to Gain a High Band Score 8.0+ In 1 Week (Book 1).”
oomm
provide you over 35 high quality sample essays to help you easily achieve an
.c.c
8.0+ in the IELTS Writing Task 1 (Academic), even if your English is not
rrss
ttttee
aa
MM
SS
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 1
The given pie charts compare the expenses in 7 different categories in
1966 and 1996 by American Citizens.
Write a report for a university lecturer describing the information below.
You should write at least 150 words.
You should spend about 20 minutes on this task.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The pie charts compare the expenditure on 7 certain categories by American
citizens in 1966 and 1996.
Overall, the figures showed that the Americans spent more amount of money
on food and cars than other remaining items in both years. Nevertheless,
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
there were numerous changes in American people’s expenses from 1966 to
1996.
In the year 1966, food and car are two goods that the citizens mostly used
their budget to purchase, at about 44% for food and 23% for car. In contrast,
people are less likely to spend on 4 other categories with similar percentages,
including 9% on petrol, 7% on restaurants, 10% on furniture and only 6% on
1% in 1966.
oomm
books. Likewise, computers were the least expensed categories by exactly
.c.c
In 1996, the figures for car expenditure/ spending increased by twofold at
ss
45% compared to that in 1966. On the contrary, the consumption of food
rr
decreased dramatically to 14% and was equal to that of restaurants, which
ttttee
jumped double since 1966. Meanwhile, the proportion of two categories,
petrol and furniture almost stayed the same, at 8% for both. Another visible
trend was that the computer expenditure surged to 10% while that of books
dropped to 1%.
aa
M
199 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
SS M
TT
The pie charts illustrate the expenditure of US citizens in 6 different
categories in 1966 and 1996.
LL
Overall, food and cars accounted for the largest proportion in 1966 and 1996
IIEE
respectively. Additionally, there was a reduction in the amount of money US
inhabitants spent on food, petrol, furniture and books whereas car, restaurants
and computer experienced an increase over the period shown.
In 1966, food was the primary source of expenses, at 44%; however, its
number decreased remarkably by 30% to only 14%, which was the second
highest together with restaurants in the year 1996. During the period of 30
years, the figure for expenditure on furniture remained relatively constant, at
about 10% and 8% in 1966 and 1996 respectively. Over the same period of
time, books saw a slight decrease of precisely 5%, which accounted for the
lowest percentage in 1996.
In terms of cars, its figure witnessed a significant growth from 23% to 45%
www.zandienglish.ir

and remained the highest point in the year 1996. Likewise, US residents spent
more money on restaurants than they did previously, at exactly 14% in 1996.
In addition, computers accounted for the lowest proportion in 1966; however,
30 years later, its percentage increased dramatically, climbing to 10% in the
year 1996. Meanwhile, there was a small change of 1% in the amount of
money spent on petrol by US inhabitants, from 9% to 8% in 1966 and 1996
respectively.
220 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 2
The charts below show the percentage of water used for different
purposes in six areas of the world.
Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and
make comparisons where relevant.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
MODEL ANSWER 1:
IIEE
The pie charts compare the proportion of water consumption for industry,
agriculture, and domestic purpose in six separate regions of the world.
Overall, it is clear that water used for agriculture accounts for the largest
proportion, except for North America and Europe, mainly providing for
industrial use.
With regard to agricultural use, Central Asia is the area that uses the greatest
level of water, at exactly 88%, followed by the figure for Africa and South
East Asia, at 84% and 81% respectively. South America needs a smaller rate,
with 71%, compared to one-third of the total consumption in Europe.
www.zandienglish.ir

In contrast, Europe area primarily uses water for industry, making up the
highest percentage among the remaining regions, over a half of the total.
Likewise, 48% of water is prioritized this purpose in North America,
contrasting to 10% of that in South America. A noticeable pattern is that all
six areas use an inconsiderable percentage of water for domestic purpose,
apart from South America, with 19%, being the most significant consumption
level.
172 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The pie charts give information about the proportion of water used for
industrial, agricultural and domestic purposes in 6 different regions in the
world.
Overall, more water is consumed by agriculture than by industry and homes
in the two Asia regions, Africa, and South America. By contrast, industry
accounts for the vast majority of water used in North America and Europe.
Out of 6 areas of the world, agriculture is the main use of water in Central
and South East Asia, Africa and South America. The figures for 4 areas are
at/take up 88%, 81%, 84% and 71% respectively. In contrast, only 39% of
agricultural water consumption in North America, which is 7% higher than
the figure for Europe.
The opposite trend can be seen in water consumption for Industry. This
(category) makes up 53% of total water usage in Europe compared to 48%
(of total water usage) in North America. By comparison, the figures for 4
remaining regions were much lower, varying from 5% to 12%. In terms of
Domestic use, while the proportion of water used for homes in the two
regions of America and Europe is over 13%, the figures for Central and
South East Asia and Africa are under 10%.
204 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 3
The graph below gives information about car ownership in Britain from
1971 to 2007.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
MODEL ANSWER 1:
LLTT
IIEE
The graph illustrates the proportion of cars used by households in Great
Britain during a 36-year period from 1971 to 2007.
Overall, the percentage of households who owned cars in Britain increased
between 1971 and 2007. In addition, the number of households with two cars
increased while the number of households without a car decreased rapidly.
Great Britain saw a steady increase in car ownership during a 20-year period.
In 1995, 20% of British families owned two cars while the figure for using
three or more cars was about 6%. During the same period, the percentage of
families with no car decreased sharply from 48% to approximately 25%.
From 1999 to 2007, there was an increasing number of families who
www.zandienglish.ir

purchased two cars and three or more cars, with 28% and 8%, respectively.
Meanwhile, families with one car still made up the majority for the whole
line graph, but their percentage dropped slightly to 42% in 2007.
158 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The line graph compares different households in terms of the number of cars
that they owned in the Great Britain between 1971 and 2007.
Overall, there were significant changes in the car ownership over the period
of 36 years. In particular, the percentages of households without a car
decreased while the reverse was true in the proportion of two-car British
families.
In 1971, almost half the number of households did not use cars regularly.
Around 45% of households had one car, but only about 7% had two cars.
Meanwhile, the figure for families with more than two cars was just under
3%.
From the late 1970s to 2007, one-car households accounted for the largest
portion of the total car ownership in Britain. Although there was a minor
change in the figure for this category, it always remained above 40%. While
the percentage of no-car families dropped significantly to 25%, the
proportion of two-car families rose to around 26%. A gradual increase was
seen in the rate of households using more than two cars, with approximately
5% in 2007.
178 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 4
The chart below shows the changes that took place in three different
areas of crime in New Port city center from 2003-2012.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
MODEL ANSWER 1:
LLTT
The line graph illustrates the fluctuation of crime rates in three various types
IIEE
in Newport city over the period of 9 years, from 2003 to 2012.
Overall, all kinds of crime experienced frequent changes over 9 years with
different levels. While the rates of car theft and robbery fluctuated slightly
during the 9-year period, the number of incidents reported due to burglary
saw a significant downward trend.
In 2013, starting at the point of nearly 3500 incidents, the figures for burglary
reached its peak at approximately 3750 incidents in 2004. The following 4
years followed by a sharp decline before hitting its bottom of around 1200
incidents. The rates of burglary in the remaining period increased a little bit
and remained nearly unchanged around the point of 1400 incidents.
Theft relating to cars stayed constant in 2 years at about 2800 incidents
www.zandienglish.ir

before its sudden drop in 2006 to just above 2000 incidents. The rest of time
witnessed a gradual increase to nearly the same level in 2003, 2750 incidents.
There was a significant change that could be seen from robbery, the type of
crime which had the lowest number of incidents, at around 650 incidents.
196 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The line graph compares three different types of crime in terms of a number
of incidents in the center of Newport city between 2003 and 2012.
It is clear that the number of robbery incidents was by far the lowest figure
during the research period. Additionally, the figure for burglaries experienced
the most dramatic change from 2003 to 2012.
In 2003, the quantity of burglaries was highest, at nearly 3500, while the
figure for robberies was significantly lower, at around 700. At the same time,
about 2800 incidents happening were car thefts. From 2003 to 2008, the
number of burglary incidents decreased remarkably and reached the lowest
point at roughly 1200. Meanwhile, Newport city centre witnessed slight
declines in the figures for car thefts and robberies.
In the following four-year period, the number of car theft incidents rose
gradually to slightly more than 2700 and became the highest figure in the
chart. The figure for robberies seemed to remain stable at just over 500, while
there was an insignificant increase to approximately 1300 in the number of
incidents caused by burglars.
180 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 5
The pie chart below shows the main reasons why agricultural land
becomes less productive. The table shows how these causes affected three
regions of the world during the 1990s.
Summarize the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and
Write at least 150 words.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The pie chart illustrates 4 main reasons caused the degradation of agricultural
land. The table shows the percentage of land in three specific regions was
affected by these causes in the year 1990.
www.zandienglish.ir

Overall, it is clear that over-grazing was the primary factor causing
degradation. Moreover, Europe was by far the region which was influenced
the most in the total land degraded.
From the pie chart, over-grazing accounted for the largest proportion, at 35
%, which was the major cause leading to degradation. Meanwhile, the second
most notable reason was deforestation (30%), which was slightly higher than
the proportion of over-cultivation, by 2%.
According to the table, Europe had the highest rate of land degraded by
deforestation with 9.8%, while the impact on Oceania and North America
was minimal, at 1.7 and 0.2 respectively. In the data of land degraded by
over-cultivation, 7.7% land of Europe decreased in the productivity and 3.3%
North America experienced the same influence. Interestingly, over-
cultivation had no effect to Oceania. In contrast, Oceania had 11.3% of
degraded farmland because of over-grazing. The figures for Europe and
North America was lower, at 5.5% and 1.5% respectively.
190 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The charts illustrate the four main factors which resulted in farmland
degradation all over the world and depict the percentage of those in three
separate regions.
Overall, it is evident that Europe suffered more from land degradation than
the two other lands, and the two main causes of this were deforestation and
overgrazing.
65% of the world degradation land has its roots from over-grazing and
deforestation, constituting 35% and 30% respectively. In addition, 28% of
global degradation is due to over-cultivation. Other causes account for only
7%.
In the 1990s, due to deforestation, 9.8% of the land in Europe was degraded,
while the impact of this on Oceania and North America was minimal, at only
1.7% and 0.2% respectively. There was 13% of degraded farmland in
Oceania caused mainly by over-grazing. Meanwhile, the total degraded land
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
in North America made up the lowest proportion, and the main causes were
over-cultivation (3.3%) and over-grazing (1.8%). In contrast, Europe had the
largest percentage of land degradation (23%) as well as a significant
proportion in over-cultivation (7.7%) and over-grazing (5.5%).
177 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 6
The chart below gives information about the most common sports played
in New' Zealand in 2002.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart compares the proportion of boys and girls who participated in
various sports in New Zealand in the year 2002.
Overall, it is apparent that there were significant differences in the percentage
of boys and girls who took part in most of these sports, whereas basketball
and tennis experienced a similar figure in both genders.
Among girls, the most common sports were netball and swimming which
made up over 25% and 23%, respectively, followed by tennis, basketball,
athletics, which all had the figure of under 10%. By contrast, cricket and
modern arts were the least common activities chosen by girls, which
represented a mere 1% and 2% in that order. Finally, 10% of girls took part in
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
other activities.
When it comes to the figure for boys, the sports with the highest participation
figure were soccer, swimming, and cricket with 25%, 13%, and 12%,
respectively. Meanwhile, martial arts, basketball, tennis were in the next
position which all had the figure between 8% and 11%. In a stark contrast,
the most striking feature can be seen from the chart is that fewer boys
oomm
participated athletics and netball than girls did which were only 3% and 1%,
compared to 5% and 21% of girls in that order. About 18% of boys played
other sports.
.c.c
ss
215 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
rr
ttttee
The bar chart provides information about the proportion of two genders who
participated in different sports in New Zealand in 2002.
aa
Overall, it is clear that there were significant differences in the percentage of
MM
boys and girls who took part in most of these sports. However, the proportion
of those who played basketball and tennis was similar.
SS
Among girls, 25% played netball and the slightly lower percentage - 22% -
LLTT
enjoyed swimming. The proportion of girls who took part in basketball and
tennis was 6% and 7% respectively. These were followed by soccer, athletics
and martial arts which were 6%, 5%, and less than 5% respectively. Finally,
IIEE
participation in other sports totaled around 10%.
In contrast, among boys, only 1% played netball, while the sports with the
highest participation figure was soccer, at 25%. Around 13% and 11% of
boys took part in swimming and cricket respectively. Sports which all had
figures of between 3% and 9% were tennis, basketball, and martial arts.
About 18% of boys participated in other sports.
172 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 7
The graph below compares the number of visits to two new music sites
on the web. Write a report for a university lecturer describing the
information shown below.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The line graph illustrates the number of audiences coming to two music sites
online, namely Music Choice and Pop Parade, and the changes of these data
during 15-days term.
Overall, the daily visits of both two music concerts fluctuated rapidly from
the beginning to the end. Despite some similarities between two lines, the
general number of visitors throughout 15 days of Pop Parade was higher than
that of Music Choice.
In the first two days, the visits rates decreased from 40 to 20 visits per day
before there was a small rise in day 3. Unfortunately, the number of visitors
declined slightly and hardly changed by 20-40 visits between day 4 and day
11. However, there seems to be a sharp recovery of 120 visits on day 12,
which was the highest point of the line. Throughout the remainder of the
period, there was a little movement in data changing until a small drop on day
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
15.
Over the same period, the statistics of visitors in Pop Parade changed most of
the time. It had a great start at 120 people per day in day 1; yet the number of
visits reduced insignificantly during the next 8 days, reached the bottom of 38
visits on day 7 before the sudden recovery of 145 people during day 10 and
11. After a slight reduction in the next 2 days, the number of visits reached a
peak at the final day of 175.
220 words
oomm
MODEL ANSWER 2:
.c.c
rrss
The line graph/ chart compares the figures for visitors to two different music
ttttee
sites online and how these figures change over a period of 15 days.
Overall, there is a rise in the figures for visitors who visit both sites over the
aa
15-day period. Although the two trends are similar in terms of the general
increase, the figure for visitors to Pop Parade in most days is higher than that
of Music Choice.
SSMM
For the first 9 days, there is a gradual decline in the proportion of visitors to
Pop Parade sites, which fall from 120,000 visitors to 40,000 visitors.
LLTT
However, for the next 2 days, the number of visitors to the Pop Parade site
grows/ increases sharply to over 140,000 visits. It drops to about 80,000 visits
from 12th to 13th before reaching the highest point during the 15 day period,
IIEE
which is around 170,000 visitors.
Over the similar period, the figure for visitors to Music Choice site varies less
significantly than to Pop Parade. It fluctuates during 11 days, although it
almost remains above 20,000 visits. However, in the following 3 days, the
figure for visitors to Music Choice site increases rapidly to the highest point
of the whole line graph, over 120,000 visits. By contrast, in the last day, the
number of visitors to Music Choice decreases rapidly by over 40,000 visitors,
falling to below 80,000 visitors on the 15th day.
219 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 8
The chart below shows the total number of minutes (in billions) of
telephone calls in the UK, divided into three categories, from 1995 –
2002.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart compares different types of telephone calls in the UK in terms
of a total number of minutes from 1995 to 2000.
Overall, while local-fixed line gained the most popularity in the UK, there
was an upward trend in the number of minutes spent on three categories of
phone calls.
With regard to local-fixed line, the number of minutes increased between
1995 and 1998, rising from more than 70 billion to just under 90 billion. It
reached a peak of 90 billion in the following year before experiencing a drop
of nearly 20 billion throughout the remainder of the period.
There was a gradual growth in the figure for national and international –
fixed line during the 7-year period, from about 38 billion to approximately 61
billion shown. Similarly, mobiles saw the number of minutes go up
considerably from around 3 billion in 1995 to reach the highest point of
almost 45 billion in 2002. It is noticeable that the number of minutes spent on
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
mobiles in the year 2002 was nearly three times as high as that in 1999.
181 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The bar chart gives data about the amount of time people in the UK spent on
three types of telephone calls over a 7-year period from 1995 to 2002.
oomm
Overall, it is clear that the time for using local – fixed-line remained
relatively unchanged while the figures for national and international - fixed
.c.c
line and mobiles increased. Moreover, local – fixed line was by far the most
ss
common way of communication by phone in the UK.
rr
In 1995, the number of minutes of telephone calls of local – fixed line was
ttttee
the highest, at approximately 73 billion minutes. By contrast, the mobile
phone was the least popular with only 4 billion minutes spent on calls and the
aa
figure for national and international – fixed line was around 38 billion.
The total minutes of local – fixed-line calls fell steadily back to 72 billion in
SSMM
2002 after experiencing a gradual increase to 90 billion in 1999. On the other
hand, the two other types of telephone call enjoyed more popularity from the
people in the UK. A sharp rise of almost 40 billion minutes was reported in
LLTT
the total time of mobile calls while national and international – fixed line also
witnessed an increase to over 60 billion minutes in 2002.
IIEE
204 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 9
The chart below shows information about changes in average house
prices in five different cities between 1990 and 2002 compared with the
average house prices in 1989.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart compares the proportion changes in the average cost of a house
over two 6-year periods with that in the year 1989 in five big cities in the
world.
It is clear that the house price of all mentioned cities fell between 1900 and
1995 before increasing from 1996 to 2002. Also, the UK was the nation
which experienced the biggest change in the value of a home over the period
shown.
In the first 6-year period from 1990, the average prices of a home in Tokyo
and London declined at the same rate, about 7%, while New York home
value decreased by a lower proportion, 5%, compared to the benchmark price
in 1989. In contrast, there were increases of 2% and 3% in the values of
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
house property in Madrid and Frankfurt respectively.
Between 1996 and 2002, the average cost of a house in London increased
significantly by 12%, compared to those of 1989. Surprisingly, only
homebuyers in Tokyo paid a lower amount than the 1989 average, but New
York saw a 5% growth in the home price. This figure for Madrid went up by
2%, whereas the price of a home in Frankfurt nearly remained stable, as
compared to the previous period.
206 words
oomm
MODEL ANSWER 2:
.c.c
rrss
The bar chart compares data on 5 various cities in 5 different countries in
ttttee
terms of changing in the house prices from 1990 to 2002, compared to those
in 1989.
aa
Overall, the average of house prices in most of the cities increased. While
London had the greatest rise in the average house prices, Tokyo was the only
SSMM
city with the decrease in the cost of accommodation.
From 1990 to 1995, the average house prices in New York experienced a
drop of exactly 5%, compared to those in 1989. Likewise, there was a similar
LLTT
decline of about 7% in the house prices in Tokyo and London. By contrast,
3% was the growth in the prices of accommodation in Madrid and Frankfurt.
IIEE
Throughout the remainder of the period, the average house prices still
continued growth in Madrid and Frankfurt, an increase of below 5% and
around 2% respectively. Accommodation prices in New York doubled,
compared to 1989. While the figure for Tokyo remained at about 5% of the
decline, there was a significant increase of over 10% in the figure for
London.
180 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 10
The diagram below shows the water cycle, which is the continuous
movement of water on, above and below the surface of the Earth.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The diagram which has been presented illustrates the circulation of the water
on, above and below the Earth’s surface.
From an overall perspective, there are three main stages shown on the
diagram. Ocean water evaporates, falls down as rain and finally flows into the
ocean again.
To begin with, in the evaporation stage, we can realize that the vast majority
of water vapor in the air stemming from the ocean. The heat of the sun makes
water evaporate, then water vapor forms clouds. At the second procedure,
water vapor condensing in the cloud falls as rain or snow.
Eventually, rainwater has several ways to turn back into the ocean. It can fall
down and create the lakes; otherwise, water returns to the ocean by osmose
via surface runoff. In the other way, the flow of rainwater may filter through
the ground and then reach the impervious layer of the planet. After the salt
water intrusion is shown to take place, groundwater returns into the ocean
and ends the process of circulation.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
172 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The flow chart illustrates the process of water recycle how these water
movements change after a separate phase.
There are 3 phases shown in the whole diagram, beginning with the
with the water runoff to the ocean again.

oomm
evaporation of water, sequencing to the falling of it as rainwater and ending
.c.c
The first phase shows that heat of the sun makes water evaporate and 80% of
ss
total water vapor comes from the ocean. Then, it condenses to form a cloud
rr
in the sky. On the rainy day, clouds become darker and the rain happens
ttttee
causing precipitation.
After this stage, drops of rainfall become snow or lakes, depending on the
aa
area’s temperature. Otherwise, some of them will go deeply into the ground
via surface runoff called groundwater above the impervious layer. After that,
MM
groundwater filters through the ground to return to the ocean. Lastly, salt
water intrusion is likely to occur before completing a cycle.
157 words
SS
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 11
The graph below shows the consumption of fish and some different kinds
of meat in a European country between 1979 and 2004.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The given line graph compares weekly consumptions of chicken, fish, beef,
and lamb per capita in a European country from 1979 to 2004.
Overall, it can be seen that while the amount of beef and lamb consumed per
person per week declined throughout the given period, the figures for chicken
significantly increased during the same time.
In 1979, a person consumed over 200 gram of beef per week, but the amount
rapidly dropped to around 175 gram in 1989 and to approximately 100 gram
in the end of the period. Similarly, lamb consumption was nearly 150 gram
per person per week in 1979. The figure then gradually fell and reached only
over 50 gram in the year 2004.
In contrast, chicken was the third highest consumption in 1979 compared to
the others, at only under 150 gram per capita weekly. In 2004, it topped at
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
almost 250 gram, a rise of nearly 66% in 25 years. Fish consumption was
stable during the period, around 50 gram per person per week.
170 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The given line graph compares the expenditure on chicken, beef, lamb and
oomm
fish in a European nation surveyed from 1979 to 2004.
Overall, the consumption of chicken increased significantly whilst that of
.c.c
other types of meat decreased over the period. In addition, the fish amount
ss
was always the least during 25 years.
rr
A close look at the graph reveals that the demand for beef was at the highest
ttttee
mark of 220 grams per person per week in 1979. By contrast, the figure for
fish took the lowest, at only 65 grams in the same year. Meanwhile, the
aa
expenditures on lamp and chicken were in similar quantities (around 10
grams).
SSMM
However, over the 25-year period, the country experienced considerable
declines in the consumption of beef and lamb to approximately 60 grams and
100 grams, respectively. On the same trend, the demand for fish also went
LLTT
down, but fell negligibly to just below 50 grams. By contrast, there was a
sharp growth to 250 grams in the amount of chicken in 2004.
IIEE
172 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 12
The two pie charts below show the online shopping sales for retail sectors
in Canada in 2005 and 2010.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The two pie charts compare four different retail sectors in terms of the
proportion of their sales on the internet in Canada in the two years 2005 and
2010.
Overall, it is clear that the percentage of online sales for each of four groups
changed dramatically over the period of 5 years. While the figures for
electronics and appliance and also home furnishings reduced, the figure for
the other two sectors increased.
In 2005, electronics and appliance accounted for the largest percentage of
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
online sales, at 35%. However, there was a fall in this figure to 30% in 2010.
Shopping online for home furnishings saw a significant drop from 25% in
2005 to 15% in 2010.
In contrast, the proportion of sales on the internet for the two remain sectors
increased. The most dramatic rise was in food and beverage sector. While the
figure was just 22% of the total online shopping sales in 2005, it rose to 32%
oomm
in 2010. Finally, video game was the least common category of online
shopping in 2005, which represented 18% of the total sales but the figure
increased to 23% in 2010.
.c.c
ss
189 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
rr
ttttee
The pie charts illustrate the percentage of online shopping sales in 4 different
categories in Canada in 2005 and 2010.
aa
Overall, the percentage of the online sales of electronics and appliance were
MM
by far the largest, while the sales of video games and home furnishings were
the lowest compared to other sectors.
SS
As can be presented in the pie graphs, the proportion of electronics and
LLTT
appliance online sales was reported to be relatively the highest in both 2005
and 2010, at 35% and 30%, respectively. Meanwhile, the figures for food and
beverage in 2005 were only 22%; however, its figures soon overtook the
year period.
IIEE
figures for electronic devices and became the best seller at 32% within a five-
Regarding home furnishings, the sales initially accounted for the second
highest proportion of the total sales on the internet, at around 25%.
Nevertheless, in 2010, its percentage dropped by 10% and this item was
considered to be the least common compared to other sectors. By contrast,
despite being originally the lowest at about 18% in 2005, the transactions of
video games soon improved after five years, which eventually accounted for
about 23%.
190 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 13
The diagrams below show the life cycle of the silkworm and the stages in
the production of silk cloth.
Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features,
and make comparisons where relevant.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
oomm
.c.c
rrss
MODEL ANSWER 1:
ttttee
aa
The given diagrams illustrate several stages of a silkworm’s life cycle as well
MM
as the process of producing silk cloth.
SS
Overall, a silkworm obviously experiences 4 stages of its life, which is
originally laid in an egg. Meanwhile, there would be 5 steps to make silk
cloth.
LLTT
According to the first figure, it is estimated that a life cycle of silkworms lasts
IIEE
a period of 2 months, beginning from an egg to the stage of a mature moth.
Within initial 10 days after being given birth, silkworm offsprings are
brought up into larvas; then, they stick to mulberry leaves as their main food
sources. In the second stage, these larvas settle down in a number of silk
threads, which has been created for 4-6 weeks. Before being a moth at the
final stage, the silk thread has become a cocoon built in 3-8 days.
Moving on to the second diagram, the process of producing silk cloth begins
with selecting better items in a wide range of cocoons. Afterward, these
selective cocoons are boiled in high-temperature water in order for the thread
to unwind at the third phase. In this stage only, the thread is also twisted
together and dipped through a color barrel for the dyeing process. Finally,
these separate strings are then rotated by a weaver.
www.zandienglish.ir

217 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The first diagram illustrates the living loop of silkworm beginning from eggs
while the second one indicates the stages in silk cloth manufacture.
Overall, the life cycle of the silkworm consists of four distinct stages;
meanwhile, there are five main steps required to make silk cloth.
In the first phase, the process starts from egg-laying that takes place on a
suitable mulberry leaf and is carried out by a female silkworm. Then, it takes
ten days for the eggs to transform into larvae catered by the mulberry leaf.
After a 4-6-week duration, the larvae cover themselves by threading silk
shells. Moving on to the final stage, in a 3-8-day period, an oval cocoon
surrounding and protecting the worm is created. After 16 days, the cocoon
then converts into a moth which is fully-grown and ready for the next
breeding season.
However, the process of producing silk cloth begins with cocoon selection. In
the subsequent stage, selected cocoons are heated to a high temperature.
Boiled cocoons are then unwound to the thread until a length of between 300
and 900 meters each is reached. In the final stage, stretched cocoons can be
dyed to make the end/final products/outcomes after being twisted and woven.
202 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 14
The table illustrates the proportion of monthly household income five
European countries spend on food and drink, housing, clothing and
entertainment.
Summarize the information by selecting and reporting the main features and
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
MODEL ANSWER 1:
IIEE
The table shows the data on the monthly expenditures of people in five
European nations on different categories.
Overall, food and drink and as well as housing accounted for the biggest
expenses of these countries while the smaller ones are spent on clothing and
entertainment.
The group of countries including France, Germany, and the UK invests the
largest portion of their monthly income on housing with 31 percent, 33
www.zandienglish.ir

percent and 37 percent respectively. Meanwhile, a smaller one is used for
food and drink. In contrast, the other nations namely Turkey and Spain
allocate more for food and drink whereas housing is less preferred by them.
In detail, the numbers of Turkey are 36 percent for the former and 20 percent
for the latter. Likewise, food and drink, in Spain, accounts for 31 percent of
the income, but only 18 percent is spent on housing.
The spending on entertainment is higher than that on clothing in France and
Spain. The proportions are around 15 percent and 8 percent respectively.
Similarly, 19 percent of German citizens’ budget is used for entertainment,
compared to 15 percent for clothing. Moreover, Britain and Turkey see a
similar number of these two categories, at about one-tenth of the monthly
income.
205 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The given table compares 5 different countries namely France, Germany, the
UK, Turkey, and Spain in terms of 4 categories of household expenditure
every month.
Overall, while the percentage of housing costs holds the first rank in
simultaneous nations, France, German and the UK, citizens in other countries
spend their most budget on food and drink.
It is noticeable that 37% was the proportion of housing expenditure in the
UK, which was slightly 4% and 6% higher than that in France and Germany,
respectively. French, German and British locals, in turn, spend 25%, 22%
27% monthly expenses on food and drink, besides, those citizens just pour
the least money on clothing every month, at 7%, 15% and 11% respectively.
In the UK, total expenditure is allocated for entertainment with 11%, that
figure in similarity for Germany is 19% and for French is 13%.
The table also depicts that food and drink are by far the main means of
household costs in two remaining nations Spain and Turkey, with a similar
pattern 31% and 36%, in turn. Whereas, the ratio of clothing is the lowest in
average expenditure every month in those countries, in addition, the figure
for Turkey is 12%, which was higher than that in Spain (with 8%). In Spain,
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
the average of wages is paid for housing costs at 20% which was twice as
much as that of entertainment. Similarly, the ratio for housing is 18% and that
for entertainment expenses is precisely 15% in Turkey.
218 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 15
The two maps below show an island, before and after the construction of
some tourist facilities.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The maps illustrate the transformation of/ the changes of an island before and
after being facilitated with many tourist amenities.
Overall, it is obvious that the island becomes more modern with a variety of
resorts and aquatic entertainment facilities equipped/ installed.
Before the construction, the area seems quite peaceful and tranquil to be
surrounded by sea and covered with several trees. Meanwhile, there is would
be a small beach to the west of the island. All of these figures in the observed
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
region have remained unchanged over the reconstruction period.
After being converted into a tourist destination, many houses are designed
within the area for accommodation. Especially, they are connected with one
another by a number of route systems, including footpath for pedestrians and
vehicles for walking and for roadway vehicle. It is of note that there are also a
new restaurant and a reception located in the central island. Surrounding the
oomm
area, more activities are activated in the coastal position, required to facilitate
several essential equipment/ constructions, such as pier and sails nearby the
shore.
.c.c
ss
176 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
rr
ttttee
The two maps represent the transformation of an island after constructing
some tourist amenities.
aa
It is clear that there were a huge number of facilities built for tourism
MM
purposes including transportation and accommodation in the central and
western island, while the east of the island has remained unchanged. In
SS
addition, despite a lot of constructions, the natural beauty of the island was
preserved.
LLTT
Before the construction of infrastructure, the island estimated about 200
squares meters had only some trees and looked like a wildlife island. It was
IIEE
surrounded by the sea corresponding with a beach in the west for swimming.
After that, most of the island was constructed/ converted to become an
attractive holiday resort.
One of the noticeable points is that the trees had stayed at the same position
during the development of the island. There was an appearance of a pier to
transport travelers by boat as well as vehicle tracks and footpaths to move in
the internal island. The reception was built in the central island and connected
with the restaurant through a short vehicle track. Towards on both sides of
the reception were the mushroom of two residential areas. There was a
footpath leading tourists to the beach to swim in the end of the west.
214 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 16
The diagram below shows how coffee is produced and prepared for sale
in supermarkets and shops.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The flow chart shows various stages of the production of coffee from coffee
beans.
There are 11 main stages in the whole coffee making process, beginning with
gathering coffee beans and ending with packaging coffee into jars.
Firstly, the coffee beans are picked and then are dried on filed under the sun.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
After that, the beans are roasted before being cooled at the fourth step. In this
stage, the cooling process must be done rapidly.
At the next stage, those which are cooled are grinded and hot water is added
to the beans at the sixth step. After the strain off the mixture, they are frozen
rapidly. The next step is grinding the frozen liquid by using a machine.
Afterwards, they are dried in a vacuum to evaporate the water and the coffee
packed into jars for customers.

oomm
is made. The entire coffee-making process concludes after the coffee is
152 words
.c.c
MODEL ANSWER 2:
rrss
ttttee
The flow chart shows how coffee is produced from coffee beans.
A glance at the graph reveals that there are 11 distinct steps beginning with
aa
bean-picking and culminating in the packing stage.
In the first phase, coffee beans are carefully picked and then dried on the
SSMM
ground under harsh sunlight. Before being rapidly cooled, dried beans are
brought to a specialized machine to be roasted. Following that, a grinder is
utilized to turn coffee beans into coffee granules. In the next step, the ground
LLTT
coffee is mixed with hot water, and the resulting mixture is strained through a
utensil to remove liquid.
IIEE
Moving on to the eighth stage, after being passed once again through the
grinding machine, the mixture is frozen. In the subsequent step, the frozen
liquid is dried in a large vacuum which enables water to evaporate, leaving
the coffee granules. These granules, ultimately, are packed into jars and are
ready for delivery to coffee shops.
158 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 17
The graph below compares changes in the birth rates of China and the
USA between 1920 and 2000.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The line graph illustrates changes in the birth rate between China and the
USA from 1920 to 2000.
Overall, the birth rates of these two countries significantly fluctuated from
1920 to 1950 and then suddenly decreased from 1950 to 2000. However, the
birth rates of the USA in most years were higher than the birth rates of China
over the period of 80 years.
In America, from 1920 to 1940, the birth rate fluctuated, but it was always
above 10% before suddenly declined to under 5% in 1945. However, the
birth rate continued increasing over the next five years and reached its peak at
15% in 1950. Over the rest 50 years, the birth rate decreased gradually to
nearly 8% in 2000.
Over the same period, the birth rate of China had its ups and downs from
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
1920 to 1950 and also reached its peak at 20% in 1950. However, after
reaching its highest point, the birth rate fell rapidly to under 10% in 1955 and
then continued dropping to nearly 2.5% in 2000.
174 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
these rates changed from 1920 to 2000.

oomm
The line graph compares China and the USA in terms of birth rates and how
.c.c
Overall, there was a general decline in the birth rates of two countries.
ss
Moreover, in this period, the birth rate of the USA was mostly higher than
that of China.
rr
ttttee
In China, the birth rate fluctuated between 10% and 15% from 1920 to 1935.
Although it declined sharply in the following decade, the China’s rate
aa
increased significantly to 20%, which was the highest point in the survey
period. Throughout the remainder of the period, the Chinese birth rate
SSM
gradually fell to below 5%.
M
In a similar trend, the birth rate in the USA had a fluctuation before dropping
to below 5% from 1920 to 1945. By contrast, in 10 years later, it increased
LLTT
rapidly to reach the highest point at 15%. In the remainder years, there was a
gradual decline in the American birth rate, which fell to 7% by the year 2000.
IIEE
165 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 18
The charts below show the reasons why people travel to work by bicycle
or by car.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The chart illustrates the changes in spending pattern of an average Australian
household over two separate years 1991 and 2001.
Overall, the expense in 2001 was slightly higher than in 1991 but it is
different between six categories. While food and non-essential goods and
services accounted for the greatest proportion of expenditure, clothing and
transportation seem to receive the least investment.
According to the table, there was a significant increase in electricity and
water spending over a 10-year period, from 75 to 120 Australian dollars per
month. The amount of money distributed in food, housing and other goods
and services, on the other hand, just marked a slight rise of 5AUD, 5AUD,
and 20AUD respectively.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Compared with these growths, however, clothing and transport spending
showed a downward trend. Australians paid a small sum in dressing up, of
which figure fell from 30AUD to 20AUD. Transport cost even saw a
dramatic decrease, from 70AUD in 1991 to only 45AUD in 2001.
158 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
oomm
The table compares the spending per month of an average Australian family
c.c
in 1991 and 2001 in terms of different categories.
.
ss
Overall, what stands out from the graph is that there were upward trends in
rr
most of the categories included in the table, with the notable exception of
ttttee
clothing and transport.
The proportion of other goods and services was the highest with 250 dollars
aa
in 1991. It then increased considerably and reached 270 in 2001. By contrast,
people only spent 30 dollars on clothing. This figure was followed by a
position in the table.
SSMM
significant decline to 20 dollars ten years later, which made them the lowest
Food was ranked in second place with 155 dollars in 1991. Throughout a
LLTT
decade, this rose only by 5. Meanwhile, electricity and water saw the highest
rate of improvement, 45 dollars, which is 5 dollars more than the percentage
of growth of total expenses. Finally, the expenditure for transport started with
IIEE
70 and decreased dramatically to 45 in 2001.
166 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 19
The three pie charts below show the changes in annual spending by a
particular UK school in 1981, 1991 and 2001.
Summarise the information by selecting and reporting.
The pie charts give information of a UK school’s expenditure changes in five

categories in three different years over a period of 20 years.
Overall, salaries for teachers and other staff accounted for the largest part of
the school spending in all three surveyed years. By contrast, insurance made
up the smallest amount of spending.
In 1981, the school spent 40% of its budget for teachers and another 28% for
other workers, making these two groups the largest outflow of money.
Investment on furniture and equipment and learning resources were equal, at
15% of the total expenditure while only 2% was paid for insurance services.
The proportion of payment for teachers increased to 50% in 1991 before
falling again to 45% in 2001 whereas that of other school staff decreased by
13% over the 20-year period. Despite a small investment of 5% received in
1991, furniture and equipment attracted nearly a quarter of the school
spending in 2001. It is interesting to note that while payment for furniture and
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
equipment dropped that of resources grew, and vice versa. In the meantime,
the proportion of the school budget paid for insurance had risen slightly to
3% in 1991 before ending at 8% 10 years later.
204 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 20
The table below presents the number of children ever born to women
aged 40-44 years in Australia for each year the information was collected
since 1981.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The table illustrates how many children 40-44-year-old Australian women
had from 1980 to 2006.
It is noticeable that the percentages of mothers who had less than three
children gradually increased in the research/given period. In contrast, the
numbers for other mothers saw/witnessed a steady decrease.
As can be seen, 29% of total women in the researched age had two children
in 1981. It gradually rose to 38% in the period of 25 years and always
accounted the highest portion. There were 7.6% of the parent had one child in
1981, which was the lowest number in that year. This number had increased
each year and reached nearly doubled in 2006. The same trend also happened
with no child’s mother, which stood at 15.9% in 2006.
The figures for women had three and four or more in 1981 were nearly equal,
with 27.4 and 27.6 respectively. While the second one significantly decreased
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
to only 11% in 2006 and became the lowest number in that year, the first one
fell steady, made up 21.5% of total Australian women aged 40-44 in the same
year.
182 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
oomm
The data gives information about the percentage of women within age 40 and
44 with/ having a different number of children in Australia since 1981.
.c.c
Overall, the number of women with less than three children increased in each
ss
five-year period, while the number of/ the figure for Australian women with
rr
more than three children was significantly low and it dropped gradually from
ttttee
1981 to 2006.
In 1981, the proportions of women with two children and three offspring
aa
were the highest compared to other categories and they accounted for 29.0%
and 27.4%, respectively. From this year onward, the figures for two-children
MM
women uplifted dramatically by more than 9% by 2006, whereas the figures
for three-children women showed some obvious inconsistency and ended up
SS
at 21.5% in 2006. Likewise, 8.5% of the total number of women had no child
TT
in 1981 and this rate has gone up slightly by approximately 7% after 25 years
before reaching its peak at 15.9% in 2006.
LL
On the other hand, the percentage of women giving births up to four and
IIEE
more children witnessed a dramatic drop during 1981 and 2006. Specifically,
in 1981, more than 27% of the women population delivered over three
children and the figures have decreased steadily since this year. Ultimately, in
2006, only 11.0% of the same population had four or more children.
221 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 21
The graph below shows the amount of money spent on books in
Germany. France. Italy and Austria between 1995 and 2005.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The line chart illustrates the expenditure on books in four countries over the
world from 1995 to 2005.
Overall, all these countries experienced a gradual upward trend in terms of
money spent on books. In addition, Germany was the country which used the
highest amount of money for reading purpose.
In 1995, Germany people spent much more the amount of money on books,
at precisely $80 million; the trend continued to rise rapidly to $95 million in
2005. On the other hand, the expenditure/spending on books in Australia was
the least in/ among four countries, only $30 million in 1995; however, the
trend increased dramatically to $62 million in 2005.
In the same period, the amount of money/budget spent on books in France
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
grew slightly, from approximately $55 million in 1995 to %75 million in
2005. In Italy, spending on books rose minimally/ marginally from $50
million in 1995 to over $60 million in 2005 and the trend on books in Italy
was lower than in Australia.
167 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
oomm
The line graph compares the amount of budget spent on books by four
different countries from 1995 to 2005.
.c.c
ss
Overall, although there were fluctuations during the period surveyed, the
rr
book sale revenues in these nations still saw considerable increases. Among
ttttee
them, the German seemed to spend the highest amount of money for this
product compared to the others.
aa
In 1995, the expenditure on the book in Germany started at 80 million
whereas the smallest was Austria with only 30 million and approximately 50
MM
million in both France and Italy. Four years later, the sale revenues were
continuously rising in German, France, and Austria with 90 million, 60
SS
million and 40 million respectively; whereas, the sale figure in Italy still
LLTT
remained the same level as it was in 1995.
Yet, the spending on books in all the four nations apparently experienced
dramatic fluctuations from 1999 to 2003. Whilst the Italian and French book
IIEE
sales were improving gradually and a huge increase of 20 million in Austria,
the largest book consumption - German suddenly dropped to about the same
level as it was in 1995. However, the book sales in the four countries
simultaneously rose sharply in 2005 with the final champion still was
German with nearly 100 million while the lowest budget was Italy with 60
million, the second and the third were France and Austria (both were about
75 million).
220 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 22
The table below gives information about the underground railway
systems in six cities.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The table compares the six networks in terms of their age, size and the
number of people who use them each year.
It is clear that the three oldest underground systems are larger and serve
significantly more passengers than the newer systems. The longest railway is
in London while the most crowded one is in Tokyo.
Being opened in 1863, London accounted for 394 kilometers and serves 775
millions of passengers per year. The second largest underground network,
Paris, is half as large as London, with 199 kilometers, but receives
approximately the double amount of passengers compared to London.
Finally, while only third in terms of size, the Tokyo system is easily the most
used, with 1927 million passengers per year.
Regarding three remaining underground networks, Washington DC railway
which was opened earliest (in 1976s), is 126 in length and serves 144 million
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
passengers per year. These figures are far higher than those for Kyoto and
Los Angeles, which serves from 45 to 50 million people and have a length of
28 and 11 kilometers respectively.
176 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
oomm
The table illustrates the data about the underground railway networks in six
cities in terms of their age, size and the quantity of travelers every year.
.c.c
Overall, it is obvious that there is a much larger amount of route length and
ss
passengers in the three oldest railways in comparison with the newer ones.
rr
Being built firstly, the London underground railway system is the longest one
ttttee
with 394 kilometers, and carries 775 million people per year. However,
despite being half of the previous route in length, about 199 km, the Paris
aa
network serves nearly twice more than the London, with 1191 million
customers. In addition, while the network in Tokyo makes up the third rank
million customers.
SSMM
in age and size, it carries the highest number of passengers which is 1972
Turning to the 3 newer networks, Washington DC is the largest in size and in
LLTT
the number of passengers with 126 km and 144 million people. Besides, the
youngest system, Los Angeles, serves 50 million passengers with the route of
28 km compared to 45 million passengers transported in 11 km by the Kyoto
railway.
185 words IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 23
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The line graph compares the number of female members of parliament in 5
European nations between 2000 and 2012.
It is clear from the chart that the percentage of females in parliament in all
countries experienced/ witnessed an increase during the time surveyed. In
addition, the data for the UK was by far lowest.
In 2000, the figure for German female politicians was highest, around a third
which was followed by that for Italy, at approximately 27%. Exactly 25%
and around 17% of women/ female members of parliament came from France
and Belgium respectively. By contrast, UK parliament occupied a small
number of women at just 5%.
In 2012, there was a considerable increase in the figure for females in Italian
parliament to around 40%, reaching a peak of the whole line graph. There
were gradual rises to around 37% and 32% in the data for Germany and
France correspondingly. At the same time, the figures for the UK and
Belgium were similar, making up about 23%.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
167 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The given line chart compares 5 European nations in terms of women
belonging to parliament between 2000 and 2012
Overall, almost all countries witnessed a growth/ witnessed an upward trend
a notable exception of Belgium.

oomm
in the proportion of female taking part in parliament over the time given, with
.c.c
In the year of 2000, Germany was the country which occupied/ accounted for
ss
the highest percentage of women members of parliament (with nearly 35
rr
percent), Belgium, in contrast, was ranked the fifth in 5 countries with the
ttttee
figure below 5 percent. The remaining nations namely Italy, France and the
UK are in that order had the figures between above 15 percent and around 26
percent. After the 8 following years, there was a significant increase in the
aa
ratio of German, Italian, French, British and Belgian females becoming
members of parliament. The figures for/ proportion of all countries ranging
SSMM
from 20 percent to 35 percent in 2008.
By 2012, Italy took over Germany as the main country in the group having
TT
the most/ highest rate of women members of parliament, with a slight
difference of 4 percent. In terms of general upward trend, the figure for
LL
French women members accounted for 32 percent, which was 12 percent
IIEE
higher than that of British ones in 2012. In the same year, a gradual increase
could be seen in the UK, which stood at a similar percentage of that in
Belgium, (around 22 percent).
219 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 24
The diagram below shows how a central heating system in a house
works.
The flow chart illustrates the system of pipes, tank, and boiler and how they
provide heat to house throw radiators and water taps.
Overall, there are five stages of this system, beginning with the entrance of
cold water into the house and ending with the re-heated process.
At the first stage, the cold water enters the house and is stored in a water
storage tank in the roof. From there water flows down to the boiler, located
on the ground floor of the house in the second stage. In the third step, the
boiler, which is fueled by gas or oil, heats up the water as it passes through it.
At the next stage, the hot water is then pumped round the house through a
system of pipes and flows into the radiators, located in different rooms. The
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
water circulates through the radiators, which have small tubes inside them to
help distribute the heat, and this warms each of the rooms. Some of the water
is directed to the taps to provide hot water for the house. Finally, once the
water has been through the pipes and radiators, it is returned to the boiler to
be re-heated and circulated around the house again.
203 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 25
The graph below shows information about the actual and expected
figures of population in three cities, Jakarta, Sao Paulo and Shanghai.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The given bar chart gives data on the number of residents in millions in three
areas namely Shanghai, Jakarta, and Sao Paulo from 1990 to 2000.
As can be seen from the chart, the figures for Sao Paulo were the highest in
almost all sections, with a notable exception for 2000 actual patterns.
In 1990, while Sao Paulo occupied/ accounted for by far the highest/ biggest
population size overall (with around 17 million citizens), Jakarta was ranked
the third with below 10 million people (nearly 9 million). At the same time,
the figure for inhabitants in Shanghai city was 10 million lower than that in
Sau Paulo.
After the 10 following years, Sau Paulo and Jakarta were predicted to
experience an upward trend, with a jump to approximately 11 million and 21
million inhabitants, respectively. In contrast, Shanghai was hoped to witness
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
a slight decrease in the size of the population with a similar trend in Jakarta.
Nevertheless, in reality in 2000, a considerable growth in the number of
people/ inhabitants was seen from three cities Jakarta, Shanghai, and Sau
Paulo, the actual figures for them ranged from 13 to 24 million people.
192 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
oomm
The bar chart illustrates the expected and actual number of people living in
c.c
three mega cities in the world in 1990 and 2000.
.
ss
Overall, it was forecast in 1990 that the population of all these cities would
rr
grow significantly. However, the real figure shows less noticeable change. In
ttttee
reality, while Jakarta and São Paulo underwent a similar upward trend in their
population, Shanghai saw a slight drop.
aa
In 1990, Jakarta had 8 million inhabitants. This figure was predicted to nearly
double after 10 years but it turned out/came out to be 3 million lower, which
MM
means this city continued to have the smallest population of the three.
Likewise, the number of inhabitants in São Paulo in 2000 was 18 million - a
SS
considerable growth from 15 million in 1980, instead of rising to the
predicted 24 million.
LLTT
By contrast, Shanghai was home to approximately 13 million residents in
1990. Despite the projection of a 4 million rise, the figure declined by 1
million in 2000.
165 words IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 26
The graph below shows the proportion of the population aged 65 and
over between 1940 and 2040 in three different countries.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The line graph compares the percentage of elderly people in the community
over a period of 100 years in Japan, Sweden, and the USA.
It is evident that the proportion of the elderly increased in each country over
the period shown. Although the three countries were similar in terms of a
general increase, the USA experienced the fastest growth in the rate of
seniors.
In 1940, elderly people in the USA accounted for approximately 10 percent
of the population. The figures for Japan and Sweden were lower, at about 5%
and 8 % respectively. In 2000, the number of seniors in America and Sweden
rose to around 15% of the population, while the figure for Japan remained
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
relatively constant.
By 2040, Japan will witness the highest percentage of elderly people. More
than a quarter of the population is expected to be seniors, compares to about
precisely 25% of Swedish and approximately aforementioned figure of
Americans.
155 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
oomm
.c.c
The line graph compares the percentage of elderly people in Japan, Sweden,
ss
and the USA over a period of 100 years.
rr
It is clear that there was an upward trend in the proportion of people who
ttttee
were 60 years old and over in the three countries throughout the period
shown. Also, Japan is the country with the highest elderly rate in the survey.
aa
In 1980, the percentage of people aged 65 and more in the US was around
9%, while the figures for Sweden and Japan stood at 8% and 5% respectively.
SSMM
In the year 1980, the proportion of old people rose steadily to 15% in the
USA and to 14% in Sweden while Japan’s elderly rate leveled off at only 4%.
L TT
By 2040, the figure for Japan is expected to reach almost 28%. The highest
figure recorded in the survey, and the rate of old people in Sweden is also
L
predicted to increase to 25% despite a fluctuation from 1980 to 2040. By
IIEE
contrast, it is estimated that the USA become the country with the smallest
elderly percentage with about 24%.
182 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 27
The graph below shows UK acid rain emissions, measured in millions of
tones, from four different sectors between 1990 and 2007.
Source: http://ielts-simon.com/ielts-help-and-english-pr/2011/10/ielts-
writing-task-1-line-graph-exercise.html
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The line graph compares four sectors in terms of the amount of acid rain
emissions and how these changed over a period of 17 years in the UK.
Overall, the amount of acid rain emissions in the UK decreased, while the
transport and communication’s emission rates remained relatively constant
between 1990 and 2007. Also, electricity, gas and water supply saw the most
dramatic decrease.
In 1990, the highest point of the acid rain emissions came from the
electricity, gas and water supply, around 3.3 million tonnes. By contrast, the
figures for acid rain emissions in the UK by transport and communication
and domestic uses were at the lowest point at about 0.6 million tonnes.
Approximately 2 million tonnes of acid rain emissions came from the other
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
industries.
The figure for the electricity, gas and water supply decreased rapidly to
exactly 0.5 million tones by the year 2007. On the other hand, the transport
and communication emissions remained over 0.7 million tones throughout
the remainder of the period. The amount of acid rain emissions produced by
domestic uses and the other industries decreased to around 0.2 and 1.2,
respectively, over the period.
192 words
oomm
MODEL ANSWER 2:
.c.c
rrss
The line graph compares four categories of the United Kingdom’s industries
ttttee
in terms of the amount of rain acid emissions that they produced over a 17-
year period.
aa
Overall, the total amount of acid rain gases emitted in the UK decreased
significantly from 1990 to 2007. The most notable decline was seen in the
SSMM
electricity, gas and water supply sector.
In 1990, the electricity, gas, and water supply sector were responsible for the
largest amount of acid rain emissions, approximately 3.3 million tons. Other
LLTT
industries produced around 2 million tons of emissions while the
transportation and communication sector released about 0.7 million tons. Just
over 0.5 million tons of acid rain gases came from the domestic sector.
IIEE
In 2007, emissions from electricity, gas and water supply fell sharply to 0.5
million tons, a reduction of practically 3 million tons. Meanwhile, the
domestic sector and other industries fell gradually to around 0.2 and 1.3 tons,
respectively. In contrast, the transport sector saw a slight increase in
emissions, hitting a peak of 1 million tons in 2005.
174 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 28
The graphs below show the numbers of male and female workers in 1975
and 1995 in several employment sectors of the Republic of Freedonia.
Write a report for a university teacher describing the information shown.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The line graphs compare the changes in the number of men and women
working in 6 employment fields in 1975 and 1995.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Overall, women were far behind in employment in Freedonia in 1975, but
within 20 years they made a significant improvement in all sectors and went
well ahead of men in Communications, Wholesale and Retail trade.
In 1975, the number of women working in Freedonia in six fields of
employment was relatively low compared to men. Male workers
predominated in all sectors, especially in Finance, Banking and
females workers in Communications.

oomm
Manufacturing. However, there was a small gap in the number of males and
.c.c
After 20 years, the employment sectors of Freedonia saw a significant
ss
change. In the fields of Finance/Banking and defense-related Public Sector,
rr
female employees caught up with males in terms of representation. The
ttttee
number of women working in Communications and Wholesale and retail
trade increased sharply and overtook the men’s in these sectors. However,
men still went ahead of women in Manufacturing and non-defense – related
Public Sector.
aa
M
172 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
SS M
TT
The charts provide information on the number of men and women working in
different job titles in two separate years (1975 and 1995), in Freedonia.
LL
While it can be seen that Public (non-defence) sector required the largest
IIEE
number of employees in both two years illustrated, the Public (defence)
became the sector with the smallest number of workers in 1995, replacing
Communications in 1975. Furthermore, the female proportion of the
workforce increased significantly throughout the period shown.
In 1975, there was a relatively the same number of men and women in
Communications field, from about 250 to and 300 people respectively, and
then the figure for women rose dramatically to approximately 550 after the
period of 20 years. Similarly, in 1995, Wholesale and retail trade sector
experienced that the quantity of female employees surpassed their male
counterparts, at nearly 800 – which was the highest point of women workers.
By contrast, the men-to-women ratios in Manufacturing and Public (non-
www.zandienglish.ir

defence) sectors did not change much over the period shown and Public (non-
defence) field recorded the largest number of men, at over 850. The
proportion in Finance and Banking of men and women were similar in 1995,
at around 450 employees of each, compared to only more than 100 women 20
years earlier. Finally, although having the smallest number of workers, Public
(defence) sector experienced (that) the figure for women doubled over the
period, to above 100 in the latter year.
218 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 29
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
MODEL ANSWER 1: IIEE
The given bar chart illustrates statistics corresponding to the proportion of
individuals who achieved particular science degrees in two distinct countries,
Malaysia and Singapore.
Overall, a conspicuous feature that is presented in the bar chart is the
proportion of people holding a master degree or a bachelor’s degree in both
countries is considerably low. However, the percentage of people without any
available knowledge about science is tremendously high.
Furthermore, percentages of people who hold a master’s degree in both
www.zandienglish.ir

countries are equivalent, which is a mere 3%. However, an overwhelming
proportion of 20% is the percentage of Singapore’s people who achieved the
bachelor’s degree, which has doubled the portion of Malaysian’s people
achieving the equivalent degree. Finally, the percentage of people in
Singapore who have no qualifications in Science which is 60%, is lower than
Malaysia, which is nearly 65%.
It is perceivable that the low qualifications rate in Malaysia and a contrasting
high qualifications rate in Singapore have corroborated for a fact that
Singapore has beaten Malaysia in the science rate.
172 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The bar chart illustrates the data on the proportion of people holding a
science degree in Malaysia and Singapore.
Overall, it is clear people receiving Master’s degree account for the lowest
percentages in both Malaysia and Singapore. While there are more Malaysian
people taking school leaving exams in science, more people have a
Bachelor’s qualification in Singapore.
The percentage of people holding a Master’s degree is the same in both
nations, at only 3%, which is the lowest level in the whole bar chart. Exactly
10% of Malaysians gain Bachelor’s qualifications, while that figure is double
in Singapore, at 20%.
In terms of school leaving exams, the figure for Malaysia is slightly 5%
higher than that for Singapore, at 35% and 30%, respectively. Remarkably,
65% of Malaysian people have no science qualification, which makes up the
highest figure in the chart. That figure decreases five percentage points in
Singapore, at 60%.
152 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 30
The graph below shows the average number of UK commuters travelling
each day by car, bus or train between 1970 and 2030.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
MODEL ANSWER 1:
LLTT
The line graph gives information about the number of commuters in the UK
IIEE
using three types of transport in the period of 60 years.
Overall, car is the most popular form of transport used in the UK during the
period. The number of people who travel by car and train increase
considerably while the figure for bus decrease steadily.
It can be seen clearly that in 1970, 5 million UK workers used cars on daily
travel while bus and train were used by about 4 and 2 million people
respectively. There was a significant rise in the number of people using cars
to 7 million in 2000. The figure for train increased rapidly to 3 million in
2000 whereas there was a small drop of approximately o.5 million in the
number of bus users.
By the year of 2030, the number of car users and rail passengers are predicted
www.zandienglish.ir

to reach 9 million and 5 million respectively. By contrast, bus is predicted to
become the least popular choice, only reaching 3 million daily users.
174 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The line graph illustrates the average volume of people who commute every
day by three different means of transport in the UK from 1970 to 2030.
Overall, car and train show a fairly similar upward trend, while the figure for
bus tends to decrease. In addition, the number of car users is expected to be
the highest during the time surveyed.
In 1970, the number of people commuting by car in the UK was around 5
million, while the figures for bus and train were lower, which accounted for
about 4 and 2 million respectively. The next 40 years, both the number of
cars and train commuters remained stable after increasing significantly
between 1970 and 2000, at about 7 million and exactly 3 million in turn.
Over the same period, there was a gradual decline in the figure for bus, from
roughly 4 million to 3.5 million.
By 2030, it is expected that the number of train commuters in the UK will
overtake the figure for bus and reach its highest point at about 5 million. Car
is predicted to be the most popular transport, 9 million people drive to work
compared to under 3 million people using buses in the UK.
202 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 31
The graph below shows female unemployment rates in each country of
the United Kingdom in 2013 and 2014.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
MODEL ANSWER 1:
LLTT
IIEE
The bar chart gives information about the proportion of women who were out
of work in four countries of the UK, namely England, Wales, Scotland and
Northern Ireland in 2013 and 2014.
Overall, the unemployment rate of women in most of the nations in 2013 was
higher than that in 2014, with an exception for the figure of Scotland. It is
clear that the rates of women without a job in England and Scotland were
extremely higher than those of women in Wales and Northern Ireland.
In 2013, the highest unemployment figure was seen in England (6.8%),
which was 0.7% higher than that of the second highest in Scotland. The rate
of unemployed women of Wales was a bit lower than that of those of
Northern Ireland, with 5.4% and 5.6% respectively.
www.zandienglish.ir

In the next one year, while the unemployment proportion of English women
decreased from 6.8% to 6.5%, the figure for Scotland rose and reached 6.7%
which was the highest figure in 2014. In terms of the other two nations, the
rate of women who were unemployed in Wales and Scotland dropped from
5.4% to 5.0% and 5.6% to 4.6 % respectively.
193 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
A glance at the chart provided reveals the percentage of women lacking a job
in four different nations of the UK, the data was shown in 2013 and 2014.
Overall, there was a general downward trend in the figure for England,
Wales, and Northern Ireland. In contrast, the proportion of Scotland
witnessed an upward tendency.
In 2013, the female unemployment percentage of England was the most
noticeable (6.8%). Scotland occupied the second position, which was only
0.7% less than England. The rate of Wales and Northern Ireland was
relatively equal (5.4% and 5.6% respectively)
Throughout the remainder of the period, there was a slight increase by 0.6%
in the proportion of Scotland, while the percentage of England dropped to
6.5%. Therefore, Scotland gained the most significant figure among the four
countries mentioned. The gap between the rate of Wales and Northern Ireland
expanded over the one-year period (from 0.2% to 0.4%).
152 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 32
The graph below shows the rate of smoking per 1000 people in Someland
from 1960 to 2000.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
MODEL ANSWER 1:
SSMM
The line graph compares/ illustrates the smoking rates in Someland and how
LLTT
these rates changed over a 40 year period from 1960 to 2000.
Overall, the smoking rate of men decreased, while there was an increase in
IIEE
the figure for their female counterparts over the period of 40 years. However,
the smoking rates of the men in most years were higher than that of the
women.
In the 1960 – 1975 period, the number of women who smoked increased
rapidly from below 100 to over 300 per 1,000 people, which was the highest
point of the whole line graph. In the following 15 years, there was an
insignificant change in the figure for women, which was approximately 300
per 1000 people. Throughout the remainder of the period, there was a gradual
decline in the women smoking rate, which fell to exactly 200 per 1000 people
by the year 2000.
Over the same period, the smoking rates of men varied less significantly than
that women. There was a gradual decline from the peak during the 40 – year
www.zandienglish.ir

period, 600 per 1000 people, to exactly 400 per 1000 people in the 1960 –
1985 period. Throughout the remainder of the period, the smoking rates in
the men decreased rapidly to over 200 per 1000 people by the year 2000.
215 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The line graph illustrates the proportion of males and females smoking in
Someland between 1960 and 2000.
Overall, the rate of smoking both genders decreased over a period of 40
years. Although the two trends were different from 1960 to 1975, the figure
for men’s smoking was higher than women.
In terms of men, there was a steady decline in the number of smoking from
the highest number of just over 600,000 in 1960 to the lowest number of just
over 200,000 in 2000. Furthermore, the figure for smoking fell sharply from
1990 to 2000, a decline around 20%.
Between 1960 and 1975, the rate of women’s smoking increased
significantly, reaching the highest point of the line graph over 300 out of
1000 in 1975 while men’s smoking fell steadily. The next five year, women’s
smoking rate remained above 30%. Throughout the remainder of the period,
there was a gradual decline, falling to 100 per 1000 in the year 2000.
160 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 33
The table below shows the proportion of different categories of families
living in poverty in Australia in 1999.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
MODEL ANSWER 1:
aa
SSMM
The table gives information about the rate of people from each kind of
families who have to live in poverty in Australia in 1999.
L TT
It is clear that the proportion of poor people who were living in families with
couples was lower than single people, and people with children were more
L
likely to be poor than those without. In addition, the rate of people living in
IIEE
poverty was lower for elders.
The majority of people were living in poverty from sole parent households,
with 21%. It was also the highest rate of that. Of single family types,
moreover, the proportion of people were living in poverty from single, no
children type which is 3 times higher than that of poor people from single
aged person type, with 19%.
The lower figures from households with couples, more specifically, only 4%
of people who were living in poverty from aged couple type, it was also the
lowest proportion. The rate of poor people from families with couples, no
children and couple with children households were 7% and 12% respectively.
In addition, the overall proportion of people from all household were living in
www.zandienglish.ir

poverty was 11%.
193 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The table reveals the poverty situation of five household types in Australia in
the year 1999.
As can be seen from the provided data, households run by a sole parent were
the poorest group while the proportion of poverty for aged couples was the
smallest.
In 1999, the average percentage of families living in poverty of Australia was
11% with 1.837.000 underprivileged households. Compared to that number,
the sole parent families recorded a significantly high proportion of poverty,
with over a fifth having financial difficulties. Followed closely was the
category of single, no children households with the percentage of 8% higher
than the national average.
There was 12% of couples with children (equally to slightly more than
900.000 families) being in poverty, which made this type the third on the list.
Being found at the bottom in term of poverty, couples with no children,
single aged people and aged couples showed the relatively low proportions of
7%, 6%, and 4% respectively.
162 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 34
The chart below shows the amount of leisure time enjoyed by men and
women of different employment status.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
MODEL ANSWER 1: aa
SSMM
The bar chart illustrates data on the amount of spare time in a typical week
spent by both genders with different job statuses over a one-year period from
1998 to 1999.
LLTT
Overall, it is clear that unemployed and retired men and women had by far
IIEE
the freest time in the whole year. Another noticeable feature is that in the
categories of part-time employers and housewives, only females could enjoy
leisure time.
In detail, accounting for more than 40 hours, spare time spent among
employed part-time citizens and housewives was high for women, as
compared to virtually no free time for males. In addition, although full time
employed women and men had fairly much leisure time during the week, the
amount was higher for the latter which made up nearly 50 hours per week.
Moreover, the figure for unemployed males was more than 80 hours, which
was largest in comparison with the other four job statuses, and this was
followed by male retirees. Besides, in terms of leisure time spent by men and
women in the unemployed and retired groups, there was no radical disparity.
www.zandienglish.ir

In these two categories, males had approximately 6 hours more of free time
than females.
200 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The bar chart gives information about the quantity of free time of males and
females in 5 types of employment condition from 1998 to 1999.
Overall, citizens who were in jobless and retired status had the largest amount
of leisure time per week. Besides, women tended to have more free time than
men.
It can be seen from the data that there were minor differences in the amount
of free time of people who are full-time workers, unemployed and retired.
Specifically, men in each of the two statuses including unemployed and
retired condition were free for more than 80 hours per week, while the figure
for women in the same condition was just over 75 hours. Regarding full-time
employers, the number of free time they enjoyed weekly was 47 and 38 for
men and women respectively.
However, women who worked part-time and those who stayed at home were
not occupied by their jobs. The part-time employers used exactly 40 hours of
free time per week. This figure was slightly lower than the number of free
time spent by the housewives (namely 50 hours per week).
185 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 35
The pie charts show the main reasons for migration to and from the UK
in 2007.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
MODEL ANSWER 1:
LLTT
The pie charts illustrate the key reasons why people immigrated to the UK,
IIEE
while others emigrated to other countries in the world in 2007.
Overall, definite job accounted for the largest proportion of main reasons for
migration to and from the UK. The remaining five reasons had a similar
percentage for migration to and from the UK in 2007.
The percentage of immigration into the UK for the definite job was
equivalent to that of emigration from the UK at 30% and 29%, respectively.
Likewise, the proportion of those moving to join a family was quite similar,
15% of immigration and 13% of emigration.
A number of people who left the UK because of looking for their job were
rather high, at around 22%, while the proportion of people entering for this
purpose was lower, approximately by 10%. A further reason affecting
www.zandienglish.ir

migration was for formal study, at 26% and the figure for emigration of this
purpose was only 4%.
160 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The pie chart illustrates the main causes for that people came to and left the
UK in 2007.
Overall, migration to and from the UK was mostly because of career.
Additionally, most people had specific reasons for moving to the UK. On the
other hand, the percentage of people leaving the UK for education was the
smallest.
The proportion of people moving to the UK for their definite job was the
largest, at 30%, compared to 12%, 15%, 26%, 11% of seeking work,
accompany/join, education and other reasons, respectively. In addition, the
percentage of immigrants coming to the UK for no reason was the lowest
with only 6%.
Likewise, 29% of emigrants left the UK for their career, while 22% of them
emigrated from the UK to seek work. Additionally, accompany/join and other
reasons were similar in terms of reasons for emigration with 13% and 14%,
respectively. The proportion of people leaving the UK for no reason was
18%. By contrast, only 4% of emigration was because of education.
169 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 36
The charts below show the levels of participation in education and
science in developing and industrialized countries in 1980 and 1990.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The given bar charts compare the educational involvements of students in
www.zandienglish.ir

terms of total years of education and their participation in science-related
subjects and study in developing and industrialized countries from 1980 to
1990.
Overall, the amount of schooling time and the proportion of scientists and
technicians increased in two types of countries. Although the amount of
money invested in research and development in industrialized countries rose,
that of developing countries decreased.
From 1980 to 1990, there was an increase in the figures for schooling time in
industrialized countries from approximately 8 years to above 10 years. Also,
the percentage of scientists and technicians increased over 20 per 1000
people over a 10 year – period. The amount of money spent on Research and
Development was approximately 150 billion in 1980 and then increased
rapidly to about 300 billion USD in 1990.
Over the same period, the figures for schooling time in developing nations
increased from over 2 years to below 4 years over a period 10 years. By
contrast, the percentage of scientists and technicians remained below 20 per
1000 people. On the other hand, the year 1990 witnessed a significant decline
in the amount of budget spent on Research and Development in these
countries from 50 billion to about 20 billion USD.
213 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The bar charts illustrate the figure for average years of schooling, the rate of
scientists and technicians and spending on research & development between
1980 and 1990 in developing countries and industrialized countries.
Overall, the industrialized countries were much more than developing
countries in term of all aspects. The figures for 3 categories in 1990 were
higher than those of 1980, with the notable exception of spending on research
& development in 1990.
In developing countries, the average years of schooling were increased
slightly from 2.7 years in 1980 to 3.2 years in 1990. The trends were similar
to the number of scientists and technicians, at 10 per 1000 people and 18 per
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
1000 people, in 1980 and 1990, respectively. In terms of spending on
research & development, the amount of money was halved about 25 US $
billion from 1980 to 1990.
In industrialized countries, there was growth in all terms of education and
science. For the average years of schooling, there were 8.3 years in 1980,
compared to 9.2 years in 1990. From 1980 to 1990, the number of scientists
oomm
and technicians was escalated at 70 per 1000 people. The spending on
research & development was doubled at about 340 US $ billion from 1980 to
1990.
.c.c
ss
209 words
rr
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Legal & Disclaimer
o mm
o
.c.c
ss
rr
ttttee
aa
M
SS M
TT
LL
IIEE
cause of action.
book.
www.zandienglish.ir

www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION
SAMPLE 1
SAMPLE 2
SAMPLE 3
oomm
SAMPLE 4
.c.c
SAMPLE 5
SAMPLE 6
rrss
SAMPLE 7
ttttee
SAMPLE 8
SAMPLE 9 aa
SAMPLE 10
SSMM
TT
SAMPLE 11
SAMPLE 12
LL
IIEE
SAMPLE 13
SAMPLE 14
SAMPLE 15
SAMPLE 16
SAMPLE 17
SAMPLE 18
SAMPLE 19
SAMPLE 20
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 21
SAMPLE 22
SAMPLE 23
SAMPLE 24
SAMPLE 25
SAMPLE 26
SAMPLE 27
SAMPLE 28
SAMPLE 29
SAMPLE 30
SAMPLE 31
SAMPLE 32
SAMPLE 33
SAMPLE 34
SAMPLE 35
SAMPLE 36
SAMPLE 37
SAMPLE 38
CONCLUSION
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
INTRODUCTION
to Gain a High Band Score 8.0+ in 1 Week (Book 2).”
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
MM
SS
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 1
A survey conducted for the places in which people gain access to the
Internet from 1998 to 2004.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart shows the percentage of people using the Internet in 4 different
locations between 1998 and 2004.
Overall, the proportion of users connecting to the Internet at home and library
saw a slight increase while this data for accessing at work and college
decreased. Also, home was the most common place for people to access the
Internet in 6 years.
Over the 1998-2004 period, the number of people using the Internet at home
fluctuated. This figure fell steadily from 1998 to 2000 but grew after that,
ranked the highest data of the total at about 55% in 2004. Meanwhile, the
percentage of users accessing the Internet at work remained constant at over
25% between 1998 and 2000 before decreasing sharply, at over 10% in the
last year.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
From 1998 to 2002, the college saw a stabilization in the number of people
connecting to the Internet, at exactly 20%, then this data slowly dropped, at
over 15%. In contrast, there was a recovery in the proportion of Internet’s
users in the library, increasing from 10% to approximately 15% in the 6-year
period.
183 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
oomm
.c.c
The bar chart compares percentages of people accessing the Internet from 4
different locations during a 6-year period from 1998 to 2004.
rrss
Overall, home was the most common place to get access to the internet.
ttttee
While the percentage of people using the internet in college remained
relatively unchanged, the figure for work slightly declined during the given
period.
aa
In 1998, over 50% of people reported using the Internet at home. This
MM
number then dropped to around 46% in 2000 but recovered in 2004, reaching
nearly 55%. College internet users were approximately 20% of the total
SS
number of surveyed respondents, and it remained stable during the survey
period.
LLTT
Approximately 30% of participants replied to the survey that they had access
to the Internet at work in 1998 and 2000. But in 2004, only over 10% replied
IIEE
that they had used the Internet at work, a drop of 20% in 4 years. The library
was by far the least popular location to access the Internet. The highest
percentage of people using the Internet at the library was recorded in 2000 at
around only 15%.
182 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 2
The chart shows the number of mobile phones and landlines per 100
people in selected countries.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The given bar chart illustrates the information on the quantity of two phone
types per 100 people, namely mobile phones and landlines, in seven
countries.
Overall, it can be clearly seen that mobile phone is popular in European
countries while people in North America prefer to communicate via
landlines.
To begin with, most of the European countries have a high level of mobile
phone usage. Italy has the greatest usage of mobile phone, with 90 mobile
phones per 100 people compared to only a half for landlines. Following Italy,
there are 88 mobile phones per hundred used in the UK compared to around
68 per 100 for landlines. A similar pattern can be found in Sweden and
Germany.
In contrast, the number of landlines is greater than mobile phones in the UK,
Canada and Denmark. Unlike other European countries, Denmark shows a
different trend in phone use where there are slightly more landlines than
mobile phones. Particularly, Denmark has the highest number of landlines,
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
with about 90 per 100 people. In the USA, the number of mobiles, at 50 per
100 people, is much lower than the number of landlines, at almost 70 per
hundred. The same trend can be seen in Canada.
203 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
citizens in seven different countries.

oomm
The bar chart compares the number of handsets and landlines for every 100
.c.c
It is obvious that Denmark owns the most landlines in the seven nations
ss
shown, and Italy has the least of all. However, it is Italy that owns the most
rr
mobile phones per 100 people, and the number of units in Canada is the
ttttee
smallest.
Regarding landlines, Denmark’s landlines figure is by far the highest; it
aa
almost doubles the landlines in Italy, which is the lowest of all. The second
highest place belongs to Sweden and the US, which have about the same
SSMM
landlines, followed by Canada, Germany, the UK and Italy.
Regarding mobile phones, despite having the least landlines, Italy ranks
highest with 90 handsets per 100 people, followed by Sweden, the UK, and
LLTT
Denmark with approximately 87, 85, 82 units owned, respectively. Canada
has the lowest number of mobile phones uses among the seven countries,
with less than 40 units owned.
160 words
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 3
The pie charts below show the average household expenditures in Japan
and Malaysia in the year 2010.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The pie charts give information about expenses per household in Japan and
Malaysia in 2010.
Overall, while Malaysian families spent the most on housing, the
expenditures of households in Japan were highest on food in 2010. Also,
families in both Japan and Malaysia spent the lowest amount of money on
health care.
In 2010, the spending of Malaysian households was highest on housing,
making up 34% of their budgets, which was 13% higher than the figure for
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Japan. Meanwhile, food accounted for 24% of household expenditures in
Japan while Malaysian spending on this category was slightly higher, at 27%.
29% of budgets of Japanese families went to other goods and services,
compared to 26% of families in Malaysia.
Japanese households spent 20% of their budgets on transport, which was
twice times as much as the figure for Malaysia. Expenditures of families in
respectively.
oomm
both Japan and Malaysian were lowest on health care, with 6% and 3%
156 words
.c.c
MODEL ANSWER 2:
rrss
ttttee
The pie charts illustrate data on the expenses of people in 2 Asian countries
(Japan and Malaysia) in 2010.
aa
Overall, the Japanese spent most on other goods and services while the
biggest amount of money in Malaysia was used for housing. Moreover, both
SSMM
nations allocated the least budget for healthcare.
To begin with, housing accounted for just above 20 percent of the Japanese’s
income whereas this category made up for 34 percent of Malaysian citizens’
LLTT
expenditure. Moreover, 3 percent more money the Japanese invested in other
goods and services than people in Malaysia did; the figures were 29 percent
and 26 percent respectively. Similarly, the former expended 29 percent of
IIEE
their budget on healthcare, which was 3 percent more than the latter’s
spending on this product.
Turning to the other categories, expenditure on food in Japan was 24 percent
which was 3 percent less than that in Malaysia. Finally, the average spending
on transportation in Japan was twice as much as that in Malaysia, at 20% and
10% respectively.
168 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 4
The charts below show the main reasons for study among students of
different age groups and the amount of support they received from
employers.
Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features and
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The two bar charts compare the primary motivations to learn of students from
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
five age groups and the proportion of support their companies offered them.
Overall, while younger people mainly studied to pursue their career, elderly
people tended to learn for their own interest. It is also evident that young
adults gained the most employers’ support to further their education.
A significant number of 80% of students under 26-year-olds were motivated
o mm
by their future occupation. The career motivation gap became wider and
wider as moving to the older groups; eventually, less than a fifth of students
o
aged 49 and over said they studied to obtain employment. By contrast, an
.c.c
opposite trend was seen in those who studied for interest where two-thirds of
ss
elderly students fell into this category, compared with a tiny proportion of
10% of young people.
rr
ttttee
Young employees enjoyed more than 60% of the time and financial support
from their employers. It is noticeable that those staff in the 30-39 age bracket
received the smallest encouragement from their firm with just over 30%
aa
while the older workers drew more support with approximately 45%.
186 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
SSMM
LLTT
The charts indicate the major rationales of people involved in studying
separated by 5 distinct ages and the percentage of supporting they gained
from their directors.
IIEE
Overall, it can be seen that the number of students going to colleges for
career purpose decreases gradually when they are getting older, while for
interest aim, the figure for those increases dramatically. Additionally, unlike
other groups, middle-aged students get their support at lower points.
In terms of under 26-year-old students, while the proportion for career
purpose is precisely 80%, which is the highest point in comparison with other
ages, the figure for interest target is only 10%. In contrast, the number of over
49-year-old students who choose to learn for their favorites gets the peak,
which is exactly 70%, largely more than approximately 50% when compared
to the figure for the career aim of their counterparts. In addition, there is a
notable detail in the number of 40-49 years old students, which is equal for
www.zandienglish.ir

both intentions, over 40%.
Under 26-year-old students obtain support at the highest point, over 60%,
followed by the figure for 26-29-year-old learners, at about 50%. On the
other hand, the middle-aged students achieve supporting slightly lower,
between 30% and 55%.
202 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 5
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
MODEL ANSWER 1:
LLTT
The table illustrates data on the proportion of British households with
IIEE
different kinds of durable goods from 1972 to 1983.
It can be seen that the interest in consumer durables among British
households increased steadily over the period shown. Moreover, dishwasher,
central heating, refrigerator and washing machine ownerships experienced
the rises at the fastest pace.
There were 42% of households owned a telephone in 1972 and the figure
increased significantly by 35% (which was the largest change recorded) by
the end of the period. Similarly, central heating ownership accounted for
roughly two-thirds in 1983, compared to about one third 11 years earlier. In
addition, refrigerator and washing machine ownership rose by 21% and 14%
respectively.
www.zandienglish.ir

By contrast, although television and vacuum cleaner had the highest
percentages of around 90%, their changing rate was not significant.
Specifically, television increased slightly by 5%, while British households
saw a rise of only 8% in the vacuum cleaner. Finally, video and dishwasher
were owned by the minority of households, which were recorded at 18% and
5% respectively, in 1983.
175 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The table compares/ gives data on the proportions of British households
owning eight different types of consumer durables between 1972 and 1983.
Overall, it is clear that television accounted for the highest figure compared
to that of other categories all the time surveyed. Also, there were significant
increases in the proportion/ percentage of households with a telephone and a
central heating over the period shown.
In 1972, 93% of British households owned a TV, and the proportion for this
item slightly increased to 98%, which was the highest number in the table, in
1983. Vacuum cleaner and refrigerator also had been owned by most of the
houses in Britain (over 90%) by the year 1983. Meanwhile, 66% of
households had a washing machine in 1972. After that, there was a
significant increase in the figure for washing machine’s owners to 80% in
1983.
Regarding four remaining consumer durables, the telephone was the most
common item among these goods, with 42% of British homes owning one in
1972 followed by a rise to 77% in 1983. Similarly, the percentage of homes
with a central heat experienced a 25% growth to 64% in 1983. Until 1983,
British houses had just begun owning a video, with 18% of households,
whereas the figure for families having a dishwasher was only 5%.
215 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 6
The tables below give information about sales of Fairtrade*-labelled
coffee and bananas in 1999 and 2004 in five European countries.
oomm
Source: https://www.testbig.com/ielts-writing-task-i-essays/tables-below-
give-information-about-sales-fairtrade-labelled-coffee-3
.c.c
Sales of Fairtrade-labelled coffee and bananas (1999 & 2004)
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The two tables compare four different countries including Switzerland,
Denmark, the UK, Belgium, and Sweden in terms of sales of Fairtrade –
labelled coffee and bananas during the period of 1999 – 2004.
www.zandienglish.ir

It is clear that the fast/ rapid increase in sales of Fairtrade-labelled coffee and
bananas concentrated on three countries namely United Kingdom,
Switzerland, and Belgium from 1999 to 2004. By contrast, while there was a
decrease in the sales of bananas in Sweden and Denmark, the figure for
coffee sales of these two countries increased over the period surveyed.
We can see that sales data for Fairtrade coffee in the UK jumped
considerably from 1.5 to 20 million euros. The figure for Switzerland
doubled over five years from 3 to 6 million euros. The same pattern happened
in Denmark, Belgium, and Sweden with an increase of 0.2, 0.6, and 0.2
million of euros respectively.
There was a rocket development regarding sales of Fairtrade-labelled banana
in Belgium over 6 times for five years from 0.6 to 4 million euros, followed
by the figures for UK and Switzerland, over 5.5 and 3 times respectively. The
proportion of Sweden, however, witnessed a decline to 1 million euros and
Denmark, similarly tailed off by 1.1 million euros in 2004.
206 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The two tables illustrate the sales of five different nations spending on
Fairtrade-labelled coffee and bananas in two separate years.
Overall, in the first chart, the figures in 2004 were always higher than those
in 1999. This trend was similar in the second table, with the notable
exception of Sweden and Denmark.
In 1999, of the five countries, Switzerland and Denmark spent the highest
budget on coffee with 3 and 1.8 millions of euros, respectively. However,
only 800 thousands of euros are spent on this item by the Swedish, compared
to 1 million of euros by the Belgian and 1.5 millions of euros by the Britain.
In contrast, in 2004, people in all nations tended to consume higher amount to
20 millions of euros, which was the largest number in comparison with that
of other countries. The figures in Switzerland and Belgium were nearly
double, at 6 and 1.7 millions of euros, accordingly. The two remaining
European nations saw a similar amount of coffee use after five years.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
The amount of money that citizens spent on bananas in Switzerland
accounted for the largest number in 1999 and it still remained the first place,
a rise of 32 millions of euros after 5 years. People in the UK and Belgium
consumed this product more than 5 times, at 5.5 and 4 millions of euros,
compared to the figures in 1999. On the contrary, there was a sharp decline in
the quantity of banana usage in Sweden and Denmark, to only 1 and 0.9
220 words
oomm
millions of euros, in that order, over this period.
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 7
The chart below gives information about the UK's aging population in
1985 and makes predictions for 2035.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart demonstrates the percentage of people aged 66 or older in 1985
and the predicted rate of that in 2035 in the UK.
Overall, an escalation is predicted to happen in all territory of the UK over a
course of 50 years. In addition, although there are different changes in terms
of the ratio of population aged 65 and over among countries in the United
Kingdom, it is estimated that Wales always is the leader in the proportion of
people in this age group.
In 1985, the percentage of resident aged 65 and over of Wales was the
highest, at around 16%. By contrast, the figure for elderly people aged 65 or
and over in Northern Ireland was at the lowest point of approximately 12%.
Exactly 12 percent of UK and England population was aged 65 and older,
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
compared to about 14% of Scotland.
By 2035, Wales is still going to have the greatest rate of people who are in
and over their 65s, with a figure that is likely to reach around 26%. However,
the biggest increase in this age group is predicted to occur in Northern
Ireland, of which the rate is estimated to double to roughly 24% in
comparison with that of 1985. The ratio of the elderly in the remaining
218 words
oomm
countries is also forecasted to rise to more than 10% in 2035.
MODEL ANSWER 2:
.c.c
rrss
The given bar chart illustrates UK’s aging population proportion in 1985 and
ttttee
forecasts about future possible population’s proportion in 2035.
Overall, the percentage of UK population over 65 years old is anticipated to
aa
be increasing over time as until 2035, the percentage will be rising up to
about 23%, which was 15% in 1985.
SSMM
Scotland has observed and will be observing the greatest in an uplift in its
aging population, which is predicted to be approximately 12% over the
period shown. Northern Ireland and Wales both witnessed a similarly
LLTT
moderate climb in its aging population, which is 10%. However, the
proportion of Wales aging population is clearly much more than that of
Northern Ireland by the end of 2035 as their tendencies proposed.
IIEE
However, England saw an equivalent upsurge in its aging population
comparing to UK’s total population. It is expected to increase from 15% to
23% by the end of 2035, which is the least increase over the period shown.
161 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 8
The bar chart shows the scores of teams A, B and C over four different
seasons
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The chart depicts the comparison of team A, B and C in terms of their scores
during four years starting from 2002.
Overall, team B scored the highest consistently in the reported period.
Starting from 2002, 82 points were scored by team B and it was over 16
times higher than that of team A. Since then, there was a downward trend of
team B’s scores and reached its lowest points in 2004, at 43. In contrast, team
A gradually improved their performance over the first 3 seasons and closed
its gap by reaching their highest position in 2004 which is just 8 points lower
than team B. Meanwhile, 2005 saw the adverse changes of these 2 teams with
the recovery of team B of 8 points and the significant drop of team A of more
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
than four times, ending with 55 points and 8 points of team B and A,
respectively.
Standing at the average position with slight fluctuation, team C remained
their performance in the range between 10 and 15 points during the first 3
years before plunging in the last one with only 5 points.
188 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
oomm
.c.c
The bar chart compares the difference of scores of 3 teams from 2002 to
ss
2005.
rr
Overall, it is clear from the graph that the scores of team B were by far
ttttee
highest during the research period. Additionally, while there was a
fluctuation in the figures of team A and team B, that of team C remained
aa
steady during the period.
In 2002, the score of team B was highest, at 82 points. In contrast, that of
SSMM
team A hit the bottom at exactly 5 points. At the same time, team C gained a
relatively low point, at 10.
L TT
There was a dramatic decrease in the score of team B to 43 points in 2004,
before bouncing back to 55 points in 2005. It can be seen from the different
L
trend in the figures of team A that it fell sharply to a mere 8 points in 2005,
IIEE
after reaching a peak at 35 points in 2004. The points of team C remained
between 5 and 15 over the four seasons.
170 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 9
The map below is of the town of Garlsdon. A new supermarket (S) is
planned for the town. The map shows two possible sites for the
supermarket.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The map shows two potential locations for a new supermarket in the town of
Garlsdon.
It is clear that the main difference between the two proposed sites lies in their
locations relative to three neighbouring towns, namely Hindon, Brandon and
Cransdon. These areas are also compared in terms of access by road and rail.
Taking location into consideration, S1 is located close to the town of Hindon,
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
which has a population of 10,000 people. However, it is quite far from two
other residential areas, which are Bransdon to the southwest with 15,000
inhabitants and Cransdon, occupied by 29,000 people, to the southeast. By
contrast, S2 has more advantages as it is situated right in Garlsdon town
centre, where it is in the middle of the three mentioned towns.
As for transport infrastructure, Garlsdon had a railway line running through
oomm
its centre from northwest to southeast, allowing customers to reach both S1
and S2, apart from residents of Bransdon town. While S2 is accessible to all
vehicles from entering the supermarket.

.c.c
the towns above by road, the pedestrian area where it is based prevents
183 words
rrss
ttttee
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The map shows the possible locations for constructing a new supermarket in
aa
Garlsdon Town, which has 65000 local residents.
MM
As it is shown from the graph, the most significant difference between 2
positions is their places being set in the urban and rural area.
SS
The S1 supermarket is set/ is planned to be built in the countryside of the
LLTT
North West of Garlson, next to the residential area. It would lie between the
main road and the railway and just 6 km to the nearest town Hindon with
10,000 residents.
IIEE
The other planned supermarket, the S2 is considered to be built in the Towa
centre which has no traffic zone but a railway going through in the North
side. From this situation, there are main roads to Brandon (16km) in the West
and Cransdon (25km) in the East as well as to Hindon (12km). The first two
locations had a higher population than the Hindon’s with 15000 for the
former and 29,000 for the latter compared to only 10,000 citizens of Hindon.
The S2 is also nearer to the industry area than its counterpart, especially the
one in the South.
190 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 10
The pie charts below give information about world population in 1900
and 2000.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The pie chart illustrates the changes in the population of various regions of
the world in 2 separate years.
As can be seen from the graph, the most significant feature is the booming
increase in the world population over the period of 10 years, from 1.6 billion
in 1990 to 6 billion in 2000.
More than half of the world population was Asian, with 60% in 1990 and this
proportion remained the largest although there was a marginal decline with
6% in 2000. In the same period, the number of people living in Africa more
than doubled, from 4% to 10%, whereas the figure for Latin America almost
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
tripled. The population of other regions as well as North America stayed
unchanged, and the figures were 6% and 5% respectively.
Another considerable feature is that there was 6% of the world population
inhabited in M.E and N.A in 2000, although this category was not revealed
on the figure in the former year. However, the percentage of the population in
Europe decreased over the last century from 25% to 4%.
178 words
oomm
MODEL ANSWER 2:
.c.c
ss
The given pie charts compare different areas of the world in terms of their
population between 1900 and 2000.
rr
ttttee
Overall, in both years, the percentage of Asian population was the highest in
both years. While there is an increase in the world population, only minimal
aa
changes can be seen in those regions between 1900 and 2000.
From 1900 to 2000, the population percentage of Africa and Latin America
SSMM
saw an increase of about 6% and 5% from 4% and 3% respectively. By
contrast, the figure for Asia and Europe dropped over the last century.
European percentage of the population decreased from 25% to 14% while
LLTT
Asia declined from 60% to 54%.
On the other hand, the proportion of North America population remained
IIEE
steady at 5% throughout a century. The Middle East and North Africa, a new
category in 2000, comprised of 6% of the world population.
152 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 11
The chart below shows global sales of the top five mobile phone brands
between 2009 and 2013.
Write a report for a university, lecturer describing the information shown
below.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart compares the worldwide cell phones sales for the 5 biggest
manufacturers from 2009 to 2013.
It is clear that 3 out of 5 companies, including Samsung, Apple, and ZTE,
saw a rise in the number of units sold, while Nokia and LG experienced a
downward trend in sales throughout the period shown. Samsung and Nokia
were the two most successful brands as their sales were biggest figures
shown in the period.
In 2009, with roughly 450 million units sold worldwide, Nokia gained the
highest position in the market. Samsung had the second biggest sales figure,
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
which was only about half the number recorded for Nokia. However, the
number of global sales of Nokia then dropped by approximately 200 units to
its lowest point at the end of the period. With around 450 million units,
Samsung became the company with the highest sales in 2013 after
experiencing a significant rise throughout the 4 year period.
In 2009, out of the three smaller businesses, sales figure given for Apple was
oomm
the smallest, with only less than 20 million units. However, there was a
significant rise in the company sales, giving it the third highest position of all
.c.c
5 brands. In contrast, the number of cell phones sold for LG dipped from 120
million to 60 million in 2013. In 2009, ZTE sold less than 50 million mobile
rrss
phones and this number remained stable until 2013.
ttttee
217 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
aa
The bar graph illustrates the number of units sold of the five most popular
mobile brands in 2009, 2011 and 2013.
SSMM
After 4 years, Samsung and Apple showed a significant growth in global
sales while Nokia and LG lost their places in ranking due to their decrease in
the total sales.
LLTT
The number of phones of Samsung sold rose constantly by around 100
million every two years and reached 430 million in 2013, making Samsung
IIEE
the most popular brand for mobile phone. Over the same period, there was a
dramatic 7-times increase from 20 million to around 150 million in Apple’s
phones sold worldwide. The figure also described a gradual rise in ZTE’s
sales to 60 million in 2013.
Conversely, there were around 430 million Nokia phones sold in 2009, which
was the highest number in global sales record. However, after a slight drop in
2011, Nokia’s sales plummeted by nearly 200 million in the next 2 years. The
global sales of LG brand also saw a decline from 110 in 2009 to 80 million in
2013.
177 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 12
The diagram below shows how geothermal energy is used to produce
electricity.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
The flow chart illustrates the process of generating geothermal energy.
The entire process includes five major steps, beginning with cold water
modification and transportation and ending with generator activation.
Initially, cold water is being stored inside a tank on the ground before being
pumped down 4.5 deep under the ground by an injection well. To heat up the
o mm
water temperature, cold water moves/ goes through the geothermal zone
which contains hot rocks and gradually boils into hot water. In the third step,
o
the production well pumps up the hot water through the ground layer and
carries it to another machine.
.c.c
rrss
In the next stage, hot water is being materialized inside the condenser and it
transforms into hot steam that will play a key role in producing electricity.
ttttee
Following this, the steam enters the generator and turbine operators block
where the electricity will be created. The turbine is then initiated by hot steam
and rotates around in order to create lots of forces that will set up the
aa
generator. Eventually, the generator is activated thanks to these forces and
M
electricity is then distributed to households.
184 words
SS M
MODEL ANSWER 2:
LLTT
The method for producing electric power by using water energy, is depicted
in the illustration.
IIEE
On the whole, this process is a complex series of 10 stages, beginning with
reserving water and culminating in distributing electricity to users.
The process begins with the evaporation of water in oceans by the heat from
the sun. As a result of being condensed into clouds, the water droplets fall
back to the earth as rain. After this, rainwater is contained in the reservoir
behind a dam before being pumped towards the turbine. Once the valve is
opened, water flows into the turbine.
The stage after this is when the turbine is operated by the pressure of water
and then an electrical current is made. Meanwhile, water is returned back to
the reservoir as the pump. Next, the electricity produced by the turbine is
transferred to the transformation station via high voltage cables. Finally, the
www.zandienglish.ir

electrical power is ready to be delivered to households, industrial areas and
public facilities such as hospitals and schools.
171 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 13
The bar chart shows the percentage of the total world population in four
countries in 1950 and 2002, and projections for 2050.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
MODEL ANSWER 1:
SSMM
The bar chart compares the proportion of the global population in four
countries, namely India, China, the USA and Japan in two years 1950 and
LLTT
2002 and also a prediction for 2050.
Overall, it is clear from the bar chart that the percentages of worldwide
IIEE
population in India and China are always the highest rates, while the figure
for Japan is by far the lowest during the research period.
In 1950, the rate of population in China was the highest, at around 23%,
while the figure for India stood at exactly 15%. At the same time, the USA
population accounted for about 12%, compared to only less than 5% of
Japan. In 2002, there was a moderate increase in the proportion of the
population in India to approximately 17%. Meanwhile, China, the USA, and
Japan witnessed a decline in their population.
In 2050, it is predicted that the percentage of India population will continue
to rise gradually to nearly 20% and become the highest figure compared to
other countries. By contrast, the population rates in both China and Japan are
expected to fall to precisely 15% and around 2% respectively. In the same
www.zandienglish.ir

year, the figure for the USA is likely to remain stable at 5%.
206 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The bar chart illustrates how the proportion of total world population changed
in 4 particular nations in 1950 and 2002 as well as the predictions for 2050.
Overall, although China experienced the highest percentage of inhabitants in
1950 and 2050, the figure for India is expected to be the highest shown on the
chart in 2050. Interestingly, India is the only one experiencing an upward
trend over the period.
From 1950 to 2002, the population of China and the USA dropped by
roughly the same percentage, 3%. Meanwhile, India saw a considerable
growth by 3%, yet its figure remained lower than China’s. Like China and the
USA, Japan’s population also decreased but less significantly.
In 2050, the proportion of India’s number of inhabitants is expected to rise
sharply and peak at more than 18%. By contrast, China and Japan are forecast
to have a substantial plummet by approximately half of their figures in 2002.
Meanwhile, the figure for the USA will stay unchanged throughout 2050.
165 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 14
The pie charts below show the average household expenditures in a
country in 1950 and 2010.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
MODEL ANSWER 1:
LLTT
The pie charts compare the percentage of money spent on goods and services
IIEE
in 1950 and 2010.
Overall, during the 1950-2010 period, the money invested in housing
decreased significantly while the budget for other categories, especially food,
transportation and other services increased significantly after 60 years.
In 1950, the expense for housing accounted for the largest proportion, nearly
three quarters of the total expenditure/spending. But 60 years later, it
dramatically fell to less than 25%. In addition, the expenditures of Education
also decreased slightly by 0.3 %, from 6.6% in 1950 to 6.3% in 2010.
In contrast, the money spent on food had a big step after 60 years, made up
the largest proportion of all household expenditures in 2010. Starting at
11.2% in 1950, this figure rose sharply to 34% in 2010. Similarly, in 1950,
www.zandienglish.ir

the expense for transportation and other services accounted for just around
3.3-4.4% but suddenly increased to nearly 25% five years after.
158 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The two pie charts display the data of what households spent their money on
in 1950 and 2010.
At first glance, it is clear that in both years, medical care cost least in the total
budget of families.
To begin with, the largest proportion of family’s expenditure in 1950 was on
housing where it formed 72.1% of the total. 60 years later, the housing costs
saw a significant decrease of 50% thus in 2010, people only spent 22% of
their budgets on housing. However, in 2010, food replaced housing and
became the area where households spent the most money on with a
percentage of 34% compared to 11.2% in 1995.
On the other hand, people became to pay more for transportation in 2010 than
they did in 1950. To be specific, there was an increase of approximately 10%
from 3.3% to 14% in this field. It is interesting to note that the cost of
families’ payments for education was almost the same with 6.6% in 1950 and
6.3% in 2010.
170 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 15
The following pie charts show the results of a survey into the most
popular leisure activities in the United States of America in 1999 and
2009.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The pie charts compare the percentage of the results of a survey into eight
SSMM
common leisure activities in America between 1999 and 2009.
Overall, the largest percentage of people living in the US enjoyed walking.
L TT
Additionally, people in the USA almost participated in outdoor activities
much more than indoor activities.
L
IIEE
In 1999, around 29% of American people enjoyed walking which was the
largest proportion. On the other hand, the figures for people in the United
States who took part in soccer, aerobics, and bicycling activities were above
10%, exactly 17%, 13% and 12%, respectively. By contrast, the rates for
remaining categories were below 10%.
Ten years later, the percentage of walking still made up the highest figure out
of eight leisure activities, at 31%. There was a dramatic change in the rates
for outdoor activities namely soccer and camping. The figures for soccer and
camping were more 1% than those in 1999. Besides, the percentage of
swimming was twice as much as the rate for that in 1999. Whilst, the
proportion of people joining in jogging, bicycling and aerobics activities were
fewer than ten years before.
www.zandienglish.ir

186 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The pie charts demonstrate the percentage of participation in some leisure
activities in the USA in two separate years 1999 and 2009.
Overall, although there were some variations in the popularity of each
category, walking was the most enjoyable activity in America.
Specifically, over a 10-year period, the proportion of people in the USA took
part in walking remained relatively stable/steady/unchanged, constituting
nearly a third of total activities. The figures for soccer and camping shared
similar patterns experienced a similar pattern of 1%, increasing slightly to
18% and 9%, respectively. Meanwhile, swimming saw sharper rises in the
rate of participants, doubling to 18%. Noticeably, yoga was replaced by
weightlifting in 2009, at strikingly 10%.
Regarding aerobics, jogging and bicycling, in 2009, fewer American people
enjoyed these activities than 10 years earlier. The most significant decrease
was seen in the figure for aerobics, at 13% in 1999, as opposed to merely 4%
in 2009. Whereas the falls in the popularity of jogging and bicycling were
slighter, at 3% and 7%, respectively.
170 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 16
The pie chart below shows information on the highest level of education
of women in Someland in 1945 and 1995.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The graphs compare the highest level of education/academic qualification of
Someland’s female residents between 1945 and 1995.
Overall, there were big changes in terms of the proportion of individual
categories, except for year 9 group. In addition, as is observed, more females
www.zandienglish.ir

got educated in Someland in 1995 than that of 1945.
As can be seen in the diagrams, in 1945 the percentage of women who did
not go to school was up to exactly 35% which was the highest figure of the
whole pie chart in 1945. An equal rate also was recorded in the third-grade
sort. In contrast, post graduate was at the bottom of seven
qualifications/levels because no females kept going to school after they had
graduated. Nearly one third of the remaining women had schooling
experience at different levels, particularly 1%; 15%; 10%; 4% for the first
degree; year 6; year 9; year 12; respectively.
In 1995, thanks to a dramatic escalation, first degree was the most common
educated level of women in Someland with 50%. Sharp increases were also
witnessed in both year 12 and postgraduate group. In contrast, the ratio of
women who either completed their third grade; 6th grade or did not go to
school reduced to 0%. On the other hand, the proportion of year 9
classification kept intact in a 50 year period with 10%.
220 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The pie charts compare the proportion of women in Someland who had
different levels of education over the separate two years.
It is clear that there were big differences in the education level of women in
Someland. It is also noticeable that while the percentage of females educated
at the level of first degree rose dramatically over the period of 50 years, the
figure for women of the degree of no schooling and third grade fell sharply.
In 1945, the majority of women were at the level of no schooling and third
grade, at 35%, which was 20% higher than that of the second highest of year
6. Only 10% of females finished the program of year 9, followed by 40% of
year 12 and 1% of the first degree. In that year, no women pursued the level
of postgraduate.
In 1995, while the proportion of women was at the level of first degree,
postgraduate and year 12 increased significantly from 1% to 5%, 0% to 20%
and 4% to 20%, respectively. The figure for the level of no schooling, third
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
place and year 6 plunged to the bottom. The rate of female completed the
degree of year 9 remained constant.
201 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 17
The table shows the worldwide market share of the mobile phone market
for manufacturers in the years 2005 and 2006.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The table compares the global market share among the mobile phone
producers in 2005 and 2006.
Overall, it is clear that the market share of Nokia saw the most considerable
increase in both years while the proportion of Samsung, L.G, BenQ Mobile
and others rose in 2006 than they had in 2005.
The percentage of Nokia’s market share was the leader with about one-third
of total and their market share accelerated by 2.5% to 35% in the next year.
Its nearest competitor, Motorola saw a significant rise in sales from over 17%
in 2005 to 21.1% in 2006. Besides, Sony Ericsson increased slightly by just
over 1% to 7.4% in 2006, compared to 6.3% in the previous year.
In contrast, the international market share of Samsung decreased by almost
1% to stand at 11.8% in 2006. The percentage of L.G decelerated from 6.7%
to 6.3% in this year. BenQ Mobile’s global market share declined to the
lowest rank by exactly 2.5% in the next year. Finally, there was a dramatic
fall in the worldwide mobile phone market share of other manufacturers by
3% to 16.2% in 2006.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
187 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The table compares the highest ranking mobile phone companies in terms of
their share of the global market over a period of 2 years.
It is clear that Nokia was the leader of worldwide mobile phone market
oomm
between 2005 and 2006. In addition, while the market share of most
manufacturers fell, that of Nokia, Motorola, Sony Ericsson rose in the same
period.
.c.c
ss
In details, Nokia was the most successful producers, with its market share
rr
rising from 32.5% in 2005 to 35% in 2006. Its nearest competitor, Motorola
ttttee
experienced a significant rise in sales of nearly 3.5 % to 21.1 % in 2006.
Sony Ericsson also increased their sales by just over 1% to reach 7.4% in
2006.
aa
By contrast, the percentage of Samsung market share fell from 12.7% in 2005
MM
to 11.8 % in 2006. There was also a decrease in sales of L.G, falling by
almost 0.5% to 6.3% in 2006. Meanwhile, global market share of BenQ
SS
Mobile fell to 2.4 % in 2006, a decline of 2.5 % from the previous year.
TT
Similarly, between the 2 years surveyed, other brands also witnessed a
considerable decrease by 3% to only 16.2% in the share of global market.
198 words LL
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 18
The diagram shows the changes that have taken place at West Park
Secondary School since its construction in 1950.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The three maps indicate several significant changes which happened in West
Park Secondary School during a period of 60 years since 1950.
Overall, it is noticeable that houses and the farmland vanished for the
development of other purposes.
In 1980, houses located on the left of the school were demolished and
converted into the car park and a science block was erected. Meanwhile, the
farmland behind the initial houses was redesigned as the sports field. By
2010, while the science block remained unchanged, the car park was
extended and occupied the whole area of the sports field.
Besides, the playground whose original size was kept until 1980 shrank to
give place to the sports field. These two buildings were both situated behind
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
the school. The main building of the school still remained in the same
position facing the main road over 60 years.
151 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The given diagrams demonstrate how different West Park Secondary School
has been since its original design in 1950.
oomm
Overall, the school main building and its science block were the major
.c.c
structures that remained unchanged over the given period. The school’s land
ss
has been completely used for the educational purpose since 1980.
rr
Its initial construction in 1950 contained 4 main components: houses,
ttttee
farmland, school, and playground. However, over the next 30 years, the two
zones catering for housing and agriculture were substituted for a new car park
aa
and a sports field. The car park and the school, including its main building
and a science block, stood facing the Main Road.
SSMM
In 2010, the general structures of the school saw a slight re-distribution in
terms of land. The space for sport fields was reduced to make way for the
expansion of the car park. Students’ recession place was also smaller, while
157 words
LLTT
main building and its science block remained intact.
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 19
The two graphs show the main sources of energy in the USA in the 1980s
and the 1990s.
The pie charts give information about the usage of 5 different forms of
energy in the USA in 1980 and 1990.
Overall, the amount of oil used by US citizens accounted for the largest
proportion in both years. Additionally, there was a slight decrease in the
figure for oil and natural gas whereas coal, hydroelectric power, and nuclear
power fluctuated over the same period shown.
In 1980, oil was the primary source of energy in the US, at 42%. However, its
number decreased by precisely 9% to reach 33%, which was also the highest
point in 1990. During the 10-year period, natural gas remained relatively
constant, at about 26% and 25% in 1980 and 1990 respectively.
In terms of coal, its figure witnessed a slight growth from 22% to 27% and
remained at a third place in the year 1990. In addition, there was no change in
the amount of hydroelectric power used in the US, at exactly 5% in both
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
years. Nuclear power accounted for the lowest percentage in 1980, however,
10 years later, its figure increased slightly, climbing to 10% in 1990.
184 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 20
The maps below show the changes experienced by the town of Lakeside
at the beginning of the 21st Century.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The maps illustrate how the town of lakeside developed over a 9-year period
from 2000 to 2009.
Overall, the town underwent mass industrialization, with less accommodation
and more modern facilities.
In the northwest of the town, there are several changes. While the old town
made way for an office and a university, the derelict warehouse was
converted into a car park. Additionally, the residential area in the town center
made way for the emergence of a shopping centre and the art centre was
developed into the cinema. One of the interesting points is that the residential
area on the western bank of the river and the school remained unchanged at
the same position during the period shown.
In the southeast of the town, the inhabitant area was demolished to make way
for the expansion of the industrial complex. Furthermore, the lake at the end
of the river in the town reduced in size and become a pond in 2010.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
159 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The maps illustrate how Lakeside developed between 2000 and 2009.
Overall, Lakeside underwent a complete transformation with new additions to
the town instead of derelict warehouses, Old Town and Art Centre.
larger industrial complex.

oomm
Moreover, woodland is decreased in size considerably to make way for a
.c.c
Looking to the north of the river, the residential area in the northwest corner
ss
remained unchanged, while the derelict warehouses and Old Town on the
rr
right of this area were demolished and replaced by a car park and offices.
ttttee
Additionally, an Art Centre, which was located in the south of the derelict
warehouses and opposite the residential area in 2000, was knocked down and
made way for a multi-screen cinema by 2009. On the northeast side of the
aa
river, a lake in the middle of the woodland was drained and turned into a
pond by 2009. To the west of the pond, further developments were the
SSMM
constructions of a university and many schools next to the offices.
As can be seen from the south of the river, a residential area and part of the
dramatically.
191 words LLTT
woodland area were removed then the industrial complex was expanded
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 21
The graph below shows average carbon dioxide (CO2) emissions per
person in the United Kingdom, Sweden, Italy and Portugal between 1967
and 2007.
Source: https://baysideielts.wordpress.com/2017/05/25/task-1-line-graph/
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The graph compares the United Kingdom, Sweden, Italy, and Portugal in
terms of average carbon dioxide (CO2) emissions per person over a period of
40 years since 1967.
Overall, the average CO2 emissions of Italy and Portugal showed a steady
but significant rise, while the UK and Sweden experienced a downward
trend.
It can be seen that in 1967, the medium amount of carbon dioxide emitted by
one person in Portugal and Italy was just above 1.5 and 4 metric tonnes,
respectively. Italy’s medium CO2 emissions increased sharply throughout the
period, exceeding that of Sweden at roughly 7 metric tonnes in 1987. The
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
upward trend reached its peak of nearly 8 metric tonnes and then leveled off
till the end of the period. Similarly/ Likewise, Portugal experienced a
significant surge to more than 5 metric tonnes in the following decade from
1967, which continued with a slight increase until 2007.
Throughout the four decades, despite seeing a gradual decline of about 2
metric tonnes from its starting point at nearly 11 metric tonnes, the UK still
oomm
took the lead in the average amount of CO2 emissions among 4 countries. On
the contrary, starting at less than 9 metric tonnes, Sweden’s medium CO2
.c.c
discharges climbed to a dramatic high of above 10 metric tonnes in 1977,
only to be followed by a sharp plummet of about 50%, ending up equally to
the average amount in Portugal.
rrss
ttttee
220 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
aa
The line graph compares carbon dioxide emissions per capita that were
produced in four countries, over the time period of 40 years from 1967 to
2007.
SSMM
Overall, it can be seen clearly that CO2 emissions per capita in the UK and
TT
Sweden had a downward trend over the period. In the meantime, the figures
in Italy and Portugal increased considerably but still remained much lower
L
than those in the UK.
L
IIEE
To begin, emissions per capita in the UK and Sweden followed a very similar
pattern. The average CO2 emission per person in the UK initially stood at 11
tonnes which was the highest of four countries in 1967. The figure stayed
unchanged until 1977 before starting to decline gradually and fell to nearly 9
tonnes in 2007.Turning to Sweden where the figure started at 8 tonnes,
although having initially increased to reach over 10 tonnes in 1977, it began
to drop dramatically and stayed at 5.5 tonnes in 2007.
Carbon dioxide emissions per capita in Italy and Portugal, on the other hand,
experienced an upward trend over 10 years. In Italy, in1967, 4 tonnes of CO2
gas was emitted, which was nearly 4 times higher than in Portugal. In next
following years, both figures declined considerably and leveled up to nearly 8
tonnes in Italy and to 5.5 tonnes in Portugal, as much as in Sweden, in 2007.
www.zandienglish.ir

219 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 22
The diagrams below show the stages and equipment used in the cement-
making process, and how cement is used to produce concrete for
building purposes.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
The diagrams describe how cement is produced with the assistance of various
equipment and the process of making concrete for construction.
Overall, cement which is made from limestone and clay can be combined
with water, sand, and gravel to produce concrete.
There are four main stages in the process of cement manufacturing. At the
first stage, limestone and clay are mashed into powder by a large crusher,
then they are merged with each other in a mixer. In the next stage, the
powdery mixture of limestone and clay is transferred to an enormous rotating
www.zandienglish.ir

heater where it is heated and mixed until it is qualified. Before being
packaged in different bags in the final step, cement is crushed by a grinder to
become a soft, powdery-type substance.
The process of concrete production is quite simple. All ingredients including
cement, water, sand and small stones, which are also known as gravel, are
combined together in a huge concrete mixer with an appropriate proportion of
15%, 10%, 25% and 50%, respectively.
169 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The pictures illustrate the processes of making cement and concrete for
building purpose.
There are five distinct steps involved in the cement manufacturing, beginning
with crushing limestone and clay and ending with packing whereas the
concrete production has fewer stages.
Initially, the process of making cement commences with the mixture of
limestone and clay which is crushed into powder. Then, this powder is passed
through a mixer. Following that, the product is dried by a rotating heater with
an outside heat source. Subsequently, the dried powder is ground, creating
cement. At the end of the process, the cement is packed in bags.
At the construction sites, cement is one of the ingredients which are used to
produce concrete. There are 4 elements including 10% for cement, 25% for
sand, 50% for small stone and 10% for water which is put in a concrete
mixer. After that, the concrete comes out and is ready to use.
155 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 23
The maps below show the changes that had taken place at the seaside
resort of Templeton between 1990 and 2005.
comparisons where relevant.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
MODEL ANSWER 1:
IIEE
The pictures illustrate the transformation at a coastal resort of Templeton
with the introduction of modernization between 1990 and 2005.
Looking at the maps, it is obvious that the area underwent a number of
changes. Generally, more apartments were constructed to cater to housing
needs and infrastructure was improved significantly.
To the North of the lake which is in the West north of the area and to the
North of the sea, apartments were built in lieu of what once were trees and
www.zandienglish.ir

small houses. In addition, to the East of the resort, a supermarket emerged to
provide commodity for citizens. In the North part of the resort, an airport
was constructed beside the school.
Further development can be witnessed in the Southern coastal area. To be
specific, the railway was built. To the East of Templeton, a ferry was
constructed to transport cars and other transport facilities. The other
important to note is that near to this ferry was a factory which replaced trees
and houses.
167 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
From 1990 to 2005, Templeton resort witnessed a significant transformation
of its background and infrastructure.
Overall, the resort’s landscape had switched into urban architecture instead of
natural scenery.
In 1990, the seaside resort had a green view with a lot of plants covering both
sides of the resort: west side and east side. However, by 2005, most of the
trees had been replaced by tall buildings and other cement constructions.
While small-sized houses had dominated mainly over the scene in western
area in the early 90s, there was a noticeable increase in the number of high-
rises in this area in 2005. Attached to general alteration is a supermarket,
which located in the centre of western land and hadn’t been seen before
2005.
The development also exposed obviously in the north-eastern part of
Templeton resort. The side was facilitated by more constructions supplying
services for people living in this area. With the appearance of a new airport,
which was built on the right edge of the river, a factory was stood on were
used to be a residential area. Besides, transportation system was highly
improved with the longer rail going around the whole resort and an
availability of a ferry.
199 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 24
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
MODEL ANSWER 1:
LLTT
The flow chart illustrates the process of manufacturing leather products.
IIEE
Overall, the process includes 11 main stages, beginning with drying skin of
animals and ending with producing the prepared material into goods.
At the initial stage, animal skin is dried before being transported to a factory.
Following this, it is carefully washed with a great deal of water and lime. In
the next step, another amount of lime is used to soak the clean animal leather
in a large container. After that, the material is treated in a huge machine that
makes it flatter.
The process continues with another soaking period in which tannin, a
substance made from water and vegetable matter, is applied instead of lime as
the 5th step. Subsequently, the flat piece of animal skin is polished
thoroughly before being moved to another factory. The process concludes
www.zandienglish.ir

with a wide range of shining leather products being manufactured.
151 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The flow chart shows how leather products are manufactured before
delivering to customers.
Overall, there are different stages in the whole leather goods production,
beginning with animal skin drying and ending with the finished goods which
are ready to deliver.
Firstly, animal skin collected in pieces is dried in the open air before being
transported by lorry to a factory for the processing stage. On arrival, they are
cleaned to get rid of impurities by a combination/mixture of water and lime.
At the next step, after the skin pieces are submerged in lime only for the
second time of washing, flattering is processed.
These flat pieces of skin then continue to be soaked again in a liquid of water
and vegetable matter, named Tannin. After that, they are polished before a
truck transports them to a factory where they are manufactured into final
designed products, such as shoes, handbags, and sports equipment. Finally,
they will be distributed to stores where customers can pick and buy them.
166 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 25
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
MODEL ANSWER 1:
LLTT
The line graph compares the percentage of the population aged 65 and above
in the USA, Sweden, Japan and how these rates changed from 1940 to 2040.
IIEE
Overall, at the beginning of the period, the proportion of the population who
aged 65 or more gradually increased in the United States and Sweden while it
decreased in Japan. However, there has been an overall rise of elder
population in all countries at the end of the period.
Looking at the detail, the percentage of older people living in the USA was
the same as in Sweden during the 1940s (just below 10%) and the 1980s
(around 15%). In the 2010s, the proportion of elderly Sweden increased
significantly to exactly 20%, which was more 6% than the figure for the US.
It is predicted that the rate of aged people in both nations will soar about 25%
by 2040.
www.zandienglish.ir

Over the same period, the percentage of elderly people in Japan decreased
from 1940 to 1990 and remained under 5%. By contrast, in the next four
decades, the figure for Japan will rise rapidly to 10% before reaching the
highest point of the whole line graph, at 27%, by 2040.
197 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The line graph compares rates of people at the age of 65 and over in Japan,
Sweden and the USA from 1940 to 2040.
Overall, there was a gradual increase in proportions of people aged 65 and
over in three countries between 1940 and 2000 and these are predicted/
estimated/ anticipated to remain the similar pattern from 2000 to 2040 in
which Japan will have the highest number of people in the 65 and over age
group in 2040.
In 1940, People whose age was 65 and over in the USA was higher than
those in Japan and Sweden. The figures for the USA and Sweden increased
gradually from 1940 to 1980, reaching 15% and approximately 15%,
respectively. However, throughout 20 years later, the proportion of the
population aged at 65 and over decreased slightly in the USA, and will
remain stable under 15% by 2020 before increasing again to over 20% in
2040. Meanwhile, from 1980 to 2040, there was a fluctuation in the figure of
Sweden which is predicted to gain 25% in 2040, and be higher than that in
the USA.
By contrast, the rate of the population aged at 65 and over in Japan was the
lowest during 1940 – 2000 period, under 5%. However, it will increase
sharply/ soar in the two following decades. And the most striking feature is
that from 2020 to 2040, it will go up rapidly from 10% and reach the peak of
25%, the highest data in the graph by 2040.
250 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 26
oomm
.c.c
rrss
MODEL ANSWER 1: ttttee
aa
The table illustrates the earning rate used on 4 popular categories by/in terms
SSMM
of adults and children in the UK in 1998.
Overall, adults spent most on food whereas music was most attractive for
children.
L TT
Food was most chosen by adults, accounting for one-fourth of their revenue
L
in which women spent the majority about 40% of their budget, while it was
IIEE
least selected by children, with only 10% of their earning.
In contrast, children were the biggest consumers of electronic equipment,
music products, and video, making up 23%, 39% and 12% of their income
respectively Boys spent more money than girls on music, with 18%
compared to 5% whereas 2 remaining items were outlaid with the same
earning rate of 2 genders, with 40% for music and about 20% for videos.
However, only 5% of adults’ expense was put on electronic equipment or
music, and just 1% for videos. In particular, electronic equipment and videos
were more popular for men than women while both 2 genders allocated 5%
of their money on music.
173 words
www.zandienglish.ir

MODEL ANSWER 2:
The table compares the consumer spending of different walks of life in terms
of four categories in the UK in 1998.
Overall, the largest proportion of consumers’ spending was on music, while
videos were estimated the least. Besides, among six groups in general,
children spent most of their income on these items.
It can be seen from the table that women and adults spent significantly on
food, at approximately 40% and 25% respectively. Women, however, were
not interested in three remainder categories and were accounted for the least
percentages of those categories in consumers’ spending. Concurrently, adults
were also the lowest group in consumption expenditure, with just 5% for both
electric equipment and music.
By contrast, girls represented the highest consumer spending on music,
comprising 40%, closely followed by 39% that of children and 38% that of
boys. Similarly, children and boys accounted for the largest amounts of
consumption in electronic equipment and videos with 23% and 18%
respectively. Meanwhile, the proportion of male consumers’ spending on
music was as same level as that of women and of adults, with just 5%.
182 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 27
The graph below shows the unemployment rates in the US and Japan
between March 1993 and March 1999. Write a report for a university
lecturer describing the information shown below.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
MODEL ANSWER 1:
LLTT
The given line graph compares the percentage of the unemployed workforce
IIEE
between two nations, the US and Japan every March from 1993 to 1999.
It is clear that unemployment rates in both nations witnessed constant
variations in the given period. Yet, they experienced 2 markedly contrasting
trends namely downwards and upwards, in the US and Japan respectively.
Initially, in March of 1993, there was a large gap between the US and Japan
in the proportion of the jobless workforce. The United States had about 7% of
the labor force who were unemployed. Meanwhile, in Japan, this number was
only around 2.4 %, nearly one-third compared to the US.
In the following years, the rate of unemployed in the US underwent many
variations. Since 1993, there was a constant fall until around March of 1995,
www.zandienglish.ir

followed by a stable period at approximately 5.5%, then a continuous drop to
the bottom of just higher than 4%. In a stark contrast, the percentage of
people who could not find a job in Japan exponentially increased. From the
late of 1998 to the end of the surveyed time, this number surpassed the one of
the US and hit its peak at more than 4.5%.
200 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The line graph compares unemployment rates in the USA and Japan and how
these rates changed from March 1993 to March 1999.
Overall, the figures of the USA decreased gradually over the period of six
years, while the data of Japan had an upward trend. In addition, the
unemployment rate of the USA was higher than that of Japan in most years.
In March 1993 – March 1999 period, the USA had the highest unemployment
rate, 7% in March 1993. However, from March 1993 to March 1997, there
was a slow decrease in the USA unemployment rate, which fell to
approximately 5% in 1997s, but it always remained above 5%. Throughout
the rest of the period, this figure fluctuated around 5%.
Over the same period, the figure for Japan varied more significantly than that
of the USA. From the lowest point of the whole line, 2.5% in March 1993, it
reached to over 5% in 1998, a rise of over 2.5% in 5 years. The
unemployment rate was also higher than that of the USA in that year.
However, one year later, the unemployment rate of Japan went down slowly
and dropped to just under 5% in March 1999.
198 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 28
The line graph below shows the percentage of tourists to England who
visited four different attractions in Brighton.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
MODEL ANSWER 1:
IIEE
The line graph compares the proportion of visitors to four different tourist
attractions in Brighton from 1980 to 2010.
Overall, while the percentages of travellers to the pavilion and pier when they
went to England increased, there was a fall in the participation of the other
sites.
In 1980, although 30% of visitors to England attended the Festival, the
figures for unnecessary pavilion and art gallery were lower at around 23%
each. Meanwhile, the pier was the least popular Brighton attraction, with only
10% of tourists going to this area. 5 years later, the proportions of visitors to
www.zandienglish.ir

an art gallery, pavilion and pier rose to 38%, 28%, and 15% respectively, but
the figure for the festival fell slightly to 28%.
After the year 1985, while the percentage of travellers to England going to
the pavilion rose sharply to a peak of almost 50 % before falling considerably
to over 30% by 2010, the figure for tourists attending festival remained
relatively stable at around 28% for the rest of the period. Also, after 1985,
Brighton saw a considerable fall by 30% in the proportion of travellers to
England visiting the Art gallery in 2010. In contrast, the figure for tourists to
the pier overtook that of Art gallery in 2005, and rose slightly to over 22% in
2010.
218 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The line graph shows data on the percentage of foreigners visiting four
attractions in Brighton, England.
Overall, the figure for travellers in all 4 places fluctuated. Although the four
trends were similar in terms of a general variation, the number of tourists in
the pier was almost the smallest.
Over the 1980-1995 period, the percentage of foreigners both in the Art
Gallery and the pier varied stably. However, the figure for the Art Gallery
was always higher. Meanwhile, the proportion of people visiting the festival
decreased gradually to about 35% in 1995. In contrast, the number of visitors
in the Pavilion increased dramatically and then reached the highest point of
the whole line graph in 1995, at approximately 50%.
From 1995 to 2010, both figures for the Pavilion and the Art gallery dropped
considerably. In particular, the one for the Pavilion fell to about 30% in 2010
while the other dropped significantly to 8%, which was the lowest point of
the graph. On the contrary, it is obvious that the number of the pier's tourists
rose quite greatly to 23% at last. During that 15-year period, the festival
attracted a fairly stable number of tourists, which increased to 37% in 2000
before reaching a plateau of 27% throughout the remainder of the period.
213 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 29
The charts give information about two genres of TV programmes
watched by men and women and four different age groups in Australia.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
The given bar charts illustrate data on the proportion of TV viewers watching
reality shows and game shows in Australia, classified by gender and four age
groups.
Overall, women and people over 45 years old are more into watching both
reality shows and game shows than the other groups. Besides, male accounts
for the least percentage of reality show viewers while the 25-35-year-old
group is not as interested in game shows as others.
In particular, approximately 70% of females love reality shows while the
www.zandienglish.ir

figure for males is merely a half of the women’s number, at about 35%. By
contrast, in terms of game shows, the percentage of male viewers is mostly
the same with the figure for females, at roughly 60%.
As for the distinctive age groups, the rates of viewers aged 16-24 and people
above 45 years old remain relatively stable in both genres of TV shows, at
roundly 50% and 70%, respectively. Meanwhile, people aged 25-34 and 35-
44 pay more attention to reality shows with 60% and 68% viewers watching
reality shows respectively, compared with approximately 40% for each of age
groups watching game shows.
187 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 30
The diagrams below give information on transport and car use in
Edmonton.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
The given charts illustrate data on the percentages of different means of
transportation and purposes for using cars in Edmonton.
Overall, car and LRT (Light Rail Transit) are the most popular means of
transportation in the area whereas the majority of people use the car to
commute to work.
In particular, the proportion of commuters driving cars account for 45%,
nearly a half of the total percentage of commuters. Meanwhile, the rate of
people choosing LRT makes up 35%, which is 10% less than the figure for
www.zandienglish.ir

cars. Bus and Taxi share the same percentage of merely 10% of users.
As for the car using purpose, commuting to work becomes the primary
reason, with 55%, while 45% of city dwellers drive their cars for business
and 40% of citizens use cars to take their children to school. The proportions
of people drive for shopping and leisure activities are precisely the same, at a
negligible 15% for each reason.
158 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The pie chart illustrates data on the percentage of people using four different
kinds of transportation (Car, light rail transit, bus and taxi) in Edmonton, and
the table shows the inhabitants’ purposes for driving the automobile.
Overall, the biggest proportion of citizens in Edmonton preferred car while
bus and taxi were the least enjoyed. Additionally, people mainly used their
car to go to work.
To begin with, 45 percent of people living in Edmonton travelled by car
whereas bus and taxi were used by 10 percent of the population. Light rail
was also the second most popular form of transport chosen by 35 percent of
the citizens.
Turning to the table, the majority of residents in the region (55 percent)
needed to go to work by car as opposed to the 15 percent minority of them
using the vehicle for shopping and leisure activities. Moreover, 5 percent
fewer drivers took their kids to school than they did for business. The figures
were 40 percent and 45 percent respectively.
168 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 31
The bar chart below shows the employment of all male and female
workers by occupation in the UK in the year 2005.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
MODEL ANSWER 1:
LLTT
IIEE
The chart illustrates data about the percentages of male and female
employees by professions in the UK in 2005.
Overall, there was a significant difference between male and female in
choosing their jobs in 2005. Also, both genders had a common in elementary
occupations.
Men who worked in skilled trades, as well as process, plant and machine
operatives, accounted for a great proportion in comparison with women.
These figures were exactly 20% and over 10% for men respectively, while
women in these fields occupied only 2%. By contrast, the percentage of
females in administrative and secretarial occupations took the largest
proportion in 2005, at 22%. Personal service jobs also required much more
www.zandienglish.ir

women with nearly 15%, whereas the figures for men were slightly over 5%.
However, approximately 18% of men worked in managers and senior
officials occupations, compared to 11% of women in this area.
There was a slight difference in elementary professions for both genders with
13% for men and 12% for women. On the one hand, professional jobs
attracted more male with almost 15%, while female workers were just over
10%. On the other hand, women tend to work in associate professional and
technical as well as sales and customer service fields rather than men. These
figures are precisely 20% and 12% for women, 13% and just slightly over 5%
for men respectively.
219 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The bar chart illustrates the proportion of occupations in the UK which all
male and female employees chose to work in 2005.
It is clear from the graph that most UK women enjoyed working in the
administrative and secretarial major. In contrast, the percentage of men
choosing professional, technology and skilled occupations increased
significantly.
Over 20% of women chose administrative and secretarial, while only 5% of
men were in this major. Following this, the proportion of personal services
and sales and customer service for women were nearly 15% and about 12%
respectively. However, the figures for men were just only 2% and 5%
respectively.
Skilled trades were the most common major among men which 20% of men
worked in while just 2% of women were keen on this major. Also, both
managers and senior officials and professional accounted for the large
proportion of male employees with 17% and approximately 15%
respectively. On the other hand, for two majors, associate professional and
technical and elementary had the roughly balanced employees with both male
and female.
174 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 32
The charts below show the results of a survey of adult education. The
first chart shows the reasons why adults decide to study. The pie chart
shows how people think the costs of adult education should be shared.
Write a report for a university lecturer, describing the information shown
below. You should write at least 150 words.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar graph illustrates different educational purposes of adults and the pie
chart reveals the way the tuition is expected to be split.
Overall, interest in subject and gaining qualifications are the primary reasons
for adults went to schools. Additionally, individuals are thought to be the
most responsible for the costs of a single course.
www.zandienglish.ir

The majority of adults, around 40 percent, decided to study to achieve
degrees or to meet their enthusiasm for the subject. By contrast, the minority
of them, about 12 percent, intend for socializing or a career change.
Moreover, the figures for the other intentions namely gaining useful skills,
promotion purposes and interest in learning were relatively similar, at
approximately 20 percent.
40 percent of the costs of each course should be paid by individuals
according to the second chart, while taxpayers were expected to afford 25
percent of the fees. The remaining 35 percent of the expenses should be
undertaken by employers.
157 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The given bar chart illustrates data on the explanation for adults’ decision to
study while the pie chart compares employer, taxpayer and individual in
terms of paying the course fee.
Overall, Most adults decide to study is because of interest in subject and
qualification purpose. Of the three mentioned parties, individual have to pay
for the largest percentage of education expenditure.
Interest in subject is by far the most common reason for adults to study which
account for precisely 40% of the key reasons represented in the given chart
while those who learn because of qualification stand up for 2% less than that
proportion. On the other hand, promotion and enjoy learning share the same
figures at 20%, roughly 2% less than helpful for the job purpose. The least
common explanations are job changing and people meeting which are 12%
and 9% respectively.
People believe that they should pay 40% of the education cost which is the
largest proportion. However, they also ask taxpayer and employer to pay an
amount of 25% and 35% of the course fee correspondingly.
179 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 33
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
MODEL ANSWER 1:
SSMM
The pie charts describe the differences in expenditures according to six
LLTT
namely categories in the US and the UK.
Overall, American and British allocate nearly a half of their budgets to food
and rent. Besides, spending on the four remaining items is generally similar
IIEE
in these countries.
In the UK, rental payment constitutes the largest proportion with 30% while
Americans use just a fifth of their money for this category. On the other hand,
the percentage of expenses on food in the USA is modestly higher than that
of the UK, which accounts for 25% and 18%, respectively. In terms of books,
British spend 3% less than their counterparts in the US.
A minority of budget is equally spent on DVDs in two nations, which makes
up only 10%. Likewise, citizens of the US as well as of the UK both
distribute their money on transport and going out fairly with 15%.
152 words
www.zandienglish.ir

MODEL ANSWER 2:
The graph illustrates data on the loss of automobile in four different countries
namely Great Britain, Sweden, France and Canada from 1990 to 1999.
Overall, it can be seen that the number of stolen cars in Great Britain, France
and Canada decreased slightly while Sweden’s counterpart rose dramatically
throughout 9 years period. In addition, the figure in Great Britain was (much)
larger than the remaining countries.
In the first 4 years, the number of car thefts in France declined steadily and
get the lowest point around 7 per thousand in 1993 while the figure in Great
Britain fluctuated from nearly 17 to 20/around 19. Throughout the remainder
of the period, both trends of France and Great Britain fluctuated between 5 to
10 and 15 to 20, respectively.
From 1990 to 1993, the number of car theft in Canada was similar to France,
which decreased gradually (by 2.5) and reached the bottom at 5 per thousand
in 1993. At the same time, the number in Sweden increased slightly at
approximately 10. In the rest of the period, there was a slow increase in the
figure of Canada, which was nearly 5 thousand in 1999 while the number of
car thefts in Sweden rose significantly and hit the peak at around 14 in 1999.
212 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 34
Chorleywood is a village near London whose population has increased
steadily since the middle of the nineteenth century. The map below
shows the development of the village.
Write a report for a university lecturer describing the development of the
Village.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The map illustrates the changes of a town called Chorleywood from 1898 to
1994.
Overall, the village becomes more developed, cutting out the natural regions
while extending residential areas and providing more transport options
throughout the village.
www.zandienglish.ir

From 1868 to 1993, there was a motorway built in 1970 in order to link the
northeast of the village with the southeast while the main road from the
northwest to northeast and northwest to southwest remained the same. A
railway was built in 1909 to connect the southwest and southeast of the
village.
While the northwest area stayed steady, there were some noticeable changes
in the southwest corner during 1922 and 1970. In the centre of the map, the
Chorleywood Park and Golf course were unchanged while the area next to
the main road was transform into a developed area between 1898 and 1883.
Going straight to the south, the area around train station was grown in 1883
and 1922. Next to this area, on the south centre, a new area was built from
1922 to 1970. From 1970 to 1994, on the neighborhood area of the
motorway, it was expanded during the period of 1970 and 1994.
196 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The map shows the development of Chorleywood village from 1868 to 1994.
It is clear that the village grew up since transport infrastructure was improved
over the period shown. There were four different periods of the development
which residential areas were built up.
From 1868 to 1883, Chorley covered a small region next to the west main
road. A small population settled down next to north-south main road and
Chorleywood Park. The second period started between 1883 and 1992, the
development of village was increased after railway had been established in
1907 with Chorleywood station. The village had expanded to the larger
residential area alongside with the main road during this time.
Between 1922 and 1970, the expansion of village had been continuing with
more people living alongside with railway. After being constructed with a
motorway from north to south in 1970, the village experienced the further
development around motorway and main road intersections with a lot of
residential areas over 26 years.
163 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 35
The graphs below show the types of music albums purchased by people
in Britain according to sex and age.
Write a report for a university lecturer describing the information shown
below.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
The bar chart illustrates the percentage of people purchasing music albums in
different categories according to genders and age groups.
Overall, pop music and rock music accounted for larger numbers of listeners,
while there were fewer buyers choosing classical music in both two genders.
The proportion of male who consumed music albums was higher than
female’s ratio in all categories.
In terms of pop music and rock music, people in the age of 25 to 34 were the
major audience accounting for 25% and 35% of total customers, respectively.
Differently, the rate of elderly people was the lowest levels, at below 10%.
Old people who are more than 45 years old were the most potential customers
of classical music albums. The figure was 22%, whereas the proportion for
www.zandienglish.ir

the age group of 25 to 34 was lower, at about 15%. The other audience
groups who were young people and mid-aged people made up the smallest
percentage of buyers, at only 3% and 1%, respectively.
164 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 36
The chart below shows the changes in car ownership in Great Britain
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
MODEL ANSWER 1:
SSMM
The line chart provided shows some striking differences in the number of
cars used in Great Britain from 1961 to 2001.
LLTT
It is clear that the number of people using one car or more than two cars
increased during the period while those who have no car decreased
IIEE
considerably. In 1961, there was approximately 65% of citizens who did not
have a car to travel, about one third had one car and no one owned two or
more cars. However, the next 40 years saw a significant change in car
ownership. Percentage of people had no car dropped dramatically to nearly
35% in 2001, a decline of about 29%. In contrast, more than two cars
increased steeply to somewhere in the vicinity of 15% and then doubled to
30% in 2001.
Finally, the percentage of one car users experienced some remarkable
fluctuation. The figure went up sharply and reached a peak of 50% in 1981
before decreasing slowly during the next 20-year period. Contributions to one
car overtook those to no car and became the highest for all car ownership.
www.zandienglish.ir

180 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The line graph illustrates the differences in the proportion of car ownership in
the UK from 1961 to 2001.
Overall, more cars were purchased over the period and in 2001 the majority
of households were recorded to have one car.
In 1961, more than 60% of families in the UK did not own any car which was
followed by the figure of the one-car owner at about 35%. In this year, there
was no household who had two cars. In the next 20 years, while the number
of one-car owners increased significantly to almost a half and that percentage
of two and more cars also climbed by around 15%, no-car families saw a
considerable decrease by almost 30%.
In the rest of the period, the number of households who bought additional
cars grew sustainably to approximately 30%. On the contrary, there were
slight downward trends in the figures of one-car and no-car owners to about
42% and 30%, respectively.
159 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 37
The graph below gives information about Dubai gold sales in 2002.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
The line chart reveals data related to gold’s sales volume in Dubai in 2002.
LLTT
Overall, the sales volume fluctuated during 12 months period but the final
figure was almost equal to the beginning sales.
IIEE
In January, precisely 200 million Dirhams worth of gold was sold in Dubai
market. The figure slightly increased to approximately 225 million Dirhams
before soaring significantly and peaked at 350 million Dirhams in March.
However, the following 4 months period saw a plummet in gold sales. From
250 million Dirhams in April, the sales decreased dramatically to 150 million
Dirhams, then reached the bottom of just over 100 million Dirhams in July.
One month later, the upward trend reappeared as the sales volume was almost
double that of July. Nevertheless, a plunge in September made the gold sales
reached the bottom again. Even though there was a rise in gold sales during
the last 3 months, the figure was just below 200 million Dirhams in
December.
www.zandienglish.ir

160 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 38
The chart below gives information about birth and death rates in
Switzerland from 1970 to 2020 according to United Nations statistics.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
MODEL ANSWER 1:
LLTT
The bar chart reveals the number of births and deaths in Switzerland between
IIEE
1970 and 2020 based on United Nation’s data.
Overall, there was an increase of birth rate during the 50 years period, while
the number of deaths fluctuated.
In the 1970s, the figures for births and deaths were 1.2 and 1 million,
respectively. Ten years later, while 1.3 million deaths were recorded, the
number of births remained constant. However, the following decade saw the
birth’s figure rocketed to 1.7 million, which was 0.2 million greater
compared to the number of deaths.
During the remaining period, the number of births rose gradually whereas the
opposite trend was found on death’s figure. From 2.7 million in the 2000s,
the figure of births grew to precisely 3 million in 2010s before being
www.zandienglish.ir

forecasted to climb to 3.2 million in 2020s. In contrast, the number of deaths
decreased steadily from 1.1 million in the 2000s to 1 million in 2010s and the
predictions show that it will bottom out at 0.8 million during the last decade.
174 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The provided bar chart demonstrates actual birth and death rate of
Switzerland in each decade from 1970 to 2010. United Nations statistics also
offer estimated numbers for Switzerland in 2020.
Overall, this chart shows us the basis characteristic of Switzerland health care
system with normal birth rate and deteriorating death rate. Nevertheless, we
only see a significant superiority of birth rate after 1990.
Considered one of the wealthiest nations in the world with exceptional living
standard, we can clearly observe this fact through the continuation of
widening the gap between birth rate over death rate. However, this was not a
consistent trend. There was also an exception in 1980 where the death rate
actually surpassed the birth rate 0.1% to stand at 1.3%.
In 1970s and1990s, the gap between birth and death rate stagnated at 0.2%.
This is when the birth rate increased from 1.2% in 1970 to 1.7% in 1990, the
death rate also rose from 1.0% to 1.5%. After this point, birth rate
exponentially doubled to 2.7% in 2000 and continued this upward trend to
reach 3.0% in 2010. Meanwhile, albeit sustainable growth in the last three
decades, the death rate finally declined to 1.1% and reach its lowest point in
2010 with only 1.0%. United Nations report also anticipates that the trend
will not stop. The birth rate is expected to hit 3.2% when the death rate is
predicted to drop to 0.8% by 2020.
219 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

Legal & Disclaimer
cause of action.
book.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION
SAMPLE 1
SAMPLE 2
SAMPLE 3
SAMPLE 4
SAMPLE 5
SAMPLE 6
SAMPLE 7
SAMPLE 8
SAMPLE 9
SAMPLE 10
SAMPLE 11
SAMPLE 12
SAMPLE 13
SAMPLE 14
SAMPLE 15
SAMPLE 16
SAMPLE 17
SAMPLE 18
SAMPLE 19
SAMPLE 20
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 21
SAMPLE 22
SAMPLE 23
SAMPLE 24
SAMPLE 25
SAMPLE 26
oomm
SAMPLE 27
.c.c
SAMPLE 28
rrss
ttttee
SAMPLE 29
SAMPLE 30
SAMPLE 31
aa
SAMPLE 32
SAMPLE 33
SSMM
SAMPLE 34
SAMPLE 35
LLTT
SAMPLE 36
SAMPLE 37
SAMPLE 38
IIEE
CONCLUSION
www.zandienglish.ir

INTRODUCTION
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 1
The line graph compares the percentage of people in three countries who
used the Internet between 1999 and 2009.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
MODEL ANSWER 1:
LLTT
The line graph compares the proportion of Internet users in three American
countries, namely the USA, Canada, and Mexico, over a period of 10 years.
IIEE
Overall, it is clear that the share of these countries’ population who used the
Internet increased significantly from 1999 to 2009. Of the three countries,
Canada had the highest number of internet users over the majority of the
period shown.
In 1999, around 20% of the USA residents had access to the Internet, while
the figures for Canada and Mexico were lower, at about 10% and 5%
respectively. The Canada’s population who were able to use the Internet rose
steadily until it surpassed that of the USA in 2002, at nearly 50%. Three
years later, the two figures met again at approximately 70% but Canada
remained the country with the highest Internet users for the rest of the period.
It is noticeable that in 2009, almost all Canadian people had access to the
www.zandienglish.ir

internet, compared to 80% of the USA residents. Much lower than their
counterparts, only 40% of Mexicans fell into this category.
180 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The line graph shows the percentage of people who connected to the internet
in three different countries between 1999 and 2009.
Overall, it is clear from the graph that all the numbers of internet users
increased during the research period. In addition, the figure for Canada
experienced the most noticeable change.
In 1999, the percentage of the population using the Internet in the USA was
around 20%. Meanwhile, the figures for Canada and Mexico was much lower
at about 5% and 2% respectively. In 2005, there were dramatic rises to
approximately 75% in Canada and the USA, whereas Mexico increased
gradually to about 25%.
By 2009, the percentage/proportion of people accessing the Internet was by
far the highest in Canada with nearly 100% of Canadian Internet users. At the
same time, compared to the figure of Canada, the proportion of people using
the Internet reached a peak at about 85% in the USA and only 40% in
Mexico.
155 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 2
The chart below shows the amount spent on six consumer goods in four
European countries.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
MODEL ANSWER 1:
IIEE
The bar chart compares how much people in four European countries spent
on 6 different kinds of commodities.
Overall, British people spent by far the largest money on 6 types of consumer
goods. While money spent on different commodities in Italy, France, and
Britain varied greatly, consumers in Germany seemed to use money equally
for all kinds of goods.
In Germany, around 150 thousand pounds were spent on personal stereos,
www.zandienglish.ir

tennis racquets, perfumes, CDs, toys and photographic film. Meanwhile,
there is a significant difference among these products in Britain. In particular,
personal stereos account for the smallest amount (around 155 thousand
pounds) and photographic film was the largest section of 6 products (above
170 thousand pounds).
Italians spent just under 160 thousand pounds on toys, presenting the largest
amount of money among 6 commodities. In France, money spent on personal
stereos, perfumes, and tennis racquets were the lowest among the four
countries. In contrast, France was the second highest for photographic film
and CDs, while money used for toys was exactly the same as that in Italy.
177 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The bar chart illustrates how much money that German, Italian, French and
British people spent on different categories of consumer goods.
Overall, British people spent more money than people in 3 other countries on
all categories, while total money that German people spent was the lowest. In
addition, money was spent the most on photographic film.
The amount of money that each country used for personal stereos, tennis
racquet and perfumes categories, ranges from 145 to 160 thousand pounds.
Britain headed of the chart, followed by Italy, then Germany and France.
In contrast, people in France spent on CDs and Photographic film more than
people in Italy, by 20 thousand pounds and 40 thousand pounds respectively,
and spent the same on Toys as Italian, at around 158 thousand pounds.
Meanwhile, German consumers paid the lowest among 4 countries for CDs
and Photographic film and Toys, at around 145 thousand pounds for each. In
Britain, 170 thousand pounds was used for photographic film – which is the
highest spending in all over the chart.
172 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 3
The table below gives information about changes in modes of travel in
England between 1985 and 2000.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
MODEL ANSWER 1:
LLTT
The given table compares annual average traveled distance per person among
various means of transport in England between 1985 and 2000.
IIEE
Overall, it can be seen that while private cars were the most popular transport
vehicle, taxi and long distance bus remained the least common way to travel
for English citizens.
In 1985, each car driver traveled almost 3,200 miles in average. The figure
was even higher after 15 years, reaching over 4,800 miles in 2000, an
increase of nearly 50% during the period shown. In contrast, every taxi driver
only traveled an average of 13 miles in 1985, much lower than that of car
drivers. Although taxi-traveling distance tripled in 2000 at 42 miles per
person, its number still accounted for the lowest use compared to other means
of transport.
Average distance traveled by long-distance buses experienced a doubled
www.zandienglish.ir

increase from 54 miles in 1985 to 124 miles in 2000. Local bus and train
were the second most common way to transport with their average distance
per individual of 274 miles and 366 miles in 2000 respectively.
178 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The table illustrates changes in travelling methods in England from 1985 to
2000.
Overall, travelling by car was a preferable way of English people over a 15-
year period. In addition, the yearly distance each person travelled by all
modes of transportation increased dramatically over the time.
While a person in 1985 travelled 3,199 miles by car, that number in 2000 was
4,806 miles. The number of miles travelled by long distance bus over
doubled, from 54 miles in 1985 to 124 miles in 2000. While an individual
only used a taxi to go for 13 miles in the past, that number nearly tripled to
42 miles at the end of the period. Train and other transportations also became
more frequently used as the distance a person travelled by them per year
increased by 77 and 135 miles respectively.
By contrast, using local buses saw a downward trend as the number of miles
a man travelled annually by them decreased from 429 to 274 miles.
Additionally, the England saw a similar trend for going on foot and using a
bicycle during this period, as they both declined slightly by 18 and 10 miles
respectively.
193 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 4
The diagram below shows the typical stages of consumer goods
manufacturing, including the process by which information is fed back
to earlier stages to enable adjustment.
Write a report for a university lecturer describing the process shown.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
The flow chart illustrates data on how consumer goods are produced and how
feedbacks influence to manufacture.
www.zandienglish.ir

Overall, the first part of diagram provides how there are 9 stages for
producing. The second part describes 7 steps for information feedbacks in
which producers know how to suitably adjust their products for the market.
In the first part of the chart, beginning with preparing raw materials and
manufactured components in storage. Before consumer goods are assembled,
the producer has to plan their production in considering their design. After
products are inspected and tested to ensure the quality of finished goods, they
are packaged and dispatched to stores where products are sold to customers.
In the second part of the diagram, beginning with the ending of the first part
that is sale stage. Market research department receives information feedbacks
from the market and then decides how to advertise, package and design
products more suitably for customers. There are also 2 parties in the first part
that influence to design is product research and testing. On the other hand,
Sales of products also influence to plan production and, as a result, the
number of raw materials and produced components in storage.
198 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 5
The maps below show how the town of Harborne changes from 1936 to
2007. Summarize the information by selecting and reporting the main
features, and make comparisons where relevant.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
The diagrams give information about the development of the Harborne town
M
S M
Overall, the town underwent a sea change. Some of the natural beauty was
S
cut out while the residential area was extended and provided more options for
entertainment.
LLTT
From 1936 to 2007, the number of trees standing in the northwest decreased
IIEE
considerably. The area surrounding the river was developed into a residential
area in the northeast of the city.
In the center of the town, people built a new shopping center while post
office, bank, and library still remained. The sweet shop and butchers were
replaced with a supermarket. Across from the post office, the flower shop
was demolished to make way for a travel agent. The cycle path in the
southwest was redesigned as a road. In the southeast corner, a museum was
constructed right on the site where the government offices used to be and the
farmland was turned into a golf course.
159 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 6
The graph below gives information from a 2008 report about
consumption of energy in the USA since 1980 with projections until 2030.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The chart compares the amount of 6 different kinds of energy consumed in
the USA since 1980 followed by a prediction until 2030.
Overall, the amount of petrol and oil used was most preferred through 50
years while hydropower was the last option. In addition, while the amounts of
petrol and oil, coal and natural gas increase, that of nuclear solar and
hydropower fluctuate slightly.
The figure for petrol and oil dropped to 30 quadrillion units in 1985. It
increased significantly from 1985 to 2015 and is anticipated to reach a peak
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
at over 50 quadrillion units in 2030. Similarly, there was a drop of
approximately 3 quadrillion units in the amount natural gas consumed in
1985. This figure is predicted to remain at 24 quadrillions in 2030, compared
to a dramatic rise by 15 quadrillions in the figure for coal.
On the other hand, the amounts of nuclear, solar and hydropower consumed
were about 4 quadrillion units in 1980. However, nuclear and solar are
oomm
forecasted to reach 6 and 5 quadrillion respectively until 2030 while
hydropower fluctuated from 1980 to 2015 and is expected to stabilize at 3
quadrillion units in 2030.
.c.c
ss
193 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
rr
ttttee
The line graph below illustrates the changes in energy consumption in the US
since the 1980s and the prediction until 2030.
aa
It is clear that the use of fossil fuel is much higher than renewable energy
MM
consumption. In the future, although renewable energy needs to be prioritized
above fossil fuel, it is predicted that the consumption tendency will not
change.
SS
LLTT
From 1980 to 2008, all sorts of energy tended to fluctuate slightly, although
the quantities were not the same. In terms of fossil fuel, the lines went up and
down but all ended up at higher points than it used to be. For instance, petrol
IIEE
and oil, coal and natural gas increased about 5 to 10 quadrillion units until
2008. In the same period, renewable energy such as nuclear, solar and wind
energy, hydropower varied slightly around 5 quadrillion units.
In projection to 2030, the overall tendency will remain. Petrol and oil, coal,
which represent fossil fuel, keeps going up considerably. Along with that
trend, nuclear, solar and wind energy in terms of renewable ones seem to rise
a bit. By contrast, natural gas and hydropower are predicted not to change at
all.
193 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 7
The bar chart shows different methods of waste disposal in four cities;
Toronto, Madrid, Kuala Lumpur and Amman.
Summarize the information by describing the main features of the chart and
making comparisons where appropriate.
Source: http://www.ielts-mentor.com/writing-sample/academic-writing-task-
1/1003-academic-ielts-writing-task-1-sample-69-different-methods-of-waste-
disposal-in-four-cities
The bar chart given illustrates various ways of disposing of waste including
Landfill, Incineration, Recycling, and Compositing in four cities.
As can be seen from the chart, Landfill was the most popular method of
waste disposal used in Toronto and Amman, while other cities chose
Incineration as the most effective solution for disposing of waste.
In particular, Landfill disposed of about 75 percent and 50 percent of total
waste in Toronto and Amman respectively. Meanwhile, the figures for
Madrid and Kuala Lumpur were approximately 30 percent and 17 percent
respectively. Besides, Kuala Lumpur and Madrid had the biggest proportion
of total waste disposed by Incineration, followed by Amman and Toronto.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
By comparison, Madrid and Kuala Lumpur had the largest percentage of total
waste solved by a method called Recycling with their figures being above 2
times higher than those of others. In addition, being lower than Madrid,
Toronto surpassed Kuala Lumpur and Amman in the proportion of total
waste handled by Compositing. Interestingly, Compositing was the least
popular among 4 methods of waste disposal in all cities given.
178 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 8
The chart below shows the number of travelers using three major
airports in New York City between 1995 and 2000.
Summaries the information by selecting and reporting the main features, and
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart gives information about the number of visitors who chose three
main New York City’s airports, including John F. Kennedy, LaGuardia, and
Newark from 1995 to 2000.
It is clear that LaGuardia attracted more travelers than the two other
counterparts over five years. Furthermore, while both LaGuardia and Newark
experienced a noticeable increase, the number of tourists preferring John F.
Kennedy fluctuated over the same period.
In 1995, the number of passengers travelling by LaGuardia was about 35
million, whereas the figure for Newark was significantly lower, at around 15
million. These two numbers then kept going up to 50 million and over 40
million in 1998 respectively. From 1999 to 2000, the figure for Newark
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
remained unchanged for the next two years; however, the number of travelers
used LaGuardia continued to climb, reaching its highest point of nearly 70
million.
In contrast, approximately 25 million people used John F. Kennedy to travel
in 1995. The number of visitors then increased remarkably for the next two
year, reaching over 45 million in 1994. After that, this airport witnessed a
194 words
oomm
slight decrease from 1997 to 1999 after growing to 45 million in 2000.
MODEL ANSWER 2:
.c.c
rrss
The bar chart illustrates the figure for passengers (in million) flows in three
ttttee
main airports in New York from 1995 to 2000.
Overall, the number of travelers using New York airports increased rapidly
aa
during the period of five years. Also, over the period except for the year
1997, LaGuardia exceeded the other two airports in terms of the total number
of travelers.
SSMM
In 1995, approximately 35 million passengers used airplanes services at
LaGuardia airport. After that, the figure went up consistently over the years.
LLTT
LaGuardia accommodated roughly 70 million visitors in 2000, outnumbered
its competitors with a difference of around 30 million.
IIEE
On the other hand, in 1995, Newark airport and John F. Kennedy served
about 20 million and nearly 30 million people respectively. However, in
1997, John F. Kennedy airport surpassed LaGuardia with roughly 50 million
passengers, then there was a gradual decrease, following by a recovery three
years later. The figure for Newark airport remained steady from 1998 to
2000, at around 40 million.
166 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 9
The bar graph indicates sales figures for reading materials from 2002 to
2012.
Write a report to a university lecturer describing the information shown
below.
The bar chart given illustrates the sales of four different kinds of the book
including Hobbies books, Entertainment books, History books, and Art books
over a 10-year period.
Overall, there was a downward trend in the sales of Hobbies books, while an
upward trend was observed in those of other kinds in the period shown. In
addition, History books were by far the best – selling type among them.
In 2002, the sale of History books was highest, at nearly 4,500 copies.
Meanwhile, the figures for Art books and Entertainment books were lower, at
approximately 1,500 copies and slightly over 1,000 copies respectively.
Hobbies books had the lowest sale figure, at only 500 copies. Then, 2004
experienced an insignificant increase by about 500 copies in the sales of all
four types of books.
In 2008, the sale of History books rose remarkably to reach the highest point
of exactly 10,000 copies, while the figures for Art books and History books
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
were equal, at exactly 3,000 copies, compared to about 200 copies of Hobbies
books. In 2012, the sale of Hobbies books declined slightly to around 300
copies, while the figures for the remaining kinds witnessed a modest increase
in comparison with those in 2010.
203 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 10
The bar chart provides data on the number of births given per woman in 6
Gulf countries in 2 separate years 1990 and 2000.
Overall, it can be seen that Oman and S. Arabia had the highest fertility rates
in both 2 years. The average birth rate per woman in 2000 was relatively
lower than that in 1990 for all 6 countries.
The fertility rate of Oman was about 7 births per woman in 1990. The figure
for S. Arabia was slightly lower, but still much higher than the other
countries in the same year. While the rates for Bahrain and Kuwait were
recorded at around 3 children per woman, the number for UAE and Qatar
reached approximately 4.
Moving further, the fertility rates of Oman and S. Arabia fairly declined to
over 5 births given by a woman in 2000, a fall of around 30% compared to
those in 1990. Other countries witnessed only a minor drop in the number of
children given birth by one woman in 2000. The figure for Bahrain decreased
from over 3 to 2 births per woman in 2000, while UAE dropped from 4 to 3
within the same period of time.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
198 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 11
The bar chart below shows the percentage of adults of different age
groups in the UK who used the Internet every day from 2003-2006.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart compared the five different age groups of people who accessed
the internet on daily basis in the UK between 2003 and 2006.
It is clear that 16-27 age group in the UK accounted for the highest points of
the whole graph over the four-year period. Also, aged 25-44 and 55-64 saw
the largest rises in Internet users over the same period.
In 2003, the percentage of people from 16-24 age groups was exactly 80%,
compared to precisely 50% of people aged 25-44. The figures for the
youngest group and aged 25-44 saw only a small increase of a full 10%. In
2006, people accessing the internet from aged 16-24 were by far the highest
in terms of users in the UK, and the second one was the older age group, 25-
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
44 age group.
The proportion of Internet users gaining access from three other age groups,
45-54, 55-64, 65 and over saw a relatively small rise in users between 2003
and 2004 in the UK. In 2005, these age groups used exactly 50%, 40%, and
approximately 15% respectively. In2006, the figure for aged 45-54 reached
nearly 55%, while 55-to 64-years-old age groups’ users figures increased
65-years-old and over.

oomm
dramatically and the percentage of the oldest age group fluctuated slightly,
211 words
.c.c
MODEL ANSWER 2:
rrss
ttttee
The diagram highlights the proportion of adult internet users divided into 5
age groups over a 4-year period starting from 2003.
aa
As can be seen from the chart, the 16-24 age group was the most popular
internet users whereas the oldest group was the least during the mentioned
decreases with age.
SSMM
period. In addition, it is evident that the use of internet on a daily basis
The internet usage rate of people aged 16-24 stood at 80% in 2003, nearly
LLTT
doubling that of the 25-44 and 45-54 age groups, is far higher than those of
remaining 2 groups. It stayed unchanged in 2004, then significantly rose by
10% in 2005, but later minimally declined by 5% in 2006.
IIEE
Whereas, the 4 years period saw noticeable growth from 50% to 80% in the
25-44 age group. The similar trend was shown in the group of people from 55
to 64, with the rise from 30% to 50%. Meanwhile, the figure for people aged
45-54 years old experienced a leap from approximately 45% to 60% in the
first 2 years, followed by a remarkable reduction of 10% in the next year
before a recovery to about 55% in the last year. The proportion of the elderly
having internet connection every day was recorded from 2004 with a gradual
climb of 5% in 2005, followed by a minimal decline to the same as the
beginning, being the lowest value among the 5 groups.
240 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 12
The graph shows oil production capacity for several Gulf countries
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart compares the amount of oil produced in different nations
during a two-decade period.
Overall, Saudi Arabia had the highest level of oil production in the given
period while the lowest amount of oil was produced in Qatar.
In 1990, almost 9 million barrels per day of oil was produced in Saudi
Arabia. The figure then slightly increased in 2000 and reached a peak of
nearly 15 million barrels per day after ten years. In contrast, Qatar had the
lowest figure for oil production. Despite a slight increase in 2000, oil
production in Qatar remained unchanged at less than 1 million barrels per
day.
The oil production in Iran, Iraq Kuwait and UAE slightly looked the same.
The estimated figure for Iran was over 3 million barrels per day in 1990,
compared to around 2 million barrels per day in other three countries. Among
four countries, Iran witnessed the highest amount of oil production during
two decades with a peak of over 4 million barrels per day in 2010, slightly
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
higher than the figure s for the rest, at around under 4 million barrels per day.
188 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The given bar chart compares oil production among 6 Gulf countries during a
period of 20 years from 1990 and 2000.
oomm
Overall, it can be seen that A. Saudi produced the highest number of oil
barrels in every single year over the given period than any other countries. In
.c.c
contrast, oil production of Qatar remained lowest.
rrss
As shown in the chart, over 8 millions of oil barrels were produced by A.
Saudi per day in 1990, almost 3-time higher than the second most oil-
ttttee
produced country – Iran – in the same year. Its production then dramatically
increased to over 14 million at the end of the period, a rise of over 80%
aa
within 20 years.
On the other hand, Qatar produced only 0.5 million of oil barrels per day in
SSMM
1990, and it remained constant throughout the years. Other countries, namely
Iran, Iraq, Kuwait, and UAE experienced a slight growth rate of oil
production, reaching nearly 4 million barrels per day in 2000 compared with
168 words
LLTT
around 2 million in 1990.
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 13
The chart shows components of GDP in the UK from 1992 to 2000.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The given bar chart illustrates the percentage of gross domestic product
(GDP) of IT and service industry in the UK between 1992 and 2000.
Overall, the GDP saw a gradual increase in both industries over the period of
8 years. Another visible trend is that the percentage of IT industry was
always higher than that of the service industry.
In 1992, the GDP of IT industry started at above 6% of the total GDP, while
the figure for service industry was precisely 4%. Both of these percentages
increased gradually to more than 8% for IT and about 6% for another
industry after 2 years. However, in 1996, the proportion of service GDP
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
continued to increase up to 7%, but there was a slight decline in the
proportion of IT, going down to under 8%.
Between 1998 and 2000, the percentage of GDP in service industry rose
slightly from 7.5% to 8%. Meanwhile, there was a surge in GDP of IT
industry, up to 12% in 1998, and it continued to increase to approximately
15% for the last year of the period.
181 words
oomm
MODEL ANSWER 2:
.c.c
ss
The bar charts illustrate the effect of gross domestic product from IT and
rr
service industry to GDP in the UK from 1992 to 2000.
ttttee
Overall, the percentage of IT and service industry increased steadily and it
can be seen that IT industry remained at a higher rate than service industry
aa
throughout this time surveyed.
In 1992, the revenue generated from IT industry and service Industry was 6%
SSMM
and 4% respectively. In next two years, the figure for both sectors rose up
approximately 2%. Moreover, there was a downward trend of IT industry in
1996, at under 8%, but it still remained higher than the service industry. In
up slightly to 6.5%.
LLTT
contrast, the contribution of Service Industry in UK’s GDP continually went
IIEE
Subsequently, it is clear that there is a sharp increase in IT industry from
1998 to 2000. It jumped up nearly double from 8% to over 14% in 2000.
Besides, the service industry still rose from over 6.5% to 8% during four
years. In last four year of this period, not only the percentage of components
of UK’s GDP was twice that in the first year of the period, but also the rate of
IT was double to the service industry.
203 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 14
The charts below show what UK graduate and postgraduate students
who did not go into full-time work did after leaving college in 2008.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The two bar charts illustrate working condition of the students who graduated
and postgraduated in the UK in 2008 including four categories: part-time
work, voluntary work, further study, and unemployment.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Overall, in two charts, the largest majority of students tended to study higher
while the smallest number of them chose voluntary jobs after graduation and
post graduation.
Obviously, in terms of UK graduates, further study was the best choice, in
favor of approximately 30 000 students, while just 3500 graduates applied for
a voluntary work, a difference of nearly 26 500 people. Part-time job and
students, respectively.
oomm
unemployment accounted for the similar number, at 17 735 and 16 235
.c.c
According to postgraduates in the UK, they were into part-time work and
ss
further study as the next step, with around 2500 students for each section.
rr
The figure for postgraduate students who could not find a job was about
ttttee
1600, which was almost four times when compared to the number of students
choosing a voluntary job, with below 350 selections.
168 words
MODEL ANSWER 2: aa
SSMM
The bar charts give information about options UK graduates and
postgraduates chose apart from full -time work after they left their colleges in
the year 2008.
LLTT
Overall, the number of graduate students who did not work full-time was far
higher than that of postgraduate ones in the UK. Among four different
IIEE
destinations given, further study attracted the largest number of students.
To specify, nearly 30,000 graduates pursued higher education and this figure
was over 10 times as high as that of postgraduates with only around 2,700
students. Part-time work category constituted the second largest share of total
numbers with 17,735 graduates and 2,535 postgraduates respectively.
The number of unemployed graduates was nearly half that of those
continuing their further education, standing at 16,235 students, while the
figure for postgraduates who were out of job followed the similar pattern.
Although voluntary work was the least popular for two types of college
leavers shown, the former had approximately ten times more people than the
latter.
www.zandienglish.ir

164 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 15
The pie charts below show the online shopping sales for retail sectors in
New Zealand in 2003 and 2013.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
MODEL ANSWER 1: aa
SSMM
The two charts depict the ratio of sales in terms of purchasing on the Internet
in four primary fields involving travelling, books, clothes and movies/ music
TT
in New Zealand over a period of 10 years, from 2003 to 2013.
LL
The overall picture presented by the diagrams is that there was a slight
downward trend in the online sales proportion of travel and costumes. In
IIEE
contrast, New Zealand witnessed a significant upward trend in that of books
and music in the mentioned decade.
As is illustrated, in the year 2003, the sales percentage of travel coupons sold
via social network within New Zealand accounted for approximately 36%
which was the majority rate in the total site as well as the highest ratio
compared to other fields over the period surveyed. Subsequently, there was a
second highest sales proportion of buying clothing on the Internet made up
roughly 24 %, followed by the fewer sales portion of films which constituted
just 21%. Whereas, New Zealand saw a low/small figure for book
purchasing, only 19%.
Interestingly, New Zealand experienced a considerable fall in the online sales
www.zandienglish.ir

rate of store chains running a business in travelling, decreasing to roughly
29% by the year 2013. Similarly, in terms of costume, the figure sharply went
down to 16% over the period covered by the charts. On the contrary, there
was a remarkable rise in sales proportion of movies and books business of
online retail systems between 2003 and 2013, constituted about 33% and
approximately 22% respectively.
220 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The pie charts compare the differences among four sectors of retail in New
Zealand in 2 years 2003 and 2013.
Overall, while travel and clothes sectors proportions were downward, the
percentages of film and books inversely increased. In addition, travel and
film were the largest parts among four sectors in both years surveyed.
On the one hand, the travel sector accounted for the largest percentage of
36% in 2003 followed by 24%, 21% and 19% of clothes, film, and books
respectively. In addition, the proportion of travel decreased to 29% in 2013 in
comparison with books proportion which by contrast, increased to 22% in the
same period.
On the other hand, film and music sector became significant and occupied for
33% in 2013; thus, this sector made up for the largest proportion at that time
which was 4% more than that of travel and 11% more than book percentage.
The proportion for clothes inversely plunged by 8% which was in the most
minority in 2013 with only 16%.
168 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 16
The pie chart shows the amount of money that a children's charity
located in the USA spent and received in one year.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
MODEL ANSWER 1:
LLTT
IIEE
The pie charts compare the amount of revenue and expenditures of a
children’s charity in the USA over a year period.
It is noticeable that spending on program services accounts for the majority
of expenses while donated food makes up the most income. In addition, the
total money of both categories is quite similar.
Most of the revenue for the charity depends on donated food with up to 86.6
%. Community contributions, which account for 10.4 % of the total income,
is the second largest percentage. The proportions of money getting from
investment income and government grants are exactly the same, at 0.2 %.
With regard to expenditure, the largest expense goes to program services with
95.8 %. In contrast, the figures for the remaining two categories namely
www.zandienglish.ir

fundraising and management and general are much lower than that
percentage, at 2.6% and 1.6% respectively. The total amount of income is
53,561,580$ which is just enough to cover the expenditures of 53,224,896$.
161 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The chart given illustrates how the fund of charity for children was raised and
used in America over a year.
Overall, the number of revenue sources and expenditures had a slight
discrepancy, in which there were no expenses to be exceeded. In addition,
food constituted the prevailing role in generating income for the US donation
entity and people spent the most money on program services for charity
operation.
In terms of revenue resources, donated food contributed 86.6% in the total
amount of $53.561.58, which was the highest proportion over the reported
time. Standing for the second position was community contributions, at
10.4%. In addition, the remaining resources just accounted for an
insignificant amount, at 2.2%, 0.2% and 0.2% for program revenue,
investment income, and government grants respectively.
In the same period, the USA saw $53,224,896 of expenditure in charity fund.
Program services were the category spent the most, at 95.8% in total. In
contrast, only 2.6% of the money was spent for raising the fund and the
percentage for management and the general was at 1.6%.
176 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 17
The table shows the Proportions of Pupils Attending Four Secondary
School Types Between 2000 and 2009.
mm
Source: http://www.ieltsbuddy.com/task-1-table.html
oo
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
MODEL ANSWER 1:
SSMM
LLTT
The table illustrates data on the percentage of children taking part in four
kinds of Secondary School From 2000 to 2009.
IIEE
Overall, the proportion of Pupils on Voluntary-controlled Schools tended to
decrease while the figure for Community Schools increased.
In 2000, the figure for Voluntary-controlled Schools was the highest in
comparison with the remaining categories with 52%. However, for the next
nine years, this proportion decreased dramatically and it just accounted for
20% in 2009. At the same period, the proportion of Grammar Schools in
2009 was 12% less than its proportion in 2000. The percentage of Specialist
Schools slightly decreased from 12% to 10% during nine years.
By contrast, the percentage of Community Schools started with the lowest
figure with 12%. It then grew up surprisingly in the next nine years, reached
to 32% in 2005 and at the end of the period, this proportion was by far larger
than the remaining categories with 58%.
www.zandienglish.ir

156 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The table compares the figures for secondary pupils in terms of the schools
they participated in from 2000 to 2009.
Overall, voluntary-controlled schools used to be the most attractive selection
but were later replaced by community schools.
To be more specific, voluntary-controlled schools was a dominant sector in
2000 with 52% of pupils enrolled. At the same time, just around half of the
students surveyed selected grammar schools, at 24%. The remaining pupils
were shared equally to Specialist Schools and Community Schools, exactly a
half of Grammar Schools enrollment rate.
The period of 2005 and 2009 experienced a drop in the number of students
registered in three school types, except for Community Schools. More
specifically, while there was a downward trend in Voluntary-controlled
Schools’ rate by 4% after the first five years and 18% in the next five years,
the figure for community schools uplifted by almost 5 times, achieving 58%
in 2009. Grammar Schools’ and Specialist Schools’ figures showed their less
attractiveness to pupils with a decline by half and one fifth respectively
during that decade.
177 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 18
The graph below shows the quantities of goods transported in the UK
between 1974 and 2002 by four different modes of transport.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
MODEL ANSWER 1:
LLTT
IIEE
The line graph compares the number of goods carried by four forms of
transport, namely road, water, rail, and pipeline, in the UK from 1974 to
2002.
It is clear that the quantity of goods transported by pipeline was by far the
lowest figure during the research period. By contrast, the figure for road
transportation was always the highest figure.
In 1974, the number of products delivered by all means of transport on road
was highest, at about 70 million tonnes, while the figure for pipeline transport
was significantly lower, at around 5 million tonnes. At the same time, trains
and ships carried the similar amount of freight, at around 40 million tonnes.
From 1974 to 2002, the quantity of goods delivered by road, water and
www.zandienglish.ir

pipeline transportation experienced gradual increases to nearly 100 million
tonnes, approximately 65 million tonnes and just over 20 million tonnes
respectively. Meanwhile, the figure for rail transport rose slightly to more
than 40 million tonnes of goods, after plunging to nearly 30 million tonnes of
goods in 1995.
174 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The line graph illustrates the number of goods which is conveyed by four
types of transport in the UK from 1974 to 2002.
From an overall perspective, the quantity of goods transported had a
generally upward trend. In addition, the road was by far the most common
kind of transport used in the UK over the period of 28 years.
It can be seen from the graph that there was a gradual rise in the number of
goods from 1974 to 1995 and then a stability (23 million tonnes) from 1995
onwards. By contrast, the quantity of goods conveyed by rail declined from
40 million tonnes in 1974 to about 30 million tonnes by 1985. This figure
then slightly went up and down before reaching the lowest point at
approximately 28 million tonnes in 1995. However, it sharply rose to nearly
42 million tonnes in the year 2002.
Over the same period, the quantities of goods transported by water and road
varied more significantly. From 1974 to 1992, the figure for water increased
with various rate to nearly 60 million tonnes while that of road reached a high
point at 82 million tonnes after fluctuating in a narrow range. Throughout the
remainder of the period, the number of goods conveyed by water and road
saw a gradual decrease and then a dramatic increase to about 65 and 98
million tonnes respectively.
219 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 19
The chart below shows the number of visitors to Victoria Park, Botanical
Garden and Sandown Zoo from 2000 to 2008.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
MODEL ANSWER 1:
SSMM
LLTT
The line graph presents information about the number of people visiting three
different locations during a period of eight years
IIEE
Overall, the number of visitors to Sandown Zoo and Victoria Park increased
while there was a decline in the figures for Botanical Gardens.
In 2000, 60,000 people visited Sandown Zoo, followed by that of Botanical
Gardens (approximately 50,000) and Victoria Park (nearly 30,000). After a
decrease of 10,000 from 60,000 to 50,000 in the next two years, the number
of visitors to Sandown Zoo gradually increased and reached a peak of
100,000 in 2008 due to the opening of children’s zoo in 2007. Together with
the establishment of Boating Lake in 2005, Victoria Park also witnessed a
slight climb in the number of visitors before soaring to almost 50,000 in
2007.
In contrast, despite the opening of a restaurant, the number of visitors to
www.zandienglish.ir

Botanical Gardens slowly climbed and peaked at almost 70,000 in 2003 then
the figures plunged by nearly two thirds after a five year period.
168 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The line graph below illustrates changes in the figures for visitors to 3 types
of places between 2000 and 2008.
Overall, there was a decline in the number of visitors to botanical gardens.
While the Sandown zoo and Victoria Park’s numbers increased, the figure for
Sandown zoo was always higher than that of Victoria Park.
In the 2000-2002 period, the visitors coming to Botanical Garden increased
slightly to 50.000 in 2002. In 2003, the figure increased significantly to
approximately 62.000, which was highest during the 8-year period.
Throughout the remainder of the period, the botanical garden’s number
decreased gradually, which fell to 42.000 by the year 2008.
Over the same period, the Sandown zoo’s visitors decreased rapidly to below
50.000, while the number of Victoria Park always remained above 20.000 in
2002. Between 2002 and 2007, the visitors to both of the places always
increased, at around 70.000 to Sandown zoo and about 42.000 to Victoria
Park, in 2007. For the final year in question, the Sandown Zoo drew 100,000
visitors, the highest figure among the 3 places. Meanwhile, the number of
visitors to Victoria Park fell to 40.000 in 2008.
191 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 20
The line graph shows the sales of children’s books, adult’s fictions and
educational books between 2002 and 2006 in one country.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
MODEL ANSWER 1:
LLTT
IIEE
The chart illustrates the revenue/income of three different types of books
from 2002 to 2006 in one nation.
Overall, while the sales of children’s books and educational books rose
during the 5 year period, the figure for adults’ fictions decreased. Also,
children’s books accounted for the highest sale over the period shown.
In 2002, the sale of adults’ fictions was the highest which is twice higher than
that of educational books, at exactly 45 million dollars. By contrast, the
figure for educational books was at the lowest point of accurately 25 million
dollars. Approximately 33 million dollars came from the sale of children’s
books in this year.
www.zandienglish.ir

The sale of adults’ fictions dip to 37 million dollars in 2003, then it fell
gradually until the end of the period, at 30 million dollars after a slight
increase in 2004. Furthermore, while kids’ books saw a gradual growth in the
sale, standing at roughly 57% in 2006 the sale of educational books
fluctuated and finally reached around 33 million dollars at the end of the
period.
175 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The line graph compared figures for three different types of books in terms of
sales from 2002 to 2006.
Overall, the number of Children’s books increased over a period of 5 years,
while the figures for sales in Adults’ fiction and Educational book decreased
and fluctuated respectively. From 2003 to 2006, the purchase of children’s
book was higher than the other trends.
In 2002, the sales from Adults’ fiction were sold by exactly 45 million
dollars, while the figures for Children’s book and Educational book were
around 33 million and approximately 25 million dollars respectively. Just
almost one year later, children’s books’ sales overtook Adult’s fictions’ sales
and became the best -selling book among three types. From 2002 to 2004,
there was a rise in children’s book sales, whereas the figures for the other
trends fluctuated.
The purchase of children’s book rose steadily to around 47 million dollars
and then increased suddenly to a peak of roughly 56 million dollars in
2006.The sales for Adults’ fiction saw the biggest decline of approximately
10 million dollars from 2004 to 2006. The amount of Educational book
revenue rapidly rose to about 33 million dollars, and ranking the second best-
selling book.
198 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 21
The line graph below gives information about the number of visitors to
three London museums between June and September 2013.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
MODEL ANSWER 1:
LLTT
IIEE
The line graph compares the number of people who visited three types of
museum each month in summer, 2013
Overall, the number of visitors to British Museum and Science Museum
increased slightly while there was a small decline in the number of people
visiting Natural History Museum. Most of the visitors preferred to go to
British Museum rather than visit other museums.
It can be clearly seen that in June, the number of visitors to British Museum
was at exactly 600,000, the highest point in three types of museum. In July, it
reached a peak of about 750,000, but then dropped significantly to 500,000 in
August and then to approximately 650,000 in September
www.zandienglish.ir

In June, the two figures for visitors to Science Museum and Natural History
Museum were lower than that of British Museum at 400,000 and about
500,000, respectively. From June to September, the number of people visiting
Science Museum and Natural History Museum had the same change. They
decreased gradually between June and August then went up slowly from
August to September. The figure for visitors to Natural History Museum was
at about 450,000 in September, slightly higher than that of Science Museum,
at roughly 440,000.
198 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The graph illustrates the figures (in thousands) for guests visiting three
museums in London during summer months in 2013.
Overall, the number of museumgoers varied during four months. In the first
two months and early August, this figure fluctuated, while throughout the
remainder of the period there was a slight increase.
British Museum outnumbered in terms of visitors. From June to July the
number of tourists increased quickly to approximately 800 thousand.
However, the period after late July witnessed a fall, and even though there
was a recovery, the number of visitors reached less than 700 thousand
people.
On the other hand, the trend of Science and Natural History Museum was
quite similar. The figures for tourists in both museums declined slowly in
June and July. After that, there was a stagnant as the figure for people visiting
National History and Science Museum was about 400 thousand and 300
thousand respectively. In the last two months, the numbers rose to roughly
500 thousand; however, that of Natural History Museum was slightly higher.
172 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 22
Below is a map of the city of Brandfield. City planners have decided to
build a new shopping mall for the area, and two sites, S1 and S2 have
been proposed.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The map illustrates the plan of a newly constructed shopping center as well as
the adjacent areas.
Overall, the city center is situated at the heart of the map and adjacent to two
Estates and park project.
More specifically, at the central part of the area, the city center is surrounded
www.zandienglish.ir

by the railway connected sites from Northern West to Southern East and the
main road from Northern East downside. This center is separated into two
parts by the river streaming from Northern East to Southern West.
On the Northern part of the river, a Golf Course and park is expected to be
built on the left side of the City Center while the Housing Estate will be
constructed in the Northern area. On the Southern part of the river, an
Industrial Estate is planned to be located next to the Railway where there is a
pathway which connects the main road with outside area right in front of it.
160 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The map shows two proposals for the new construction of a shopping mall in
a town named Brandfield.
Overall, it can clearly be seen that while the first proposal (labeled as S1 in
the map) recommends the shopping mall to be placed between the housing
estate and city center areas, its alternative option, namely S2 is suggested to
locate to the South East/ in the South East/ on the South East edge of
Brandfield.
According to the map, it is noticeable that both S1 and S2 are quite close to
major roads and a railway that runs across the town. However, S1 is designed
to attract more potential shoppers from the residential area of the town,
whereas S2 is a railway away from the industrial zone, which might promise
possible purchases and traffic from the factory workers.
Another significant feature of the map is that it takes double distance to get
from S2 to Brandfield city centre compared to S1. With regards to nature and
recreational activities, S1 overlooks a river and a large golf course and park
which occupies most of the land to/in the east end of Brandfield.
190 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 23
The pie charts show the electricity generated in Germany and France
from all sources and renewables in the year 2009.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
MODEL ANSWER 1:
IIEE
The pie charts illustrate the generation of electricity in two European
countries including Germany and France from many kinds of resources in
2009.
Overall, as can be seen from the charts, the total electricity generated in
Germany surpassed that in France.
In particular, Conventional Thermal played the most important part in the
production of electricity in Germany, accounting for just under three out of
www.zandienglish.ir

five, followed by Nuclear (23%) and Renewables (17.4%). In contrast,
Nuclear was the most essential part in making electricity in France,
accounting for 76%, and other parts had smaller figures, which ranged from
about a mere 10% to nearly 14%.
Going to the details of Renewables, while Germany’s electricity generation
relied mainly on Biomass (39.3%), Hydroelectric (80.5%) was the main
source to generate electricity in France. In addition, Wind ranked the second
in the renewable electricity in both nations and Solar amounted to a minority
in the renewable electricity. Interestingly, Geothermal was not used to
produce renewable electricity in both given countries.
166 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The pie charts compare the amount of electricity produced from all sources
and renewables in Germany and France in 2009.
Overall, the adverse trends of electricity generation from the traditional
thermal and nuclear method were observed in two countries but the total
percentages of energy produced from renewables in each country were
similar, while, there were big differences in the proportion of renewables’
types generated.
It is clear that conventional thermal was used mostly to produce electricity, at
59.6%, in Germany; meanwhile, the figure was only 10.3% in France.
Similarly, France mainly generates electricity by Nuclear, at exactly 76.0%,
but this type occupied just 23.0% in Germany.
Germany used Biomass and Wind quite equally as renewables, at 39.3% and
36.9% respectively, while these types of energy were small proportions of
electricity generated in France, at roughly 10% each. The greatest figure of
renewables was produced by Hydroelectric, at 80.5% in France, but it
remained only 17.7% in Germany. Both countries depended on small figures
of Solar and Geothermal, which were from 0.0% to 6.1%. Hydroelectric
generation reached highest, at 80.5% in France.
182 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 24
Write a report for a university lecturer describing the information in the
graphs below.
m
oo m
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
The 2 pie charts compare education attainment in the percentage of females
in Someland between 1945 and 1995.
SSMM
Overall, it can be seen that women in Someland were more educated in 1995
than in 1945. While no education and third grade were the most common
above.
LLTT
levels of education in 1945, all females in 1995 attained at least year 9 and
IIEE
As shown in the first chart, in 1945, 35% of women in Someland received no
education at all, and another 35% only reached third grade in their education
level. These 2 groups accounted for over two-thirds of the total female
population in Someland. Meanwhile, in the second chart, the percentages of
women who were uneducated and pursued third-grade education were
minimized to 0% in 1995.
Females in Someland were educated much more in 1995. Half of female
population received first-grade degrees, and one-fifth received post-
graduation education, a significant improvement compared to 1945, when the
proportion of females who achieved first degrees or post education was only
1%.
168 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 25
The graphs below show a comparison of the expenses in the UK and the
US.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The pie charts illustrate data on the percentages of four different categories in
terms of expenditure in the UK and the US.
Overall, both countries spend the largest proportions of their expenses on rent
and food. In addition, spending on DVDs, going out and transport account for
similar percentages of the total expenditure in two nations.
In the UK, the largest percentage of expenses is for rent (30%), which is
slightly more than that of the US (20%). In contrast, Americans tend to spend
more of their budget on food than Australians, 25%, and 18% respectively.
The DVDs makes up the smallest figure in both the UK and the US, only
10%. People in both countries spend 15% of the expenditure on going out
and transport. On the other hand, the Australians spend 3% less on books
than their counterparts in the US (12% and 15% respectively).
151 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The pie charts illustrate data on the expenditures of people in the US and the
UK in 2010.
Overall, while American citizens spent most on rent, the British used the
largest budget for food. Moreover, inhabitants in both nations allocated the
least money for DVDs.
oomm
As can be seen from the graphs, 30% of British people’s budget was spent on
.c.c
rental payment while the American invested one-fifth of their income in this
category. Additionally, the British used 7% of expenditure more than the
rrss
American did. The figures were 25 percent and 18 percent respectively. In
comparison, DVDs were expended on by 10 percent in both countries.
ttttee
Turning to the other categories, books accounted for 12 percent of the
American’s spending whereas they made up for 15 percent of the British’s.
aa
Eventually, people in both nations spent similarly on going out and
transportation; at exactly 15%.
152 words
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 26
The bar chart shows the percentage of the total world population in four
countries in 1995 and 2002, and projections for 2050.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart illustrates how the proportion of total world population changed
in 4 particular nations in 1950 and 2002 as well as the predictions for 2050.
Overall, although China experienced the highest percentage of inhabitants in
1950 and 2050, the figure for India is expected to be the highest shown on the
chart in 2050. Interestingly, India is the only one experiencing/enjoying an
upward trend over the period.
From 1950 to 2002, the population of China and USA dropped by roughly
the same percentage, 3%. Meanwhile, India saw a considerable growth by
3%, yet its figure remained lower than China’s. Like China and USA, Japan’s
population also decreased but less significantly.
In 2050, the proportion of India’s number of inhabitants is expected to rise
sharply and peak at more than 18%. By contrast, China and Japan are forecast
to have a substantial plummet by approximately half of their figures in 2002.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Meanwhile, the figure for the USA will stay unchanged throughout 2050.
163 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The chart illustrates the proportion of the total population in the world in
different locations, namely India, China, the USA, and Japan from 1995 to
2002 and estimations for 2050.
oomm
Overall, the rate of people in each country decreased in the 1995-2002 period
.c.c
and will continue to decrease in the future. However, there was an exception
ss
for India with the proportion of population inclining to increase.
rr
China was strikingly seen as a country having the highest population until
ttttee
2002 and has a tendency to decrease significantly to exactly 15% by the year
2050. Also, Japan with the lowest population in four countries experienced a
aa
gradual decrease from 1950 to 2002 and is forecasted to decrease by 2050.
Meanwhile, the population of the US accounted for around 7% in 1950 and
SSMM
decreased slightly by 2002 then will remain stable by 2050 as predicted.
By contrast, India witnessed a constant increase over the period shown.
Beginning from precisely 15%, the figure for India rose gradually to about
LLTT
17% in 2002 and will reach to approximately 19% in 2050 at which it will
surpass China to become the country having the highest population.
IIEE
190 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 27
The graph below shows radio and television audiences of United
Kingdom throughout the day in the year 1992.
below.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The line graph shows data about the percentage of UK population watched
TV or listened to radio throughout the day from October to December in
1992.
Overall, the audience rates of both media channel fluctuated over the period
of 24 hours. Although the two trends were similar in terms of a general low
from midnight to early morning, the audience rate of TV at the most time was
higher than that of radio.
For the first eleven hours of the day, the proportion of television audiences
varied slightly between 3% and 7%. However, at the following 9 hours, the
TV audience rate increased significantly to exactly 45%, which was its
highest point during the day period. Throughout the remainder of the period,
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
there was a dramatic decline in the TV audience rate, which fell to 18% by
the time 11 p.m.
By comparison, the proportion of radio audiences fluctuated for the first six
hours and it always remained under 5%. Afterwards, there was a rapid
growth in the number of radio audiences and it climbed to the highest point
of the whole line graph, 30%, at 8 p.m. By contrast, 6 hours later, the
5% at 11 p.m.
oomm
audience rate of radio reduced slowly by over 10%, falling to approximately
210 words
.c.c
MODEL ANSWER 2:
rrss
ttttee
The line graph depicts how people in the UK used radio and television during
a day in 1992.
aa
Overall, the number of television viewers accounted for the larger percentage
than that of radio listeners. And these two numbers fluctuated and reached the
SSMM
highest point at two different times of the day.
As can be seen from the graph, there was a significant increase in radio
audiences from 6.00 in the morning. After reaching a peak at nearly 30% at 9
the next morning.

LLTT
am, this number began to decrease gradually, bottoming at about 2% by 4 am
IIEE
It is noticeable that the proportion of TV viewers was much higher than that
of radio audiences. However, at the time when the number of radio listeners
rose quickly, that of television watchers fluctuated at a very low percentage,
about 10%. There was a dramatic growth in this number from 2 pm, peaking
nearly 50% at 8 pm and went down rapidly, starting from 10 pm. The figure
for radio and television audiences hit the bottom with the same level, about
1%, at the same time, 3 am.
185 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 28
The graph below shows in percentage terms the changing patterns of
domestic access to modem technology in homes in the UK.
The line graph illustrates the percentage of styles to connect advanced

technology of the UK people from their houses.
Overall, the percentage of people in the UK accessing modern technology in
four patterns increased steadily. Also, CD player was by far the most
common way which people used in homes.
In 1996/97, the proportion of people using CD player was the highest, at
exactly 60%. By contrast, there was almost no one connecting Internet at
those time. Approximately 28% users accessing computer, compared to
around 19% mobile phone users.
The figure for CD player used at homes rose gradually to 82 % while there
was a substantial increase in the rate of Internet users from 10% in 1998/99 to
32% in 2000/01 and continuously went up to 45% at the end of the given
period. Besides, users accessing computers rose gradually at around 53%
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
over the period. The rate of those who spent their time in using mobile
phones fluctuated widely, and the trend was upward, soared to 70% in the
year 2002/03.
173 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 29
The chart below gives information on the percentage of British people
giving money to charity by age range for the years 1990 and 2010.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart illustrates the proportion of five different British age groups
which made the donation to charity in 1990 and 2000.
Overall, greater percentages of British people donated to charity in 1990.
Besides, we can see that the largest group of donors moved from the 35-50
age group to the 51-65s in 2000.
In 1990, about 42% of the 35-50 age group made charitable donations, which
was the highest percentage compared to other groups. The 18-25s donated the
least, as only roughly 17% of them gave money to charity. After ten years,
the figure for the former fell to about 35%, whereas that of the latter declined
to 7%. The 26-35 age group also saw a decline as the number dropped from
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
just over 30% in 1990 to just under 25% in 2000.
When the donation of British people aged up to 50 years old went down, the
51-65 age group recorded an increase of almost 10% to approximately 40%
which was the highest level among the five groups. There was also an
increase in the 65s as the figure rose from 32% in 1990 to 35% in the year
2000.
192 words
oomm
MODEL ANSWER 2:
.c.c
ss
The bar chart compares the proportions of people in Britain who gave money
rr
to charity in terms of the age group in two years 1990 and 2010.
ttttee
It is clear that the percentages of those giving money to charity fell from
1990 to 2010 in three age groups, namely the 18-25s, the 26-35s and the 36-
aa
50s. By contrast, the figures for 51-65 and over 65 age group increased over
the period shown.
SSMM
In 1997, the proportion of those between 18 and 25 donating to charity was
highest, at more than 40%, while the figures for the 51-65s and the 26-35
were slightly lower, at about 35% and just over 30% respectively. By
charity.
LLTT
contrast, only about 17% of the youngest age group in the chart donated to
IIEE
In 2010, the percentage of people of 36-50 age group making donations fell
by 7% to 35%. The figures for the 26-35s and 18-25s also declined to just
under 25% and 7% respectively. By contrast, there was an upward trend in
the proportion of people over age 50 giving money to charity. While the
percentage of donors between 50 and 65 increased from 35% to nearly 40%,
the figure for those over 65 went up by 3% to 35%.
206 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 30
The charts below show the number of Japanese tourists travelling
abroad between 1985 and 1995 and Australia's share of the Japanese
tourist market.
Source: http://examwriting.blogspot.com/2017/05/chart-japanese-tourists-
travelling.html
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart illustrates the number of Japanese citizens going aboard for
traveling purpose in a ten-year period, from 1985 to 1995; while the line
graph gives data on the percentage of Japanese tourists going to Australia.
Overall, the number of Japanese tourists going aboard rose year by year, and
there was an increasing number of citizens of Japan choosing Australia as a
traveling destination.
www.zandienglish.ir

In 1985, only around 5 million Japanese went on vacation in foreign
countries. This number steadily went up to between 10 and 12 million in
1990. After some fluctuations between 1990 and 1992, more and more
Japanese traveled aboard; and by the end of the period, nearly 16 million
Japanese spent their holiday outside Japan.
Among around 5 million people from Japan traveling aboard in 1985, only
2% of them went to Australia. Three years later, the proportion of Japanese
tourists reached to 5%. Although Australia recorded two fluctuations, the
percentage of tourists from Japan still increased in general and reached 6% in
1994.
169 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The bar chart illustrates how many Japanese citizens travelled overseas from
1985 to 1995 while the line graph demonstrates the proportion of Japanese
people who visited Australia.
Overall, there was a significant increase in the number of Japanese tourists
over the period shown. Similarly, Australia’s share of Japan’s tourists market
grew considerably although it experienced a wild fluctuation.
In 1985, approximately 5 million Japanese people visited other countries and
this was followed by a gradual growth in the next 5 years to about 11 million
in 1990.The figure decreased slightly in the following year before going up to
12 million in 1993 and finally climbed to 15 million visitors in 1995.
In 1985, there were 5 million Japanese people going to Australia. The period
between 1989 and 1990 observed a steady increase in the number of Japanese
visitors, and then it reached at 5 % before falling marginally to nearly 4 % in
1990.The figure reached its peak in 1994 and then went down to precisely 6
% in 1995.
170 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 31
The charts below give information on the ages of the population of
Yemen and Italy in 2000 and projections for 2050.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The pie charts compare Yemen and Italy in terms of the proportion of
people’s different ages in 2000 and (predicts for) 2050.
Overall, for three out of four charts, the number of people aged between 15
and 59 accounted for the largest proportion in both nations. While the
www.zandienglish.ir

percentage of people aged fewer than 15 is predicted to decrease, there will
be more elderly people in two countries by the year 2050.
In 2000, Yemeni children made up the biggest percentage of its population
with 50.1%, while the figure for Italy was just 14.3%. In the same year, only
3.6% of Yemeni population was elderly people (aged above 60), compared to
the second largest number given for Italy, 24.1%. With 61.6% of the
population, the most popular age range in Yemen at this time was 15-59
years, whereas the figure given for Yemen was a little bit smaller by about
15%.
By the year 2050, the number of inhabitants aged between 15 and 59 is
expected to account for the largest proportion of both Yemeni and Italian
people, with 57, 3 % and 46, 2% respectively. There will be a slight increase
in the 0-14 years category in 2 countries. In contrast, it is predicted that both
2 nations will see a downward trend in the people aged 14 or under. Yemeni
and Italian of this age range will drop by 2.8% and 20.1% respectively.
219 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The pie charts compare Yemen and Italy in term of the groups separated by
different ages over two years 2000 and 2050.
Overall, the groups aged between 15 – 59 years have accounted for the most
percentages in both nations in 2000 and projection for 2050. In addition, the
proportions of two remaining groups have noticeably changed over two
years.
In Yemen, the populations from 15 to 59 years old accounted for the large
proportion in 2000, 46.3% and will increase to the highest percentage in
2050, 57.3%. However, this group is expected to decrease to only 46.2% in
spite of the highest percentage in 2000, 61.6% in Italy.
The group aged between 0 and 14 years old with the large proportions in
Yemen will dip dramatically, from 50.1% in 2000 to 37% in 2050. In
contrast, the populations aged over 60 years old with the large percentage in
Italy is expected to rise, from 24.1% in 2000 to 42.3% in 2050. Besides, in
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Yemen, the old over 60 years with the small percentage will increase slightly
to 5.7% in 2050. On the other hand, the young up to 14 years old in Italy
with the small proportion is predicted to decline, only 11.5% in 2050.
205 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 32
The diagram shows the consumption of renewable energy in the USA
from 1949-2008.
Write a 150-word report for a university lecturer identifying the main trends
and making comparisons where relevant.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The given line chart provides data on total consumption of Renewable
Energy and sources used to generate renewable energy in the USA between
1949 and 2008.
Overall, it can be seen that total renewable energy consumed in the USA
dramatically increased over time. Additionally, hydroelectric power and good
were the 2 major sources exploited to produce renewable energy.
In 1950, around 3 quadrillions Btu renewable energy was consumed. The
consumption then significantly grew, reaching 2 peaks in 1985 and 1998 at
about 6.5 and 7 quadrillion Btu respectively, then eventually hit almost 8
quadrillion Btu in the end of the period shown.
Hydroelectric contributed most in the production of renewable energy.
Almost over 3 quadrillions Btu renewable energy were generated from this
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
source from 1980 to the end of the period. Wood was also a significant
source, producing less than hydroelectric power, but still accounted for
around 2 quadrillions Btu renewable energy consumption.
153 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
oomm
The line chart illustrates figures for the utilization of four various types of
renewable energy during the period from 1949 to 2008.
.c.c
Overall, the total consumption of renewable energy more than doubled by the
ss
end of the period, with a small growth in hydroelectric power and wood as
rr
well as a strong contribution in two other newer sources biofuels and wind.
ttttee
As the graph shows, hydroelectric power and wood started the period at the
same level, but both saw only limited growth. The former witnessed a
aa
gradual upward fluctuation and reached a high of over 3 quadrillions BTU in
1985 and repeated its record in 1995, which made it the most used energy
over 2 quadrillions BTU.
SSMM
throughout the period. Since then, the figure plunged tremendously to just
Similarly, the latter also reached a peak of its contribution at just under 3
LLTT
quadrillions BTU in 1985 after rising substantially from just under 2
quadrillions BTU in 1950. However, its trend was broken by a sharp drop
back to its original level over the rest of the period. Of the two newer sources,
IIEE
Biofuels which first appeared in the mid-1980s, generated a remarkable
growth up to nearly 1 quadrillion BTU by 2000. Meanwhile, wind power,
which was the latest to emerge among the group or four sources, saw a rapid
climb to about 0.5 quadrillions BTU since 2000.
219 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 33
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The two pie charts show data about the household expenditure of two average
US families in 1970 and 2004.
At a first glance, mortgage and childcare have a significant growth while
entertainment remains steadily and others decrease over three decades.
Although food accounted for the largest proportion of total expenditure in
1970, mortgage became the category that was spent the most in the latter
year.
In 1970, mortgage got 26% of household expenditure and rose to nearly two
times in 2004. Similarly, with only 1% in 1970, childcare jumped to 10%
after 34 years. Entertainment was the only household that did not have any
fluctuation in a long period of time with 13%.
In contrast, food, transport, and clothing experienced a decrease in percentage
between 1970 and 2004. Accounting for a quarter of household expenditure
in 1970, food expenditure fell considerably in 2004 to 12%. Payments for
transport and clothing saw the same tendency. 13% of transport and 22% of
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
clothing expenditure were recorded in 1970, but in 2004 those reduced to 5%
and 10% respectively according to the pie charts.
181 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The pie charts illustrate the proportions of two average US families in terms
oomm
of different categories of expenses in 1970 and 2004.
Overall, spending on mortgage and childcare showed a dramatic increase in
.c.c
the period. In contrast, the other 4 categories experienced a downward trend
ss
or remained unchanged.
rr
In 1970, the figure for mortgage stood at 13%. After 34 years, the
ttttee
expenditure skyrocketed considerably to 50%, making it the highest figure in
the second chart. Likewise, although spending on childcare in the first year of
aa
the period was nearly 0%, the expense on it rose significantly by 12% in
2004.
SSMM
Conversely, expenditures on food, transport, and clothing saw an obvious
decline. Noticeably, while 25% of the total chart was attributed to food in
1970, spending on this category decreased by half of that number, ending at
LLTT
13% in 2004. Similarly, expenses on transport and clothing declined
remarkably. However, the data about entertainment stayed the same in the
period.
158 words
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 34
The given table compares the current and projected length of High-Speed
railway among 3 countries in 3 separate years 1990, 2010, and 2020
Overall, it can be seen that China witnessed a significant growth in High-
Speed rail length over the 30-year period. Meanwhile, France and Japan
maintained a much lower increasing pace compared to China.
As shown in the table, China possessed no High-Speed railway at all in 1990,
while the figures for France and Japan were 720 Km and 1832 Km
respectively. In 2010, China had started building a railway and reached over
3,500 Km High-Speed railway length, approximately 2 times longer than the
total length of that in France. Although Japan had increased their length to
over 2,500 Km in 2010, it still came in second of the longest railway among
the 3 countries.
As projected in 2020, China is expected to lengthen their high-speed railway
to over 13,000 Km, an enormous number compared to France and Japan,
which is likely to reach around 4,000 Km and 3,600 Km respectively.
172 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 35
The graph and table below give information about water use worldwide
and water consumption in two different countries.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The charts compare the worldwide water consumption for agriculture,
industry and domestic sectors from 1900 to 2000, and water use in terms of
irrigated land and individual consumption in Brazil and Congo in 2000.
Overall, it is obvious that there was a gradual increase in international water
usage during the period shown. Furthermore, water used in Brazil was much
higher than in Congo in the year of 2000.
By 1900, global agricultural water usage accounted for the largest proportion
at 500 km3, which was much higher than industrial and home domains, at
100 km3 and 70 km3 respectively. The data for agriculture category
experienced a continually smooth increase to 3000 km3 during the given
www.zandienglish.ir

period. In contrast, the figures remained nearly unchanged until 1950 for the
industrial use, and 1970 for the domestic use. Throughout the remainder of
the time, the two sectors witnessed a gradual growth to 1000 km3 for the
former, compared with 500 km3 used for the latter.
On the other hand, the table illustrated that the population in Brazil was 176
million people in comparison with only 5 million residents in Congo. This
amount explained the reason why individual water consumption in Brazil was
higher than in Congo, with 359 m3 and 39 m3 respectively. Meanwhile,
Brazilian consumed about 26500 km3 to water land, which was 265 times
more than Congolese.
219 words
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The given line chart and table illustrate the amount of water used around the
world and consumed in Brazil and Congo.
Overall, there was a significant increase in global water use over the period of
10 decades from 1900. In addition, water consumption in Brazil was
considerably higher than that in Congo.
In 1990, the amount of water which was used for Agriculture was the highest
in the group of three, standing at about 500 km3, while that figure for
Industrial use and Domestic use just occupied a very small (around 50 km3).
Global water use for Agriculture and Industrial sharply rose by 2500 km3 and
1400 km3 respectively in 2000. Domestic water use remained unchanged at
under 50 km3 in the first six decades and reached a peak of 500km3 in 2000.
In 2000, Brazil’s population was 176 million while Congo’s population was
just 52 million. We can see that the amount of water consumed in Brazil was
over four times as high as that in Congo. Most water consumption in Brazil
was used for irrigated land aim, at 26500 km3, which was 265 times as high
as that in Congo.
192 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 36
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
MODEL ANSWER 1:
IIEE
The line graph illustrates how many books residents read at Burnaby Public
Library in terms of gender between 2011 and 2014
Generally speaking, it is immediately noticeable that there was an upward
trend in the number of books which were read by men, while the number of
books read by a woman, after a marked rise in the first 2 years, witnessed a
downward trend.
Starting at about 3000 in 2011, there was a slight growth in the number of
www.zandienglish.ir

books read by men to approximately 4000 in 2012. After that, this number
surged to around 10000 in 2013, followed by a substantial growth to just over
14000 at the year 2014.
Over the same period, the number of books read by females climbed
gradually from about 5000 in 2011 to 8000 in 2012, a rise of around 3000
books in one year. The figure reached a high of just under 10000 in 2013,
before falling markedly to approximately 8000 in the final year.
164 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The line graph indicates the figures for books read by men and women at
Burnaby Public Library between 2011 and 2014.
Overall, the number of books read at Burnaby Public Library increased over
the period of 4 years. The figure for books read by women was higher than
that for men from 2011 to 2013 but lower in 2014.
The number of books read by men increased slowly from 3000 to 4000 in 1
year and then it rose dramatically to 14000 in 2014. It can be seen that the
number of books read by men was lowest at 3000 in 2011 and highest at
14000 in 2014.
On the contrary, books read by women went up quickly from 5000 to 10000
between 2011 and 2013 and it decreased to 8000 in 2014. The number of
books read by women reached the lowest point at 5000 in 2011 and a peak at
10000 in 2013.
155 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 37
The graphs show changes in spending habits of people in the UK
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
MODEL ANSWER 1: aa
SSMM
The two pie charts illustrate how UK residents spent their money on seven
different types of item in 1971 and 2001.
LLTT
Overall, it can be seen that while the expenditure on books, furniture, petrol
and foods reduced, the amount spent on the three others increased
IIEE
significantly. Remarkably, in both years, the spending habits for foods and
cars always made up the largest percentages.
In 1971, British people spent nearly a half of their income, at 44%, on food,
which was 3 times bigger than in 2001. The second position belonged to cars,
at 22%. The proportions of spending on five others, except for computers,
were quite similar, at around 9%. By contrast, computers accounted for the
lowest percentage of the total types of item with exactly 2%.
30 years later, in 2001, the expense on cars accounted for 43% of the total
proportion, which was the largest proportion. 14% was the percentage of
restaurants and foods’ expenditure. The figures for expenses on furniture and
petrol reduced slightly and made up the same proportion, at 8%. Besides that,
the amount of spending on books was only 1%, which was the lowest over
www.zandienglish.ir

the times surveyed.
194 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The two graphs compare the proportion of UK citizen expenditure in 2 years,
1971 and 2001.
It can be clearly seen that the expense of petrol and furniture dramatically fell
between 1971 and 2001, whereas that of computers saw a significant rise. In
2001, the UK residents spent most of their money on cars.
More specifically, in 1971, petrol and furniture were the most consuming
things of UK people, account for 36% and 32% of their spending
respectively, but in 2001, the figure for both these categories remarkably
declined to 8%. The fall also was seen in the percentage of restaurants, from
25% in 1971 to 14% in 2001.
UK people spent money in computer markedly rose, from 7% in 1971 to 12%
in 2001. By 2001, the biggest expenditure of UK citizen was seen in cars
(43%) which are 3 times higher than foods and restaurants which were the
second highest expense of the UK residents (14%). Books accounted for the
least consume of UK people, only 1%.
169 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 38
The pie charts below show units of electricity production by fuel source
Australia and France in 1980 and 2000.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
MODEL ANSWER 1:
aa
MM
The pie charts compare the amount of electricity produced by 5 fuel sources
in Australia and France in 1980 and 2000.
SS
TT
It is clear that the production of electricity increased significantly in both
France and Australia from 1980 to 2000. Notably, in Australia, the electricity
LL
production from coal was the highest in both years whereas that of natural
IIEE
gas decreased to the lowest percentage in 2000.
In 1980, 100 units of electricity were produced in Australia, compared to 90
units in France. Half of electricity in Australia came from Coal. Nuclear
power was not used by Australian people while in France, fuel came from all
5 sources with the highest production from Coal and Natural gas.
In 2000, the total amount of electricity in France doubled that of 1980 while
the figure of Australia increased by 70 units. In France, Coal remained the
most popular power source, followed by Hydropower. On the other hand,
France witnessed a great change in the fuel source structure. Nuclear power
jumped from just 15 units in 1980 to 126 units in 2000, accounted for almost
75% of the total power source of the country.
www.zandienglish.ir

190 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The pie charts illustrate data on different kinds of electricity production by
petrol source in Australia and France in two separate years.
Overall, it is clear that coal was by far the largest electricity producer in both
France and Australia in 1980. It is evident that while Australia factories
focused on creating coal mostly in 2000, electricity production of nuclear
power was dominant in France.
In terms of Australia, a half of electricity production was from coal during
1980. Moreover, accounting for a fifth of electricity production, the figure for
both hydropower and natural gas were relatively high, which was twice as
much as that of oil (10 units). In 2000, this country witnessed a significant
increase in coal, rising to 130 units, whereas the same pattern can be recorded
in oil and national gas, which constituted exactly 2 units.
In France, making up a quarter of electricity production, natural gas and coal
were by far the highest electricity production by fuel source. By contrast,
there were only 5 units of hydropower produced in 1980. After 20 years,
surprisingly, nuclear power was the largest producer/source, with a further
126 units. In addition, French factories produced hydropower and natural gas
with the lowest level, at 4 units combined.
207 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 39
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
MODEL ANSWER 1:
SSMM
The table shows the proportions of land covered by forest in four different
LLTT
countries in 1990 and 2005, and projected figures in 2015.
Overall, Brazil had the highest percentage of forested land among all
IIEE
countries in all three years. While Brazil and Australia saw a decrease in the
amount of land covered by forest, there was a rise in the proportion of
forested land in New Zealand and Chile.
In 1990, 62.2% of the area in Brazil was covered by forest, and this is the
highest figure in that year. By contrast, Australia and Chile had only about
one-third of that amount, at 21.9% and 20.4% respectively.
Brazil experienced a drop in the percentage of forested area in 2005, at
57.2%, and the figure was expected to drop further to 53.5% in 2005.
Similarly, the proportion of land covered by forest in Australia dipped to
21.3% in 2005 and predictively to 20% in 2015. However, the forested area
was expected to rise to 32.3% in New Zealand and 22% in Chile in 2015.
www.zandienglish.ir

173 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The table compares the proportion of land covered by forest in four nations in
two years 1990 and 2005, and also the predictions for 2015.
It is clear from the table that Brazil has had the highest percentage of land
covered by forest in three years. Additionally, the figures for Australia and
Chile are by far lowest during the research period.
In 1990, the rate of land enveloped by jungle in Brazil was highest, at about
62.2%, while the figure for New Zealand was considerably lower, at 28.8%.
About 21.9% of land buried by forest was in Australia, compared to only
20.4% of that in Chile. In 2005, the percentages of woodland in New Zealand
and Chile rose slowly to 31% and 21.5% respectively, whereas Brazil an
Australia both witnessed considerable declines in their figures to 57.2% and
21.3% respectively.
In 2015, it is predicted that the proportion of land covered by forest in Brazil
will increase to 53.5% and remain the highest figure compared to other
countries. By contrast, the percentage of woodland in Australia is projected to
decrease to 20%. In the same year, the figures for New Zealand and Chile are
likely to rise to 32.3% and 22% respectively.
202 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 40
The chart below shows the different levels of post-school in Australia and
the proportion of men and women who held them in 1999.
make a comparison where relevant.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
MODEL ANSWER 1:
SSMM
TT
The chart demonstrates the information about gender proportion according to
5 levels of post-school qualification in Australia in 1999.
LL
It is noticeable in the chart that except for the undergraduate diploma and
qualifications.
IIEE
bachelor’s degree, males outnumbered females in other post-school
The most significant gender difference was found in the lowest level, skilled
vocational diploma, with 90% of those who hold the qualification were was
males and only 10% was females. In the higher levels, the disparity was also
obvious, but in a lesser degree because the percentage of males tipped over
females by 40% in postgraduate diploma (70% males and 30% females) and
by 20% in master’s degree (60% males and 40% females).
In a reversed trend, there were more females graduates in bachelor’s degree
and undergraduate diploma compared to those of males. While the disparity
was marginal with around 5% difference in the bachelor’s degree,
www.zandienglish.ir

undergraduate diploma experienced a dramatic disparity in which the number
of female graduates was almost double that of male counterparts, with 70%
females and only 45% males.
174 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The chart represents the percentage of people who obtained different types of
academic degrees divided by genders, in Australia, in 1999.
It is clearly seen that the most common qualification that Australian women
gained was ‘Skilled vocational diploma’, whereas men had a stronger
tendency to get an undergraduate diploma.
According to the data given, over 90% of women had successfully completed
‘Skilled vocational diploma’, the highest figure amongst all academic
qualifications. In contrast, the most uncommon degree for women was
undergraduate diploma, with only around 37% proceeding to this degree.
Men, however, showed a total contrast pattern as they topped the chart for an
undergraduate degree, with almost three-quarters of all respondents reaching
this level. Whilst only a tenth of them stopped at ‘Skilled vocational
diploma’. Another interesting feature was that the academic level of bachelor
was what the statistics for both genders most harmonized with one another,
with 52% for men and 45% for women achieving this degree.
159 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
IELTS Academic Writing Task 1 Samples
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

Legal & Disclaimer
cause of action.
book.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION
SAMPLE 1
SAMPLE 2
SAMPLE 3
SAMPLE 4
SAMPLE 5
SAMPLE 6
SAMPLE 7
SAMPLE 8
SAMPLE 9
SAMPLE 10
SAMPLE 11
SAMPLE 12
SAMPLE 13
SAMPLE 14
SAMPLE 15
SAMPLE 16
SAMPLE 17
SAMPLE 18
SAMPLE 19
SAMPLE 20
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 21
SAMPLE 22
SAMPLE 23
SAMPLE 24
SAMPLE 25
SAMPLE 26
oomm
SAMPLE 27
.c.c
SAMPLE 28
rrss
ttttee
SAMPLE 29
SAMPLE 30
SAMPLE 31
aa
SAMPLE 32
SAMPLE 33
SSMM
SAMPLE 34
SAMPLE 35
LLTT
SAMPLE 36
SAMPLE 37
SAMPLE 38
IIEE
SAMPLE 39
SAMPLE 40
SAMPLE 41
SAMPLE 42
SAMPLE 43
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 44
SAMPLE 45
SAMPLE 46
SAMPLE 47
SAMPLE 48
SAMPLE 49
SAMPLE 50
SAMPLE 51
CONCLUSION
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
INTRODUCTION
Thank you and congratulate you for downloading the book “Ielts Academic
oomm
.c.c
rrss
develop your well-organised answers for the Task 1 Writing.
ttttee
aa
MM
SS
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 1
The bar chart below gives information about the number of students
studying Computer Science at a UK university between 2010 and 2012.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The given graph illustrates the number of males and females studying
Computer Science at a UK university from 2010 to 2012.
Overall, among females, the number of British students studying Computer
Science varied, whereas International students experienced a growth over the
period of 2 years. Apparently, it can be seen from the graph that the number
of female students in both British and International remained relatively
constant over the same period.
In 2010, the proportion of British male students was higher than that of
International students, at around 28 students. Although the two trends were
similar in terms of the number of students studying Computer Science in the
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
year 2011, British male students experienced a sudden increase, which
climbed to approximately 43 students in 2012. International students also saw
a growth to 23 students in 2011 before reaching its peak, 38 students, in
2012.
Over the same period, the number of female students in both British and
International varied less significantly than male students. Over the 2-year
oomm
period, the figure for British female students was higher than International
students. From 2010 to 2012, there was a sudden increase in the number of
.c.c
British female students, which rose to approximately 45 students. Also,
International female students experienced a smooth growth, from 13 students
rrss
to precisely 20 students in 2010 and 2012 respectively.
ttttee
220 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
aa
The bar chart illustrates data on the quantity of two kinds of students studying
Computer Science course in a UK university from 2010 to 2012.
SSMM
Overall, the number of British male students were greater than that of their
international counterparts over the 2-year period. Similarly, there were more
LLTT
UK female students than overseas ones in this course.
In terms of men, the number of learners from the UK studied Computer
Science is nearly twice as many as those from other countries in 2010; the
IIEE
figures were just under 40 thousand and exactly 20 thousand respectively. In
the next 2 years, the latter experienced a double, increasing to about 40
thousand. In comparison, the former noticeably grew to approximately 43
thousand in 2012 despite a significant shrink of around 15 thousand one year
ago.
Turning to women, the figure for British students was more than twice as
much as that for overseas students in 2010, at above 30 thousand and
marginally 15 thousand. Britain saw an uninterruptedly upward trend in these
numbers over the next years, which reached peaks of precisely 45 thousand
and 20 thousand respectively, at the end of the period.
192 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 2
The chart below shows the percentage change in the share of
international students among university graduates in different Canadian
provinces between 2001 and 2006.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart given shows data about the percentage of foreign students
graduated from 8 Canadian universities in some selected provinces from
2001 to 2006.
Overall, Canada saw a rapid increase in all different universities over the
period of 5 years. In addition, New Brunswick was always an ideal institution
for international students to get their degrees, both in 2001 and in 2006.
To be more specific, approximately 13% of foreign graduates was reported in
New Brunswick University in 2001, whereas there was only 7% of that in the
year 2006. Although the figure for Nova Scotia was higher than that for
British Columbia at the beginning, at 7% and 4% respectively, the next 5
years saw a similar percentage of 13%, which was the next highest proportion
at that time. Thanks to an increase of 2% from 6% in 2001, Quebec stood at
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
the fourth position in 2006.
The number of graduated foreigners at the remaining universities is relatively
similar. Newfoundland and Labrador, Manitoba and Ontario all started at 3%
then increased to over 6% in 2006.
179 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
oomm
The bar chart shows changes in the percentage of foreign students attending
.c.c
different universities in Canada. Figures are given for 2001 and 2006.
rrss
It is noticeable that there was a general increase in the proportion of
international students throughout the given period. Also, in 2006, these
ttttee
figures were considerably higher in New Brunswick, Nova Scotia, and
British Columbia universities.
aa
In 2001, the rates of overseas graduates from New Brunswick, Nova Scotia,
and Quebec universities were relatively similar, at around 7%. Meanwhile,
SSMM
the proportions of Alberta and British Columbia foreign students accounted
for just under 5% of the total attendance rate. Manitoba, Newfoundland and
Labrador and Ontario universities attracted no more than 4% of international
LLTT
graduates, being the lowest figures shown on the chart.
In 2006, a dramatic rise can be seen in the universities of New Brunswick,
IIEE
attracting approximately 13% of non-Canadian students. The most significant
increase, however, belonged to British Columbia institutions, with the
percentage of foreign graduates almost doubled over the five-year period. At
the same time, figures for the remaining provinces in this country showed an
overall smaller rise, but they all exceeded the threshold of 5%.
167 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 3
The first chart below shows how energy is used in an average Australian
household. The second chart shows the greenhouse gas emissions which
result from this energy use.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The first pie chart illustrates the energy consumption in a family on average
in Australia. The second pie chart gives information about the emissions of
greenhouse gas including six categories caused by the given energy usage
Overall, in the first chart, the household energy used by heating and water
heating accounts for the largest proportions of the total consumption in
Australia. Meanwhile, in terms of the second chart, water heating and other
appliances are the two main reasons of greenhouse gas emissions.
Obviously, the largest expenditure on energy is for heating, at 42%, while the
figure for water heating is just 30%. However, the amount of greenhouse gas
produced by water heating approximately double to the emission of heating.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Other appliances just made up 15% of the total energy in one household, but
it emits nearly 30% of greenhouse gas in Australia.
Among the remaining parts of energy, refrigeration holds 7%, which was 3%
more than the amount of lighting. Nevertheless, refrigeration and lighting
contribute to 14% and 8%, accordingly, of greenhouse gas production. The
percentage of cooling is the lowest, at exactly 2% in the total amount of
oomm
energy consumed by an average Australian family, and it makes up just only
3%, which was the smallest figure sending out greenhouse gas.
212 words
.c.c
MODEL ANSWER 2:
rrss
ttttee
The first pie chart compares the percentage of energy used in different
activities in each Australian family and the second one compares the rate of
gas emissions among the activities.
aa
Overall, Australians use energy mainly for heating and water heating, and the
SSMM
highest amount of gas emissions comes from water heating.
Heating accounts for 42% of total energy use, compared to 30% of the energy
used for water heating. By contrast, cooling has the lowest figure of only 2%
LLTT
which is half of the energy used for lighting (4%). Meanwhile, the figures for
refrigeration and other appliances are 7%, and 15% respectively.
IIEE
The activity that causes the largest amount of gas emissions is water heating,
followed by other appliances (28%). In contrast, cooling only made up 3 % of
total amount of gas emissions compared to 8% for lighting. Otherwise,
despite consuming more energy than other activities, heating produces 15%
of gas emissions which is relatively equal to refrigeration.
159 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 4
The chart below shows male and female fitness membership between
1970 and 2000.
The given graph illustrates the number of male and female fitness
membership between 1970 and 2000.
Overall, the figure for both male and female fitness membership varied over
the period of 30 years. Also, it is obvious that the average number of male
fitness membership was higher in most years.
In 1970, the figure of males was higher than that of females, at around 2100
people. By contrast, the number of females who had fitness membership was
at the lowest point of the whole chart, at exactly 1000. It can be seen from the
graph that the figure for females was lower than male by more than a half in
the year 1970.
Female fitness membership experienced a marked growth to precisely 2000
people in 2000, after a gradual decline of about 600 people in the 1985 –
1990 period. On the other hand, there was a remarkable decrease in the
number of male fitness membership, which suddenly fell to approximately
1000 people in 2000, after reaching the peak of the whole line graph, of 5000
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
people, in 1995.
178 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 5
The line graph below shows the average daily maximum temperatures
for Auckland and Christchurch, two cities in New Zealand, and London
and Edinburgh, two cities in the United Kingdom.
The graph compares information about the average maximum temperatures

on a daily basis of four cities in New Zealand and the United Kingdom.
It is clear that the temperatures of four areas all fluctuate between 5 and
25°C. In addition, the highest temperatures of London and Edinburgh are in
the middle of the year when Auckland and Christchurch witness the lowest
one.
Two British cities share the similarity. In January, the temperatures of them
were lowest, at above 5 °C. These degrees then experience a gradual increase
and reach the highest point in July, at approximately 20 °C. After that, there
is a moderate decline in the degrees of the following months.
In contrast, Auckland and Christchurch have the highest temperature in
January, reaching around 25°C while the lowest one is in July, at about 10°C
and 15°C, respectively. From August to December, the temperatures drop
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
slightly, which bottom at nearly 10°C in both locations of New Zealand.
158 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 6
The diagram below shows the production of steam using a gas cooled
nuclear reactor.
Source: https://www.ielts-exam.net/academic_writing_samples_task_1/720/
The diagram indicates the way that steam is produced by cooling gas in a
nuclear reactor.
It is clear from the diagram that steam is created from water which is the
main material in a complex process.
First, in a reactor, which has a radiation shielding, surrounds a pressure vessel
with two gas pipes connected to two ends of the heat exchanger from the
outside. Secondly, there are four graphite moderators containing uranium fuel
and a boron control rods holding it with the wall of the vessel and a shielding
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
by a charge tube which loads uranium fuel. The cool duct runs into the
distance of two graphite moderators by the gas blower and becomes hot gas
duct before entering the heat exchanger.
The heat exchanger has a pipe with one head taking water by water circulator
and the remaining head spreading out steam to turbo-alternator. Then, the
water entering in the heat changer becomes a steam due to a hot gas duct,
oomm
which then passes the pipe. Otherwise, it becomes cool gas before entering
the pressure vessel at the same time. It begins a new process producing steam
in the nuclear reactor.
.c.c
ss
193 words
rr
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 7
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The pie charts demonstrate the discrepancies in the proportion of
carbohydrates, protein and fat for three different diets.
Overall, while the average diet contains the lowest percentage of
carbohydrates out of three diets, it has the highest proportion of protein. In
addition, the healthy diet for sport makes up the lowest percentage of protein
and fat out of three diets.
It is obvious that accounting for only 15% of the healthy diet for sport, the
rate of fat in this diet is lower than two other diets with the same proportion
of 20%. Similarly, protein in the diet for sport is merely one-fourth of the
total intake of these three substances. At the same time, healthy and average
diets keep a larger proportion of fat at 30% and 40% respectively.
Regarding carbohydrates, it represents 60% of healthy diet for sport, which is
the biggest figure in these three diets. While a half of the total intake is
carbohydrates for a healthy diet, this substance occupies only 40% of the
average diet.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
171 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The pie charts compare the carbohydrates, protein and fat in the term of
different categories of diet, namely an average diet, a healthy diet and a
healthy diet for sport.
oomm
Overall, the percentage of carbohydrates intake of sports people is higher
than an average diet and healthy diet. In addition, the amount of fat accounts
c.c
for the smallest proportion in the whole graph.
.
ss
Carbohydrates make up 60% of the sport healthy diet while the figure for the
rr
average diet and healthy diet are slightly less than that of sportspeople, at
ttttee
40% and 50%, respectively. On the other hand, 40% of the average diet goes
to protein, which was higher than the other two by 10% and 15%
correspondingly.
aa
The rate of absorbing on fat is exactly the same in both the average diet and
sport diet.
151 words
SSMM
the healthy diet, at 20% but the figure dropped to only 15% for the healthy
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 8
The following diagram shows how greenhouse gases trap energy from
the Sun.
below.
The chart gives information about the process by which solar radiation is
blocked from escaping the Earth by greenhouse gases.
Overall, the process includes three main stages, beginning with the stage
where some sunlight that hits the Earth is reflected while some are sent out in
all directions, and ending with the trapping of heat by the atmosphere.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Firstly, when radiation from the Sun strikes the Earth, some of it is
immediately reflected back out to space by the atmosphere surrounding our
planet. At the next stage, some solar radiation that passes through the
atmosphere becomes heat, it is partly emitted by the Earth’s surface while
some of the Sun’s heat is normally trapped by greenhouse gases, keeping the
planet from freezing.
oomm
The entire process finishes with human activities, mainly by fossil fuels
combustion, are releasing carbon dioxide, which is the most prevalent
.c.c
greenhouse gas. Besides, the cutting down of the trees causing the decrease in
CO2 absorption, leading to the increase in global temperature.
165 words
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 9
The graph below gives information about the preferred leisure activities
of Australian children.
Write a report for a university lecturer describing the information
shown.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart illustrates the percentage of Australia students of ages 5 to 14
participated in different activities.
Overall, both two genders boys and girls are similarly being most attracted by
watching TV or video. While Boys spend more time on skateboarding or
rollerblading, Bike riding and electronic or computer games, Girls pay more
attention to Art and Craft.
Among 5 activities, there are 100% of boys and girls choosing Television or
videos as their favorite habit during free time. By contrast, the last choices of
boys and girls for leisure time are Art and Skateboarding at nearly 37% and
22% respectively.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Boys are doing their favor on bike riding and computer games more than girls
with about 20% excess each activity. Nearly 78% of boys ride bicycles while
only 59% of girls are interested in this activity. Besides, there is exactly 80%
of boys love computer games and only 60% of girls are on the same side.
158 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
oomm
The bar graph illustrates the activities that Australian children aged from 5 to
14 preferred to do in their free time.
.c.c
ss
Overall, it was clear that sedentary pursuits were far more popular than active
ones.
rr
ttttee
From the graph, all the boys and girls enjoyed watching TV or videos most in
their leisure time. In addition, 80% of boys and 60% of girls took great
aa
pleasure in playing electronic or computer games, which made this activity
become the second most popular activity among Australian kids.
spare time.
SSMM
Surprisingly, 75% of boys and nearly 60% of girls liked riding bikes in their
On the other hand, almost 60% of girls enjoyed the activities that were related
LLTT
to art and craft, while only 35% of boys chose them as their hobby. Although
skateboarding or rollerblading was less selected by children, it still attracted
35% of boys and 25% of girls to participate in.
151 words
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 10
The graph below shows how money was spent on different forms of
entertainment over a five-year period.
below.
The bar chart provides information about expenditures on several recreational

activities of people living in Asia, Europe, and United States in 1995 and
2000.
Overall, United States was the region spending the largest amount of money
on entertainment of all given areas. Furthermore, all places witnessed a
considerable increase in the expenditures on relaxing activities over five
years.
In a five-year period, the biggest amount of money devoted for fun belonged
to the United States. In 1995, Americans spent 184 billion dollars to enjoy
different types of media, compared to under one hundred billion dollars spent
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
by Asians and Europeans. While the amount of money spent on music, video,
and cinema almost unchanged in the US after five years, about 40 billion
dollars, this figure for television and publishing rose rapidly from about 140
billion dollars to 200 billion dollars.
There was also an upward trend in the total expense on entertaining goods in
Asia and Europe. The figure for Asia, in detail, increased noticeably from
oomm
around 60 billion dollars in 1995 to 110 billion dollars in 2000. During the
same period, almost all types of amusement in Europe became more popular,
especially television and publishing.
.c.c
ss
196 words
rr
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 11
The Table below shows the results of a survey that asked 6800 Scottish
adults (aged 16 years and over) whether they had taken part in different
cultural activities in the past 12 months.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The table shows data on the proportion of adults in 4 separate age groups
who participated in different cultural activities last year in Scotland.
Overall, the figures for youngsters between 16 and 24-year-olds were always
the highest of all, with the notable exceptions of undertaking crafts and
cultural purchases, which were lower than others.
While 35% of 16-to-24-year-olds took part in cultural performances, the
percentages of 25-and-above-year-olds were significantly lower, at around
22% and 17%. However, in terms of undertaking crafts and cultural
purchases, there was only 11% of the youngest group, compared to 17% of
the 25-to-44-year-old group, and 22%, 18% of the oldest group.
In this same year, the figures for the third group who participated in visual
arts, writing and computer based were 11%, 5%, 5% respectively and 30%,
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
17%, 1% for the first group, which was a big difference. Meanwhile, visual
arts were the most favourite cultural activities of people at the age of 16 and
over, at 6%. Additionally, Scotland saw a similar figure for 25-to-44-year-
olds who wrote about cultures.
175 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
oomm
The table gives information on what cultural activities 6800 Scottish adults
c.c
with the minimum age of 16 attended in the period of 12months.
.
ss
Overall, it is evident that any performance which includes dancing, singing,
rr
playing musical instruments and acting had the highest level of participation,
ttttee
whereas computer based had the lowest rate during the year.
Firstly, while elderly people were more likely to participate in undertaking
aa
any crafts and cultural purchases with 22% and 18% correspondingly, any
performance was the most highly regarded in the aged from 16 to 24 and
SSMM
from 25 to 44, with 35% and 22% respectively.
Secondly, there was a significantly different picture in participation in visual
arts and writing of the youngest people comparing to that of the oldest
LLTT
people. In detail, 30% of the aged 16-24 had taken part in visual arts which
was twice as much as that of the aged 25-44 and triple the aged 45-74. A
similar pattern was seen in writing activity, in which the 16-24 age group was
IIEE
three times higher than the rest of two aged groups.
179 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 12
The bar chart illustrates the level of participation in different sports activities
by gender in the UK in 2005.
Overall, while noticeable sex disparities were recorded in soccer and netball,
the other categories experienced slight imbalances.
Twenty percent of schoolboys took part in football which four times higher
than around five percent of schoolgirls did. On the contrary, the number of
young female players of netball made up around 16% comparing to only
about 2% of their counterparts.
Regarding two remaining sports, swimming was more popular for girls than
boys, whose percentages were around 16% and 13%, respectively; in
contrast, the proportion of boys involved in basketball was marginally higher
than that of girls at approximately 15% and 14%, correspondingly. The figure
of those who did not play any sport was insignificant, which was precisely
5% for girls and about 4% for boys.
151 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 13
The charts below show the proportions of British students at one
university in England who were able to speak other languages in
addition to English, in 2000 and 2010.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The given pie charts compare the ratios of British students at a university in
England who could speak foreign languages along with English in the two
years 2000 and 2010.
At first glance it is clear that the number of students who were able to speak
only Spanish occupied the largest proportions; meanwhile, there was just
www.zandienglish.ir

one-tenth of all the students who could speak only German at this university
in both years.
For instance, there was one-fifth of students could not speak another
language in 2000, this number declined by half in 2010. The percentages of
students who could speak two other languages and German were the same,
which accounted for 10% in 2000. However in the year 2010, while the
number of multilinguals increased to 15%, the number of students can speak
German remained unchanged.
The year 2000 witnessed the number of students who were able to speak only
Spanish held the biggest rate – 30% and this number was 15% when it comes
to another language. In 2010, each of these both numbers went up by 5%.
Interestingly, there were 15% of the students being able to speak only French
in 2000; however, there were not any students could speak only this language
at the university.
207 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The pie charts illustrate the percentage of British students who could speak
one or more languages including French, German, Spanish except for English
at a university in the United Kingdom in two different years.
Overall, a number of students who knew just two languages or less
constituted the vast majority in comparison with the others who could speak
at least three languages. In addition, the proportion of students speaking no
more than two languages decreased slightly from 2000 to 2010.
In 2000, the British students being good at Spanish accounted for the largest
percentage, at 30%, which tripled the number of ones who could speak
German or at least two other languages. Besides, the figures for speaking
English and French or Another language were exactly the same, at 15%,
which was 5% lower than speaking English only.
In 2010, there was a slight increase in the proportion of British students who
were able to speak Spanish from 30% to 35% after 10 years. Also, both the
number of the students using another language and the ones knowing two
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
other languages grew by 5%, to 20% and 15%, respectively. Meanwhile, the
percentage of English students declined 10% compared to the figure for the
students who could speak English and French, a fall of 5%. Finally, German
spoken by British students remained stable at 10% during this period.
219 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 14
The bar chart below shows shares of expenditures for five major
categories in the United States, Canada, the United Kingdom, and Japan
in the year 2009.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart compares the percentages of customers’ expenses, which are
split into 5 groups, in 4 countries namely the United States, Canada, The
United Kingdom and Japan in 2009.
It is clear that spending on housing and health care was the most popular in
the US, whereas Canadian poured the most amount of money into
transportation and clothing.
Money spent on food was the highest in Japan, accounting for approximately
23% which was followed by the UK with 20%. In contrast, the figures for
dwellers living in the US and Canada were nearly the same at just under 15%.
With regard to housing, American spent more than 25% of their income on it,
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
which was the highest rate recorded in the chart, followed by those who lived
in the UK with around 23% and Canada and Japan with around 20%.
Additionally, 20% of the expenditure of Canadian was allocated to
transportation, which doubled the figure for the Japanese and from 3-5%
higher than those for the US and UK.
In terms of the last two categories, people living in the US expended the most
oomm
money on health care service with just about 7 percent, compared to under
5% of Canada and Japan and only 2% of the UK. In contrast, the highest rate
.c.c
of expenditure on clothing was the Canadians’ with nearly 6% while those
figures for other countries were from 4-5%.
219 words
rrss
ttttee
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The bar graph illustrates data on the expenditure of people in 4 separate
aa
countries on various categories in the year 2009.
MM
Overall, housing accounted for the greatest proportion of expense in most of
the countries while healthcare made up the smallest share. Additionally, the
SS
expenditure on transportation in these nations was significant.
LLTT
The largest expenses of the American and the British were on housing, which
was around 26 percent and 24 percent respectively. Moreover, the spending
of British people on food was exactly 20 percent, which was about 12 percent
IIEE
more than that of American citizens. Likewise, people in the UK used 2
percent more for clothing than in the US. In contrast, transportation was more
spent on in American than in Britain. The figures were around 25 percent and
20 percent respectively.
The largest percentage of the Japanese’s budget, 25 percent, was used for
food whereas the Canadian spent most on housing with 21 percent of their
income. Furthermore, the expenditure on clothing in Canada was slightly
greater than in Japan; a difference of around 2%. Similarly, the proportion of
expense on transportation in the former country was precisely 20 percent,
which was twofold that in the latter one. Finally, both nations spent nearly 5
percent of their budget on healthcare.
www.zandienglish.ir

212 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 15
The graph below shows the number of visitors to three museums
Museum visitor numbers, 2000-2005.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
The bar graph illustrates the number of yearly visitors to three museums in
LLTT
New York, Tokyo, and China from 2000 to 2005.
Overall, the number of visitors of MET museum in New York and National
IIEE
museum in China saw an upward trend over the surveyed period, while the
number of people visiting Edo museum fell.
In 2000, there were around 13.5 million people visiting China National
Museum, while 12 million and about 6.5 million visitors entered Met and
Edo museum respectively. The number of visitors to National Museum in
China increased gradually and reached the peak of just under 16 million
people in 2005.
The number of people visiting Edo museum in Tokyo remained stable in
2001 before falling sharply to its bottom in 2003, at around 6.5 million
visitors. The figure for MET museum in New York dropped significantly in
2001 to a half of that in 2000 and stayed at this level in 2003. Over the latter
part of the period, the figures for Edo and MET museum saw a considerable
www.zandienglish.ir

rise to 10 and over 14 million people respectively.
182 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 16
The bar chart below shows the percentage of students who passed their
high school competency exams, by subject and gender, during the period
2010-2011.
oomm
Students passing high school competency exams, by subject and gender,
2010-2011
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart gives information about the proportions of school boys and
girls passing their high school competency exam, by subject between 2010
and 2011.
www.zandienglish.ir

Overall, students of both sexes did better in Mathematics, Computer Science,
and Foreign languages than in other subjects. Additionally, girls surpassed
boys in most of the subjects (except Geography).
It can easily be seen from the chart that more than 40% of the students passed
Mathematics, Computer Science, and Foreign Languages exams. In addition,
the differences between the passing rates of boys and girls were not quite big,
at 0.6% in Foreign Languages, 0.8% in Mathematics and 4.2% in Computer
Science. In contrast, in Physics, Chemistry, History, and Geography, less
than 40% of the students performed their tests successfully. The difference in
the percentage of girls’ results and boys’ also varied a lot, from 2.1% to
16.1%.
Furthermore, the girls showed a better performance than boys in most of the
subjects. Particularly, the passing results of Chemistry exam done by school
girls were far better than by schoolboys, at 30.2% and 14.1% respectively.
Only in Geography did girls perform less impressively than boys.
188 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The given chart demonstrates the proportion of boys and girls who completed
successfully their high school competency exams by subject during the
period 2010-2011.
Overall, it is noticeably seen that girls outperformed boys in most of the high
school subjects. While results for boys and girls in most subjects were
roughly comparable, there were significant differences in Chemistry and
Geography.
Girls achieved by far their best result in Computer Science with the highest
pass rate of 56.3%, followed by 42.1% of boys. There was the same pattern
in 4 subjects: Math, Foreign Languages, Physics and History in which the
pass rates of girls were slightly greater than those of boys. While the figure in
mathematics and foreign languages were nearly 50% of both genders, the
percentage in physics were 36.7% and 34.5% for girls and boys respectively.
This was followed by 25.6% of girls and 22.9% of boys who passed the
exams in History.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
By contrast, in chemistry subject, the pass rate of girl students was
outstanding with 30.2% which doubled that of boy students. The only subject
which boys’ results better than that of girls was Geography in which they
achieve the pass rate of 30.4%, which was 10% higher than the figure for
girls.
206 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 17
The illustrations show how chocolate is produced.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The flow chart depicts the process of manufacturing chocolate.
Overall, there are total 10 main stages of making chocolate, beginning with
harvesting pods on cacao trees and ending with the production of chocolate.
Initially, ripe red pods are plucked from cacao trees which are grown in
South America, Africa, and Indonesia. The next step shows that pods
harvested are split into the outer shell and white beans which subsequently
fermented in the third stage. Following fermented stage, those beans are
spread under sunlight until they became dried. Then, once the dry beans have
been placed in large sacks, they are ready to be delivered to the factory by
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
train or lorry.
In the factory, the seventh step sees dehydrated beans are roasted at the
temperature of 350°C, followed by being crushed in a rotating machine to
remove their outer shell. The final stage is marked with the inner part of the
bean pressed and liquid chocolate produced.
157 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
oomm
.c.c
The pictures illustrate the process of making chocolate.
rrss
It is clear that there are ten distinct stages involved in chocolate
manufacturing, beginning with harvesting ripe red pods of cacao trees and
ttttee
ending with extracting liquid chocolate.
At the beginning of the process, people harvest ripe red pods of cacao trees
aa
which are usually grown in Southern America, Africa, and Indonesia. Then,
white cocoa beans inside the harvest pods are removed from the pods before
SSMM
being fermented into a pool. Following that, the product is spread under the
sunlight. Once the beans are dried, they are packed into large sacks before
being transported by train or lorry to depots.
L TT
Next, dried cocoa beans are taken to factories. Subsequently, the beans are
L
roasted at a temperature of about 350 degrees Celcius before passing through
IIEE
a crusher for their outer shell to be removed. In the final stage, the inner part
of beans is pressed, resulting liquid chocolate is produced and ready to use.
161 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 18
The diagrams below show the life cycle of a species of large fish called
the salmon.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The diagram illustrates the development of the salmon during its life cycle.
Overall, the process involves seven distinct stages, beginning with the
newborn eggs in fresh water and culminating in the development of an adult
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
salmon.
To begin with, the floating eggs are hatched in around 3 months. The next
step is when each egg is turned into the Alevin and is fed off yolk-sac for
several weeks. Over the period from 5 to 10 weeks, it becomes the fry and
starts to swim in the water. Gradually, the Parr grows up until it is several
months old, it develops “finger” markings on its body.
o mm
The next stage is when the Smolt is about from 1 to 3 years old, they all
o
gather in groups and head out to the ocean. The adult has to spend
.c.c
approximately from 1 to 8 years at sea before forming the spawning adults.
ss
After laying a large number of eggs in the water within 2 weeks, the salmon
rr
die. Having been finished these steps, the life cycle of the salmon starts over
ttttee
again.
179 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
aa
and reproduce.
SSMM
The diagrams illustrate how salmon begin their life, become adult salmons
Overall, a salmon experienced 3 main stages before breeding in 2 different
LLTT
aquatic locations including 2 periods in rivers and the last period in the sea.
Therefore, newborns overcome the same period.
IIEE
Salmon begin life as eggs on small stones, which were bred among reeds in
slow-moving upper reaches of a river. After approximately five to six months
the eggs hatch into fry, which is three to eight centimeters in length. Fry will
live in a lower river with fast flowing waters for four years before reaching
twelve to fifteen centimeters. In this period, it is called ‘smolt’.
Smolts migrate into the open sea, after 5 years living at sea, it will grow up
and have an adult size with 70-76 centimeters. After that, it will immigrate
into where it was hatched to lay eggs and newborns will start the same cycle.
155 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 19
The graph below gives information from a report in 2010 about the use
of energy in Australia since 1980 with projections until 2030.
The line graph compares the consumption of six types of energy in the USA
Generally, the total amount of non-renewable energy consumed over the
period of 50 years is far more remarkable than the amount of the renewable
one.
In 1950, the amount of Petrol and Oil consumed was highest, at 35
quadrillion units, while the figure for coal and natural gas was significantly
larger than the other types of energy excluding petrol and oil, at 20
quadrillion units and above 15 quadrillion units respectively. Petrol and oil
consumption dramatically increases and is estimated to reach the highest
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
point in the graph at 50 quadrillion units in 2030. The other two figures
gradually went up in the same period, except for the natural gas consumption
plateaued since 2015.
Three types of renewable energy shared the same consumption at
approximately 5 quadrillion units in 1980. 50 years after. Nuclear
consumption is forecasted to use to nearly 9 quadrillion units, while
oomm
solar/wind’s figure experiences a slight increase just above 5 quadrillion
units. At the same time, there will be a small decrease in the amount of
hydropower consumed.
.c.c
ss
190 words
rr
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 20
The graph below gives information on wages of Canada over a ten-year
period. Write a report for a university tutor describing the information
shown.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The line graph illustrates changes in salaries of people living in Canada
during a period of 10 years since 1993.
It is noticeable that the figure experienced some fluctuations with a slight
decrease towards the end of the research period.
According to the graph, the wage’s growth rate was fairly erratic during the
first half of the period. The growth rate started at two percent in 1993, then
followed by few variations, first doubling to four percent in 1994,
subsequently falling back to a low of three percent in 1995. Thereafter, the
growth gained a remarkable recovery in the next three years, rising by one
percent each year to reach its highest top of six percent in 1998.
In the last five years, the figure proved few fluctuations again; however, the
trend was downward this time. After dropping from 1998 peak, the growth
experienced a slight climb in 2000, just to slowly come back down again by
one percent per year until reaching its lowest point of one percent in 2002.
Then in 2003, the figure for wage growth slight rose to nearly the same
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
amount as in the beginning of the whole period.
194 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
This line graph shows the percentages of growth in wages in Canada from
1993 to 2003.
oomm
It can be clearly seen that the highest and lowest records respectively went to
the year 1998 and 2002.
.c.c
For the first 5-year period, the rate remains high with the minimum growth of
rrss
2% as recorded in 1993. There was a sharp rise of 2% in the next year before
it dropped to around 3% between 1995 and 1996. However, from this point
ttttee
on, the growth percentage of wage rose rapidly until getting to 6% in 1998,
which was also the peak over the 10-year period.
aa
In contrast, the other five year was a remark of an alarming plummet. Just a
year after the peak, the growth percentage dropped by 3% - the biggest
SSMM
change over 10 years. It continued to fall from 2000 to 2002, where the
growth rate was only 1%, before recovering to 2% in 2003. Another
interesting feature is that, despite the unstable growing pattern, the wages
177 words
LLTT
growth rate in Somecountry was remaining positive throughout the period.
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 21
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The maps illustrate the transformation of West Park Secondary School over
the period of 60 years from 1950 to 2010.
Overall, the school was completely informed over the period. The most
significant change was the new car park replaced for the residential area and
farmland, while the main building near the main road remained stable.
From 1950 to 1980, a small-size car park and a science block were built right
on the site where houses used to be. Farmland was demolished to create a
large sports field. Meanwhile, there was no change for school and
playground.
In 2010, science block and the main building still remained at the initial
location. However, the playground located at the south-east area had smaller
size and shared its place for the new sports field. Whereas, the position of the
sports field in the past was reconstructed in order to extend the car park.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
151 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The maps illustrate how West Park secondary school developed over a 60-
year period from 1950 to 2010.
It is clear that the school changed considerably over the period shown, with
sports field in 2010.

oomm
the disappearance of residential area, farmland and the appearance of the
.c.c
In 1950, there were some houses to the southwest of the main road, but these
ss
houses were knocked down and replaced by a car park and science block in
rr
1980. Farmland was located in the southwest corner, but it was demolished in
ttttee
1980 to make way for a sports field. Meanwhile, the playground in the
southeast area remained unchanged.
aa
From 1980 to 2010, the car park was widened to the south, forcing the sports
field to be moved a little to the east and the playground was narrowed.
MM
However, the science block was located in the middle of the school and the
main building of the school still remained.
154 words
SS
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 22
The maps below show the village of Stokeford in 1930 and 2010.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The given maps illustrate the transformations occurring in Stokeford in the
period from 1930 to 2010.
As is presented in the given illustration of the maps, we can see that the town
became more developed with the disappearance of farmland and the
expansion along with the renovation of residential areas.
After 80-year period shown, Stokeford experienced a destruction of farmland
which accounted for the majority of land initially in 1930. This disappearance
was a staggering increase in shops on farmland ground both to the southwest
and the northeast of the city. The spread of shops focused on the city center
and made the most striking [prominent] change to Stokeford.
The primary schools in the east side of the village remained the same during
the given period although some additional constructions were made with it.
In addition, the two shops opposite to the primary school were demolished.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Other prominent changes taking place in the village is that the large house
located on the left side of the school was rebuilt for usage of a retirement
home. Besides, the garden in front of the large house was narrowed [reduced
in size] for the establishment of shops there. The school stayed at the same
position, but it had been built some additional constructions.
210 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
oomm
Stokeford from 1930 to 2010.
.c.c
The maps illustrate the developments that occurred at a village called
rrss
It is noticeable from the maps that the number of residential houses in this
ttttee
village significantly increased over the period. Additionally, no farmlands
were to be found by the year 2010.
aa
In 1930, Stokeford was mainly covered with farmlands. There was only one
main route running parallel with the river. Both features, however, showed
MM
changes in 2010, with the appearance of smaller roads and houses. These
houses were densely situated next to the roads as well as the primary school.
SS
On the southeast area of the village, gardens became smaller in size due to
LLTT
the growing numbers of houses. Meanwhile, one of the large houses inside
the gardens was turned into a retirement home. The bridge on the north
corner, on the other hand, still remained without any modification throughout
IIEE
the years. Moreover, the shops beside the post office, which is still in the
centre of the village, disappeared after 80 years.
168 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 23
The diagram illustrates different steps involved in the production of milk.

It is clear from the diagrams that there are 7 main steps in the process,
beginning with milking cows and ending with the final milk products being
sold in the stores.
At the first stage of this process, cows which are fed on the grassland are
milked by machine two times a day. Secondly, that amount of milk is
refrigerated in the storage before turning to the next step where the milk is
delivered by tankers to the dairy every day.
At the following stage in the dairy, an amount of this material is made into
other products of milk such as cheese, cream or butter, while the remaining
milk is pasteurized and packaged into bottles. The final stage of this process
is when these products are transported to the supermarkets and shops and
ready for consuming.
151 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 24
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
The pie charts show contributions to pollution in a specific area of ocean
SSMM
Overall, pollutants from air contributed the highest percentage of pollution
while the smallest contribution was litter.
LLTT
As can be seen from the charts, both domestic sewage and offshore oil saw a
considerable rise in their contributions. While the figure for domestic sewage
went up from 18% to 29% in 2007, the percentage of offshore oil was nearly
IIEE
triple.
On the other hand, the rest categories witnessed a significant decline.
Industrial waste entering the ocean dipped rapidly to 9% in 2007. Likewise,
farm waste only accounted for 2%, being halved compared to ten years
before. Meanwhile, the proportion of Marine in 1997 and 2007 was 22% and
17% respectively. In 2007, fewer pollutants from air came to the sea. This
discrepancy was just only 1%.
151 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 25
The two pie charts below show how employment is divided in Tanzania
and Ireland.
The charts illustrate the differences in terms of employment distribution

between Tanzania and Ireland in 1999.
Overall, in Tanzania, agriculture accounted for the highest proportion while
most of the employees in Ireland were attracted in services sectors. By
contrast, construction witnessed the smallest percentage in Tanzania;
whereas, water and energy were the lowest figures in Ireland.
Looking back at the charts, it was obvious that 79% of workers in Tanzania
were in agriculture. After that, services and manufacturing were two sectors
in which had a lower percentage in this country. More importantly, while the
smallest figure was construction in Tanzania with only 0.6 percent, the lowest
one in Ireland was 1.3% in water and energy.
In Ireland, service was the sector attracted a significant figure at 71, 1
percent. Meanwhile, manufacturing was at a lower percentage after that.
Finally, construction, agriculture, and forestry were the third rank in this
country.
151 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 26
The charts below show household spending patterns in two countries
between 1980 and
2008.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
MODEL ANSWER 1:
LLTT
IIEE
The pie charts compare the UK and New Zealand households in terms of
their expenditure on five different categories in the years 1980 and 2008.
Overall, the largest expenditure was leisure activities in the UK, and utility
bills in New Zealand. It is also evident that there had been some changes in
the spending structures in both mentioned countries.
In 1980, expenditure on Food/drink of UK households stood at 23% while
that of New Zealand was slightly higher, at 29%. The figures fell over the
surveyed period, by a significant 10% in the UK and 4% in New Zealand. A
different trend was seen in utility bills whose figures increased slightly from
26% to 28% in the UK and from 27% to 31% in New Zealand.
Of the rest categories, leisure activities were the highest expense, accounting
www.zandienglish.ir

for around a third of the total spending in the UK, compared to about 17-18%
in New Zealand. An average amount of 15% of the total budget was spent on
transport in both countries. Meanwhile, the percentages of other expenses
were exactly the same in both the UK and New Zealand, at 9% in 1980 and
rose to 11% in 2008.
198 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The pie charts compare the figure for the UK and New Zealand in terms of
different categories of household expenditures from 1980 to 2008.
Overall, spending on leisure activities and utility bills accounted for the
largest proportions of expenses in both countries. Additionally, both the UK
and New Zealand experienced a decrease in transport, food and drink.
In 1980, the largest expenditures in the UK were for leisure activities and
utility bills (27% and 26%), while the figures for New Zealand were 18% and
27% respectively. In terms of food and drink, the figure for New Zealand was
slightly 6% higher than that for the UK, at 29% and 23%, respectively.
In the year 2008, the UK households spent 2% less on transport than their
counterpart. The percentage of spending on leisure activities was 17% in
New Zealand, whereas that figure was double for the UK (34%). Finally,
people in both nations spent a similar percentage of their budget on the other
categories, at 11%.
165 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 27
The charts below show the percentage of time younger and older people
spend on various Internet activities in their free time (excluding email).
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
The pie charts illustrate how people of younger and older age groups allocate
their free time to/for on various activities on the Internet.
IIEE
Overall, the two groups have the opposing patterns in their favorite choices.
In addition, younger people tend to spend their time more evenly in the
activities than their counterparts.
To specify, while social networking consumes 24%, the largest proportion of
time of the 18-26 age group, it is considered as one of the least popular for
the 60-70 age group, at only 8%. Inevitably, the former is exactly 3 times
higher than the latter. Likewise, younger people spend 18% of their time on
playing games, which is again triple that of the older.
In contrast, the older group regards making bookings for cinema or travel as
the best use they make of the Internet with 29% of the total time, which
exceeds that of the younger youngster by roughly 6 times. By comparison,
the other activities share quite similar figures between two groups. For
www.zandienglish.ir

example, researching on health data and making purchases capture slightly
higher ratios of time for the older users than the younger. Moreover, an
insignificant difference is noticed in the time spent on for accessing music or
films with the former 17% and the latter 21%.
212 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 28
The pie chart shows the percentage of women in poverty and the bar
chart shows poverty rates by sex and age. They are from the United
States in 2008.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
The pie chart displays the distribution of poor American women among
various groups. The bar chart compares the percentage of poverty between
genders in different age groups.
Overall, it can be seen that single women with no dependent children
accounted for the majority of women in poverty in the US. In addition,
www.zandienglish.ir

women were recorded with a higher poverty rate compared with men at any
age.
As shown in the pie chart, over half (54%) of women living in poor
conditions were single and had no dependent children. Single women with
dependent children accounted for one-fourth of the total poverty while
married females with no children came last with only 8%.
According to the bar chart, women seemed to dominate men in terms of
living in poverty. Specifically, poor females aged 18-24 made up over 20%
while the figure for males of the same age group was less than 15%.
151 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 29
This bar chart illustrates the number of students studying different
subjects at university level over a five-year period.
Write a report for a university lecturer describing the Information below.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
The bar chart shows the figure for students who studied in five different types
of subjects at the university between 1996/97 and 2000/01.
LLTT
Overall, the numbers of learners in medicine and dentistry, physical sciences,
biological sciences and computer sciences increased while the figures for
engineering and technology students decreased. Also, engineering and
IIEE
technology were by far the most common subject which learners studied at
university.
Over the period between 1996 and 1997, the figures for engineering and
technology students were the highest, at around 135000 people. By contrast,
the rate for those who studied in medicine and dentistry was at the lowest
point of exactly 40000 people. Approximately 80000 students who studied in
biological sciences, compared to 75000 people in physical sciences.
The number of the person who enrolled in/participated in/went to college for
engineering and technology reduced over the period between 1996/97 and
2000/01 and reached the lowest point in 2000/01 at precisely 120000 people.
On the other hands, the figures for computer sciences significantly jumped
www.zandienglish.ir

from 75000 to exactly 12000 people over the period of five years. While
biological sciences and medicine and dentistry were subjects that witnessed
gradually increased around 95000 and 42000 students, respectively in
2000/01; the number of physical sciences’ learners steadily decreased over
the period between 1996 /97 and 2000/01.
216 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 30
The table below gives information about the daily cost of water per
person in five different countries. (Figures are based on the minimum
daily requirement per person of 11.5 litres.)
Cost of minimum daily water requirement by country
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
The given table compares the cost of daily water consumed per capita as well
as how much it accounted the average daily income among 5 different
countries.
LLTT
Overall, it can be seen that Tanzania had the highest cost of water drunk
IIEE
every day while the figure for the US was lowest. In addition, the cost of
daily water in Tanzania ranked first in terms of percentage of average daily
wage.
It took a Tanzanian 6.4 cents to afford for the amount of water needed each
day. Meanwhile, in the US, a person only paid 0.85 cents to purchase the
amount of water that he/she consumed daily. The cost for Uganda, at 4.1
cents per capita per day, was also too much higher than the other countries,
almost 3 and 4 times higher than the figures for Pakistan (at 1.76 cents) and
the UK (at only 1.3 cents).
Moving further, each person in Tanzania had to spend 5.7% of his/her daily
wage on daily water consumption, while each in the US and the UK spent
www.zandienglish.ir

less than 0.01% of their earnings every day.
182 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 31
The table below shows statistics about the top five countries for
international tourism in 2012 and 2013.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
TT
The table compares the world’s 5 most popular tourist destinations in terms
of tourist arrivals and spending in 2012 and 2013.
LL
Overall, France was the most attractive destination in the 2-year period while
IIEE
the fifth rank belonged to Italy. However, among those 5 countries, the USA
topped the list in terms of tourist spending.
In 2012, France saw the highest figure of tourists, at 83 million and nearly
double compared with Italy, at 46.4 million. Spain and China shared the
similar number of visitors which were slightly over 57 million while the USA
stayed at 66.7 million. 2013 saw the increase in numbers for 4 countries with
the notable exception of China.
The USA earned the most revenue from tourism industry at 126.2 billion and
139.6 billion dollars, in 2012 and 2013 respectively. Meanwhile, Spain took
the second position with 60.4 billion dollars in 2013, followed by France,
China, and Italy in terms of the amount of money. Interestingly, although
www.zandienglish.ir

China witnessed a fall in tourists’ number, they still gained a slight rise in
tourists’ expenditure from 50 to 51.7 billion dollars.
182 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 32
The table below shows the results of surveys in 2000, 2005 and 2010
about one university.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The provided table illustrates data about the satisfaction level of students in a
university in terms of different items in 2000, 2005 and 2010.
It is clear that print resources were highly appreciated by the largest
proportion of students while the smallest number of them felt satisfied with
the range of modules offered. Also, most of the facilities in the school were
improved over shown time, receiving good ratings from more students.
In 2000, 87% of school’s students agreed that print resources were useful,
outgoing in the column of the year 2000. This figure increased by 2% in 2005
before falling slightly to 88% in 2010. Besides, a large number of students
were attracted by the improvement of teaching quality and electronic
www.zandienglish.ir

resources when the good assessment for these two items climbed
considerably from 65% to 69% and 45% to 88% respectively.
By contrast, the range of modules offered seemed to lose students’
confidence over the period shown, with the percentage of students being
pleased with this category dropping from 32% in 2000 to 30% in 2005 and
27% in 2010. Also, there was a constantly high proportion of students trust
buildings/teaching facilities, at 77%.
195 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The table chart highlights information about the proportion of student’s
satisfaction for a variety of elements of a university between 2000 and 2010.
Overall, there was an upward trend in the percentage of students who are
satisfied with the university, with two exceptions in that of a range of
modules offered and building facilities.
Regarding print resources, the figure changed slightly during the period.
However, it was still the best compared to others. With respect to electronic
resources, the figure went up dramatically in a 10-year period. It started at
45% in 2000 and nearly doubled in 2010 (at 88%) which was the same as that
of print resources.
Compared to others, the proportion of students who gave good comments for
teaching facilities remained stable at 77%, lower 11% than the two first-rank
factors. In contrast, there was a marginal decrease in the figure of a range of
modules offered, from 32% to 27% in 2010, declined by 5%. It is clear that
this was given the worst score by students.
171 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 33
The percentage of workers in agriculture, manufacturing and services in
7 European countries in 2014.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
The table illustrates the proportion of the workforce in three different sectors
IIEE
of an economy in 7 countries of Europe.
Overall, services sector employed the highest percentage of workers in each
country, while the agriculture sector was the least common, except in
Romania.
Service-related workers in the UK accounted for over 80% of the entire
economy, which was also the highest figure in the table. Following the UK
were Greece, France, and Germany at 80.6%, 78.9% and 73.8% respectively.
Interestingly, Romania, which had the lowest percentage of service workers
(43.9%) was the country that occupied the highest proportion in agriculture at
28.2%, while that of the UK was the lowest in this sector and in the table, at
1.3%. This figure of Romania roughly doubled the second highest proportion
in agriculture, at 12.1% in Ukraine. The percentages of other countries were
www.zandienglish.ir

lower than 3.5%
The UK also had the lowest proportion in manufacturing, at 15.2%. This was
less than a half of the highest percentage in this sector, at 37.4% in the Czech
Republic. Ukraine and Romania took up for the second and third place in
manufacturing, at 29 and 27.9%. Those for other countries were less than one
fifth.
200 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 34
The bar chat shows the highest qualification attained by sex for working-
age population in Wales in 2001/2002.
make a comparison when relevant.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
The bar chat shows the data of a survey conducted for the highest
qualifications accomplished by Welsh people in working age between 2001
IIEE
and 2002. There is a categorical distinction between men and women.
Overall, the number of males having GCE A level or equivalent were by far
highest while GCSE grade A*-C or equivalent was achieved mainly by
females.
To be more specific, women outnumbered man for a percentage of those
holding Higher education qualification and GCE A grade A*-C or equivalent.
Nevertheless, gender disparity in higher education qualification was not
much at around 3%. Meanwhile, this discrepancy in GCE A grade A*-C was
approximately tripled.
For the rest of qualifications, males surpassed female. In GCE A-level and
equivalent, the proportion of man attaining was nearly doubled that of
www.zandienglish.ir

women. The figures for man and woman possessing degree or equivalent
were about 13% and 11% respectively. Other qualifications were much in
common between man and women. It’s noticeable that the population of
females who didn’t have any qualifications is considerably higher than that of
males.
176 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 35
The chart shows British emigration to selected destinations between 2004
and 2007.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
The bar chart compares the number of British people who emigrated to five
different countries over the period 2004 to 2007.
Overall, it is clear that Australia was the most popular destination throughout
the period shown. Besides that, while the figures of Australia and the USA
fluctuated, the figures of three other countries was relatively constant.
In 2004, emigration to Australia was 42,000 people, which was 7,000 higher
than Spain and twice as high as the New Zealand, the USA and France.
Although the figures for Australia reduced in 2005 and 2007 at 38,000 and
43,000 respectively, in 2006, it reached a peak at more than 50,000, which
was the highest point in the whole chart.
Spain was the second popular choice with around 35,000 in 2004 and 2005
www.zandienglish.ir

though from 2006 to 2007, the number of people decreased slightly to
28,000. Approximately 20,000 people came to New Zealand and the USA
each year, whereas although France attracted nearly 35,000 in 2005, it was
the country with the least people coming to in the end of the period with only
under 20,000.
182 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 36
The following bar chart shows the different modes of transport used to
travel to and from work in one European city in 1960, 1980 and 2000.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
MODEL ANSWER 1:
IIEE
The chart illustrates how people in one European country uses 4 types of
transport to commute to and from work in 1960, 1980 and 2000.
Overall, while the use of cars increased over the period, there were downward
trends in the percentage of people using the other means of transport.
In 1960, going on foot accounted for the largest figure among 4 types of
transport with 35% of total travellers. By contrast, only about 7% of people in
this country used cars for commuting. Meanwhile, the proportion of people
who commuted by bus and bike was 20% and about 27%, respectively.
www.zandienglish.ir

The period from 1960 to 2000 saw a sharp increase in the figure for car
commuters to about 37%, the most exceptional means of transport in this
duration of time. At the same time/ Simultaneously, the percentage of people
traveling by bike and on foot decreased dramatically, ending the period with
only 10% for walking and about 7% of the bike as opposed to the figure for
the bus, experiencing fluctuation and standing at/ reaching about 17% in
2000.
180 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The bar chart illustrates data on the percentage of 4 types of transport people
used to go to work in a specific European city in 3 separate years, 1960, 1980
and 2000.
Overall, the number of people who utilized cars increased while there was a
significant fall in the use of bikes. Besides, the rate for moving by bus
remained relatively constant.
In 1960, the proportion of people walking was the highest, at nearly 35
percent. By contrast, the rate for those who used car stayed at the lowest
point of around 5 percent. Approximately 25 percent of users moved by bike,
compared to nearly 20 percent of people choosing the bus.
The percentage of car utilizers went up to over 35 percent in 2000- a seven-
fold increase whereas the figure for foot declined dramatically to under 10
percent. Similar to walking, the rate for people using bike also decreased by
about 5 percent from 1960 to 1980 and then slumped to approximately 5
percent in 2000. On the other hand, users moving by bus fluctuated slightly at
around 15 percent in 2000 after climbing over 25 percent in 1980.
190 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 37
graph below.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
MODEL ANSWER 1:
LLTT
IIEE
The line graph illustrates information about rates of smoking in Someland
Overall, the number of men who smoked decreased steadily while the rate of
smoking for women fluctuated and this trend was lower than that of men.
The number of male smokers showed a downward trend during the 40-year
period. In 1960, there were 600 men in every 1000 was smoking. This
number gradually declined to about 500 by 1975, about 400 by 1985 and
continued to drop rapidly to approximately 250 in 2000.
In contrast, the rate of female smokers varied significantly than that of men.
By 1960, this trend was very low at only about 80 in every 1000, lower than
male smokers 520. However, 15 years later, the rate of smoking for women
www.zandienglish.ir

increased dramatically above 300 in 1975, which was its highest point during
the period. After a 5-year period, it always remained stable like in 1975, at
which point the figure began to gradual decline and fell to about 200 by 2000.
171 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The line chart compares the proportion of people smoking between men and
women in Someland from 1960 to 2000.
Overall, it can be seen that there was a gradual decline in the figure for men
smoking while for women, the trend was a general increase. The gap between
the number of male and female smokers became smaller throughout the
period.
Over the 1960-1970 period, the figures dropped steadily from the highest
point of the whole line graph, 60%, to above 55%. Moreover, in the
following 20 years, there was a gradual decline in the percentage of male
smokers in Someland to below 40% by the year 1990. Throughout the
remainder of the period, the rate of smoking in men diminished a little
sharply, and it decreased approximately 150 per 1000 men smoking between
1990 and 2000.
Another important point is that over the same period, the proportion of
women smoking in Someland fluctuated more significantly than men. In the
first 5-year period, the rate rose slightly up to 20 percent in 1965. After that,
the percentage of smoking of women approximately levelled off before
reaching the highest figures of women smoking over a period of 40 years,
above 30%, in the year 1975. The percentage was also a little higher than
30% in 1980 and then fell gradually until attaining exactly 20% in 2000.
218 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 38
The graph below shows relative price changes for fresh fruits and
vegetables, sugars and sweets, and carbonated drinks between 1978 and
2009.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The line graph compares price changes in terms of three different types of
food and drinks including fresh fruits and vegetables, sugars and sweets, and
carbonated drinks from 1979 to 2009. It also shows the trend in the
consumer-price index during the 30-year period.
Overall, there was an increase in prices for all three categories as well as the
consumer price index between 1979 and 2009. The most significant growth
www.zandienglish.ir

was seen in fresh fruits and vegetables.
In 1979, the price of carbonated drinks, sugar and sweets, fresh fruits and
vegetables was quite similar, started at around 65 US dollar. Between 1981
and 1985, there was a slight fluctuation in the prices of those items, while the
consumer price index rose slowly to 100 during this period.
Throughout the remaining of the period, sugar and sweets, carbonated drinks
prices and consumer price index continued to rise steadily and stayed
approximately at 150, 110 and 165 respectively in 2009. In contrast, over the
same period, there was a significant increase in the price of fresh fruits and
vegetables by more than 5 times, at around 330 before reaching the highest
point, 340, in 2008.
193 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The line graph illustrates the changes in the prices of fresh fruits and
vegetables, sugar and sweets, and carbonated drinks and the overall trend in
the consumer price index from 1978 to 2009.
Overall, it can be seen that all items experienced the upward trends
throughout the period. Remarkably, fresh fruit and vegetables’ relative price
always stayed higher than that of the three others.
From 1979 to 1981, the price of all commodities showed the same change,
from 60 to 100, until their prices began to diverge. There was a slight
increase in carbonated drinks’ price while both consumer-price index and
sugar and sweets’ price rose slowly and steadily. In contrast, only fresh fruit
and vegetable’s price had a periodic fluctuation. In 2007, it reached a peak at
nearly 350, which was the highest price change in the graph.
By 2009, although the price of fresh fruit and vegetables decreased smoothly,
it still remained in the first place, at 325. The percentage of sugar and sweets
and carbonated drinks’ prices continued rising, at 200 and 105 respectively.
Finally, 210% was the percentage of consumer – price index in two years,
2007 and 2009.
192 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 39
The pie charts below shows the comparison of different kinds of energy
production of France in two years.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
MODEL ANSWER 1:
SSMM
The pie graph illustrates the percentage of Gas, Coal, Petro, Nuclear and
2005.
LLTT
other sources of energy in France in two different years namely 1995 and
IIEE
Overall, the percentage of Gas and Coal accounted for the largest proportion
in both years. In addition, there was a small change in the percentage of Gas
and Coal while those of Petrol, Nuclear, and other energy production changed
significantly.
The percentage of Gas and Coal was the highest in 1995 (29.63% and
29.80%) and both of them kept increasing slightly until 2005 with 30.31%
and 30.93%, respectively. Furthermore, there was a gradual growth in the
proportion of other and Nuclear energy production of France from 4.90% and
6.40% in 1995 to 9.10% and 10.10% in 2005.
By contrast, the proportion of Petrol decreased dramatically from 1995 to
2005. In 1995, the percentage of Petrol was 29.27% but in 2005 this
proportion just accounted for 19.55%.
www.zandienglish.ir

152 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The pie charts illustrate the amount of energy in 5 different categories used in
France in 1995 and 2005.
Overall, coal accounted for the largest proportion in both years. Additionally,
there was an increase in the figure for using gas, nuclear, coal and other kinds
of energy, whereas petrol witnessed a marked decrease.
In 1995, coal was the primary source of energy in France, at 29.80%;
however, after 10 years, its number increased slightly by nearly 1% to
30.93%, which was also the highest point in the year 2005. During the period
of 10 years, the amount of gas used by French inhabitants rose smoothly from
29.63% in 1995 to 30.31% and remained at the second point in 2005. Over
the 10-year period, nuclear witnessed a marked growth of precisely 3.50%,
climbing to 10.10% in the year 2005. In addition, there was a considerable
rise in the percentage of other kinds of energy to 9.10%, which was the
lowest point in 2005.
In terms of petrol, French citizens used less than they did previously, which
means there was a remarkable reduction in the percentage from 29.27% to
19.55% in the year 1995 and 2005 respectively, over the period.
198 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 40
The chart shows the percentage of male and female teachers in six
different types of educational setting in the UK in 2010.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
MODEL ANSWER 1: LLTT
IIEE
The bar chart illustrates the rate of men and women teachers in 6 various
types of educational setting in the UK in 2010.
Overall, while the proportion of female who were teachers reached a peak in
pre-school, those of male reached the highest percentage in university.
Additionally, the figure for female teacher tended to fall from nursery to
university, while the tendency of males was in contrast.
In terms of the first 3 types of educational system, the women always got
higher rates than Men. Around 90 % of teachers working in nursery school
were female, whereas there was only 2 % of male working there. However,
the gap between 2 genders was reduced remarkably and balanced at 50 % in
college.
www.zandienglish.ir

For the last 3 types, the rate of male teachers witnessed a slight rise and there
was a downward trend in the female rate. There was 46% of females teaching
at private training institute but the figure for males was higher with 52%.
Finally, the percentage of men reached a peak at 70 %, which was higher
40% than those of women in University.
186 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The bar chart illustrates the proportion British teachers working at six
different institutions in 2010, in terms of gender.
It can clearly be seen from the chart that in the UK, nursery and pre-school
attracted most female teachers, whereas the percentage of university teachers
was the highest among men in 2010.
The year 2010 witnessed disproportions between men and women working at
nursery and primary school, which nearly consisted of only female teachers.
In nursery or pre-school, the figure for women was just under 100% and it
was approximately 90% in primary school. In another educational setting
which the womankind was predominant, secondary school, the portion of
both genders were less different, at around 50%.
When it comes to private training institute and university, the statistics were
higher in the stronger sex. About 70% of the university teachers were
mankind, more than double the other gender. Also having the higher rate of
men but the situation was less pronounced, in private training institution
system, the number of the two sides were both slightly under and above 50%
of total teachers. Of the six patterns, the only college had absolutely the same
components with 50% of each gender.
196 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 41
The graph below shows the contribution of three sectors-agriculture,
manufacturing, and business and financial services- to the UK economy
in the twentieth century.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
TT
MODEL ANSWER 1:
LL
The provided bar graph reveals information about economic contribution in
the UK by three sectors namely agriculture, manufacturing, and business and
IIEE
financial services of the twentieth century from 1900 to 2000.
Overall, while the proportion of agriculture and manufacturing had a general
fall, the profit of business and financial increased considerably in that period.
Beginning with under 50% in 1900 and going up slightly to over 50% in
1950, agriculture was the greatest contribution to the economy in first fifty
years as well as during the twentieth century. However, there were
remarkable declines in the percentage of this field to around 10% in 1975 and
to under 2% in 2000.
Manufacturing has the same pattern with agriculture. Although the figure for
manufacturing showed a significant decrease from 45% to 15%, that sector
was still the second highest data between 1900 and 2000. Business and
www.zandienglish.ir

financial had a substantial growth from the lowest in 1900 before becoming
the highest profit in 2000 (from under 3% to 30%).
166 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The given bar chart compares the changing of three contributors to the UK
economy in the twentieth century.
Overall, it can clearly be seen that the percentage of agriculture and
manufacturing witnessed a downward trend while that for business and
financial climbed rapidly.
In 1900, the proportion of agriculture made up exactly 50% and rose slightly
to about 53% in 1950, before diving sharply to around 2% in 2000 which was
the lowest point of the whole bar chart. Likewise, the percentage of
manufacturing was at about 45% in 1900, the figure declined to around 39%
in 1950 and 35% in 1975, a difference of approximately 4%, followed by a
sharp fall to nearly 18% in 2000.
In contrast, the proportion of business and finance in 1900 was at about 4%,
this figure peaked its high at approximately 36% in 2000, after an increase in
1950 and 1975 with around 10% and 20% respectively.
154 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 42
The diagrams below show the changes that have taken place at Queen
Mary Hospital since its construction in 1960.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
MODEL ANSWER 1: LLTT
IIEE
The maps demonstrate the transformation that had been made at Queen Mary
Hospital during 40 years period from 1960 - 2000.
Overall, it can be noticeably seen that since 2000 Queen Mary Hospital had
been increased in its size and the surroundings had transformed from
recreation building and rural area into functional health departments that
served for public healthcare and education.
In 1960, the hospital was built next to the Shopping centre and both were
near the main road. A large area behind the Hospital was turned into a car
park while the land behind the shopping centre was used for farming. After
20 years, new constructions were built in order to train nurses for the hospital
as well as serving the public health care. Specifically, the old shopping centre
www.zandienglish.ir

was demolished and replaced by a pharmacy and a cancer centre.
Furthermore, farmland was converted into a nursing school.
In 2000, the main hospital remained unchanged after 40 years but the cancer
centre was expanded to cover the entire area which used to belong to the
nursing school. As a result, the car park had been reducing by a half in order
to make a way for a new and smaller nursing school.
203 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The maps illustrate how Queen Mary Hospital changed after constructing
Overall, the hospital became more developed, cutting out the un-related
service building and area to reform medical field while constructing three
additional hospital buildings.
In 1960, the hospital was built close to the main road and left on its side was
a shopping centre. Later, the shopping centre was replaced with two new
buildings – a pharmacy and a cancer centre in 1980. Afterwards, while the
hospital and pharmacy buildings remained in terms of size, the cancer centre
was largely extended in 2000.
From 1960 to 1980, the area behind the shopping centre – the farmland was
turned into a nursing school while the car park still located at the back of the
hospital. In 2000, because of cancer centre’s expansion, the nursing school
and the car park had been redesigned. As a result, their areas were reduced by
a half compared to the previous sizes in 1980.
160 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 43
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
The diagram describes how five different tea products are produced with the
initial step of growing to the final step of drying.
www.zandienglish.ir

Overall, the stages of planting, harvesting leaves, wilting and oven drying are
required in all types of tea and some special tea needs further treatment such
as steaming, rolling, crushing or fermenting.
At the first stage, tea trees are planted and leaves are collected when they are
qualified. After that, these leaves are withered. The process of making white
tea is finished by the last stage of oven dehydrating, while green tea is
steamed and rolled before being dried in ovens.
The production of three remaining tea types involves the fermentation
process. Oolong tea is slightly fermented after the rolling step, in contrast, the
complete fermentation is applied to black tea. Interestingly, small leaf black
tea is produced by smashing tea leaves into pieces instead of rolling ahead of
the fermenting stage.
154 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 44
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
MODEL ANSWER 1:
aa
S MM
The line chart gives information about average yearly spending on mobile
and landline phone services in the USA over a period of 10 years.
S
TT
It is clear that while the amount of money spent on cell phone services rose
quickly over the period shown, the figure for residential phone services
LL
dropped gradually. Moreover, it is also noticeable that the spending on
IIEE
mobile services overtook that for landline services in 2006.
In 2001, US consumers paid about $700 for residential phone services, which
was $500 higher than that of cell phone services. Over the following five
years, average yearly spending on landlines fell slightly. By contrast,
expenditure on mobiles increased sharply, making them (become) equal at
approximate $600 in 2006.
Over the next four years, the increasing trend in the amount of money paid
for handset devices continued to hit $750, which was the highest figure
recorded on the line graph, whereas the spending on landline phones reached
its lowest point, at around $450.
163 words
www.zandienglish.ir

MODEL ANSWER 2:
The line graph compares the amount of money spent on mobile and landline
phone services every year in the US over a period of 10 years from 2001 to
2010.
It is clear that there were 2 opposite trends in the phone services usage. While
American residents paid more and more money for cell phone services,
landline services gradually became less popular over the period mentioned
[over their lifetime].
In 2001, only a little more than $200 were spent on mobile phones while US
customers invested up to approximately $700 in landline phone services,
noticeably three-fold more than the former’s figure. The period from 2001 to
2006 witnessed a dramatic fall in the expenditure on residential phones and a
steep rise in the bills for mobile phones, contributing to equal amounts of
money paid for the 2 services in 2006, at a fairly significant amount of $550.
By 2010, the annual sum of money that US consumer spent on mobile phones
climbed enormously to about $750, nearly a 3-fold increase compared to the
2001 figure. On the contrary, there was a sink in the yearly expense for
residential services, by $150, only one-fifth of the stated expenditure on cell
phones in 2010.
202 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 45
The number of houses built per decade in the towns of F and N over the
last century.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
The bar chart illustrates the number of houses built every ten years in two
different locations, Farkletown and Newtown over the last 100 years.
Overall, the number of houses in Farkletown exceeded those constructed in
Newtown. While Farkletown experienced a considerable rise in new houses
built over 100 years, house building in Newtown was much more erratic.
During the first three decades, house numbers erected in Farkletown rose
steadily, from 40 new houses in the 1990s to under 120 in the 1930s. Over
the next 40 years, new houses constructed in Farkletown remained constantly
at 120 before surging up to 280 houses in the 1980s and then peak at 350 in
the last decade.
In the first two decades, more houses were built in Newtown than in
www.zandienglish.ir

Farkletown. Suddenly, there was a sharp drop from 60 to 20 in the 1920s.
From the 1920s onwards, Newtown saw a steady growth from only 20 to 80
new buildings, followed by a sudden decline to nearly zero in the 60s. There
was, subsequently, a dramatic surge in the 70s with over 200 new houses
erected. While the 80s experienced a plummet in new constructions in
Newtown to only 10, there was a rocket increase to 270 in the last decade.
208 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 46
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
MODEL ANSWER 1:
LLTT
The chart illustrates data on the revenue of Games software, DVD/video and
IIEE
CDs all over the world from 2000 to 2003.
In general, the worldwide sale of CDs dipped slightly while the figures for
Games software and DVD/video climbed up. In addition, CDs were the most
common item bought by users over the period.
In 2000, the revenue of CDs industry was approximately 35 billion dollars.
The figure was roughly 3 times as Games software’s sale which accounted
for above 10 billion dollars. Regarding the revenue of DVD and video, the
number was nearly 20 billion dollars.
Over the period of four years, in 2003, the sale of CDs decreased slightly to
above 30 billion dollars. By contrast, the figure for DVD/video rose
significantly by roughly 1.5 times, nearly the sale of CDs in 2003. Similarly,
www.zandienglish.ir

Games software producers saw a moderate increase in their income, closely
20 billion dollars by the end of the period.
156 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The bar chart depicts changes in global sales of games software, CDs, and
DVD or videos from 2000 to 2003.
It is noticeable from the graph that the revenue of CD slightly decreased but
was always the highest figure amongst three items while both games software
and CDs saw a steady growth in terms of sales.
In 2000, the world spent around 35 billion dollars purchasing CDs while that
figures of games software and DVD or video was nearly a half,
approximately 13 billion and 18 billion respectively. By 2002, the sales of
DVDs and video had increased by over 10 billion to 28 billion whereas a
growth of just 2 billion was seen in games software, making it reach the same
level of DVDs in 2000.
In 2003, while CD consumption hit its bottom at over 30 billion, more than
30 billion dollars of DVDs and videos were bought, which doubled its initial
figures in 2000 and the global sales of games software reached a peak of
nearly 20 billion dollars at the same/respective time.
176 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 47
The diagram illustrates the process that is used to manufacture bricks
for the building industry.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The diagram shows how to produce bricks from clay which are used to build
houses.
Overall, there are 7 stages in the process of manufacturing bricks ranging
from digging clay to delivering bricks to customers.
In the first stage, clay is excavated from underground by an industrial digger
and it is used as the main material for brick manufacture. Clay is then broken
www.zandienglish.ir

down into smaller pieces by a metal grid and conveyed on a roller. The
subsequent step is that clay is mixed with sand and water at a proper ratio
which is then transformed into cubes by two different methods, using a wire
cutter or a mold to shape bricks.
In the next step, these bricks are placed into a drying oven for 24-48 hours so
that all water contained in the bricks can evaporate and make bricks become
harder. In the fourth step, the bricks are heated in a kiln at a moderate
temperature of 200oC-480oC, then at a higher temperature of 870oC-980oC
before being cooled down in a cooling chamber for 48-72 hours. The finished
goods are then moved to the next stage for packaging and being delivered to
customers.
194 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The figure shows how to produce bricks for industrial construction.
Overall, there are 7 stages in the process of producing bricks, beginning with
clay being dug up in the ground, and ending with delivery to customers.
As stated above, the process starts with clay excavation by using a digger. To
dispose of the large pieces of clay, they are placed on a huge metal grid
where smaller pieces will be dropped onto a big roller below. These small
pieces will then be mixed with sand and water. Bricks are shaped by a wire
cutter or a mold before moving to a drying oven for 24 to 48 hours.
After the bricks are moved to a massive kiln at a moderate temperature, at
around 200 to 980 degrees, they will continue to be moved to another kiln at
a higher temperature, at 870 to 1300 degrees. Then these bricks are kept in a
cooling chamber for 48 to 72 hours before they are packaged at the sixth step.
The process concludes with transport to the building industry.
176 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 48
The pie charts below show how dangerous waste products are dealt with
in three countries.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The three pie charts give information about the percentages of dangerous
waste products disposed of using different ways in three different countries,
namely the Republic of Korea, Sweden, and the UK.
It is clear that recycling is the most popular measure of dealing with
dangerous waste products in South Korea, while Sweden and the UK prefer
www.zandienglish.ir

underground to other methods.
In the UK, underground is used to tackle the highest proportion of waste
products, at 82%. While the figures for chemical treatment and dumping at
sea are the same, at 8%, incineration is the least popular solution used for
disposing waste products, at only 2%.
In South Korea, while the percentage of waste products which are dealt with
by recycling is highest, at 69%, the figure for underground is significantly
lower, at 22%. Meanwhile, only 9% of waste products tackled by
incineration. In Sweden, the rate of waste products tackled by underground is
highest, at 55%, while the figure for recycling and incineration are
considerably lower, at 25% and 20% respectively.
171 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The diagrams illustrate different methods that 3 nations namely Republic of
Korea, the United Kingdom and Sweden use to cope with waste products.
Overall, the UK uses more methods to curb waste products than the 2 other
nations. Also, the South Korean government sees recycling as their top-
prioritized measure while the most common one in Sweden and the UK is
burying the waste.
Data shows that the greatest proportion of waste products are recycled in
South Korea, 69%, compared to 25% in Sweden. UK government does not
list this eco-friendly measure on this country’s waste removing programs. By
contrast, most of UK’s waste products are put underground, accounting for
82% while the figures for Sweden and Republic of Korea are 55% and 22%
respectively.
All the above-mentioned countries use incineration as a remedy in dealing
with waste products; however, this method accounts for the smallest
proportion of 9% for South Korea, just 2% for the UK and the highest figure,
20%, for Sweden. Besides, alongside the aforementioned measures, UK
government also solves an equal amount of thrown-away garbage, 8% each,
by chemical treatment and sea dumping.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
186 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 49
The diagrams below show the transformation of the area around
Tumbledown between 1995 and 2010.
The map illustrates the changes in the neighborhood of Tumbledown from

1995 to 2010.
Overall, while Tumbledown became much larger in 2010, the area around it
more developed with the appearance of places for science, high technology
and providing options for shopping and beauty care activities.
To be more specific, in 2010, the park was replaced by Science park and
museum whereas school was supplanted by hotel and spa in the northwestern
side of the river. A new shop appeared in front of hotel and spa fairly nearby
the river.
Moving to the southern side of the river, the hospital no longer existed. A hi-
tech center was built nearby the river right at the location of the hospital
before. In the southeastern corner, wood lessened itself and moved far away
from the river bank. There used to be farmhouse and farmland on the left side
of Tumbledown in 1995. Fifteen years later, both of them were removed by
science academy and science laboratories.
163 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 50
The illustrations below show how coffee is sometimes produced.
Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The diagrams describe the various stages involved in the production of dried
coffee.
Overall, clearly, this is a complex process that requires a range of equipment
www.zandienglish.ir

and machinery as well as skilled workers at some stages. As can be seen from
the diagram, there are 12 stages in this process, beginning with sorting beans
and ending with packing and selling products to the customers.
To begin with, the coffee beans have to be classified manually. In the
following step, people use the sieve to clean the sorted beans, then those
beans are spread on the ground to dry under the sunlight for 4 weeks. After
the dried beans are raked and turned carefully by employees, they are stocked
in the silo in preparation for delivery to the mill.
The process continues with the hull of the materials in using the highest skills
of workers. Before being packaged at the ninth stage, the beans are grated
through a big net with a lot of tiny holes. Afterwards, raw materials are ready
to be sold directly to the consumers. However, some manufacturers invest a
huge amount of money to buy numerous kinds of machine to roast coffee
beans. At the end of the process, with packaging, label and brand, it is easier
to bring the product to the market.
217 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The given diagram illustrates the manufacturing process of coffee using the
dry method. In general, the production of coffee includes 12 distinct stages,
beginning with bean classification, and ending with packing and selling well.
At the first stage, the seeds of the coffee plants are sorted by hand. These
sorted seeds are then put into a sieve, where they are washed with fresh
water. Afterwards, the coffee beans are dried in the sun over the course of
four weeks, before being raked and turned. Following a period of storage in a
silo, the beans are then delivered to the mill.
The procedure continues with removing the seeds' coats, by using a large
pestle, and then the coffee beans are put through a grader so as to classify
according to their size. After being bagged, the beans are sold as coffee
cherries or raw coffee. Next, the raw coffee beans after being bought are
roasted in the roaster. Finally, the roasted beans are packed, and now ready
for distribution to customers.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
170 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 51
The line graph below gives information on cinema attendance in the UK.
Write a report for a university lecturer describing the information given.
The given line graph shows the figure for the number of people went to the
cinema in England from 1990 to 2010.
Overall, the rate of cinema attendance seems to increase gradually over the
period of 20 years, except a slight drop between 1995 and 2000. It is
observed that people who 44-54 went to the cinema more than younger
groups.
In the period of 1990 to 1995, the percentage of people from 44 to 54 years
old went up slightly which made up 40%. There was a steady decline in the
year of 1995 to 2000. Followed this trend, the proportion of age group of 34
to 44 decrease to above 30%. 5 years later, the oldest group picked up
significantly just under a half and reached the peak in 2010, above 50%. This
group was followed by the group of 34-44 years old, which accounted for
more than 40%.
Over the same period, the trend of cinema-goers aging 24-34 showed some
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
fluctuations. It saw an increase of 8% then fell to above 20% in 2000 and
gradually went up by the year of 2010. At the bottom is the youngest group
who between 14 to 24 years old, leaped less than 5%, which comprised only
above 20% in the greatest point.
213 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Legal & Disclaimer
o mm
o
.c.c
ss
rr
ttttee
aa
M
SS M
TT
LL
IIEE
cause of action.
book.
www.zandienglish.ir

www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION
SAMPLE 1
SAMPLE 2
SAMPLE 3
oomm
SAMPLE 4
.c.c
SAMPLE 5
SAMPLE 6
rrss
SAMPLE 7
ttttee
SAMPLE 8
SAMPLE 9 aa
SAMPLE 10
SSMM
TT
SAMPLE 11
SAMPLE 12
LL
IIEE
SAMPLE 13
SAMPLE 14
SAMPLE 15
SAMPLE 16
SAMPLE 17
SAMPLE 18
SAMPLE 19
SAMPLE 20
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 21
SAMPLE 22
SAMPLE 23
SAMPLE 24
SAMPLE 25
SAMPLE 26
SAMPLE 27
SAMPLE 28
SAMPLE 29
SAMPLE 30
SAMPLE 31
SAMPLE 32
SAMPLE 33
SAMPLE 34
SAMPLE 35
SAMPLE 36
SAMPLE 37
SAMPLE 38
SAMPLE 39
SAMPLE 40
SAMPLE 41
SAMPLE 42
SAMPLE 43
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 44
SAMPLE 45
SAMPLE 46
SAMPLE 47
SAMPLE 48
SAMPLE 49
oomm
SAMPLE 50
.c.c
SAMPLE 51
rrss
ttttee
SAMPLE 52
CONCLUSION
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

INTRODUCTION
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 1
The graph below shows the demand for electricity in England during
typical days in winter and summer. The pie chart shows how electricity
is used in an average English home.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The line graph illustrates the amount of consumed electricity within a day in
England during winter and summer, and the pie chart gives information about
the proportion of different purposes of using electricity in a typical English
household.
Overall, it is noticeable from the line graph that the consumption of
www.zandienglish.ir

electricity in winter is dramatically higher than the figure in the summer. As a
result, the electricity used for the heating purpose has a dominant proportion
compared to others.
From the graph, the amount of electricity consumed during the winter
remains higher and always stays at above 30,000 units, while during the
summer, the electrical consumption keeps below 20,000 units. It is clear that
the highest amount of electricity used in winter is nearly 50,000 units at
around 22:00, compared to the peak consumption in summer, which is about
20,000 units, at 14:00. Moreover, during a day from 7:00 to 8:00, the
consumption of electricity in both winter and summer is at the lowest point
about 31,000 units and 14,000 units respectively.
Moving to the pie chart, it is apparent that electricity which is used for the
heating purpose has the highest proportion of 52.5% due to high demand in
winter, compared to 17.5% of electrical usage for ovens, kettles, washing
machines. The equal percentage of electric demand for lighting, TV, radio;
and vacuum cleaners, food mixers, electric tools is merely 15% for each
group of purpose.
220 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The line graph represents the consumption amount of electricity in England
in 2 seasons - winter and summer, whilst the pie chart describes the various
purposes it is needed for in a typical English family.
It is clearly seen from the line graph that the level of consumption for this
kind of energy approximately doubles in winter. Moreover, according to the
pie chart, electricity is used mainly for heating rooms and water.
The record shows that the average electricity consumption in the summer is
roughly 18,000 units, while this number recorded in the winter is around
36,000. There is also a noticeable similar pattern between both seasons
during the period 9-14 hours, in which both demands are steadily recovering
from the lowest value.
As can be seen in the pie chart, the use of electricity for heating purpose takes
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
more than half of the total electricity consumption (52.5%). The second-most
common application, which is for running ‘Ovens, kettles, washing
machines’, accounts for 17.5% of the total. Whilst, the other two purposes,
which are ‘Lighting, TV, radio’ and ‘Vacuum cleaners, food mixers, electric
tools’, share the remaining 30% evenly.
188 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 2
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart illustrates three important sources for export in Southland in
two years 2000 and 2016 and gives projected figures for the same fields in
2025.
As can be seen from the graph, the biggest export revenue for the current year
was generated from dairy products. However, international tourism is
predicted to claim the leading position in 2025.
In 2000, the revenues from international tourism and dairy products were
approximately 8 billion and 7 billion pounds respectively. 16 years later,
there was an increase of roughly one million pounds in the international
tourism. At the same time, the figure for dairy products leaped to nearly 10
billion pounds, which was the highest number in this year. After reaching its
peaks, by 2025, dairy products are expected to witness a slight decrease to
about 9.5 billion pounds. International tourism, in contrast, is anticipated to
continue growing to almost 10 billion pounds.
There was obviously a downward trend in meat products. Starting at roughly
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
6 billion pounds in 2000, its revenue declined to nearly 5.5 billion pounds in
2016 and is projected to go down to roughly 5 billion pounds in the year of
2025.
194 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
2000, 2016 and prediction for the year 2025.

oomm
The chart compares the figures for three main exported items in Southland in
.c.c
Overall, dairy products are currently the main export while tourism played
ss
the major role in 2000 and is anticipated to recover the initial position in
rr
2025. In addition, the increases in the amount of income from international
ttttee
tourism and dairy products have been in inverse proportion to that of meat
products.
aa
There has been a negative correlation between tourism and meat products. In
2000, the figure for international tourism was roughly 8 billion pounds in
MM
comparison with a negligible amount of 6 billion pounds of that in meat
productions. The gap now is being widened to 4.5 billion by an increase of
SS
one billion of tourism and a drop of a half billion of that of meat products.
LLTT
In addition, in 2025, the tourism is projected to peak at 10 billion while meat
products are estimated to steadily remain at around five billion. Furthermore,
the figure for dairy products rose from around 7 billion in 2000 to 10 billion
years.
198 words
IIEE
in 2016. It is followed by an anticipation to dip by 0.8 billion in the next nine
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 3
The line graph illustrates how much three different kinds of food were eaten
in China over a period of 26 years.
Overall, it is clear that fish was the most popular food in China throughout
the period shown. Also, while the consumption of meat and fish saw an
increase, there was a gradual fall in that of salt.
The amount of fish consumed was the highest over the years with 600 grams
in 1985. In the first 10 years, the figure of fish experienced a fluctuant period
between 600 and 700 grams. Fish consumption continued to increase by 250
in the remaining years.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
In 1985, almost 500 grams of salt was eaten in China, while the amount of
meat was lower by 400, the amount of salt used by Chinese people fell
constantly to only 200 in 2010. In the same year, meat consumption caught
up with salt after a 25-year period of steady rise.
155 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 4
The graph below presents the employment patterns in the USA between
1930 and 2010.
Summarise the information by selecting and report in the main features, and
The line graph illustrates how the employment in five different categories
changed from 1930 to 2010.
Overall, while farming, fishing and foresting experienced the most significant
change, the figures of the remaining items remained below 40% in the given
period.
In 1930, the percentage of farming, fishing and foresting started at 75%,
which was higher than those of the remaining items by about 65%. Farming,
fishing and foresting witnessed a gradual fall by 15% in 1970. Meanwhile,
there were few changes in the proportion of industrial, sales and office,
technical and other services. In 1970, they all shared the same figure of
around 10%.
The percentage of farming, fishing and foresting dropped significantly by
almost 60% with the lowest figure among the items. In contrast, other
services levelled off at 10%. Industrial, technical and sales and office
increased constantly to reach 35%, 30%, and 20% respectively.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
151 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 5
The table compares data regarding the popularity of seven phone functions in
three separate years, namely 2006, 2008 and 2010.
Overall, there were upward trends in the figures for most of the phone
functions. Among all features that were investigated, making a phone call
was the most popular function all over the surveyed period.
Despite a slight fall in 2010, making calls served as the main function taking
up the highest figure of 100 in the first two years and 99 in 2010. Taking
photos, texting and playing music saw a steady increase over the time.
Starting at 66 and 73 respectively, taking photos and texting remained as the
second popular functions with the average of 78 in 2010. Meanwhile, playing
music rose by more than a half from 12 to 26.
Searching the Internet and video record which were the two new features
introduced in 2008 increased dramatically by 32 and 26 to reach 73 and 35 in
2010. There was a notable rise by 25 in the figure of playing games in 2008;
however, it levelled off in the last year.
183 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 6
The graph below shows changes in young adult unemployment rates in
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
MODEL ANSWER 1:
SSMM
The line graph illustrates young adult unemployment rates in England and
how these rates changed from 1993 to 2012.
LLTT
Overall, the trend of four categories was similar in most of the time. People
aged 16-24 living in London had the highest percentage of being
IIEE
unemployed.
In the 1993 – 2002 period, there was a general decline in the proportion of
unemployment of 4 groups. However, the percentage of the unemployed/
unemployed people aged 16 – 24 in London was always higher than the
others in England. The percentage of people being jobless were the lowest
during the period between 2001 and 2004. Especially in London, the
unemployment rate of people in 16-24 age group dropped from 22% to
around 15% in 2002, compared with those in the rest of England, overall
London and overall rest of England, which were at around 12%, 7%, and 5%
respectively.
Over the same period, the rates of redundancy of four categories rose slightly.
www.zandienglish.ir

The percentage of unemployment of the 16-24 age group in London and the
rest of London varied more significantly than that of overall London and
overall rest of England from 2006 to 2012.
190 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The line graph compares the proportion of unemployed youngsters in the UK
between London and other areas during the period from 1993 to 2012.
It is evident that the unemployment rates among young adults surged rapidly
and the figure for London was always higher than that for the other parts of
England. In addition, it was significantly higher than the rates of overall
which reduced gradually in the period given.
After decreasing from approximately 22% in 1993 to above 14% in 1999, the
young's unemployment rate in London then rose to exactly 25% in 2012,
which was the highest rate during the 19-year period. The figure for the Rest
of England reduced by 6% from 1993 to 2001 and grew discontinuously
throughout the remainder of the time, and finally reached above 21% in 2012,
which was less than the Capital 5%.
The unemployment rate of overall London decreased from 14% in 1993 to
approximately 7% in 2005, a slight drop of about 7% in 12 years. Over the
next seven years, it fluctuated and became 9% in 2012. However, that rate of
overall Rest of England went down gradually to around 4% in 2005, which
was the lowest point of the graph. Finally, it went up and reached above 7%
in 2012.
212 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 7
The percentage of school-aged boys in two different age groups who
participated in 5 different sports in the UK in 2010.
Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main feature and
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
MODEL ANSWER 1:
SSMM
The chart gives information about the proportions of schoolboys in two
in 2010.
LLTT
separate age groups who took part in five different types of sports in the UK
IIEE
Overall, the rates of boys from 6 to 11 years old were always higher than that
of the older group, with the notable exception of swimming, which was the
same.
The percentage of boys in the younger group playing football was 87%,
compared to 78% of the older group. In terms of basketball, 35% of boys
between 6 and 11 years old took part in while the percentage of boys from 12
to 16 was 25%. Additionally, 45% of boys in the younger group playing
cricket while the figure for the other group was lower by 11%.
Likewise, 23% of the younger age played rugby while the percentage of boys
from 12 to 16 years old was slightly lower, at 21 %. However, as previously
mentioned, the percentage of swimming in both groups was exactly the same,
at 19%.
www.zandienglish.ir

167 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The table shows data on the proportion of schoolboys in 2 separate age
groups who took part in playing 5 kinds of sport in the UK in 2010.
Overall, the figures for boys aged between 6 and 11 years old are always
higher than those for the older boys, with the notable exception of swimming,
which is the same.
87% of 6-to-11-year-olds played soccer, while the percentage of boys
between 12 and 16 was slightly lower, at 78%. Only 25% of the older age
group played basketball, compared to 35% of the younger boys. The
percentage participation in cricket by the younger group was 45% and 34%
for the older group; a difference of 11%.
In the same year, the proportion of both age groups/the two age groups in the
UK who liked swimming was the same, at 19%. However, the UK saw a
similar figure for schoolboys aged 6-11 and 12-16 who played rugby in 2010,
at 23% and 21% respectively.
162 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 8
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
MODEL ANSWER 1:
SSMM
The chart compares six types of transportation that people, in a European
country, traveled in terms of kilometers in ten years from 2000 to 2010.
LLTT
It is clear that the total amount of Kilometers that people traveled in 2010
were higher than the other year. Besides, bus and train were the most popular
IIEE
means of transport over the period shown.
As can be seen on the chart, the total number of both years experienced
remarkably high with 70 million in 2000 and over 90 million in 2010. More
specifically, bus and train share the similar trend, with around under 20
million in 2000 and around 35 million in 2010.
As to the rest of other types of transportation, there was a small increase in
the distance of using the plane for travel, with from 10 million to15 million
kilometers between 2000 and 2010. By contrast, there was a different trend
with a decrease in 10 years, with 10 million in 2000 and around 4 million
kilometers in 2010. Meanwhile, motorbike remained unchanged in the same
period with 5 million kilometers.
www.zandienglish.ir

180 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The given bar chart illustrates how far the passenger traveled by various
means of transport in the United Kingdom in 1999 and 2000.
Overall, it is clear that people traveled more in 2000 than in 1999. Another
striking feature is that travellers had a tendency to go by bus more than by
bicycle, motorbike, air, and rail.
In particular, the total kilometers travelled by all five means of transportation
in 2000 were higher than that in 1990. Specifically, the bus was the transport
that people used most in 1999 with nearly 50 billion kilometers while fewer
people wanted to travel by train, at above 40 billion kilometers. However, the
distance that people go by bus and train was approximately the same in 2000
at nearly 55 billion kilometers.
In terms of bicycles, there was a slightly higher number in 1999 than in 2000
and its figure also resembled to that of motorbikes, 5 billion kilometers in
1999 and 4 billion kilometers in 2000. On the contrary, there were just over 4
billion kilometers that travellers went by air in 1999, but in 2000 the number
increased by one-third of that of 1999 figure.
193 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 9
The diagram below shows the production of electricity using a system
called Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion (OTEC).
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
The chart illustrates how the Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion (OTEC)
system can produce electricity from seawater.
www.zandienglish.ir

Three main stages are shown on the diagram. Heat energy transforms warm
seawater, water vapour creates electric power and eventually runs back into
the ocean again.
It is clear to see that there is a difference in temperature between surface
seawater (29°C) and deep seawater (5°C), which OTEC uses to convert heat
energy into electric power. Firstly, warm seawater flows into evacuated
evaporation chamber, where it is evaporated by solar energy. Throughout this
process, salt is deposited and water vapour is generated. In the next stage,
water vapour drives a turbine to produce electricity.
At the third stage of this process, water vapour continues to enter to a
condensing chamber. Afterwards, it is condensed by cold seawater from the
depth of the ocean, producing drinking water. Waste salt water is discharged
into the ocean and the process can be repeated.
156 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 10
The table below shows sales made by a coffee shop in an office building
on a typical weekday.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
MODEL ANSWER 1:
aa
MM
The table gives detailed information about sales of all types of products in a
coffee shop on a normal day.
SS
T
Overall, two kinds of beverage including coffee and tea are used more
LL T
popularly than fast food except for pastries. Especially, most of the junk food
mentioned in the table also has the highest figures sale in the early morning.
IIEE
As for drinking product, it is remarkable that coffee is preferable to tea when
compared all time groups listed. For instance, in the earliest time of a day,
coffee reaches the highest number with 265 and also maintains the first
position in the evening when the total money at that time stayed at exactly
200. However, despite being ranked second prize in all drinking, tea has
tended to decline gradually to 35- the smallest number in a day.
In terms of snacks, pastries have an overwhelming rate when keeping 275,
compared to other products from 7.30 to 10.30. In contrast, the amount of
money spent on sandwiches is lower than that on pastries but the figure for
these is higher than that for tea in general.
185 words
www.zandienglish.ir

MODEL ANSWER 2:
The table compares coffee, tea, pastries, and sandwiches in terms of sales
made by a coffee shop in an office building at different times of a day.
Overall, pastries are sold most from 7:30 AM to 10:30 AM and from 2:30
PM to 5:30 PM, while the sales of sandwiches are highest between 10:30 AM
and 2:30 PM and coffee had the highest consumption from 5:30 PM to 8:30
PM. Also, the figures for coffee are nearly similar during the day.
The sales of pastries are 275 between 7:30 AM to 10:30 AM, compared to
110, 265 and 50 of tea, coffee and sandwiches consumption, respectively. On
the other hand, sandwiches are most consumed with 200 from 10:30 AM to
2:30 PM, while tea is least consumed with only 50. In addition, the sales of
coffee and pastries are 185 and 95, respectively.
From 2:30 PM to 5:30 PM, sales of coffee and pastries are similar with 145
and 150. In contrast, tea is least sold with 50. Additionally, the sales of coffee
are the highest between 5:30 PM and 8:30 PM with 200. On the other hand,
tea is least consumed with only 75.
195 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 11
The three pie charts below show the changes in annual spending by local
authorities in Someland in 1980, 1990 and 2000.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The charts compare local authorities in Someland in three years 1980, 1990
and 2000 in terms of different categories of yearly expenditures.
www.zandienglish.ir

Overall, what stands out from the charts is that spending on higher education
accounted for the largest proportions of expenses in three years. In addition,
there were fluctuations in all six categories.
The percentage of health and human resources was 14% in 1980 and rose
considerably to 20% in 1990. However, this figure was then followed by a
double decrease ten years later. By contrast, environmental services started in
1980 with only 4%. Over a decade, it increased by 1% and then nearly
doubled in 2000, reaching its peak at 9%.
In 1980, authorities spent 16% of their expenditures on transportation. This
statistic then dipped by 10% and recovered to 22% in 2000. Finally, in terms
of K-12 education, spending went down through 20 years, beginning from
25% and reached 18% in 2000, which was the lowest rate of it.
162 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The three pie charts show data on local authorities expenses in Someland in
three separate years, 1980, 1990 and 2000.
Overall, in all three years, the greatest spending was on education and other
purposes only cost a small amount of money. While the money spent on
transportation, education and environmental services increased over the time,
there were drops in those factors such as K-12 education, health, and human
resources or other.
Expenditure on health and human resources had increased to 20% by 1990
before dropping to 10% in 2000. In contrast, the figures for transportation
show an opposite trend. The cost decreased to only 6% of total expenditure in
1990 but rose quickly in 2000 when it represented 22% of total budget.
Similarly, the cost of environmental services saw an increasing trend,
growing from 4% to 9% by 2000.
In the all three years, the greatest expenditure was on education. But while K-
12 education decreased over the time to 18%, the proportion of higher
education remained the largest, reaching 45% of total spending in 1990 and
40% in 2000.The money spent on other purposes only cost a small amount of
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
money with just 6% in 1980 and dropped about 5% by 2000.
202 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 12
The graphs below provide information on global population figures and
figures for urban populations in different world regions.
The line graph gives data about the growth of inhabitants in all over the
world over the period of 300 years. The bar chart compares the number of
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
city dwellers living in different parts of the world from 2015 to 2040.
Overall, the chart indicates the upward trend in the number of people who
live in developing countries while a similar pattern is also estimated for the
world population of the graph.
In 1800, the figure for people living on earth was at around 1000 million and
o mm
it continued to increase gradually to over 2000 million for the next 140 years.
It is predicted that this number would go up dramatically over a period of 100
o
years and might reach a peak of 8000 million before being likely to decrease
substantially by the end of 2100.
.c.c
rrss
In 2015, the number of people those who live in developed areas was about
1300 million, whereas the figure for developing areas was just above 2000
ttttee
million. While the population for the former regions is expected to grow
gradually to nearly 4000 million by 2040, the data for the latter one is likely
to remain stable throughout the period, at 1300 million.
198 words aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 13
The table shows the proportion of Australian families that owned certain
household appliances in 1995 and 2002.
Summaries the information by selecting and reporting the main feature and
The table illustrates the percentage of Australian families using 6 kinds of

household device, namely Personal stereos, Computers, TV sets, Washing
machines, Refrigerators, and Hairdryers, in 1995 and 2004.
As can be seen from the table, there was an upward trend in consuming this
equipment.
It is clear that TV sets, Refrigerators and Washing machines accounted for
the greatest proportion in both 1995 and 2002. To be more specific, the figure
of houses having these machines were always remained higher 50% before
experiencing remarkable increases to approximately 100% in 2002.
Interestingly, Refrigerators, which were ranked second in 1995 at 98%,
became most popular in 7 years later at 96%.
Similarly, the percentage of using the others household appliances that were
under 50% in 1995 having marked rises in 2002. Noticeably, computer,
which was not consumed widely in the first year of the survey, climbed
tremendously to 76% in the second one.
152 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 14
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The causes of land productive deterioration, as well as its effects on different
www.zandienglish.ir

areas throughout the world in the years of 90s, are illustrated correspondingly
by the pie chart and the table.
It is obvious that during the 1990s, over-grazing was the most responsible for
the land degradation over the world. However, Europe, where had the largest
percentage of land degraded, derived the major reason of deforestation.
In the 1990s, the majority of land eroded was due to over-grazing with 35%.
Following that, deforestation held the second most popular causes with 30%
of land degraded. Moreover, over-cultivation was charged for 28% of soil
area lost its productivity. Other reasons accounted for 7% of the total.
As far as the problems are concerned in different regions in the world,
deforestation and over-cultivation deteriorated the largest European land with
respectively 9.8% and 7.7%. Additionally, while over-cultivation did not
impact in Oceania, over-grazing was the main cause for its land erosion with
11.3%. North America’s land productivity was affected the least by all above
reasons with merely 5% of total land degenerated.
179 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The pie chart and the table illustrate the outstanding factors causing land
degradation in the total world and three specific regions during the 1990s.
It can be seen that there were three main reasons why agricultural land
becomes less productive. In addition, Europe was the area in which the
proportion of land degraded by these factors was higher than those in the two
other regions.
Over-grazing was the most momentous reason creating the land degradation
with 35%, accompanied/followed closely by deforestation and over-
cultivation with 30% and 28% respectively. Meanwhile, other factors
accounted for just 7% the total.
The total land degraded in Europe was highest with 23%, exactly 10% more
than that in Oceania, and appropriately 20% more than in North American.
The other important point to note is that deforestation caused the largest
percentage of land degradation at 9.8% in Europe, as against 0.2% in North
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
America. On the other hand, 7.7% of the land was degraded by over-
cultivation in Europe while Oceania did not suffer from the effects of this
cause. Over-grazing caused the largest percentage of land degradation at
11.3% in Oceania, which doubles that in Europe.
190 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 15
The chart provides the research on the number of time the Australian
adolescents ate fast food annually in twenty-five years, from 1975 to
2000.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The line graph shows changes in the consumption of fast food among
Australian teenagers from 1975-2000.
There were dramatic changes in the consumption of all three kinds of fast
food over the period. The consumption of fish and chips dropped markedly
while hamburgers and pizza became much more preferred.
In 1975, teenagers ate fish and chips 100 times annually, followed by that of
hamburgers and pizza with 10 times and 5 times per year, respectively. In the
next 5 years, there was a slight drop in fish and chips consumption but it soon
recovered and reached 97 times/year in 1985. Thereafter, however, this figure
declined significantly to only 40 times/year in 2000.
By contrast, the figures for hamburgers and pizza followed an upward trend.
The consumption of hamburgers increased sharply to 83 times/year in 1985.
It then exceeded that of fish and chips and continued rising gradually to 100
times per year in 2000. Similarly, the figure for pizza climbed substantially to
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
over 80 times/year in 1995 then remained stable until the end of the period.
176 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The given graph illustrates how fast food consumption of teenagers in
Australia changed between 1975 and 2000.
oomm
Overall, while hamburgers and pizza saw an upward trend in their
consumption, there was a decrease in the amount of fish and chips eaten.
.c.c
Moreover, despite the similar trend, the consumption of hamburgers was
ss
always higher than that of pizza.
rr
Between 1975 and 1985, the number of times eaten per year of hamburger
ttttee
soared sharply from 10 to 100. However, the following 15 years just saw a
slight increase in the figure. From 1975 to 1995, the amount of pizza
aa
consumed also rose quickly, yet in the last 5 years of the period, its number
stayed unchanged at 83 times.
SSMM
In the first decade, although the number of fish and chips fluctuated, it still
remained higher than those of hamburger and pizza. However, immediately
after that, it dropped significantly by 60 to under 40 by 2000.
153 words
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 16
The diagrams below show stages in the development of simple cooking
equipment.
The diagram illustrates the development stages of cooking equipment.

Overall, there are three main stages in the process, starting with the simplest
structure of the cooking machine and ending with equipment which is more
modern and complicated in structure.
As can be seen, the first stage of the development of cooking equipment
which is called stage A, includes the simple structure of three stones putting
on a circle. There are gaps between stones where people can put grass in for
creating fire. Then, in the next development process which is stage B, there is
a clay shield which is built around the stones and has a hole to put the grass
and wood in the stove for fire purposes.
Finally, on stage C, the equipment is developed to be more complicated than
the two previous ones. There is a door on the foot made by mental of the
cooking machine which allows ash to come out and air to come in when
necessary. Above the foot, there is a pot made by clay which has a handle on
the sides, small tools to support the pot on the top and the grate for charcoal
at the bottom.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
197 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 17
The table illustrates the consequence of a survey which was conducted to

identify the opinion of a city sports club’s members about its activities,
facilities and operating hours.
Overall, a majority of the club’s members are satisfied with its activities,
facilities and opening hours. While most males and females are happy with
the club facilities, there is a contrast between the rates of men and women
preferring its activities and operating times.
As can be seen on the table, there is a similarity between the proportion of
males and females in the level of satisfactory about the facilities of the club,
which is about 64% and 63% in very satisfied level, 22% and 27% in
satisfied and 14% and 10% in the unsatisfied level for males and females
respectively.
In contrast, there is a contrast between male and female in the level of
satisfaction in terms of the club’s activities and opening hours. While a
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
majority of women are happy with opening hours, which is precisely over
95% of satisfaction, 63% of men are happy about this. According to the table,
5% of men do not like the range of activities, compared to women’s rates,
which is about 30% reporting unsatisfactory.
201 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 18
The table below shows the number of visitors to Ashdown Museum
during the year before and the year after it was refurbished. The charts
show the result of surveys asking visitors how satisfied they were with
their visit, during the same two periods.
Source: https://www.testbig.com/ielts-writing-task-i-ielts-academic-
essays/table-below-shows-numbers-visitors-ashdown-museum-16
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The table shows how many people visited Ashdown Museum before and after
its refurbishment and the pie charts illustrate 5 different categories in terms of
behavior towards Ashdown Museum’s visitors.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Overall, after being refurbished, most people show their great satisfaction
while they used to be not very happy with their experiences at the museum.
Additionally, it is obvious that the number of visitors to the museum after
refurbishment was higher than that of before.
In the year before being renovated, dissatisfied was the primary behavior of
precisely 40%, however, after a long term of refurbishment, its figure
oomm
witnessed a significant reduction by 25% to 15%. In terms of satisfied
people, its proportion increased considerably, from 30% in the period before
.c.c
refurbishment to 40%, which was the highest position in the period after
being renovated. During the period of refurbished years, there was a marked
rrss
growth in the number of very satisfied people, reaching 35% after
refurbishment. Both the number of people who had no response to the survey
ttttee
and those who were very dissatisfied accounted for exactly 5% in the period
of having refurbished, which was at 5% and 10% respectively beforehand.
aa
While only 74000 people visited the museum before terms of refurbishment,
the number of visitors after having the museum renovated was dramatically
higher by 18000 visitors.
218 words
SSMM
MODEL ANSWER 2:
LLTT
The table gives information about how many people visited Ashdown
IIEE
Museum in two periods before and after its refurbishment. The pie charts
compare the levels of visitors` satisfaction as a result of this change during
two years.
It is clear from the table that after the refurbishment, Ashdown Museum
attracts more attention and the number of visitors increases significantly.
Although two pie charts have the same total proportion, the former represents
a rising level of satisfied people.
From the table, the number of tourists coming to Ashdown Museum after the
refurbishment is 18000 people larger than that before. The proportion of
visitors giving good feedback for the survey after the change in this Museum
grows up sharply in terms of very satisfied and satisfied, also makes up the
majority. In particular, the figure of people feeling very satisfied was 35%,
www.zandienglish.ir

which doubled than that before refurbishment. In addition, the percentage of
satisfied tourists increases from 30% to 40% after the change.
On the other hand, dissatisfied and very dissatisfied witnessed an outstanding
decline in the percentage of 40% to 15% and 10% to 5% respectively.
Another interesting fact is that there is always 5% of asking visitors giving no
response in both two periods, occupying the smallest part.
208 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 19
The bar chart below shows the percentage participation of men in senior
development in three companies between 1980 and the year 2010.
Summaries the information by selecting and report in the main features, and
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
The charts compare the proportion of men who were gathering in a senior
LLTT
position in three companies from 1980 to 2010.
Overall, the percentage of men in senior development position in IBM and
IIEE
Microsoft increased significantly throughout this period. In the contrast to
two companies above, the rate of men holding the senior positions at Apple
fluctuated during three decades.
It can be seen from the chart that the trend of men who dedicated to a senior
position in IBM was upward. The senior position occupied by men remained
in the first five years of this period at rate 2%, and jumped up twofold to 26%
in 1995 and reached the top at 62% in 2010. Similarly, the rates of men were
in charge of a senior position at Microsoft increased strongly during the
period. It went up steadily at 8% in 1980 to 16% in 2000 and afterward, it
rose up a triple, at 46% in 2010.
By contrast, the men holding the senior position of Apple were the highest, at
15% in 1980. But it decreased to 12% in 1985 before rising to 21% in 1995.
www.zandienglish.ir

Otherwise, it went down to 18% in 2000 and continually increased to 24% in
2010.
203 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 20
The diagram below shows various stages involved in the production of
beer.
Summarize the information by selecting and reporting main features, and
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
The diagram illustrates the process of how small tough grain becomes a
preferred and nutritious beverage.
LLTT
Overall, the flow requires ten steps, beginning with grinding the malted
barley and culminating in packaging in several ways.
IIEE
From the beginning, the barley which has been malted is grounded by the
milling machine. In the following step, the barley is then hydrated into
glucose, which is the basic ingredient of the process while getting through the
mashing. At the next stage, the sweet wort, which is separated from the grain
bed, is used for feeding cattle in farm and being purified by being boiled in
high temperature with sugar and hops added in the fourth stage. The mixture
is then whirled to combine the ingredients before going through the cooling
machine to rest.
Once the combination has been cooled in the sixth stage, it is then put in the
non-oxygen container together with the yeast as the requirement of the
fermentation to get through the metabolic process, which releases carbon
dioxide. It is only when the mixture gets through the eighth and the ninth step
www.zandienglish.ir

to become drinkable. In the eighth stage, the liquid is matured by heat before
being purified the last time. Afterwards, beer is packaged into bottles, cans,
and container on trucks in order to be delivered to the customers.
219 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 21
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
The chart compares the distribution of government expenditure across nine
aa
categories between two years 2000 and 2010.
MM
Overall, education was the most priority in both two years whereas transport,
culture, leisure and other expenses accounted for the smallest percentages. In
SS
addition, there were remarkable increases in the proportion of Welfare and
LLTT
Interest on the national budget.
On the one hand, in 2000, there were four categories including education,
IIEE
healthcare, pensions and defence making up for the largest proportions which
were 24%, 21%, 19% and 17% respectively. After ten years, however, the
percentage for education slightly dropped from 24% to 21% compared to the
subtle cut down on healthcare by 1% while defence expenditure remained at
14% in 2010. In terms of pensions, this category levelled off at 19% in both
two years.
On the other hand, the proportions of Welfare and Interest on government
budget were 8% and 5% in 2000 and then rose approximately two-fold which
were 13% and 10% respectively in 2010. Consequently, 3% of transport and
2% of culture plunged by 2% and 1% respectively. Nonetheless, the
percentage for other fields remained the same level in surveyed years with
1%.
www.zandienglish.ir

193 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 22
The graph below shows the consumption of Fast Food (in grams per
week) in the UK in 1970, 1975, 1980 and 1990.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
The given line chart demonstrates three types of Fast Food consumed in the
UK throughout the 20-year period from 1970 to 1990.
the time shown.

L TT
Overall, the number of Fish & Chips and Hamburgers witnessed a dramatic
growth while the number of Pizza experienced a noticeable reduction during
L
IIEE
It can be seen from the graph that, enjoying at the lowest point at roughly 40
grams per week in 1970, the figure for Hamburgers increased significantly,
nearby threefold higher than the starting point, at approximately 120 grams in
1985, before reaching the peak at just below 300 grams in 1990 and became
the 2nd runner. As regards to the 1st-runner, standing at under 100 grams
in1970, the consumption of Fish & Chips rises slowly at around 150 grams in
1980. Then, this number went up suddenly, climbing up to the highest point
at exactly 500 grams and was twice as many as the consumption of the
Hamburgers in 1990.
In contrast, Pizza had a steady decline in numbers, being the most favorite
Fast Food as compared to two formers at 300 grams in 1970. By 1985, the
www.zandienglish.ir

quantity of Pizza bottomed out at 200 grams, followed by a marginal change
at just over 200 grams in 1990.
206 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 23
The pie charts below show the percentage of housing owned and rented
in the UK in 1991 and 2007.
Summarize the information by describing the main features of the charts and
making comparisons where appropriate.
mm
Housing owned and rented in the UK
oo
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
The pie charts illustrate 4 different kinds of housing in the UK over two
IIEE
separate years, 1991 and 2007.
Overall, home owner accounted for the greatest proportion in both years.
Additionally, it is obvious that there was a marked increase in the proportion
of home ownership, private renting whereas social housing and social renting
witnessed a reduction over the same period shown.
In 1991, house owner was the primary source of housing in the UK, at about
60%. After 16 years, its figure experienced a considerable growth to 70%,
which was also the highest point in the year 2007. During the 16-year period,
there was an increase in terms of private renting of approximately 5%, from
around 9% to nearly 14% in the year 1991 and 2007 respectively.
Making up for about 25% in 1991, the number of the social renting house in
www.zandienglish.ir

the UK decreased remarkably, which fell to about 12% in 2007. In 1991,
social housing accounted for only 6% of the total of 22 million homes,
however, its proportion fell slightly to 4%, remaining as the lowest point in
2007.
183 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 24
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
The line graph compares the amount of acid rain emission from four sectors
in the UK over a period of 17 years from 1990 to 2007.
aa
It is clear that the total amount of emission fell dramatically from 1990 to
supply.
SSMM
2007. The most significant decrease was seen in the electricity, gas and water
T
In the year 1990, only around 0.6 million tons of acid rain emission was
LL T
caused by transport and communication and domestic, but the figure of this
emission in the other industries was 1.5 million tons higher, at 2.1 million
IIEE
tons. Meanwhile, electricity, gas and water supply was the major sector
contributing to the total amount of emissions, with 3.3 million tons. Over the
following 17 years, while emissions from transport and communication
fluctuated between about 0.6 and 1 million tons, a considerable decline was
seen in all other sectors.
In 2007, the other industries became the main section in causing acid rain
emissions, at just under 1.3 million tons, compared to around 0.6 million tons
and 1 million tons of emissions from transport and communication and
electricity, gas and water supply respectively. By contrast, the figure of
emissions from domestic was the lowest, with only around 0.3 million tons.
203 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 25
The charts below give information about travel to and from the UK, and
about the most popular countries for UK residents to visit.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The line chart reveals the comparisons between the number of foreigners
visiting the UK and that of UK people going abroad while the bar chart
illustrates the most-chosen destinations by UK residents in 1999.
It is clear that the number of UK residents going outside their boundary for a
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
trip outweighed the figure for overseas residents traveling to the UK
throughout the period shown. Though, the common trend in both categories
was upward. In addition, France was the most popular country visited by UK
dwellers in 1999.
According to the first chart, the figure for UK residents traveling abroad was
around 12 million people in the initial year while there were only about 10
oomm
million foreigners coming to the UK. However, after 20 years, the number of
UK people going outside the boundary for visiting soared and reached the
.c.c
peak at approximately 52 million. Finally, it was 25 million more than the
figure for overseas visitors traveling to the UK which hovered around 25
million by 1999.
rrss
ttttee
Turning to the bar chart, it can be seen that France was the most popular
destination for UK travelers in 1999 with about 12 million visitors. It was
followed by about 9 millions of UK people going to Spain. These figures
aa
were much more than a number of people visiting USA, Greece, and Turkey
which were 4, 3 and 2 million respectively.
220 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
SSMM
LLTT
The first line graph gives information about the number of visitors from and
to the UK between 1979 and 1999, and the second bar chart compares the
IIEE
figures for UK visitors among five countries in 1999.
It is clear that both visits to and from the UK rose significantly in the period
of 20 years, and that from and to the UK accounted for the highest number.
We can also see that France was the most favorite destination for UK visitors.
In 1979, the rates of UK visits and overseas ones stood at around 10 million.
By 1999, visits to foreign countries by UK residents had reached
approximately 52 million, and visits to the UK by foreigners had increased to
over a half of that figure.
In the year 1999, France had the greatest rate of UK travellers (12 million)
which was followed by Spain (9 million). By contrast, the USA, Greece, and
Turkey attracted the least UK residents, with the figure reaching 4 million, 3
www.zandienglish.ir

million and 2 million respectively.
171 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 26
The charts below give information about USA marriage and divorce
rates between 1970 and 2000, and the marital status of adult Americans
in two of the years.
Summarise the information selecting and reporting the main features, and
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The charts illustrate the number of marriages and divorces and marital status
www.zandienglish.ir

of adult people in America between 1970 and 2000.
Overall, the number of marriages increased over the period shown, while
there were some fluctuations in the figures for divorces. In addition, in terms
of marital status, the majority of the adults were married.
In 1970, the number of marriages in the USA was highest, at 2.5 million,
which was more than two times as high as the figure for divorces. The
number of marriages remained stable 10 years later, before falling
slightly/gradually to 2 million in 2000. By contrast, the figure for divorces
peaked at nearly 1.5 million in 1980 and then fell to 1 million in 2000.
The majority of American people were married. In 1970, 70% of adult people
were married, and despite a decrease, the number of married people remained
the highest with 60% in 2000. The percentage of widowed people also
declined slightly. By contrast, the proportion of never married and divorced
people grew to 20% and nearly 10% respectively in 2000.
178 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The first graph illustrates the proportion of marriages and divorces over a
period from 1970 to 2000 in America, while the second chart gives data on
the marital status of mature American according to four sections in separate
years, 1970 and 2000
The most striking feature is that married Americans accounted for a higher
rate than singles counterparts and the figure for marriage witnessed a
downward trend during the survey.
In details, in 1970, 2.5 million adults were married in the USA, which was
2.5 times greater than the number of divorces. This rate roughly remained
stable next decades, with the figure for divorces experiencing a slight
increase in 1980 - nearly 1.5 millions of divorces. In comparison, the
percentage of American adulthood getting married was the highest, at 70,
which was approximately 10 times higher compared to those who were still
single or windowed.
In 2000, the number of divorces slightly fell again, reaching the same as the
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
figure of the first year and as can be observed, it was just half of that of
marriages this year. Meanwhile, the number of American adults who were no
longer in a marital relationship or still single saw a dramatic growth by a
roughly 10% in 2000.
206 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 27
building purposes.
The diagrams describe the process of manufacturing cement with a support

from other equipment and how to produce cement for construction.
Overall, there are four main stages in cement-making production beginning
with limestone and clay being crushed and ending with packing cement into
bags, while making concrete requires 4 materials and mixing equipment.
Initially, limestone and clay are crushed into powder by a large crusher.
Afterwards, they are merged with each other in a mixer. In the next step, the
powdery mixture of limestone and clay is transferred to an enormous rotating
heating where it is heated and mixed until it is qualified. After those stages,
the raw materials are changed into cement powder after going through the
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
grinder which makes them become a soft, powdery-type substance.
In the concrete manufacturing for building purposes, there are 4 main
materials: cement, water, sand and gravel and mixing equipment. There is
approximate 10% of water and 15% of cement put into the concrete mixer
while these figures for sand and small stones are 25% and 50% respectively.
These raw materials will be put in the mixer before turning into a mixture for
constructive purposes called “concrete”.
194 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 28
The pie charts show user’s preference on social media channel
throughout 3 years period, from 2011 until 2013. Social media channels
accounted on the charts are Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, Google+, and
Pinterest.
The pie charts illustrate the percentage of people who were interested in
different categories in terms of the communication channel over three
separate years, namely 2011, 2012 and 2013.
Overall, Facebook accounted for the greatest proportion in all three years.
Additionally, it is obvious that there was a reduction in the proportion of
Facebook users whereas Twitter, LinkedIn, Google+ and Pinterest witnessed
a marked increase.
In 2011, Facebook was the main online social channel people like most with
precisely 59%, however, after 2 years, its figure experienced a significant
decrease of 21% to 38%, which was also the highest point in 2013. The
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
percentage of Twitter users remained relatively constant throughout the 3-
year period, at about 21%, 23%, 25% in the year 2011, 2012 and 2013
respectively.
In terms of LinkedIn users, its section saw a minor rise from 10% in 2011 to
15%, remaining as the second position in the year 2013. Covering 5% in
2011, there was a considerable growth in the number of people using
oomm
Google+, which climbed to 14% in 2013. Also, during the 3-year period, the
number of Pinterest users went up slightly from 5% in 2011 to 8%, which
was the lowest point in the year 2013.
.c.c
ss
203 words
rr
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 29
The graph below shows the number of passenger railway journeys made
in Great Britain between 1950 and 2004/5.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The line graph illustrates the figures for commuters using the three different
railway systems in Great Britain from 1950 to 2004/5.
Overall, the number of people in Great Britain making railway journeys
increased over the period shown. It is clear that the use of National rail
network as well as London was more popular than Light rail and metro
system.
In 1950, both national rail network and London Underground were used
widely with over 600 million passengers, while Light rail & metro systems
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
did not appear in Great Britain until 1960s. However, over the period from
1960 to early 1980s, the three systems usages witnessed a gradual decrease.
In 1980, there were no passengers using Light rail and metro systems.
Likewise, the commuters of the National Rail network and London
Underground reached the lowest point at about 600 million and 500 million,
respectively.
oomm
By 2004/5, a considerable growth was recorded in the use of the three
railway systems in Great Britain. The number of British people using
.c.c
National rail network rose significantly to around 1000 million, which
equaled its initial point in the end 1950s. These figures for London
rrss
Underground were up to almost 1000 millions of passengers as well as Light
rail & metro system at approximately 200 million.
210 words
aa
The graph shows the number of trips made by passengers on three railway
SSMM
systems in Great Britain between 1950 and 2004/05.
Overall, it is clear that the trends for all three networks were upward with the
LLTT
similarity between the National rail network and the London Underground.
To specify, the number of passenger railroad in National rail network
increased slightly from 1950 to 1960 about 200 million before falling
IIEE
considerably over the 20 years later. Likewise, in the same period, those in
London Underground leveled off around approximately 700 million and then,
it reached the lowest point at 500 million in the 1980s. After that, both of
them jumped quickly and between the 1980s and the early 2000s, the national
rail network reached a peak of approximately 1.1 billion passenger journeys
in 2004/05.
By contrast, after their introduction in the 1960s, the light railway and metro
systems carried fewer passengers than the other two networks. However,
between 1980 and 2004/05, the number of journeys made by passenger
climbed dramatically, to nearly 200 million in 2004/05.
174 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 30
The diagram below shows the process of using water to produce
electricity.
The chart illustrates how electricity is produced by using water.

Overall, the process of producing electricity includes 8 main steps, beginning
with the evaporation of water and ending with providing electric to users. In
addition, this process is dependent on weather conditions.
Firstly, water is evaporated from the sea by the heat of the sun, causes rain
after that, and then, water is reserved in the reservoir through using dam. In
the next stage, pressured water is used to make turbine turn to create
electricity through opening or dosing valve, while water comes back to the
reservoir by using the pump at the sixth stage.
At the next step, the electricity is then transported in the high voltage cables
from turbine to transformer station. In the last stage, the process finishes with
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
providing electricity to users/for people to use through underground cables
including electricity used in families, factories, hospitals or schools etc.
152 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 31
The diagram shows the life cycle of the honey bee.
The diagram illustrates various stages of the honey bee growth through the
life cycle between 34-36 days.
Overall, the whole life of the honey bee development includes six main steps,
beginning with eggs’ hatch and ending with the honey bee laying.
The honey bee life cycle commences when honey bee egg hatches after 9-10
days. The next step of honey bee life cycle lasts basically 5 days, which the
immature insect appears. In the following stage, it lives with a role of nymph
during 7 days before the nymph moults 3 times when it develops in the
period of 9 days.
The honey bee life cycle continues with the emergence of a young adult.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
After a total of 30 to 31 days from the start of series, the young adult bee
appears from its final moulting stage, and in the period of only 4 days, it
reaches full maturity to begin its production mission. It means that female
honey bee lay typically from 1 to 2 eggs every three days. Finally, the life
cycle turns to the first stage with honey bees’ hatch.
183 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 32
The chart below shows the amount of time that 10 to 15-year-olds spend
chatting on the Internet and playing on games consoles on an average
school day in the UK.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The chart illustrates information about how much time was spent on chatting
on the Internet and playing on game consoles by 10 to 15-year-olds on an
average day in the UK.
It is noticeable that more girls spent time on chatting on the internet than
boys. By contrast, most of the boys used their time to play game consoles
instead of chatting.
Boys from 10 to 15 years old preferred playing computer games to chatting
online. Roughly 85% boys played game console while this percentage was
only 55% for chatting online. Additionally, the majorities of boys played
computer games between 1 to 3 hours with over 40% and 30% of boys said
that they spent 4 hours plus for this habit.
By contrast, girls liked chatting online more than playing game console.
About 68% of girls from 10 to 15 years old joined online conversation per
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
day comparing to 50% of girls played game console. Moreover, most of them
spent 1-3 hours chatting on the Internet with 35%.
168 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The bar chart compares the time spent by students aged from 10 to 15 in the
oomm
UK on two different activities on an average school day.
It is clear that playing game consoles is much more popular than chatting on
.c.c
the Internet. However, this activity is more popular among boys while girls
ss
favour chatting.
rr
Looking at the chart in more detail, the boys aged between 10 and 15 clearly
ttttee
are attracted to/ are interested in/ prefer playing on game consoles over
chatting online. While about 35% of boys prefer chatting on the Internet, the
aa
figure for playing computer games is more than 80%. Furthermore, the
majority of these boys spend 1 to 3 hours per school day to play on their
MM
consoles, at approximately 50% while only one-fifth of that number spend
more than 4 hours on such activity.
SS
By contrast, girls prefer chatting on the Internet. Nearly 70% of surveyed
LLTT
girls chat online, compared to about 50% playing computer games. Of the
girls playing on their consoles, most of them spend less than one hour a day,
whereas the majority of girls engaging in online conversations spend more
IIEE
than 1 hours a day, nearly 10% are online more than 4 hours to chat.
204 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 33
The line graph illustrates trends in discharge rate of Red River that was
recorded in Fargo Station monthly in 1993.
Overall, the figure of discharge at Red River experienced a fluctuant period
with two peaks in April and August.
In the first half of years, it remained stable at approximately 1000 cu ft per
sec for three months before soaring up by 16500 to nearly 17500 in April.
After that movement, there was a sharp decrease in the percentage of Red
River Discharge, which was recorded to fall down by almost 1500 to only
3000 on Jun.
Over the remaining time, it inclined significantly to reach the second peak at
25000 in August after two-month recovery since June. In the last quarter, the
proportion of Red River declined sharply by 23000 to only 2000 in December
which was only twice as much as that in January.
151 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 34
The graphs below show the size of the ozone hole over Antarctica and the
production of three ozone-damaging gases from 1980 to 2000.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
The two line graphs illustrate how the ozone hole over Antarctica changed its
size and the amount of three different harmful gases between 1980 and 2000.
Overall, the ozone hole had been enlarging from 1980 to 2000 because of the
www.zandienglish.ir

significant growth of CFC-12 and N20 gases over the period.
Statistically, in 1980 the size of the ozone hole was under 400 thousand
square km. During the 1980-2000 periods, it has been widening, and
experienced the largest square in 2000, at 3,600 thousand square km, except
for a slight drop by almost 1000 thousand square km from 1990 to early 1992
In 1980, while under 70 million tonnes of CFC-11 was generated; which was
over twice than that of CFC-12, the amount of CFC-12 outnumbered the
figure of CFC-11, at over 40 million tones and approximately 35 million
tonnes respectively.
After 1990, the other damaging gas called N20 was produced. While CFC-12
gas displayed the largest quantity in 2000, at about 50 million tonnes, there
was a considerable increase in the figure of the newly-introduced gas,
reaching the point at over 35 million tonnes. In contrast, CFC-11 gas
experienced the smallest figure, at 5 million tones only.
197 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 35
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
MM
The table compares the number of people in terms of four different types of
film which they watch at the cinema in four countries.
SS
Overall, Indian people are more likely to watch films at the cinema compared
LLTT
to other three nations. It is also noticeable that action is the most favorable
kind of movies in all four countries.
IIEE
Action movies are preferred by people in all four countries, with exactly 29.9
million people in total and around 7 to 8 million in each country. In contrast,
the number of people who decided to watch horror movies is much lower, by
14.1 million people in comparison with action films. Besides, romance and
comedy movies have quite similar in the cinema viewing figures, staying at
20.3 and 19.9 million respectively.
Specifically, India has the highest number of viewers in total and in three
movie categories, except for the horror films with only 2.5 million people
while this type is (more) popular in Ireland (6.4 million) and in New Zealand
(4.7 million). On the other hand, there are just 17.8 Japanese people prefer to
watch movies at the cinema, with the highest figure of 7.1 in action and the
lowest one of 2.2 in horror. Finally, the total number of viewers in Ireland
www.zandienglish.ir

and New Zealand are 23.3 and 20.3 million respectively.
219 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 36
The following two pie charts show the results of a survey into the
popularity of various leisure activities among European adults in 1985
and 1995.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 1:
A glance at the two pie charts provided illustrates data on the proportion of
various activities that European adults do in their pastime during the period
www.zandienglish.ir

As can be seen from the two pie charts, watching TV was the most widely
enjoyed in both years, by nearly a third in 1985 and slightly lower 30 percent
in 1995. Yet by far the most significant change to take place during the
period was the increased popularity of playing computer games. Not a single
respondent to the survey rated playing computer as their preferred leisure
activities in 1985. However, in 1985, this figure jumped to 27 percent which
was the second highest percentage. This is followed by talking with friends,
which made up 26 percent in 1995, a 5-percent increase compared to 21
percent in 1985.
In stark contrast, it is noticeable point is that eating out which was the second
most widely enjoyed pastime experienced an exponential decrease in 1985,
accounting for 23 percent to a mere 8 percent in 1995. Similarly, there was a
considerable decline in terms of talking with family which constituted 18
percent in 1985 and 7 percent in 1995. Meanwhile, this figure for others
plunged from 6 percent to 2 percent in 1995.
211 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The two pie charts illustrate the changes in the number of people taking part
in some types of leisure activities of European adults between 1985 and 1995.
As can be seen from the charts, watching TV is the most popular activity
among adults in Europe in both years. In 1985, they had several activities like
watching TV, talking with friends, families; eating out and taking part in
other activities. However, they did these activities less than in ten years later
because they spent more time in new activity-playing computer games.
Watching TV, which constituted more than one-third of all European adults’
activities in 1985, went down slightly to 30% in 1995. Ten years later,
European adults started playing computer games. This activity became the
second most popular activity, which made up nearly a third of the total.
Likewise, talking with friends increased by 5% and accounted for more than
one-fourth of all activities.
On the other hand, European adults tended to talk with family in 1985 less
than ten years ago. In addition, eating out and other activities were the least
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
popular activities which dropped to 18% and 2% in 1995, respectively. By
contrast, there was no difference between the proportions of watching TV in
both years surveyed, at exactly 32%.
212 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 37
The line graph below shows the amount of electricity generated in 3
countries using wind power.
make comparison where relevant.
The line graph provided data on how much electricity was produced from
wind energy in China, Germany and the USA over the course of 10 years
starting from 2000.
Overall, all of the three nations witnessed an upward trend during given the
period of time, especially China which saw a sharp increase since the latter
half of decade.
In 2000, Germany produced most electric power from wind with roughly 6
gigawatts, followed by China and the USA with around 3 and 2 gigawatts
respectively. The figures for three countries were in the increase for next
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
years until 2008 where the amount of electricity generated in the USA
surpassed that of Germany. From that time on, the volume of electricity
production of Germany went up slowly, whereas the other two countries
experienced a dramatic rise with 35 and 27 gigawatts of the USA and China
respectively.
In 2010, the figure for China was the highest, compared to the remainder, at
oomm
more than 45 gigawatts. In fact, forty gigawatts of electric energy came from
the USA, compared to only around 25 gigawatts from Germany.
182 words
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 38
While the line graph indicates the number of people who got the citizenship
in the UK from 1992 to 2002, the bar chart illustrates the number of
emigrants from different continents to the same country in the year 1992 and
2002.
Overall, the figure of citizens in the UK showed an upward trend.
Specifically, Asia outnumbered other continents in the number of immigrants
who obtained UK citizenship.
Statistically, only 20 thousand people in the UK became official citizens in
1962. In 2002, the figure of UK citizens reached the highest point at
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
approximately 160 thousand, which was a rise by 110 thousand as compared
with that in 1992.
On the other hand, Asian people obtaining UK citizenship accounted for the
largest quantity in both year 1996 and 2002, about 49 thousand and 57
thousand respectively. While in 1996, Europe and Africa displayed a similar
figure; at 9 thousand people, those continents continuously experienced a
oomm
nearly resemble quantity, varying from 25 to 27 thousand people. Lastly,
America, Australia and “others” hit the lowest point at 5 thousand and 4
c.c
thousand people being citizens in the UK in 1996 and 2002 respectively.
.
ss
190 words
rr
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 39
The charts below show the proportion of the world’s oil resources held in
different areas, together with the proportion consumed annually in the
same areas.
The bar charts provide the information on the structure of global’s oil sources
in various groups of countries and yearly oil consumption of each group.
Overall, it is clear that the majority of world’s oil resources belongs to the
Middle East. However, Asia contains the biggest proportion of annual oil
consumed.
Looking at more details, it is noticeable that by far the greatest percentage of
oil sources all over the world goes to the Middle East, at 56.52%. Less than
half as much, namely 14.84%, Canada ranks the second in this structure.
There is a significantly lower amount of resources in the remaining areas with
Australia and New Zealand having the lowest figure in all indicators.
Asia, which constitutes around 2% in the first chart, seems to have the largest
proportion in the second chart, 26.21%. This is followed by the USA and
Western Europe which take up 25.4% and 19.24% of the total oil percentage
respectively. Although the Middle East produces the biggest oil in the world,
the figure for its consumption is approximately 6%, which is also that of
Central and South Africa and Eastern Europe. Finally, it can be seen that at
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
about 1%, Australia and New Zealand make up the smallest percentage in the
range of statistics.
211 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 40
The chart gives information about UK immigration emigration and net
migration between
1999 and 2008.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The chart illustrates the number of immigrated and emigrated people in the
UK as well as the deviation between these two numbers in a ten-year-period,
from 1999 to 2008.
At first glance, the number of people who immigrated to the UK was
considerably higher than that of ones who emigrated from the UK. The net
migration in the last five years of this period also increased in comparison
with that in the first five years.
In 1999, the number of immigrated people was around 450 thousand,
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
increasing steadily to about 490 thousand until 2000 and remaining
unchanged till 2001. This number witnessed a significant growth in 2003 to
above 590 thousand in 2004. Afterwards, the number of immigrated people
experienced a minor drop in 2005 before reaching the peak at exactly 600
thousand in 2006.
Similarly, there were also some fluctuations in the number of people
oomm
emigrating from the UK but the trend was generally upward until 2006. A
significant decrease in this number was followed by a considerable increase
.c.c
to reach the top at over 410 thousand in 2008. Meanwhile, the net migration
stood at above 150 thousand, experiencing some slight fluctuations before
rrss
reaching the highest number at about 250 thousand in 2004.
ttttee
204 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
aa
The chart demonstrates statistics about UK immigration, emigration and net
migration between 1999 and 2008.
SSMM
Both immigration and emigration rates rose during the above period, but the
figures for immigration were significantly higher. Net migration peaked in
2004 and 2007.
LLTT
In 1999, there were over 450,000 people coming to live in the UK while
roughly about 300,000 emigrated. The figure for net immigration was about
IIEE
160,000, and it remained at a similar level until 2003. During 1999-2004
period, the immigration number increased by approximately 150,000 people,
but there was a smaller rise in emigration. Besides, net migration peaked at
250,000 people in 2004.
After 2004, the rate of immigration was still high, but the number of people
emigrating fluctuated. Emigration figure fell suddenly in 2007 before
reaching a peak to about 430,000 people in 2008. Therefore, the net
migration figure rose to about 240,000 in 2007 but falling to around 160,000
people in 2008.
154 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 41
Three pie charts about young Australians secondary school leavers in
years 1980, 1990 and 2000. Each pie showed the proportion of school
leavers that continued studying, were employed or unemployed.
Write a report to a university lecturer describing the pie charts below.
The pie charts illustrate the proportion of graduates in three different

categories after graduating from schools over three separate years, namely
1980, 1990 and 2000.
Overall, the employed accounted for the greatest proportion in all years
mentioned. Additionally, it is obvious that there was a significant increase in
the proportion of people who were employed whereas unemployed and
further education experienced a reduction over the period shown.
In 1980, further education was the primary source of school leavers at
precisely 50%, however, after 20 years, its figure decreased dramatically to
approximately 25%, remaining as the second position in the year 2000.
In terms of the employed, its proportion saw a considerable growth during the
period of 20 years, from around 30% to about 70% in the year 1980 and 2000
respectively. Over the 20-year period, there was a fall in the number of
people who were unemployed to approximately 10%, accounting for the
lowest point in the year 2000.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
159 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 42
The bar chart below gives information about the percentage of the
population living in urban areas in the world and in different continents.
The bar chart illustrates data on the proportion of urban citizens in 5

continents in 2005, and compares this with the number in 2007 and the
projected percentage in 2030.
Overall, the percentage of urban inhabitants in the world is expected to
double between 2005 and 2030. Moreover, North America had the largest
number of the metropolitan population while Africa had the smallest
quantity.
To begin with, in 1950, 64 percent of North American people lived in urban
regions whereas only around 17 percent of African and Asian citizens lived
there. Additionally, 9 percent more inhabitants in Europe inhabited in
metropolitan areas than those in Latin America Caribbean. The figures were
51 percent and 42 percent respectively. After 37 years, Latin America
Caribbean experienced the most significant increase (37 percent) in urban
population while the least noticeable growth (15 percent) occurred in North
America.
In 2030, approximately 87 percent of inhabitants in Latin America Caribbean
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
and North America is predicted to live in metropolitan areas, as opposed to
just more than half of African and Asian people. In comparison, the number
of Europe is likely to develop to 72 percent.
190 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 43
The line chart compares the percentages of contentment to the health care
system in 1991, 1998 and 2007.
Overall, while Canada and Netherlands percentages were downward, the
proportions of England and USA became significant through the period
shown. Additionally, over the 16 years, Netherlands ranked first in
satisfaction followed by Canada, England, and the USA in the descending
orders.
On the one hand, in 1991, the percentage of Canada was in the top ranking
among four nations with nearly 60% compared with only around 20% of that
in England. However, in the next 7 years, this proportion plummeted
dramatically to around 20% while English percentage increased gradually
and peaked at about 25%. In 2007, Canadian satisfaction bounced back and
hit at roughly 40% in comparison with about 23% of that in England.
On the other hand, the proportion of satisfaction in Netherlands was under
50% in 1991 which experienced the period of growth with the highest point
at about 52% in 1998 and then stood at only 48% in 2007. At the same time,
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
the percentage of the USA which was 40% lower than that in Netherlands
hopped considerably and reached approximately 18%.
192 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 44
The pictures below show the recycling process of wasted glass bottles.
The chart illustrates the procedure of recycling wasted glass bottles.

Overall, there are three main stages including collecting, processing and
bottling in the recycling process before being sold in the supermarkets. In
addition, there are several steps in each stage.
Initially, wasted glass bottles are collected and flocked to a collection point
before being transported to a glass factory. Subsequently, the bottles are
immersed in high-pressure water and sorted out into three types of colors
including clear, green and brown. Afterwards, the categorized/ sorted bottles
are processed in the glass factory in which it is fractured into pieces and
burned in the furnace from 600 to 800 degrees Celsius.
The next step is both new and recycled liquid glass is poured into a glass
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
mould where it will be cooled and turn solid in a glass bottle shape before
being bottled and labelled. Eventually, these products will be ready for sale
on supermarket shelves.
153 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 45
The bar graph shows the global sales (in billions of dollars) of different
types of digital games between 2000 and 2006.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart compares the global sales of four different types of digital
games from 2000 to 2006.
Overall, handheld games had the highest number of global sales during the
given period. While there was an increase in global sales of handheld, online
and mobile games, the worldwide sales of console games gradually dropped
during a six-year period.
In 2000, the sales of console games were 12 billion dollars, which doubled
that of handheld games. After four years, the global sales of handheld games
gradually climbed to nearly 15 billion dollars, then remained unchanged
between 2004 and 2005 before reaching a peak of almost 18 billion dollars in
2006. In contrast, the figure of console games slightly dropped between 2001
and 2005 despite a minimal increase between 2003 and 2004 then halved in
2006.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Online and mobile phone games appeared later than the other two games but
having a dramatic rise in the number of global sales. Starting with 1 billion
dollars in worldwide sales in 2001, the figure for online games dramatically
increased to 9 billion dollars in 2006, a rise of 8 billion. Similarly, there was
a climb in the sales of mobile games from 2 billion in 2002 to 7 billion
dollars in 2006.
207 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
oomm
.c.c
The bar chart illustrates the worldwide revenue of four kinds of digital games
over the period of six years.
rrss
ttttee
Overall, there was an increase in the global sales of these types from 2000 to
2006, except for the figure for Console Games. The turnover of Handheld
Games was by far the highest figure.
aa
In 2000, the revenue of Handheld Games was doubled that of Console
MM
Games. The year 2001 and 2002 experienced the appearance of Mobile
Phone Games and Online Games respectively, whose wholesales were at well
SS
under 2 billion dollars (units).
LLTT
Handheld Games were by far the most prevalent digital games over the
period shown. Its turnover rose gradually by 6 units in the six-year period. By
contrast, the global sales of Console Games decreased by half to 3 units from
IIEE
2000 to 2006. The figure for Online Games grew by nearly 8 units to 9 units
which outstripped those of Mobile Phone Games and Console Games.
158 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 46
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart compares the percentage of young people taking four types of
home activities namely computer games, reading, board games, and watching
TV in four selected countries: England, Scotland, Ireland and Wales.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Overall, it can be clearly observed that playing games on computers is the
most popular hobby among young generation. The rate of people watching
TV at home is slightly higher than that of the remaining activities.
It can be noticed that the proportion of computer gamers in Ireland is highest
with exactly 60%. While Wales and England together share the second
position in this category, Scotland witnesses the lowest rate, at around 40%.
oomm
In terms of watching TV session, nearly a third of junior citizens shows
interest in this kind of activity. However, the figure for Scotland is slightly
lower with approximately 25%.
.c.c
ss
On the other hand, it can be seen that reading and playing board games have
rr
less attractiveness to young people. Wales is the country having the highest
ttttee
percentage of board games’ players, at 30%. The figures for England, Ireland
and Scotland are 25%, 20%, and around 15%, respectively. By contrast,
reading activity in Scotland is as popular as watching TV, with around a
aa
fourth of young people interesting in. Whereas, in Ireland and Wales, the
rates of people taking this kind of hobby are equally lowest at 10%.
220 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
SSMM
LLTT
The bar chart shows the proportion of the youth joining/taking part in 4
leisure activities in different parts of the United Kingdom.
IIEE
Overall, the young people in 4 countries like playing computer games the
most. While reading activity is the least common in England, Ireland and
Wales, board games hold this position in Scotland.
In Ireland, about 60% of people aged 11 to 16 play games on the computer,
which is the highest proportion in 4 nations. While both England and Wales
have the same level at around 50%, the figure for Scotland was the smallest,
about 40%. However, in this country, the youth prefer reading the most with
the percentage at approximately 25%, followed by England which is 5%
smaller. Ireland and Wales have a proportion of readers in young people at
about 10%.
In terms of other leisure activities, watching TV is more popular than board
www.zandienglish.ir

games in most countries, except for the Wales which has the same level of
popularity in these two activities. The percentage of the youth who watch TV
in England, Ireland and Wales are all around 30%. In Wales, young people
play board games at the proportion of 30% then England and Ireland coming
in the second and third place at 25% and 20%, respectively. This kind of
activity was less common among the Scotland’s young people, with the
percentage of about 15%.
219 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 47
The graph compares the percentage of international and the percentage
of UK students gaining second class degrees or better at a major UK
university.
oomm
1/2582-academic-graph-writing-195-percentage-of-international-and-uk-
students-gaining-second-class-degrees
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
MODEL ANSWER 1:
IIEE
The bar chart illustrates data on the proportion of overseas and UK students
who received second class degrees or higher in terms of eight different
subjects at a UK university in the year 2009.
Overall, while more international students gain second class degrees or better
in technology-related subjects, UK students tend to do better in Art social
science-related subjects. Also, the percentage of overseas and UK student
gaining a degree in Nursing and Accountancy is the same.
In 2009, a UK university had the highest percentage of international students
www.zandienglish.ir

who got second class degrees or better in Information technology, at nearly
90%, compared to only around 60% of UK students did so. Likewise, the
proportion of UK students who gained a good degree in Electrical
engineering was 20% less than that of foreign students, at just over 60% and
exactly 80% respectively. Also, degree results were similar for two group in
Nursing (about 75%) and Accountancy (80%).
Still, the proportion of UK students outnumbered the figure for international
students in 4 remaining subjects. While the difference between two groups in
English literature, Art history, and Sociology was insignificant (about from
5% to 20%), the biggest gap was in International law, which three-quarters of
UK students gained a second class degree or better.
212 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The bar graph illustrates the differences between the UK and international
students’ percentages of second class degree achievement across seven
subjects at a major university in the UK.
Overall, the proportions of international student were higher than that of the
UK in Electrical, Information technology while UK students had advantages
in English literature, art history, law, and sociology.
On the one hand, home and international students had the same proportions in
terms of nursing and accountancy which were about 75% and 60%
respectively. However, there was around 85% of international gained a good
degree in Information technology whereas the figure for the UK was
approximately 55%. In addition, international students gaining second class
degrees or more in electrical engineering took up for 5% less than that of IT
while the figure for home students was 61%.
On the other hand, there were 80% of UK students achieving art history and
sociology which were respectively about 10% and 5% higher than that of
international students. Analogously, regarding English literature and
International law proportions, those of home students were 75% and 70%
while those figures for international students were about 58% and 45%
respectively.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
192 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 48
The graph shows the size of the Ozone layer hole in Antarctic and three
productions of damaged gases to the Antarctic Ozone from 1980 to 2000.
The first graph illustrates how large the Ozone layer hole was in Antarctic
and the second one compares the amount of three detrimental gases to the
Antarctic Ozone between 1980 and 2000.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Overall, the size of Antarctic Ozone Layer Hole increased considerably.
Meanwhile, the production of H2 and H2...11 drew a parallel trend; however,
the amount of H2O2 was downward.
On the one hand, the measurement of Ozone Layer Hole levelled off, at
around 48 million square km from 1980 to 1982. Afterwards, this figure
increased dramatically and reached at about 200 million in 1992 before it
peaked at 250 million in 2000.

oomm
plunged rapidly to only 150 in 1994. However, the size bounced back and
.c.c
On the other hand, in the initial year, the production of H202 was 150
ss
thousand metric tonnes followed by nearly 100 thousands of H2...11 while
rr
there was no production of H2. Nonetheless, the H2O2 figure reached the
ttttee
highest point at 200 thousand in 1985 before becoming problematic and
plummeted to 0 by 2000. By contrast, the figure for H2...11 slightly
fluctuated and remained at roughly 100 thousand while the amount of H2
aa
stood at the initial level until 1990. In the last four years, those figures
noticeably reached at about 160 and 80 thousand respectively in 2000.
213 words
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 49
The table describes the figure for foreign tourists arriving in six areas around
the World and the yearly development rate between 1995 and 2020 of each
area.
Overall, the common trend in the number of visitors in six areas was upward
and European and American countries had the largest number of overseas
tourists while Africa showed the minority in their visitor numbers. In
addition, the Middle East, North, South Asia, Pacific and Africa grew most
rapidly.
On the one hand, the figure for foreign visitors in Europe increased from 386
to 776 millions of people followed by a 172-million-people rise in America.
In comparison, the figure for Africa was raised from 4 to 19 million while
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
South Asia underwent the rise of 39 million from 10 millions of people.
Furthermore, North Asia and Pacific soared from 19 to 88 million-
approximately 5 times in comparison with the greatest growth of Middle East
which became significant from 15 to 92 million.
On the other hand, European and America showed the lowest percentages
with 3.1% and 3.8% respectively. By contrast, the annual development of
oomm
Africa, South, and North Asia were familiar with 5.4%, 5.5%, and 5.6%
respectively while the Middle East ranked the first with 5.8%.
203 words
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 50
The line graph illustrates the anticipation about the number of people taking
part in learning three major world languages from 2020 to 2030.
Overall, the common trend for the chart is upward despite some fluctuations.
However, while English is predicted to be the most popular language,
Mandarin will replace Spanish to be the second one.
In 2020, there will be around 550 millions of people learning English in
comparison with about 200 million people willing to take part in Spanish and
only 100 million of people who study Mandarin. Afterwards, the figures for
Mandarin and Spanish will rise considerably before coinciding at
approximately 350 million. At the same time, the figure for English will
increase rapidly and reach at approximately 700 million in 2024 before
plunging to 250 million more than Mandarin and Spanish.
However, the number of people studying English is anticipated to bounce
back and peak at roughly 750 million in 2030 while Mandarin will be
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
becoming popular dramatically and reaching about 200 million less than that
of English. In addition, the figure for Spanish will rise more modestly and
stand at around 500 million eventually.
188 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 51
The line graph illustrates the figure for London Underground station
passengers between 6.00 am to 22.00 pm.
Overall, the number of passengers fluctuated significantly. It always
remained between 100 and below 400.
In the 6 am - 10 pm period, there was a fluctuation in the number of people
getting on London underground. During the first three hours, the figure
increased greatly before reaching the highest point of the whole line graph, at
400 at 8 am. However, in the following period of two hours, it fell sharply to
180 at 10 am and then gradually went up to more than 300 at 14.00.
Throughout the remainder of the period, it is obvious that there was a
dramatic dip to below 100 by 16 pm.
From 16.00 pm to 22.00 pm, the number of passengers varied more
significantly than the 6 am - 16 pm period. It rose to 380 at 18 pm, which was
its highest point during the 8-hour period and then dropped to 100 at 22 pm.
In the next two hours, the figure grew to 190, falling to 110 at 22 pm.
186 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 52
The graph below gives information about international tourist arrivals in
five countries.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
MODEL ANSWER 1:
SSMM
LLTT
The line graph compares the number of overseas visitors traveling to the
USA, Brazil, Egypt, Malaysia, and France in millions of people between
1995 and 2010.
IIEE
Overall, the number of international tourist arrivals rose in all countries, and
the most dramatic increase was seen in France, compared to the slowest
growth in Brazil throughout the period shown.
In 1995, just under 10 million of international visitors travelled to Brazil and
Egypt, which was the lowest figure shown on the graph, while this figure for
France was 20 million higher, at 30 million. Meanwhile, the USA had by far
the highest number of tourists in among the five countries in this year, at
roughly 70 million, before climbing rapidly to a peak of over 90 million in
2005.
By 2010, the number of overseas residents who went to Brazil and Egypt was
about 16 million and nearly 20 million respectively, while this figure for
www.zandienglish.ir

Malaysia was double, with slightly above 40 million of visitors. By contrast,
the USA and France were the most popular options for international tourists,
with over 85 million of visitors choosing to travel in these countries.
189 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
A glance at the graph reveals the difference in the number of foreign visitors
in five regions internationally from 1990 to 2005.
Overall, the figure for foreign travellers in all five areas followed an upward
trend over the period mentioned.
In details, initially, North America, Central and Eastern Europe, South-East
Asia took up the first, second and third positions out of the five tourist
attractions, with approximately 20, 30 and 70 visitors respectively and
maintained their position during the period. Although having a striking start,
tourist arrivals to North America grew slightly until leveling off at roughly 87
million in 2005. Meanwhile, the first five year period witnessed a marked
improvement in Central Eastern Europe in terms of the number of foreign
visitors from less than a half to almost equal that of North America.
While foreign visitor arrivals in South-East Asia shared a similar trend to that
of Central Eastern Europe with a double increase from 1990 to 1995, the
variation of two remaining regions was within a small range from nearly 10
million to just above 20 million. There had virtually been a coincidence of
the starting point between the figure for the other two regions including Sub-
Saharan Africa and South America before the former overtook the latter at
the end of the period.
216 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

Legal & Disclaimer
cause of action.
book.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION
SAMPLE 1
SAMPLE 2
SAMPLE 3
SAMPLE 4
SAMPLE 5
SAMPLE 6
SAMPLE 7
SAMPLE 8
SAMPLE 9
SAMPLE 10
SAMPLE 11
SAMPLE 12
SAMPLE 13
SAMPLE 14
SAMPLE 15
SAMPLE 16
SAMPLE 17
SAMPLE 18
SAMPLE 19
SAMPLE 20
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 21
SAMPLE 22
SAMPLE 23
SAMPLE 24
SAMPLE 25
SAMPLE 26
oomm
SAMPLE 27
.c.c
SAMPLE 28
rrss
ttttee
SAMPLE 29
SAMPLE 30
SAMPLE 31
aa
SAMPLE 32
SAMPLE 33
SSMM
SAMPLE 34
SAMPLE 35
LLTT
SAMPLE 36
SAMPLE 37
SAMPLE 38
IIEE
SAMPLE 39
SAMPLE 40
SAMPLE 41
SAMPLE 42
SAMPLE 43
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 44
SAMPLE 45
SAMPLE 46
SAMPLE 47
SAMPLE 48
SAMPLE 49
SAMPLE 50
SAMPLE 51
SAMPLE 52
CONCLUSION
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
INTRODUCTION
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
MM
SS
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 1
The chart below shows the GDP growth per year for three countries
The bar chart illustrates the annual GDP growth of three different nations
from 2007 to 2010.
Overall, the GDP rate in Tunisia and Ecuador decreased significantly while
the figure in Japan increased steadily over the period.
In 2007, Tunisia’s GDP development was highest, at approximately 6.3%,
before falling significantly to about 3% and remained stable at the end of the
period. Meanwhile, in 2007, the figure for Ecuador was a half of that for
Tunisia, but reached a peak of about 5% in 2008, then fell to a bottom at
nearly 1.2% before increasing to around 2.2% in 2010.
The GDP growth in Japan in 2007 was over 3 times lower than that in
Tunisia. However, the GDP grew to 6.5% by 2010 which was the highest
figure shown in this graph. The other important point to note is that the
figures in three countries in 2008 were roughly the same number, at
appropriately 4.5% for each nation.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
160 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 2
The diagram illustrates the various stages of glass containers manufacture and
glass recycling.
It is clear that there are four stages to produce glass containers from mixing
stage to product – completed stage. It can be seen that glass recycling
consists of five stages beginning with the collecting of used glass and ending
at moulding stage.
Looking at the information of glass-making process in more detail, at the first
stage, 4 ingredients such as sand, soda ash, limestone and other chemicals are
combined to make a mixture. This mixture is then melted in a glass furnace at
a high temperature of approximately 1500*C. The final product is afterward
used blowing method to be shaped.
Regarding the second diagram, glass recycling process begins when people
collect used glass and then sort them into categories by color. Before being
crushed and melted, the glasses are washed to remove all impurities. This
process ends when the melted liquid in stage 4 is now moulded into new
products.
163 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 3
The table and pie chart shows the number of research students in
Australian universities in 2001 and 2010.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
The table gives information about the number of students who conduct
research in Australia universities over two separate years, 2001 and 2010
IIEE
while the pie charts give more detail information about genders of mentioned
students.
Overall, according to the table, the number of research students from both
local and international areas experienced increases over the time period, in
which that of research students from local areas accounted for the greatest
proportion in total. It also can be seen from the pie charts that there was a
reduction in the number of male and female students of the local area
whereas that of international students showed an opposite trend.
In 2001, both male and female coming from local regions were the primary
source of research students in Australian universities, with exactly equal
proportions of 43%, after which they fell slightly to 39% and 35%
respectively. During the period of 9 years, there was a growth in the
www.zandienglish.ir

percentage of international male students, rising from a tiny 3% to 12% in
2010. Meanwhile, the percentage of international female students also
showed a similar trend, with an increase from 4% to a modest 15% in 2010.
In addition, starting at 33657 and 5192 students in 2001 respectively, the
number of local and international research students both increased to 39488
and 14593 students, nearly a 3-fold increase, at the end of the period.
219 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 4
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
The chart documents the results of quarterly sales and profits statistics,
aa
including forecast sales, actual sales and pre-tax profits at Presto Bearings
last year.
SSMM
It is evident from the information provided that both these sections saw
considerable fluctuations in 4 quarters, with lows during fourth quarter and
LLTT
highs during the third quarter.
In the first three months, actual sales and pre-tax profits started at about 550
thousand and almost 80 thousand Euros. They both saw an upward trend to
IIEE
reach the peak in the third quarter. However, the figures of actual sales which
were approximately 1.3 million Euros surpassed that of pre-tax profits around
900 thousand Euros.
Meanwhile, forecast sales, on the other hand, revealed a remarked decrease,
from 700 thousand in the first quarter to about 500 thousand Euros in the
second quarter. Then, it reached a peak of 1- million Euros in the third
quarter. After that, both actual sales, forecast sales and pre-tax profits had
soared dramatically, reaching just under 400 thousand, around 300 thousand
and about 100 thousand Euros respectively.
175 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 5
The charts below show how selected age groups purchased concert,
cinema, and theatre tickets online over the first three months of 2006 in
three countries and how the Internet was accessed.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The two bar charts illustrate the proportion of purchased online tickets for the
concert, cinema, and theatre and how the Internet was accessed in Australia,
the UK, and Malaysia over the first three months of 2006, 6 years after the
turn of the millennium.
Overall, the young-aged group tends to purchase online tickets more often
[frequently] than the old one in most nations with the exception of Malaysia
in which the reversing pattern took place. Moreover, regarding the means of
Internet connection, a desktop computer is mostly utilized by people in all
mentioned nations, followed by laptop and cell phone.
It is noticeable that people aged from 25 to 44 bought tickets online more
frequently than the age group 65 and above in Australia and the UK, despite
the reversing pattern in Malaysia. Specifically, purchases for the younger age
group were the same in Australia and the UK at a compelling 55 percent and
it was just under [just south of] 40 percent in Malaysia. Interestingly, the
percentage of people in Malaysia and the UK for the older age group were
very close around 42% each, in comparison with a higher rate of people in
Australia at just over 45 percent [by 3% more than that number].
In terms of the most widespread mean of access to the Internet in all stated
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
countries, desktop computer, there was a respectable majority of 63% of
people using it, followed by Australia’s and Britain’s figure. By contrast,
among three categories, cell phone accounted for the smallest rate evidently
at a noteworthy plurality of 30% in Malaysia, a similar circumstance
experiencing Australia and Britain but at a lower rate.
220 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
oomm
.c.c
The bar charts compare two age groups in terms of buying tickets online in
early 2006 and illustrate the popularity of 3 technology devices which were
UK, and Malaysia.

rrss
used to buy tickets on the internet. The figures were given for Australia, the
ttttee
Overall, more 25-to-44-year-old people bought tickets online than remaining
age group, except for Malaysia. The most common means of connecting to
aa
the internet to buy tickets was Desktop computer. In contrast, the Mobile
phone had the lowest figures for 3 countries.
SSMM
In Australia and the UK, the vast majority of online ticket buyers was people
who aged from 25 to 44. The figures for both countries were the same at
TT
about 55%. By contrast, fewer people who aged over 65 in both Australia and
UK bought tickets on the website, under 50% and just over 40% respectively.
LL
However, Malaysia was different, where there are only about 40% of online
IIEE
ticket buyers who were from 25 to 44-year-old compared to around 43% of
older people.
Out of 3 means of access to buy tickets, Desktop had the highest percentage
of users. The figures for 3 countries were over 50%. Nearly 70% of users
were in Australia. By comparison, the proportion of people using the Mobile
phone when they bought tickets was nearly under half the figure of Desktop
computer, which was registered the lowest number in the second bar chart
shown. The laptop was the second most popular devices that online ticket
buyers use. While the figures both Australia and Malaysia were similar at
about 40%, the proportion of users in the UK was 10% lower.
220 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 6
The illustration delineates the daily botanical process which transforms the
solar energy into chemical one: sugar.
Overall, the photosynthesis requires a combination of several steps to afford
the high demand of energy and ingredients.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
The first occasion of the photosynthesis is the opening of stomata on leaves
surface to gather the excessive volatile in the earth atmosphere: carbon
dioxide. Noticeably, this process can only occur during the day when the sun
is shining, due to the light stimulation on the activity of the stomata.
Moreover, not only does the sunlight activate the gas collecting of the leaves
but also it provides the leaves with electron energy for the chemical reaction
mm
initiating the sugar when the red and blue lights are absorbed by the
pigments- chlorophyll. Consequently, the green wave lengths absorption
oo
from the sun of leaves are trivial, which explains why the plants have their
natural green colour.
.c.c
rrss
Simultaneously, at the root of the tree, the water from the soil is absorbed
actively through the root surface. Water is then, thanks to physical and
ttttee
chemical forces in the plant, flowing to the xylem of the root to reach other
orgasms of the plant. This multi-purpose ingredient takes joint in the sugar
making procedure. During that procedure, oxygen is created and together
aa
with the volatile water, they are released into the air through the opening
stomata. The transpiration- the water loss, is not the threat of the botanic life
SSMM
but an essential process needed for water transition in the plant. Once the
solar energy is completely transformed into chemical- the sugar is made, the
excess is, therefore, preserved as starch in the roots to provide the energy for
plants wheel of life.
220 words
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 7
The pie charts below compare water usage in San Diego, California and
the rest of the world.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The pie charts illustrate the proportion of water used for three different
purposes in two specific cities namely San Diego and California and the other
areas in the world.
In general, in San Diego County and California, water was mainly consumed
by households, while in the rest of the world, the capital usage of this
resource was for irrigation.
As can be seen from the pie charts, in San Diego County and California,
domestic water use accounted for the highest percentage, at 60% and 39 %
respectively, whereas the figure for the all remaining regions was much lower
than this, at only 8%. By contrast, 69 % of the total amount of water
consumption was for agriculture worldwide, except for San Diego County
and California where water usage for this purpose just stood at 17% and 28%
respectively.
Besides, interestingly, the percentages of water used for industry in San
Diego County and the rest of the world were equal, at 23% in comparison
with over 30% in California.
168 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
The pie charts compare San Diego, California and the world in terms of
allocating water in 3 main purposes: for households, industry, and
agriculture.
It is noticeable that there is opposite trend of distributing water to 3 sectors
between 2 surveyed cities and the rest of the world. In San Diego and
California, most of the water is used in households, while agriculture sector
oomm
consumes the biggest proportion of the total water used.
Residential purpose accounts for by far the greatest amount of water in San
.c.c
Diego, with 60%, followed by industrial and agricultural purposes with 23%
ss
and 17% respectively. California shares the same pattern of using water with
rr
San Diego, but there is a much smaller difference among three purposes. 39%
ttttee
of the total water goes home and roughly a third of the total water is
distributed to industry and agriculture.
By the contrast, globally, 69% of total water used served agricultural sector
aa
while the figure for residential usage was 61% lower, at a mere 8%. There is
M
23% of the total water consumed by industry.
177 words
SS M
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 8
The table below shows the percentage of students proficient in a foreign
language.
This bar chart depicts the number of students speak fluently a second
language in six countries. It also looks at the difference between male and
female students at each nation.
Overall, both female and male students in Romania and India accounted for
the largest percentages among six countries while Chinese male students and
Thailand females made up for the smallest proportions. In addition, female
proportions in most of the countries are higher than males with the exception
of Thailand.
It is immediately apparent that the India has the most students who master a
second language, with 67% of males and 56% of females. The next most
students that are proficient in a foreign language is Romania, which runs at
65% for males and 42% of for females, and closely followed by Vietnam at
56% and 38% for each gender. Russian students are an only bit fewer than
Vietnamese students in language proficiency, about 43% of boys and 35% for
girls. Finally, the fewest number of students successfully learn a new
language are China and Thailand, both of which ranging from 14% to 32%
for two genders.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Typically, there are considerable differences in language fluency between
males and females. Romania has the biggest gap among two genders as 22%
more females grasp a foreign language successfully than males. In a similar
pattern, the differences are 17%, 12%, 15% and 8% in Vietnam, India, China
and Russia respectively. Notably, in Thailand, the pattern is inverse when
boys have 5% greater than girls in language proficiency.
219 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 9
The bar chart below shows the numbers of students sitting examinations
in eight different subjects and the percentage of students gaining top
marks.
The chart illustrates the differences in the number of students taking

examinations and the proportions of top-mark students among eight
disciplines.
Overall, mathematics examinations were done/sit/taken by the largest number
of students while the percentage of awarded students of that subject was
much higher than the other disciplines.
On the one hand, the figure for entries of mathematics examinations was
around 75 thousand while 45% of those students gained top marks. This
figure was considerably greater than the number of students doing biological
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
exams which took up for 60% with 30% of them was awarded. Moreover,
chemistry and art and design accounted for approximately 55% and 53%
respectively. However, the proportions of chemistry and design top-mark
students were a trifle higher than that of Biology with 34% and 32% of those
pupils.
On the other hand, the proportion of Media was about a half of that of Art
oomm
and Design with 30% in comparison with 20%, 15% and 10% of Physical
Education, Food Technology, and Computing respectively. Additionally, the
.c.c
figure for A and A* students in examinations of Media occupied for 13% of
them whereas those proportions of Education, Health and Computing took up
rrss
respectively for 16%, 14% and 16% of those students.
ttttee
203 words
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 10
The flow chart illustrates the consequences of deforestation.
The flow chart demonstrates the effects of the removal of forests.

Overall, there are four main consequences resulted from deforestation which
eventually leads to flooding and loss of biodiversity.
Initially, the flooding is a result of the heavy logging equipment which turns
soil into the hard and baked surface. Those will lead to the run-off of
rainwater which causes the flooding. Another consequence is the decline in
the number of roots securing the top soil. Subsequently, soil erosion,
degradation of vegetable and less biodiversity eventually happen.
Furthermore, the degradation of vegetation could result from the reduced
amount of moisture returned to air which will reduce precipitation, increase
drought, degrade vegetation and lead to a loss of biodiversity lastly. In
addition, the loss of biodiversity is an effect of the loss of micro-organisms
relying on waste wood because the greater likelihood of burning causes the
disappearance of this material. This leads to degraded vegetation.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
153 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 11
The chart below shows average hours and minutes spent by UK males
and females on different daily activities.
The table gives us information of the average time both genders spending on
different daily activities in the UK.
It is clear that sleep, leisure, and occupation take up most daytime of both
males and females. Men spend significantly more time for work, whereas
women, as a conventional conception, spend more time on housework and
childcare.
Most people involved in the survey use their time for sleep and leisure with
more than 8 hours and approximately 5 hours respectively. The third highest
importance is taken up by employment and study recorded of 3.45 hours for
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
males and 2.26 hours for females.
Other activities such as housework, childcare or voluntary work and meetings
are far more favorable to women rather than men. In detail, nearly double
time of chores and childcare females spend every day compared with the
other gender. Although there come some differences between both genders,
we can see relative similarities to some extent in relaxation, personal care or
reading.
161 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 12
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The two pie charts compare the proportion of brand names in the Thai ice-
cream market, namely Unilever, Nestlé, and others, over the past two years.
Overall, at first glance, it is evident from the information provided that
Unilever and Nestlé are the two primary producers. The majority of ice-
cream market share in Thailand belongs to these, accounting for about 75%
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
last year and 80% this year collectivity.
Last year, Unilever’s ice-cream product which is preferred best in Thai Land,
reached 45%, about half the ice cream market. Market share figure for the
brand still maintained over this year. The second position is Nestlé’s ice-
cream product, which represented 30% last year. There was a moderate
increase in the consumption of Nestlé’s product, with 35% of the total market
was 10% lower.

oomm
this year. However, compared with Unilever’s ice-cream product, the amount
.c.c
Meanwhile, the percentage of other brand names were the lowest. The
ss
consumption of ice cream products from other companies from last year to
rr
this year witnessed a gently decline from 25% to 20%.
ttttee
173 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
aa
The two pie charts give information about the proportion of market share in
SSMM
Thailand ice-cream industry.
In general, Unilever has the greatest share in Thailand ice-cream market. The
percentage market of Nestle grows up this year, by contrast, this figure for
LLTT
other companies falls down.
Turning first to Unilever, from last year to this year, the share market of
IIEE
Unilever has remained stable, at a minority of respectable of 45%. This
company has taken nearly half of market share in Thailand, became the
biggest brand in Thailand ice-cream market.
With regard to Nestle, the second largest company among these three, in last
year, Nestle took about one- third total share of the market, at a moderate
30%. After that, this year see the slight increase in the percentage of share of
Nestle, at 35% out of the unit. Whereas, the market share of other company
decrease s over 1 year. 25% share of market belonged to other company, in
comparison with 20% in this year.
165 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 13
The graph below shows in percentage terms the changing patterns of
domestic access to modern technology in homes in the UK.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The line graph gives information about the percentage of people having
access to 4 different modern technology within the UK and illustrates how it
has changed from 1996 to 2003.
It is clear that the proportion of people who connected to modern technology
increased over the period shown. While most people used modern technology
such as CD player, home computer, and mobile phone in 1996/97, it was not
until 1998/99 that Internet appeared.
In the period 1996-1997, the percentage of people who used CD player was
60%. Meanwhile, the figures for home computer and mobile phone were
lower, at about 30% and approximately 20% respectively. By contrast, the
proportion of people who had access to the internet was zero until it climbed
to 10% in 1998 and 1999.
By 2003, the percentage of modern technology users continued to increase
significantly. The figure for CD player users was about 82%, compared to
70% of the mobile phone users and the proportion of home computer and
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
internet users were nearly 60% and just over 40% respectively.
174 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The line graph illustrates the proportion of CD player, mobile phone, home
computer and internet access to the latest technology in UK households.
oomm
It is clear that there was an upward trend in the number of British using four
approaches. The total number of the CD player and home computer usages
.c.c
gained steadily compared with the number of people using mobile and
ss
internet access, which had only started to be recorded from 1998.
rr
In 1996, 60 percent of populations using CD player was at its highest and
ttttee
gradually rose over a period of seven years, at about above 80 percent. In the
same trend, there was a moderate increase in the number of home computer
aa
usage from approximately 30 percent to just over 50 percent between 1996
and 2003.
SSMM
On the other hand, mobile phones started with the lowest accessibility at
about 19 percent, but it considerably gained and surpassed home computers
at the beginning of 1990 with around 70 percent usages by 2003. Similarly,
LLTT
internet access which just started to be recorded from 1998 with only 10
percent, then swelled significantly to 47 percent over the 4-year period.
IIEE
189 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 14
The bar chart below gives information about student enrolments at three
US universities over the period from 1990 to 2010 in four different
faculty areas.
The graph illustrates how many students of three universities apply in

subjects/majors at the US between 1990 and 2010.
Overall, the number of students join in biology and engineering fell
significantly, while that in business and social work saw a considerable
increase during the period shown.
In details, the number of student applications in engineering started at 4500,
being double that in business in 1990; following this, the figure for
engineering witnessed a downward trend to around 500, which was lowest in
2010. A similar trend happened to biology which came second in 1990 with
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
3000, then it halved in 2000 and finished at about 1000 in 2010.
In contrast to biology and engineering, a growing trend was seen in business
and social work. The data on student selecting business doubled from 2000 in
1990 to 4000, which was the highest value of/among four faculty areas, in
2010. Similarly, there was a minimal rise in the figure for social work started
in 1990 at the lowest value at 1000 to approximately 1900 in 2010.
174 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 15
The table shows the percentage of journeys made by different forms of
transport in four countries. The bar chart shows the results of a survey
into car use.
The table shows the percentage of transport means used in four countries,
namely the USA, the UK, France, and Netherlands. Meanwhile, the bar graph
explains why people chose cars for travelling to work.
Overall, two graphs show considerable variations in transport means used,
however, cars accounted for the biggest proportion in most cases.
As can be seen, a car which was the most frequent mode in all four countries
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
had the percentages ranging from 90% in the USA to 47% in Netherlands.
There were some differences in the figures of the other transport modes.
Surprisingly, bicycle and foot are used in Netherlands the most among four
countries (with 26 percent and 18 percent respectively). In France, eighteen
percent of people surveyed chose public transport to travel which places the
highest position in comparison to these number in other countries.
oomm
The bar graph gives an explanation why people in the USA use the car to
work. Specifically, nearly 40% of people resorted to the car as the only
.c.c
option available. The number of people questioned choosing a car because of
its convenience account for nearly a quarter of all. Most people surveyed use
rrss
car for need rather than preference. While some people rely on cars for
working (30%), the smallest percentage (30%) chose cars to go to work at
ttttee
night.
218 words
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 16
Charts 1 and 2 below show the proportion of income spent on different
areas by young people in Canada and Poland. Chart 3 shows the average
age of certain life events for these countries and an estimated global
average age.
Write a report summarising the information. Select and describe the main
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
The 3 charts provided indicate the portion of income spent on 6 selected
sectors in Canada and Poland and the average age of 3 key life events of both
aa
illustrated countries compared to the global norm.
MM
As can be seen from the first pie chart of Canada, it is clear that the
percentage of expenditure on leisure is the largest share, with one fifth (20%),
SS
followed by, clothing at 19%. The figures of other areas are roughly similar,
LLTT
fluctuating from 14% to 16%.
Regarding the Poland’s expenditures, there is a vast majority of nearly a half
IIEE
(43%) spent on studies which are ranked the first and twice times higher
compared to the figure of transport, with 26%. The percent of expenditure on
clothing and leisure are 11% and 10% respectively and the same figures at
5% are accounted for the expenditures of food and housing.
Turning to the third bar chart, the Canadian youngsters leave home and buy
the first car at their age of around 20s which is earlier compared to the Polish
and Global who involve in these 2 events at more than 25 years old.
However, the youths in both Canada and Poland get married at the age of
30s, which is later than the estimated age of universal young people, at only
20 years old.
In summary, it is clear that the Canadian expenditures distribute roughly
equally in all areas while the Polish spend the most money on studies.
www.zandienglish.ir

Moreover, the youngsters both selected countries get married lately whereas
the Global norm represents the reversed pattern.
219 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 17
The table below shows social and economic indicators for four countries
in 1994, according to United Nations statistics.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
The table compares United Nations data on socio-economic indicators for
Canada, Japan, Peru and Zaire in 1994.
aa
Overall, the figures for all four indicators in Canada and Japan were
significantly higher than Peru and Zaire. In addition, Zaire had the lowest
MM
figures for each of the indicator.
SS
Annual income per person in Japan was $15760, considerably ahead of
Canada with $ 11100. The figures for Peru and Zaire were dramatically
LLTT
lower, at $160 and $130 respectively. In terms of life expectancy, this was
nearly similar in Canada (76 years) and Japan (78 years), followed with lower
figures by Peru (51 years) and Zaire (47 years).
IIEE
Canada headed the table for daily calorie supply per person. The calorie
intake of 3326 compared with 2846 in Japan, 1927 in Peru and 1749 In Zaire.
While adult literacy rates in both Canada and Japan were almost 100%, 68%
of people in Peru and only 34% of those in Zaire were literate.
158 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 18
The tables and pie chart show in percentage terms the results of a survey
of a new shopping complex in Auckland, New Zealand.
The table and the chart compare the level of satisfaction of customers in a
new shopping centre in Auckland, New Zealand in terms of its shops,
restaurants, and design.
Overall, customers were happy with the new shopping complex. It is clear
that men were more satisfied with shops and restaurants than women were.
Almost 50% of men expressed greater satisfaction with shops and restaurants,
while these figures for women were 37% and 35%, respectively. However, in
the same services, the proportion of very satisfaction of females was higher
than that of their men counterpart. The highest percentage of customers
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
having no comment accounted for only one-fifth of the outcome. In addition,
both men and women had a similar satisfaction of shops, at exactly 20%. On
the other hand, only 5% of males were dissatisfied with restaurants,
compared to 21% of females.
In terms of design, both genders seemed pleased with the design of the centre
with 62% of the survey. Furthermore, nearly 20% of the customers showed
oomm
that they were extremely interested in the design in comparison with only
10% of the customers showing their dissatisfaction 11% of the remainder not
making any comment.
.c.c
ss
194 words
rr
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 19
The bar chart shows the average price of a house in the UK in different
years. The pie charts show the percentage between owners, people
renting and those with second homes.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart gives information about the cost of an average house over the
25-year period in the UK, which was calculated in Euro. The pie chart
compares the proportion of people owning homes, renting and having second
homes in the years 1985, 1995 and 2000.
It is clear that house prices in the UK increased rapidly over the period
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
shown, especially the period from 2000 to 2005. It is also noted that the
proportion of individuals renting declined gradually, while there was a
dramatic rise in the percentage of people who were owners.
In 1980, the average cost of a house in the UK was about 25,000. From 1980
to 1995, there was a steady increase in UK house average price to more than
50,000. Then the UK experienced a dramatic rise in the average price of a
chart.
oomm
house to under 200,000 in 2005, which was the highest figure recorded in the
.c.c
In 1985, the percentage of people renting was highest, at 59%, while the
ss
figure for owners was significantly lower, at 34%. By contrast, those with
rr
second homes made up only 7% of the total people. From 1995 to 2005, the
ttttee
proportion of individuals who rented houses decreased gradually from 53%
in 1995 to 44% in 2005, whereas the figure for people who owned houses
went up significantly from 27% in 1995 to 53% in 2005 and became the
aa
highest figure in the chart. Meanwhile, the figure for those with second
homes experienced a dramatic decline to only 3% in 2005 and remained the
218 words
SSM
lowest figure in the chart.
M
MODEL ANSWER 2:
LLTT
The bar chart illustrates the average amount of money that people had to
IIEE
spend in order to possess a house in the UK from 1980 to 2005, and the pie
charts compare the proportion of house owners, renting people and ones with
second home over 3 separate years, 1985, 1995 and 2005.
Overall, it is clear from the bar chart that average price of a house in the UK
increased dramatically throughout the 1980-2005 period. In addition, by
considering the pie chart, the percentage of people who had their own house
rose while this percentage of renting people decreased.
In 1980, it took about £20,000 to have a house in the UK, however, this price
rose gradually in the 20 years following. In 2005, house price in the UK
reached a peak in the period at nearly £200,000 which was almost twice as
high as this in 2000.
www.zandienglish.ir

In 1985, there was 59 percent of house owners in comparison with 34 percent
of renting people and just 7 percent of those who had a second home.
However, in 2005, the proportion of people who owned house accounted for
53 percent, after a significant rise of 19 percent while this proportion of
renting people experienced a decrease of 15 percent. Although in 1995, 10
percent of people had a second home, it only accounted for 3 percent in 2005.
215 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 20
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
The diagram illustrates how reused waterfall is utilized in each household.
IIEE
Overall, it is clear that the process of rainwater reuse includes five main steps
beginning with rain falling on dam and trees and ending with the amount of
treated water being excessed to the river.
At the first stage, rain falls accumulatively into two kinds of places. The first
kind is dammed and the second kind is trees. Subsequently, while water in
the dam is taken into water treatment plant for drinking purpose for dwellers,
rainwater in trees is put into rainwater tank and then transported to every
house with recycled water for another usage purposes.
At the next step, after being used for various objectives in the household, all
of the amount of water is changed into household wastewater and it is taken
www.zandienglish.ir

into wastewater treatment plant. The process finishes with the treated water
being excessed into the river with storm water.
155 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 21
The first chart below shows the results of a survey which sampled a
cross-section of 100,000 people asking if they travelled abroad and why
they travelled for the period 1994-98. The second chart shows their
destinations over the same period.
below.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
The two given table illustrate the reasons for travelling aboard and the several
destinations of over 100,000 people in Britain over 4 years since 1994.
Overall, the number of abroad trip decreased slightly in 1995 and went up
www.zandienglish.ir

throughout the remaining time. Most people who travel abroad went to
Western for holiday.
As can be seen in the first table, holiday was so far the most common reason
for travelling aboard, which made up around 70% of the total in four years
while business, the second common purpose, stood at only around 14%. On
the other hand, people in the UK rarely went to other countries to visit friends
and relatives since the figure, for this reason, was always the lowest among
three main reasons, which was only 3181 people in 1998, around one-sixth of
holiday trip and four-fifths of a business trip in the same year.
There were only two main destinations for aboard trip in these years in the
UK: Western and North America and Western obviously overwhelmed North
America in the number of the arrived trip from the UK. The number of the
Western trips was always approximately 13 to 19 time higher than those of
North America. 1994 witnessed the lowest number of the arrived trip in both
destinations which was 919 in North America and 19,371 in a Western while
by the year 1998 the number nearly doubled in North America and rose up by
26% in Western.
219 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 22
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
The graph gives information about the participation of students in three
SSMM
courses over the 4-year periods from 2001 to 2004.
Overall, the number of students joining three stated courses experienced an
L TT
increase during the period. Moreover, among these three, course C is by far
the most popular course at the end of the period.
L
IIEE
The period opened with just north of 4 million students participating in
course A, making the course the most common one whereas there was only
half of that number of students joining course B and slightly less than that
taking course C. Thereafter, despite a moderate decrease in the next
following years to about 2.6 million, the figure for course A rose back
approximately to the 2001’s figure.
Turing to the student number of course B and C, the former increased
noticeably to about 4.3 million, doubling its figure in the previous year, after
which it fluctuated and ended up at just under 3 million in 2004. After
remaining unchanged during the first two years, the number of participants in
course C saw a significant increase to reach its peak at 5 million, making it
the most commonly-participated course at the end of the period.
www.zandienglish.ir

199 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 23
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
The line graph compares four Australian groups of people aged from 14 to
over 50 in terms of cinema attendance over a period of 20 years.
Overall, the proportion of cinema attendants in all age groups rose steadily
over the period shown. It is clear that cinemas attracted mostly young adults,
while older people were less interested in this kind of entertainment.
In 1990, up to 90% of Australians who were between 14 and 24 years old
www.zandienglish.ir

went to the cinema at least one time a year, while the figures for people who
were in the 25-34 age bracket and 35-49 age bracket were nearly the same, at
around 60%, 30% lower than that of the young. By contrast, only 40% of
elderly people attended cinema that year.
The proportion of teenage attendants increased slowly and reached a peak of
95% in 1996 before remained steady over the next ten years. Cinema
attendance rate of Australians aged 25 to 34 and 35 to 49 both saw a
significant rise to 80% in 2006 when the figure for middle-aged people is
expected to continue to rise while the figure for adults to decrease. Consistent
with the previously established trend, in 2010, up to 60% of elderly people is
predicted to watch films at least once in cinemas.
216 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 24
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
The line graph shows household expenditure by category in Britain from
1957 to 2007.
aa
M
As can be seen, the pattern of household expenditure in the UK has changed
SS M
over 50 years. While housing and transport and vehicles saw an increase,
there was a fall in the figure of the remaining. The most significant drop
T
belonged to the percentage of food.
LL T
The housing, transport and vehicles expenditure increased over the period of
50 years, however, they remained under 20% during this time. Both of them
IIEE
reached the highest point at almost 20%, in the 2000s but there was a small
disparity between them, in which the proportion of housing was slightly
higher than that of transport and vehicles.
Over the same period, the expenditure on food, clothing and footwear and
fuel, light, and power remained decreasing. Especially, the rate of spending
on clothing and footwear; and fuel light and power maintained their position
as the lowest, which constituted around 10% in 1957 and dropped to about
5% in 2007. However, expenditure on food experienced the most notable
change. It decreased dramatically from nearly 40% to under 20% between
1957 and 2007.
190 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 25
The line graph below shows the changes in the share price of
Outokumpu companies in euros between January 2006 and December
2010.
Given is the graph illustrates the changes in the share price of Outokumpu in
a five-year period between 2006 and 2010.
Overall, the price saw a general fluctuation in the share price through the
whole graph. However, the price of the first three years was much higher than
the price of the remaining months and the figure in early 2007 is the highest
share price for the period.
At the beginning of the graph, there were several fluctuations till late 2006
before there was a sharp increase from about 21€ per share to approximately
31€ per share and this is also the peak of the whole graph. This price only
lasted for a very short time then it fell rapidly to 22€ per share before rising
strongly again in 2008.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
From the mid of 2008, there was a dramatic decline to the lowest point at
about 8€ per share. After that, the share price had a significant variation until
it reached a peak at nearly 17€ per share in 2010 and finally end up at just
over 12€ per share at the end of the year.
186 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 26
The table below shows the projected costings over the next five years in
American dollars for three environmental projects for sustainable
forestry. The pie chart shows the expected expenditure breakdown
allocation for the first year as the projects are set up.
The table illustrates the predicted cost in American dollars for three
environmental projects over the next five years and information about the
forecasted expenditure share for the first year is presented on the pie chart.
It can be seen from the table that South-east Asia has the highest predicted
cost over a whole period.
In the first year, the estimated cost of African project is 10.5 million dollars, a
little more than half of Central America and about one-third of the Asian
project. There is a prediction that West Africa will spend less money in the
following years than in the first year, with figures plummeting by 7 million
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
dollars in Year 5. Central America shows a similar pattern. In Year 5
expected cost of the project is 5 million dollars which are four times less than
in Year 1. Whereas, a significant rise in the cost of Asian project is set
throughout the period.
Regarding the pie chart, a hefty 50 percent of the projected cost in Year 1 will
cover salaries, while training and office expenses will simultaneously share
10% each and the rest part of set-up costs.
190 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 27
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The table gives information about using various mobile phone features from
2006 to 2010.
Overall, it is clear that most people used mobile phones for calling. There
was an upward trend in almost function use especially searching on the
Internet.
The percentage of making calls in 2006 made up to 100%, the highest figure
in all features. The second highest rate is sending and receiving text messages
(73%). By contrast, less than 20% people played game and music on their
phone, and there was no one using a mobile phone for searching the Internet
and recording video.
By 2010, apart from the slight decrease in the proportion of making calls and
play games, five other categories had upward trends. Searching for Internet
rate jumped from 41% in 2008 to 73% in 2010, recording video rate was 4
times higher than the figure in 2008 (9%). There was a significant rise in the
percentages of playing game and music.
158 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
A glance at the table provided reveals the degree of prevalence, in
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
percentage, of a variety of features used on mobile phones between every 2
years from 2006 to 2010.
It is evident that phone users prioritized making phone calls, as well as taking
photos and texting in all 3 years reported, whereas playing music and
recording video were the least utilized features. Another noticeable detail was
the substantial growth in the figure of owners surfing the Internet.
o mm
Accounting for 100% in the first two years recorded and 99% in 2010,
o
making calls proved to be the most popular use of mobile phones from 2006
.c.c
to 2010. Likewise, a similar pattern was observed for taking photos and
ss
texting, in which the proportion rose from 66% to 76% for the former and
rr
from 73% to 79% for the latter. On the other hand, the percentages of owners
ttttee
utilizing mobile phones for musical and recording purpose were reported to
be lowest throughout the years, starting at 12% and 0% in 2006 and ending at
26% and 35% respectively.
aa
It is interesting to note that although reported with 0% of phone owners in
M
2006, the figure for surfing the webs surged to 41% in 2008 and finished at
212 words
SS M
73% in 2010, experiencing a marked increase.
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 28
A glance at the graph reveals a piece of information about the average

amount of precipitation and temperature in an area of East Africa on a
monthly basis.
Overall, rainfall and temperature are proportional, which shows the highest
recordings in spring and winter.
In details, precipitation begins with a low amount at roughly 10 millimeters,
which is similar to the figure for the temperature at 22°C. However, since
March, both the amount of rainfall and temperature have soared and reached
a peak at approximately 280 millimeters for the first and 23.5 degrees for the
latter in April.
The middle of the year witnesses a sharp decline in average rainfall and
temperature. These categories continuously fall before reaching a bottom at
about 120 millimeters and just 5 degrees respectively in July. However, these
figures recover quickly, namely 280 millimeters and 150 degrees in October
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
then finish the year by falling back to the starting point.
154 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 29
The graph below shows the unemployment figures amongst women of
different age groups.
The line graph shows the percentage of unemployed women in 8 age groups.
It can be clearly seen that most women at the age of 18 and 45 experience the
situation of being out of work, compared to the minority of other age groups.
As can be seen, those who just enter the labour force witness the second
highest percentage of 15%; however, as women are older, the figures
decreased significantly. Particularly, at the age of 25, the unemployment rate
of women is just 5%, which is also the figure for those aged from 30 to 35.
On the other hand, women are most likely to be jobless when they are 45
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
with the percentage of 20%, a difference of 15% compared with that of the
age from 25 to 35. However, this proportion falls slightly to 10% at the age of
55 and remains the same until women are 65 years old.
153 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 30
The chart below shows the average bed use in three typical hospitals
internationally and the proportion of hospital budgets allocates to in-
patient care before and after day-surgery was introduced in 2003.
The bar chart gives the data of beds serving in a hospital in three different
nations in the period from 1997 to 2006, while the pie charts reveal the
percentage of expenditure on in-patient care in 2002 and 2006.
It can be seen from the line graph that, while the number of beds in Chinese
and Ukranian tended to increase gradually during the period, French ones
which took the last position of the hospitals underwent a decline after a
gradual growth.
To specify, Chinese began at the highest point at 70 beds, followed by
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Ukranian with 55 beds. Both of them increased gradually till 2003 when
Chinese continued experiencing an upward trend, going up to 92 beds in
2006, meanwhile Ukranian reached a peak of over 70 beds, before staying
unchanged at this point in the last two years. Interestingly, French hospital
was at the lowest position at the beginning, 40 beds, then witnessed a rapid
growth to approximately 70 beds in 2003, nearly approaching the number of
oomm
Ukranian. However, it went down dramatically to 40 beds in the end.
In a pie chart, generally, in-patient cost constituted a small proportion of
.c.c
expenditure structure of health service. To specify, it only accounted for 35%
of the total money in 2002, followed by a considerable decrease to
rrss
approximately one-fourth 4 years later.
ttttee
219 words
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 31
The bar chart below shows the percentage of people in Great Britain
living alone by age and sex in 2004/2005.
The chart gives Information about the proportion of British citizens living
alone by different age groups and gender in 2004/2005
Overall, the number of both males and females who tended to live alone
increased gradually when they get older.
It is noticeable that more males than females were living alone in the three
younger age groups (from 16 to 64). In the youngest age group, the
percentage of men occupied a tiny 5% compared to 4 percent that of women.
The rate of males constituted nearly twice as much as that of females (9%) in
the age group 25-44. The proportions of men and women in the 45 to 64 age
group accounted for 17% and 16% respectively.
Whereas, the patterns were reversing in the two retired age groups. The
proportion of males aged between 65 and 74 was a half as much as that of
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
females just under 33%. In the oldest age group, the rate of women
outnumbered overwhelmingly the opposite sex, making up 59% as opposed
to 28%.
171 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 32
The graph below shows trends in US meat and poultry consumption.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The line graph presents how meat and poultry were consumed in the US
Overall, beef was the most popular one of the four types of meat surveyed
during the period given. Additionally, there was a significant increase in the
consumption of broilers.
It can be seen clearly that between 1955 and 1976, consumption of beef
increased rapidly from 60 to peak of 90 pounds per person per year. Broilers
consumption had the same trend which rose from 10 to 30 pounds per person.
Whereas, there was a significant fluctuation in the consumption of pork, from
around 40 to 50 pounds per person. Finally, people in the US spent the least
budget on turkey, reaching under 10 pounds per person in 21 years.
By the year of 2012, beef and broilers had nearly the same consumption,
reaching 50 and 55 pounds per person respectively. By contrast, there were
no considerable changes in the trend for the consumption of pork and turkey
over the examined period.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
168 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The line graph indicates the date on consumption of beef, pork, broilers, and
turkey in the United States over the period from 1955 to 2012.
It is clear that beef was by far the most popular among the four kinds of meat
oomm
over 52 years. However, there was a significant increase in broiler
consumption during the remainder of the period and its figure eventually
surpassed that for beef.
.c.c
ss
In 1955, US consumption of beef and pork was around 59 and 50 pounds per
rr
person per year respectively. But at the same time, Americans did not eat
ttttee
broilers and turkey until 1960. For the next 21 years, beef consumption in the
US rose considerably to a peak of 90 pounds per person, while the figures for
pork fluctuated steadily between 50 and 40 pounds person. During the same
aa
period, the number of broilers consumed went up gradually to approximately
39 pounds per person, meanwhile, this for turkey remained constant at about
SSMM
5 pounds per capita each year.
By 2012, Beef was not a top choice for American’s meals when the amount
TT
of beef consumed plummeted to nearly 50 pounds but the consumption of
broilers which had surged quickly since the 1970s declined slightly to about
LL
55 pounds per capita. By contrast, there were, by large, no considerable
IIEE
changes in pork and turkey consumption in this period.
219 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 33
The bar chart below shows a survey of a group of young of professional
aged 20-30 years who were asked to state which factors motivated them
to succeed.
Write a report for a university lecture describing the information shown
below.
The bar chart illustrates the factors of motivation that affect or influence the
success of young people aged 20-30 years, who asked to state by surveying.
Overall, personal affection and external affection mainly affect to young
people’s success. It always impacts to people to make more motivated.
There are two main factors that show the separateness, which is a personal
and external factor. As a personal factor, the personal satisfaction and
ambition factor are the highest impaction with 80%. Besides, the rivalry and
desire for material things with lower impaction as about 50%. Furthermore,
other factors such as money, feeling inadequate, jealousy, and fear of failure
are also influent to young people’s motivation. The percentage of those
ranges about 45%, 33%, 30%, and 25% accordingly.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Lastly, for external factors, people are quite influenced by them. It showed up
through the percentages of these databases, which never go less than 40%
(peer pressure) and rise up to 70% (family pressure).
159 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 34
The graphs provide information about worldwide energy consumption,
the countries with oil reserves and the world oil prices from 2000 to
2025.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The two pie charts, combined with the line chart, show data regarding some
aspects of the energy market.
Overall, oil is very likely to remain as an important energy source, with more
than a half the global old reserves being located in Mid-east countries.
Looking at the first pie chart, the consumption of oil was the highest in 2005,
accounting for 37% of the energy consumed worldwide, followed by coal and
natural gas, making up 28% and 23 % respectively. Nuclear and hydro-
electric contributed equal consumption with a figure of exactly 6%. As the
second pie chart shows that the largest oil reserves went to two nations
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
namely Saudi Arabia (20%) and Canada (14%). As regards to Mid-east
countries including Iran, Iraq, Kuwait, and United Arab made up significant
amounts of the global reserves, ranging from 8% to 10%. Venezuela, Russia
and the United States accounted for a smaller share, at 6%, 5%, and 2%
respectively.
As can be seen from the line chart, the oil started the first decade of the 21st
oomm
century with around 33 dollars per barrel. It decreased slightly to just under
30 in the next 3 years before reaching a peak of 60 dollars in 2006. Oil price
.c.c
witnessed a tremendous drop to a low of just 49 dollars in 2010. It is
predicted that the price will remain fairly stable until 2018. Noticeably, it is
of the period.
rrss
projected to experience an upward fluctuation to nearly 55 dollars by the end
217 words
aa
The pie charts compare distinctive kinds of energy used in 2005 as well as
S MM
major oil sourcing countries in the world, whereas the line chart provides an
overview of oil price changes from 2000 to 2025.
S
TT
Overall, it can clearly be seen that oil was the most utilized energy type in
2005. Furthermore, Saudi Arabia and Canada were the world’s leading oil
LL
exporters. Another feature is that while oil price was subject to fluctuations in
IIEE
the first decade of the 21st century, the general trend is upbeat from 2010
onward.
According to the first chart, it is noticeable that oil took the lion’s share of the
pie with 37% in 2005, followed by coal and natural gas with 28% and 23%
respectively. Correspondingly, nuclear and hydro-electric were moderately
consumed in the given year which equal record of 6% each.
With regards to oil reserve strongholds, it is remarkable that 53% of the
world oil originated from the four giants which are Saudi Arabia (20%),
Canada (14%), Iran (10%) and Iraq (9%). The remaining mentioned countries
contributed less than 8% each. Unsurprisingly, the rest of the world is
accounted for only 18% of this planet’s most used energy source.
www.zandienglish.ir

Moving on to the business of oil price, the figure varied greatly between 2000
and 2010. To be more precise, it started off with almost 35 dollars per barrel
at the beginning of the period, plummeted to around 29 dollars each before
reaching an all-time peak of nearly 60 dollars per unit. Oil price then went
down to about 58 dollars per barrel in 2010 and kept stable at that level until
now. However, oil market value is predicted to make a comeback in 2025 at
approximately 55 dollars each.
220 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 35
The charts below show the number of girls per 100 boys in all levels of
education.
Summarize the information by selecting and reporting on the main features,
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLT
and tertiary education.
T
The charts illustrate the number of girls per 100 boys in primary, secondary
IIEE
In general, there were more girls than boys studying at all levels of education
and, their participation tended to increase from 1990 to 2000 in both
developing and developed countries.
Obviously, in the period of 1990 to 2000, the developing countries
experienced a significant increase in the number of girls secondary and
tertiary level respectively; from 72 in 1990 to 82 in 2000 and from 66 in 1990
to 75 in 2000. Meanwhile, developed countries witnessed a sharp rise in the
first two levels of education, from 93 in 1990 to 96 in 2000 in primary
education and from 98 in 1990 to 99 in 2000 in secondary level.
On the other hand, it was highlighted in the tertiary school enrolment chart
that there was an imbalance in developed countries since the number of girls
were 105 in 1990 and subsequently rose to 116 per 100 boys in 2000 at that
www.zandienglish.ir

time.
168 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 36
The chart below shows the amount of money per week spent on fast
foods in Britain. The graph shows the trends in consumption of fast
foods.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
The table gives information about money per week which British spent on
hamburger, fish & chips, and pizza in 1990 while the line graph compares
changes in consumption of these items during the period of 20 years.
Overall, the amount of money spent on hamburgers in a high-income group
was the highest, and fish & chips was the most consumed item in 1990.
www.zandienglish.ir

In 1990, the money people with high income used for buying hamburger was
nearly 42 pence per person, above 2 times higher than the figures for fish &
chips and pizza, at roughly 17 and 19 pence respectively. By contrast, about
17 pence of low-income U.K. population paid for fish & chips in comparison
with around 14 pence of hamburger and approximately 7 pence of pizza.
Hamburger was also the most popular fast food in the medium income class,
they spent over 32 pence on this item while they only spent 25 pence on fish
& chips and above 10 pence on pizza.
Over the 20-year period, fish & chips consumption experienced a dramatic
increase from roughly 75 gm to 500 gm, and the consumption of hamburger
also rose rapidly by approximately 250 gm. In contrast, the pizza was the
highest consumed fast food in 1970 with above 300 gm and then declined to
about 200 gm in 1990.
219 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 37
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
MODEL ANSWER 1:
SSMM
A glance at the charts reveals (a set of information about) the average
temperature on a monthly basis together with the annual average daylight in
LLTT
London, New York, and Sydney.
Overall, while New York and London witness quite a similar pattern,
IIEE
temperature of Sydney fluctuates in a different trend; however, the number of
daylight hours in all metropolises is proportional to temperatures, by
extension, they have experienced a similar level at the very beginning and the
very end, whereas they have changed significantly in the mid of the year.
In details, the longest time of daylight of 2535 belongs to New York.
Besides, the temperature in this place starts at the lowest level, with roughly 5
degrees before going up gradually until peaking at approximately 30 degrees
in July, then falling back to the starting point at the end of the year. Despite
having the shortest day, London has the temperature almost doubling the
figure for the former at the beginning, following the same trend towards
temperatures’ trend in New York.
www.zandienglish.ir

At the same time, there are 2473 hours of sunshine in Sydney. Therefore, its
temperature remains fairly constant at around 20 degrees. Specifically,
starting at 25 degrees, the temperature drops to the lowest point of 15 degrees
in July before recovering in the last year.
216 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The line chart illustrates the monthly changes in the average temperatures in a
year while the table compares the total amount of time of sunshine annually.
Overall, temperatures in London and New York had a similar pattern in
which there were great differences between the hottest and coldest months.
Besides, while those cities overcame the higher temperatures in summer
months, Sydney temperatures were downward in these months and tended to
be hotter by the turn of years. In addition, New York was the city having the
longest daylights when London experienced the shortest ones.
On the one hand, Sydney was the hottest city in January with the average
temperature hovering around 26 while those of London and New York were
about 5 and 8 respectively. Nonetheless, in July, the temperature in New
York soared and peaked at approximately 30 followed by about 23 of that in
London. Meanwhile, the average temperature in Sydney was stable until
March and then reached the lowest point in July. Afterwards, those figures
gradually returned to the initial point and started a new cycle.
On the other hand, there were only 1,180 hours of daylight in London which
was the smallest one compared to the remaining cities. By contrast, Sydney
was inversely proportional to London sunshine hour which was 2,473. New
York recorded the largest number of hours of daylight which was 2535.
218 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 38
The line graph below shows the average daily maximum temperatures
for Auckland and Christchurch, two cities in New Zealand, and London
and Edinburgh, two cities in the United Kingdom.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
The line chart illustrates some information about the daily hottest degree in
four cities.
IIEE
As can be seen from the chart that, while the two cities in New Zealand
(Auckland and Christchurch) have the same pattern, the remaining in the UK
witnesses a completely opposite trend.
To turn to/Concerning New Zealand, the temperature in Auckland is higher
than Christchurch throughout the year at 25 and 23 respectively. Between
January and July, there is a downward trend of about 10 Celsius in the
temperature of Auckland. Similarly, Christchurch’s temperature sinks to a
low of roughly 15 Celsius. Afterward, the degree in Auckland remains stable
at approximately 15 Celsius before increasing significantly to well over 20
Celsius while that in Christchurch also rockets to more or less/around 20
Celsius.
www.zandienglish.ir

In London, from over 5 Celsius, the temperature rises sharply and reaches a
peak of roughly 23 Celsius before falling gradually to nearly 5 Celsius. The
degree increases slightly to over 15 Celsius and remains constant at this level
before plunging to about 8 Celsius in Edinburgh.
174 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 39
oomm
.c.c
rrss
MODEL ANSWER 1:
ttttee
The bar chart compares estimated sales of jeans (in thousands of pairs)
aa
according to two different corporations in Turkey over a period of next year.
The pie chart illustrates the expected market share.
SSMM
Overall, the sales of jeans of both companies are expected to rise, in which
sales of Jack & Jones Co. is projected to be higher than that of Mango Co.
LLTT
during the given period, except for July and August. Jack and Jones Co. is
also forecast to have the leading market share next year.
IIEE
Regarding the first graph, Jack & Jones enjoy the biggest sales in Dec, with
over 900 compared with roughly 600 of Mango Co., whereas the highest
figure of Mango Co. is anticipated in August, with over 500. The sales of
Mango Co. will consist of a mere, over 100, exceeded by that of Jack and
Jones Co., about 450 in January. 400 and 420 are estimated figures of Jack &
Jones Co. and Mango Co. in July, in that order.
In terms of the second graph, Jack & Jones Co will account for a half of the
market share, less than a quarter (20%) will go to Mango Co.
196 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The bar chart provides an overview of jeans revenue projection of Mango Co.
www.zandienglish.ir

and Jack & Jones Co. In Turkey next year, whereas the pie chart predicts
market share performance of them by the end of next year.
Overall, it can clearly be seen that while Jack & Jones Co. is predicted to
outmatch its competitor in annual sales & share, and both companies
managed to lead upward trends in terms of monthly sales turnover.
According to the bar chart, it is evident that Jack & Jones Co. is estimated to
generate more monthly sales than Mango Co. throughout the year, except for
July and Aug. The apparel giant plans to start the year with approximately
490,000 pairs of jeans sold in January and subsequently make a record of
900,000 pairs in December, almost doubling its January performance.
With regards to Mango, although the corporation has a more conservative
monthly forecast compared to its direct competitor, it is optimistic to overtake
Jack & Jones Co. in July & August with over 450,000 pairs of jeans
estimated to be sold. December revenue is also anticipated to hit a peak of
nearly 550,000 units.
192 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 40
The chart below shows the percentage of difference in income between
men and women from 1978 to 2008.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
The line chart provides an overview of the income gap between males and
IIEE
females in five developed countries (namely Japan, US, France, UK and
Australia) from 1978 to 2008.
Overall, it can clearly be seen that most of the countries mentioned managed
to reduce the income difference between genders over the given period,
except for Australia. It is also interesting to realize that Japan had the highest
income gap of all.
According to the data source, there was a significant difference of 50% in
income earned by an average Japanese man compared to his opposite sex
fellow. However, this figure went down remarkably over the 30-year period,
settling at just over 40% in 2008.
Likewise, other nations including the US, the UK and France all made huge
www.zandienglish.ir

effort to narrow down the income gap among sexes. To be more specific, the
US and the UK drove the gap down from approximately 30% in 1978 to
around 28% 30 years later; whereas France made a marginal change from
20% to about 18% in 2008. Australia, on the other hand, started off the period
with around 18% and succeeded in staying at that level for 20 years, before
surprisingly peaking at nearly 24% in 2008.
203 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 41
The chart below shows the number of men and women in further
education in Britain in three periods and whether they were studying
full-time or part-time.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
MODEL ANSWER 1:
IIEE
The given bar chart illustrates the figure for male and female in further
education in Britain over three periods 1970/71, 1980/81 and 1990/91.
Overall, compared to the number of full-time students, the number of part-
time students was significantly smaller. In addition, the number of women in
both sectors rose dramatically while it seems that the rate of men who had
fulltime education saw a slightly decline.
A glance at the chart reveals the number of part-time male students increased
from nearly 100 thousand in 1970/71 period to 200 thousand in 1990/91
period, a 2-fold increase, whereas, the figure for men in full-time education
www.zandienglish.ir

dipped slightly in the early nineties than 20 years earlier.
As far as women are concerned, the numbers grew in both sectors of
education. The number of women taking education soared from 700 thousand
to 1.2 million during the twenty-year period. The amount of female part-time
students went up more gradually from 100 thousand in 1971 to over 200
thousand in 1991.
203 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The bar chart illustrates data for male and female in Britain’s further
education from 1970 to 1991 and on the type of studying – full time or part
time, that they chose.
Overall, full-time education was chosen by mostly two genders, while part-
time education saw an increasing trend over the period of time.
To specify, in 1970 – 1971 period, there was a significant/considerable
number of men studying full time in further education in Britain, at nearly
1000 people, whereas the number of women was a bit lower, at
approximately 700 people, and this tendency still remained in the following
10 years. However, there was a considerable growth in the figure for a female
at around 1150 people in 1990 – 1991 period.
As for part-time education, the number of people in two genders witnessed an
upward trend in three periods. The number of male students taking up part-
time education/training started at roughly 100 students at the beginning of the
period, doubling that of female students of the same education/training type.
Nevertheless, the number of female students saw a 4-fold increase to
approximately 200 people, exceeding the figure for male students in the
1980-1981 period. Afterwards, the number of men was the same with the
quantity of females studying in further education, at roughly 220 people in
1990 – 1991 period.
217 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 42
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

The figure/diagram shows alterations in the campus layout of a school called
Hogwards Grammar from 2004 to 2010.
It is clear that significant changes were in terms of expanding the
infrastructure of the school in order to better suit the need of growth in
student number.
In 2004, the campus involved only one school building link to a sports field
by a walking path. The number of students rose by 400 to reach 1000 in
2010. Consequently, the sports area’s scale was reduced in order to construct
two more buildings to its North and West in 2010.
In addition, the original building and the new one connected with one another
by walking paths, and there was no path leading to the field. Besides, a new
car park was built to the Northwest next to the building 1 and linked to the
old one, which is located in the Northeast, by the main road around the
campus site.
157 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 43
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
The bar chart provides an overview of CO2 emission level, whereas the line
chart illustrates the growth of transportation vehicles in England and Wales
from 2000 to 2020.
SSMM
Overall, it can clearly be seen that the number of vehicles had surged
exponentially in the last 16 years, among which car was the principal source
LLTT
of CO2 emission in the above-mentioned nations.
According to the line chart, cars produced 3 more million tons of carbon
IIEE
dioxide in only 10 years, which leads to the prediction that its environmental
impact will continue to heighten to 25 million tons in 2020. Likewise, the
same pattern is seen in other sources of air pollution, namely van and truck
despite being at a slower speed of growth. Bus, on the other hand, managed
to control its CO2 emission level at around 9 million tons in the first ten years
of the century, and is therefore expected to stay at this number in the
subsequent decade.
The root cause of this worsening trend is well explained in the growing
number of vehicles. England and Wales speedily ballooned their vehicle
collection from 20 to approximately 45 million units between 2000 and 2010.
This results in the projection that as many as 55 million units might be
reached in 2020.
www.zandienglish.ir

212 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 44
The chart below shows the total number of Olympic medals won by
twelve different countries.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
The stacked bar chart compares twelve Olympic participating countries in
aa
terms of the number of gold, silver and bronze medals they received
M
Overall, the number of three types of medals achieved was fairly equal in all
SS
collected the most medals. M
the surveyed countries. It is also evident that of the twelve countries, the USA
LLTT
It is clear that the majority of Olympic medals belonged to the USA with a
total number of approximately 2,300 medals, including 900 gold, 700 silver
and 650 bronze medals. The Soviet Union came in the second place with a
IIEE
full number of 1,000 medals in total, less than a half of that of the USA. It is
interesting to note that the overall medals won by the UK were equal to the
total number of gold and silver medals earned by the Soviet Union.
The other European countries and Australia shared a quite similar number of
medals awarded, which was around 500 medals. At the bottom of the rank
were the two Asian countries, Japan and China, the figures for which were
about 350 medals.
180 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 45
The line graph below gives information about the rates of unemployment
between 1991 and 2005 in three different countries in Europe. The table
shows the percentage of men and women in the workforce in these
countries.
make comparison where relevant.
The given line graph illustrates the data about the percentage of people who
had no jobs in Spain, Germany, and Italy from 1991 to 2005. The shown
table presents the difference in job opportunities between sexes in three
abovementioned countries in 1991.
It is clearly seen from the line chart that there was an upward trend in the
unemployment rate in Germany, a downward trend in Spain and a slight
fluctuation in Italy during this period. A striking feature of the table is that all
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
these regions accounted for a higher proportion of males employed than
females.
If we look at the line chart, Germany made up the smallest percentage of the
jobless at nearly 4% in 1991; however, it saw a considerable growth by 5% in
the next 6 years. After a steady fall to 6% in the 1997-2001 period, the
German unemployment rate reached its highest point at above 9%. In the 8-
oomm
year period between 1991 and 1999, Italy experienced a soar from 8% to just
over 12%, followed by a dramatic drop to its starting point, 8%, from 1999 to
.c.c
2005. The Spanish rate of unemployment went up gradually from 13% to
18% between 1991 and 1993, remained unchanged at 18% in 1995 then
steadily fell to 9%.
rrss
ttttee
With regards to the table, Italy was the dominating country in the number of
men who had jobs, at 77.1%, slightly larger than Germany’s, at 76.5%. Spain
had the lowest rates of male as well as female employees, at 66.2% and
aa
32.3% in turn. The largest number of women employed belonged to Germany
with more than half of German while Italy was the second highest female
workers, at 37.8%.
220 words
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 46
The diagram below shows how salt is removed from sea water to make it
drinkable.
The flow chart gives information about the process of producing clean water
from salt water so that it can be used for drinking.
Overall, sea water has to follow four main steps to be drinkable, beginning
with pretreatment filter stage and ending with storage stage.
At first, water which is taken from the sea must go through pretreatment step
before filtration. Under high pressure, the treated water then is forced through
the membrane. The membrane only allows water molecules to pass, thus
impurities and salt are eliminated. The waste of the first two steps, filter
backwash, and seawater concentrate, are all given back to the sea while the
main product is continued in further steps.
Subsequently, the filtered water is post-treated with lime, chlorine, and
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
fluoride in the third processing stage. The product of this final main step is
drinkable water. Before being transferred into integrated water supply
system, clean water is stored at storage conditions.
156 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 47
The diagram below shows how the Australian Bureau of Meteorology
collects up-to-the-minute information on the weather in order to produce
reliable forecasts.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The picture illustrates the process of generating the latest accurate weather
forecast by the Australian Bureau of Meteorology.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
It is clear that there are four distinct stages in this process, beginning with the
capture of information from various sources. The data is then processed,
prepared and disseminated to the public.
At the first stage in the process, incoming information is assembled via three
different methods namely satellite, radar station, and drifting buoy. The next
step is conducting analysis and forecasting the attained data. Up-to-the-
oomm
minute information is displayed on a satellite photo and radar screen by
satellite and radar respectively while data showed on a synoptic chart is the
c.c
combination of all three ways of gathering weather information.
.
ss
As the third step is shown in the diagram, precise data processing, and
rr
broadcast preparation is implemented by computers. The process concludes
ttttee
with publicizing the weather forecast through specific means of media which
are TV newsreader, radio and recorded announcement.
159 words
MODEL ANSWER 2: aa
Australian Bureau of
SSMM
The chart provided demonstrates the process of data collection used by the
LLTT
Overall, there are four main stages in the process of producing weather
forecast, beginning with gathering incoming information and ending with
broadcasting.
IIEE
At the beginning of the process, satellite, radar, and drifting buoy are used at
the same time to collect information about the weather from both outsides
and inside the Earth to ensure ultimate accuracy. Then the data gathered from
these three different sources are presented in forms of satellite photos, radar
screen or synoptic chart to make it easier for analyzing and forecasting.
In the next stage, analysis and anticipation on weather, which is previously
made, will be processed and utilized to produce preparation for broadcasting.
Finally, the official also the most reliable forecast will be announced to the
public through separate means of multimedia such as newsreader on TV,
radio and recorded announcement.
151 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 48
The picture below shows the production technique of red wine.
Summarize the information by selecting and reporting the main features.
The description given by a detailed process represents a technique that is

used to manufacture red wine for commercial.
There are eight steps in this process, beginning with collecting grapes and
ending with creating many bottles of red wine.
As can be seen obviously from the given process, the first stage is that the
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
vast majority of grapes are harvested from farms. The second stage in the
process is to keep those that are selected in anaerobic condition from two to
three weeks. At the next step, before putting a huge amount of grapes in pot
ale for the purpose of ferment with skin, producers need to grind/squash them
through crushing machine. Subsequently, in order to get free run juice that is
made into two simultaneous stages, one of which is directly created from the
drainer.
oomm
pot ale, whereas the other one deduced from pressurizing skins and stems in a
.c.c
Next, the juice is continuously conveyed to the pot ale to ferment again
without skin. After transmitting this product to oaken cask for maturation
rrss
within a period of time about 6-24 months, the manufacturers have to pour
the juice via a filter to serve clarification. The final stage is that a variety of
ttttee
red wine bottles are packed and exported to market, however, to obtain a
good and reputed commodity, one of the necessary steps is taste adjustment
beforehand with a suitable amount of not only acid but also sugar.
220 words aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 49
The graph shows the percentage of UK adolescents following a
vegetarian diet.
A glance at the graph provided reveals the change in the proportion of UK

adolescents adopting a vegetarian diet in the period from 1960 to 2020.
It is apparent from the information supplied that there has been a significant
variation in the ratio of UK vegetarians at young ages.
Having started at the lowest point in 1960, the percentage of young
vegetarians in the UK grew exponentially over the next twenty years. After
reaching the peak at somewhere in the vicinity of 16 percent in 1980, the rate
experienced a dramatic decrease with a minor fluctuation in the following
two decades.
It was in 2000 that the proportion of UK teenagers having a vegetarianism
stood at 5 percent. Since then, there was a steady rise in the ratio of young
people who ate vegetarian meals until 2010 when it was approximately 10
percent. It is forecasted that the percentage may reach a plateau in the last
decade.
157 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 50
The diagrams below show the site of a school in 2004 and the plan for
changes to the school site in 2024.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
The maps depict the modifications in a school site in 2024 compared to the
original one 20 years earlier.
Overall, the school will be extended as a response to the increasing number
of attendees, as well as the remarkable re-construction of the whole site.
It is expected that from 600 students in 2004, there will be an increase by 400
students in the next 20 years. To the north area of the school site, there will
be a corridor used for connecting the first school building and the second one.
The most noticeable development will be the appearance of the third school
building which is estimated to replace the sports field. The remaining of the
path is planned to be a link between the third building and the two others.
www.zandienglish.ir

A new road will be installed/built from the main entrance to the second car
park which will be built/constructed on the site of the original sports field.
Furthermore, this road will divide the site into two parts, the educational area,
and the forest. Interestingly, the sports field will be relocated southern in the
forest, but it will be across from the second car park. Most of the trees will
still remain in order to keep the largely green landscape for this school site.
213 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 51
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
MM
The table showed data of population in four different countries including
Australia, Canada, New Zealand and the United States from 1990 to 2000
SS
and predicted the number of citizens of these countries in 2020 and 2050.
LLTT
It can be seen from the table that population of four countries rises gradually.
The US is the country which has the most crowded population while New
Zealand has the least population among four countries.
IIEE
In a decade from 1990 to 2000, New Zealand people always accounted for
less than 4 million while the US had over 200 million people and reached
275.1 million people in 2000. The population of Australia and Canada were
not as much as the US. In 10 years, Australia and Canada only increased 2.1
and 4.6 million people respectively. Australia got 19.2 million people in 2000
and Canada reached higher with 31 million people.
In 2020 and 2050, the population of 4 countries will grow but the order is the
same as in the past with the US, Canada, Australia and New Zealand in the
descending order.
179 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 52
The chart below shows estimated world illiteracy rates by region and by
gender for the year 2000.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart illustrates illiterate citizens according to their sex in different
areas in 2000.
Overall, girls/women always had fewer opportunities to go to schools than
boys/men in all selected regions. In addition, South Asia had the highest
illiteracy rate in both genders while the lowest one belonged to Developed
Countries.
People in Sub-Saharan Africa, Arab States, and South Asia had a relatively
high illiteracy rate which always stood at over 29% for both male and female.
To be specific, South Asia saw an approximately 34% of men were illiterate,
compared to about 55% of women. The male figure in the Arab States was
lower than that in Sub-Saharan Africa by 1% which accounted for 19% and
20% respectively. In contrast, over 2% higher of illiterate males in the Arab
States was reported, 21% in the Arab States and 19% in Sub-Saharan Africa.
The remaining regions witnessed a considerably lower rate of people who
could not read and write. There was 20% of illiterate female in East
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Asia/Oceania while the proportion of male was just a half of that.
Interestingly, the figure for Latin America/Caribbean and Developed
Countries were similar in terms of male and female which constituted nearly
10% for the former and 1% for the latter.
208 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
oomm
The bar chart illustrates the anticipated rates of illiteracy in six regions of the
world by gender in 2000.
.c.c
ss
Overall, more women were illiterate compared to the number of men.
rr
Developed countries had the highest literacy rate, which is in contrast to
ttttee
South Asian countries, in which the illiteracy rate was higher than any other
regions.
aa
In South Asia, more than half of the women could not read and write,
compared to around 35% of the men. This rate was a little less serious in
SSMM
Arab countries and sub-Sahara Africa region respectively.
On the other hand, in East Asia/Oceania, only 20% of the women and less
than 10% of the men were illiterate, which was less than a half of the rate in
LLTT
South Asia. While the rate of illiterate men in Latin America/Carribean was
slightly higher than that in East Asia/Oceania, there were only /a little less
more than 10%/ half of women could not read and write correctly. Developed
IIEE
countries, in which the literacy rate was the highest, had only around 1% to
2% of both genders which was considered illiterate.
183 words
www.zandienglish.ir

60 High Quality Samples for Your Reference to Gain a High Band Score
8.0+ In 1 Week (Book 7)
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Legal & Disclaimer
o mm
o
.c.c
ss
rr
ttttee
aa
M
SS M
TT
LL
IIEE
cause of action.
book.
www.zandienglish.ir

www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION
SAMPLE 1
SAMPLE 2
SAMPLE 3
oomm
SAMPLE 4
.c.c
SAMPLE 5
SAMPLE 6
rrss
SAMPLE 7
ttttee
SAMPLE 8
SAMPLE 9 aa
SAMPLE 10
SSMM
TT
SAMPLE 11
SAMPLE 12
LL
IIEE
SAMPLE 13
SAMPLE 14
SAMPLE 15
SAMPLE 16
SAMPLE 17
SAMPLE 18
SAMPLE 19
SAMPLE 20
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 21
SAMPLE 22
SAMPLE 23
SAMPLE 24
SAMPLE 25
SAMPLE 26
SAMPLE 27
SAMPLE 28
SAMPLE 29
SAMPLE 30
SAMPLE 31
SAMPLE 32
SAMPLE 33
SAMPLE 34
SAMPLE 35
SAMPLE 36
SAMPLE 37
SAMPLE 38
SAMPLE 39
SAMPLE 40
SAMPLE 41
SAMPLE 42
SAMPLE 43
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 44
SAMPLE 45
SAMPLE 46
SAMPLE 47
SAMPLE 48
SAMPLE 49
oomm
SAMPLE 50
.c.c
SAMPLE 51
rrss
ttttee
SAMPLE 52
SAMPLE 53
SAMPLE 54
aa
SAMPLE 55
SAMPLE 56
SSMM
SAMPLE 57
SAMPLE 58
LLTT
SAMPLE 59
SAMPLE 60
CONCLUSION
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

INTRODUCTION
Writing Task 1 Samples: 60 High Quality Samples for Your Reference to
Gain a High Band Score 8.0+ in 1 Week (Book 7).”
provide you 60 high quality sample essays to help you easily achieve an 8.0+
in the IELTS Writing Task 1 (Academic), even if your English is not
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 1
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
The bar chart compares the proportion of young people doing four types of
activities at home, namely computer games, reading, board game and
watching TV in four different countries.
It is clear that the percentage of young people playing computer games at
home was highest in all countries. The figures for watching TV and playing
board games were higher than the figures for reading activity.
Ireland was the country having the highest percentage of young people
playing computer games at home, at around 60%, while the proportion of
young people getting hooked on this hobby in Scotland was lower when
compared with other countries, at 40%. The figures for reading activity in
www.zandienglish.ir

both Ireland and Wales were lowest figures, at only 10%, while the
percentages of reading activity in Scotland and England were higher at 25%
and 20% respectively.
The percentage of young people in England, Ireland and Wales watching TV
at home was equally, at 30%, while the figure for Scotland was 25%. The
figure for board games in Wales was higher than the figures for this activity
in other countries, at 30%.
184 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 2
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
The bar chart compares the proportion of people using the Internet in terms of
aa
different age groups over a period of 2 years.
MM
Overall, the vast majority of people who gained access to the internet aged
from 16 to 50. Meanwhile, Internet users who aged less than 15 and over 50
SS
accounted for the smallest figure in the chart shown.
LLTT
In 1998, the proportion of users accessing the internet in the age of 16-30 was
the highest, at 53% compared to 41% of the 31-50 age group. In contrast, the
IIEE
rate for children who used it was at the lowest point of exactly 2%. Only 4%
of the oldest people accessed the internet.
Over the following 2 years, however, there was a steady decline in both 16-
30 and 31-50 age groups. The figures for both age groups were at 44% and
37% respectively. In addition, the percentage of children who used the
internet rose slightly to 9% in 2000. Likewise, the oldest people saw a 6%
increase in the proportion of internet users.
173 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 3
The chart below shows the amount of time that 10 to 15-year-olds spend
chatting on the Internet and playing on games consoles on an average
school day in the UK.
writing-task-1-details-paragraphs.html
The chart describes the time spent by children aged between 10 and 15 years
old on chatting online and playing computer games in the UK.
Overall, we can see that playing games is more popular than chatting on the
internet. Compared with chatting online which most girls engage in, boys
have a preference for playing on games consoles.
The same figure can be seen on less-than-1-hour chatting online in both
genders, which makes up about 25%. In contrast, 30 % of girls engaging in 1-
3-hour online communication, while only 25% is boys. The figures for this 4-
hours-plus activity are just under 10% among girls and boys, which is the
smallest percentage.
Regarding playing on games console, the majority of girls with 30% spend
less than 1 hour on this activity, higher than that of boys by nearly 10%. In
contrast, above 40% of boys play computer games for 1-3 hours, which is
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
three times higher than that of girls. Only 1% girls and 10% of boys spend 4
hours or more to play on games consoles.
176 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 4
The table below shows the proportion of time different age groups spend
on various Internet activities.
making comparisons where relevant.
The table describes the proportion of time people of different age groups
using on various Internet activities.
It is clear that the amount of time invested in most online activities fluctuates
significantly in the age group of 10-15 and over 50 than that of other Internet
activities.
Social networking and playing games activities make up the largest amount
of time in the groups aged from 10-15 and 16-20, compared to 0 % of
shopping time for the people aged 10-15 and only 8 % browsing news sites
time for the age group from 16-20. The age group whose age ranges from 21
to of 29 invests time mainly on social networking, followed by the activity in
terms of shopping time, while shopping is spent more time by the age of 30-
39 than the amount of time spent on social networking, with 25% of the time.
People aged from 40-49 and over 50 tend to spend most of the time on
browsing news sites, with 30 % of the time and 54 % of the time respectively.
By contrast, playing games accounts less time with 2 % time at age group
from 40-49 and only 1% of time at the age of over 50.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
203 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 5
Given three maps illustrate how Laguna Beach changed between 1950 and
1990.
Overall, this region was increasingly modernized in the period of 40 years.
In particular, this was such a pristine beach in 1950 with non-artificial
sceneries excluding a little track leading straight to the beach huts near the
coast. After 20 subsequent years, sand dunes were narrowed in order to build
villas. Meanwhile, woodland was cleared and replaced by a caravan park.
The track was transformed into the road so as to facilitate transportation.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
The beach in 1990 was likely to undergo a total transformation in comparison
with itself 40 years ago. A hotel was constructed where villas used to be
located. Sand dunes were completely demolished, turning to landscaped
gardens. In addition, a surf school was erected right by the seaside. Only the
road and caravan park remained the same as 20 years ago.
150 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 6
The line chart provided indicates the number of travelers to Tabard towers
theme park over the period of 12 months illustrated.
It is evident that there was a significant increase in tourist’s trend from
January to December. The number of travellers in September was highest,
while June accounted for the lowest amount of ones.
It can be seen from the graph, the number of individuals who visited the park
rose steadily in the first three months with roughly 10 thousand visitors for
each one. Following that, Almost 30 thousand visitors were the figures that
had a considerable growth in only next two months.
Noticeably, the period from May to September witnessed sharply fluctuation
which hit the lowest point of 20 thousand tourists in June followed by a
dramatic rocket at 120 thousand inhabitants in August and then reached a
peak at 140 thousand people in September. Regarding the final quarter of the
year, it experienced a steadily crash by 20 thousand people every month from
October to December.
168 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 7
The line graph shows the past and projected finances for a local
authority in New Zealand. Summarize the information by selecting and
reporting the main features and make comparisons where relevant.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
The graph delineates the accomplished and forecasted finances in the unit of
LLTT
million dollars for the Kiwi supremacy in the 2012-2022 timeframe.
Overall, the revenue of rates and user charges both experienced the upward
IIEE
trend and will not see a decline vista, in reverse, the amount of money used
for borrowings, grants and subsidies wildly fluctuated in the past and is
predicted to keep being unstable until 2022, yet in different degrees.
Remaining the most noticeable pattern at the first glance, though witnessed a
plateau in the first two years of the period, the revenue of the authority has
then been accelerating and becomes the highest figure over the 10-year
period with the envision of nearly 2500 million dollars in 2022. In addition,
recorded to be at the second place in 2012 with 1000 million dollars, the
money charged by users is then climbing up non-stop and is believed in 2022
to touch its heyday which is slightly lower than the revenue rates for
approximately 500 million.
To a further concern, the four patterns all went up in the first few years;
www.zandienglish.ir

however, the lent money was the first to plunge and then touched its bottom
peak, nearly three-fourths of a million in the year of 2016. For the next half-
decade, this pattern will recover and boost to its peak with approximately 500
million dollars extra before sinking sharply at the end of the frame. In
comparison with the borrowings, it is true that the grants and subsidies were
rising up in the 3-year-period from 2012 to 2015; however, the later just
slightly rose and just increased with a higher speed in 2016. Then, in the last
years of the period surveyed, it is predicted that the money used to grant and
subsidize will not see any different signs but a marginal drop.
220 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 8
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

The maps illustrate the transformation of Meadowside village and Fonton,
which is a neighboring town in the three different time periods, which are
1962, 1985 and the present.
Overall, the most significant change is Meadowside village is developed into
Meadowside suburbs. Another noticeable feature is Meadowside and Fonton
are connected with each other at the present.
In 1962, we can see that there was a small road going through the whole
Meadowside small village and a railway in Fonton. However, in 1985, the
village was expanded and its unique road was widened. Moreover, there was
the road constructed to connect Meadowside and Fonton. Besides, leisure
complex, a housing estate was built in the north and superstore was created in
the south of Meadowside.
At the moment, it is also noted that Meadowside was turned from the village
to the suburbs, and it was also extended to the east to connect with Fonton. In
addition, hotel and station are created in the center of these two places.
Moreover, there is a railway from this station to the other railways in Fonton.
Finally, business park was built in the south of such road.
190 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 9
The table below shows the total length (in kilometers) of High-Speed Rail
tracks of China, France, and Japan in 1990, 2010, and projections for
2020.
Length of high-speed rail (kms)
1990
oomm2010 2020
China
France
0
720
.c.c 3,529
1,871
13,126
3,976
Japan 1,832
rrss 2,534 3,625
ttttee
aa
The graph compares the number of kilometers of High-speed Rail tracks in
three nations, namely China, France and Japan in 1990, 2010 and prediction
MM
for 2020.
SS
Overall, all of the countries surveyed have an increase in the total length of
the tracks over the period. In addition, it is forecasted that China will have the
largest one in 2020.
LLTT
It can be seen that there was not any kilometer of High-speed rail tracks in
IIEE
China in 1990. It is projected that, in 2020, the figure will go up sharply, at
13,126 kilometers which is the highest number recorded in three countries.
On the contrary, the figure for Japan was the highest in 1990, at 1,832
kilometers, and there will be a considerable rise to 3,625 which is the lowest
one in 2020.
In addition, the total length of the tracks in France increased dramatically
from 720 in 1990 to 1,872 kilometers in 2010 and is predicted to rise
considerably to 3,976 in 2020.
163 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 10
The table compares the income of a small restaurant during the week of 7 to
13 October in terms of lunch sales and dinner sales.
In general, the sales of weekdays were far higher than that on the weekends,
especially, the income reached its peak on Friday at both lunch and dinner
sales. In addition, the restaurant earned more money from dinner sales than
lunch sales.
Between 7 and 11 October, the lunch sales remained relatively constant
around $2500 then dipped significantly to $1550 by 13 October. The dinner
sales experienced the same pattern. In details, the restaurant saw the similar
number of incomes between around $3600 and approximately $3800 from
Monday to Thursday then the sales skyrocketed to $4350 on Friday, leading
to a drop of roughly $1000 by Sunday. Moreover, the sales reached its peak
on Friday at about $8000 in total which was about two times as high as the
lowest point being recorded on Sunday.
It is reported that the gap between dinner sales and lunch sales was widest on
Friday at roughly $2000, compared to about $1000 on Sunday – the least
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
difference is recorded.
189 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 11
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart compares four different countries in 1994 in terms of social and
economic indexes, based on United Nations statistics.
It can be seen that the figures for developed countries were by far higher than
developing countries. Moreover, Zaire was ranked at the bottom among
indicators shown.
Japan was reported by United Nations that the annual income of each people
was 15,760 USD, followed by Canada and Peru with 11,100 USD and 160
USD respectively. By contrast, people in Zaire earned the lowest annual
income at 130 USD, about twelve times lower than Japanese. Regarding life
expectancy, wealthy countries were claimed above 76, led by Japan at 78,
whereas poor countries were reported around the 50s.
It is clear that people in economically developed countries consumed more
calories than their counterparts in developing countries. Canadian consumed
the largest amount of calories at 3326 calories, compared to only 1927
calories of Peru and 1749 calories of Zaire. Literacy rate experienced the
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
same patterns, 99% of people in Canada and Japan were educated, while in
Peru and Zaire, the figures were reported only 68% and 34% respectively.
186 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The table gives data about social and economic indicators of people from
four different countries during the year 1994.
oomm
It is clear that Japanese and Canadian have better and stable lives. On the
.c.c
other hand, citizens living in Peru and Zaire are suffering from a hard living.
rrss
Of the four countries, Japanese were the richest, about 15760 dollars per
capita a year. Life expectancy there was also the highest, at 78 years old in
ttttee
1994. Canada followed closely behind, about 76 in life average duration, with
the earnings per year, was just over 11000 dollars per person. Nevertheless,
aa
each one living in Canada was supplied more calories a day than in Japan,
about 3326 and 2846 respectively.
SSMM
The other countries have much lower indicators in all four items. The income
of a person a year ended at 160 dollars in Peru, approximately 1% when
compared with Japan. It was even lower when moving to Zaire as the number
LLTT
was just 130 dollars. The average ages were not very high, whereas the
number of calories was both under 20,000. The percentage of adults who
knew to read and write was 68% in Peru, twice as much as in Zaire.
198 words
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 12
The chart illustrates the percentages of people at different ages who attend at
arts events to perform types of music in Canada.
Overall, it is noticeable that the types of music performed by these age
groups vary, and those aged 15 to 19 are likely to choose any concern and
professional music to perform more than the others in the arts events.
The level of the attendance for four options, including any concert or
professional, theatrical, popular musical and opera music decreases when
performers become older. In detail, almost half of young people aged from 15
to 19 choose concert or professional music, the highest figure shown,
compared to around 35% of those aged between 35 and 44 and roughly 25%
of those aged over 60. Similarly, slightly under 35% of 15-to-19-year-olds
selects popular music, while the percentages for other age groups are just
over 20% and almost 10% respectively.
Meanwhile, as people become older, they are more likely to choose
symphonic or classical or choral music to perform. Specifically, the
proportion of the over 60 age group is by far the highest for those types of
music, at about 10% and 8% respectively. By contrast, dance music is chosen
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
by most of the middle age group, at roughly 7%.
210 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 13
The bar chart shows the number of volunteers in New Zealand who
helped in sports organizations in 2010. The pie chart illustrates the
number of volunteers doing different types of jobs for that same period.
The bar chart illustrates the percentage of volunteers from different types of
family who helped in sports organizations. The pie chart shows how many
volunteers took part in 5 different types of jobs. Both diagrams refer to New
Zealand in 2010.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Overall, the bar chart concentrates that most volunteers who helped in sports
organizations in New Zealand was from couples and dependent children
families. Meanwhile, the pie chart shows that much more volunteers did
teaching-related jobs than others.
In 2010, Couple and dependent children made up the highest proportion of
volunteer for sports organizations, at 49.8%. By contrast, the figures for
oomm
volunteers who lived in couples with no dependent children and other
families were much lower, at 26.9% and 12.4% respectively. Only 10.9% of
the lowest figure.

.c.c
volunteers were from one parent/one person families, which was registered
rrss
Out of 5 different types of voluntary jobs, teaching-related jobs accounted for
ttttee
the biggest number of volunteers, with 206,000 volunteers. This figure also
over double that of Referee or umpire (98,300 people). Only 62,700 people
doing jobs such as Medical support or other, which was the smallest number.
aa
The second most popular voluntary job was that volunteers worked as
Committee member or administrator, at a quarter (1/4) of the total number of
participants.
210 words
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 14
The pie charts below compare water usage in San Diego, California and
the rest of the world.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
A glance at the chart provided reveals the water utilization for three purposes:
residential, industry and agriculture in three separated regions: San Diego,
California and the worldwide.
Overall, the percentage of water allocated to industry was the second most
dramatic data in all three mentioned locations, while the positions of two
remainders were different.
The distributions of water in San Diego and California were similar in terms
of order: the water usage for residential was most significant, and agriculture
gained the less amount of water. However, the deviation between the highest
and lowest point of San Diego was by far more noticeable than California
(43% and 11%, respectively). The rate of industry in California was 10%
more than San Diego.
Turning to the worldwide, the story was different. The highest figure was
agriculture, which accounted for 69%. The amount of water used by
residential was only 8%, and it occupied the lowest position among the three
water usage purposes. The percentage of the industry was precisely equal to
San Diego (both 23%).
172 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
The given charts compare the percentage of water used for different purposes
in San Diego, California and the other part of the world.
It is clear that there is a huge gap in the water usage in agriculture and
residential between those places.
In San Diego County, water used in residential makes up 60% of total
outweighs with 69% compared to 17%.

o mm
amount of water used, whereas it is only 8% in the other parts of the world.
However, when it comes to water usage in agriculture, the world completely
o
.c.c
There is a great difference in the percentage of water used for residential and
rrss
agriculture in San Diego and worldwide, with about almost threefold in San
Diego and eightfold in the rest part of the world. The difference is not too
ttttee
great in California, with 28%, 33%, and 39% respectively. Water usage in the
industry is slightly stable and similar globally.
152 words
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 15
The graph below shows information about employment rates across 6
countries in 1995 and 2005.
The bar chart illustrates the percentage of employment in both genders in 6

selected nations between 1995 and 2005.
Overall, the male workforce in all countries was always higher than the
female one throughout the period. In addition, the unemployment rates in
both men and women were similar in terms of a general decline in the year
2005.
Iceland became the country had the most male employees with 70% and 82%
in 1995 and 2005 respectively while the highest employment rates in female
belonged to Switzerland, at 56% in 1995 and 68% in 2005.
The proportion of males hired in Australia, the UK, New Zealand and the
USA were relatively similar. To be more specific, this figure in 1995 ranged
from about 65% to 70% and that in 2005 was always at average 70%. In
contrast, women in Australia and New Zealand less went to work than
women in the UK and the USA, at around from just 25% to 40% for the
former and approximately between 65% and 70% for the latter over the
reported time.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
177 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 16
The graph shows Japanese average monthly salary (Yen) from 1953 to
1983, and the prices of black and white television and color television
during the same period.
The line graph illustrates the variation in the amount of Japanese average
wage each month and the cost of black and white TV as well as color TV
throughout the thirty-year period between 1953 and 1983.
Overall, it is clear that the figure for black and white TV was the highest
when there was not the invention of color television. Another noticeable
feature is both color and black and white TV cost decreased rapidly, whereas
the Japanese income witnesses an increase.
In detail, during the first period, we can see that while the quantity of average
monthly salary in Japan was the lowest, at roughly 18 thousand Yen, the
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
black and white TV price reached a peak of exactly 110 thousand Yen before
a sudden decrease in the next ten years. In addition, Japanese were paid from
about 20 to 30 thousand Yen in the first two decades.
Interestingly, after the year 1973, there was a swift climb in Japanese average
monthly wage, surpassing the TV price and reaching the top with nearly 70
thousand Yen. Although both trends of color TV and black and white TV
oomm
were similar in terms of general decline, the latter constantly had a higher
value than the former, a difference of about 30 thousand Yen in 1983.
213 words
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 17
The pie charts below give data on the spending and consumption of
resources by countries of the world and how the population is
distributed.
below.
The pie charts given illustrate the expenditure on five different categories and
how countries consume resources as well as the allocation of the population
over the world.
Overall, people use the least amount of money on clothing while the largest
expense is accounted by other purposes. In addition, Asia is the region having
the most population and a similar percentage of that is witnessed in both the
Europe and Americas which also stand for the highest proportion of
consumption resources.
With regarding world spending, food and transport are the second and the
third most popular, at 24% for the former and 18% for the latter. The
spending on accommodation is just a half of that on food, at 12% which
doubles the expense on clothing, at 6%. Whereas, people spend most of their
money on miscellaneous items represented by 40% in other categories.
The report sees nearly three-fifths of the world population in Asia while just
one-tenth of that in Africa which constitute 57% and 10% respectively. The
Europe and the USA are similar in terms of 14% of population distribution.
Although the total proportion of citizens in European countries and the US is
only 28%, consumption resources derived the most from such countries, at
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
60%.
207 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 18
The graph below gives information on the population of turtles in India
from 1980 to 2012.
The line graph illustrates the percentage of turtles and all species in India and
how these change between 1980 and 2012.
Overall, the percentage of Green Turtles and Leatherback Turtles fell over the
22-year period, lower than that of all species. In the same period, the
proportion of Olive Ridley Turtles went up and remained above the figure for
all species.
It can be clearly seen that there was a fluctuating increase in the proportion of
all species before it stopped at about 110%. The percentage of Olive Ridley
Turtles increased steadily to roughly 140% from 1980 to 1997, the highest
point of the whole graph. After some fluctuations, it finally reached a figure
of about 130% in 2012, higher than the figure for all species.
Over the same period, the figure for Leatherback Turtles rose gradually by
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
over 10% between 1980 and 1987, then it fell significantly to below 60%, the
lowest point on the graph in 2012. India witnessed a fluctuation in the
percentage of Green Turtles before it fell to below 90% in 2012, significantly
higher than the figure for Leatherback Turtles but it was still lower than the
proportion of all species.
196 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 19
The maps below show recent changes in the town of Kimsville.
The illustration reveals the change in the town of Kimsville which occurred
from 2002 until now.
It is clear that the town has experienced negligible changes with the
appearance of new apartments, new train station, and entertainment facilities.
The map of the town in 2002 shows that the city centre was in central of the
town which was surrounded by a shopping centre, a factory, an old cinema
and quite lots of trees.
Today, the city centre and the shopping centre which was located in the north
have remained unchanged for over 20 years whereas the surrounding areas
changed significantly. In the north-western area, the trees were chopped
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
down, being replaced by new apartments. Moreover, the factory in the east
was replaced by the old cinema which was relocated from the south and
renovated after that. Besides, in the southwestern area, the trees were cut
down to make room for a football stadium, whereas a new train station was
erected in the west. By contrast, the trees in the southeastern and the
northeastern areas still exist until now.
178 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 20
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The map illustrates two potential locations (labeled as S1 and S2) proposed
for a new school in Canterbury.
Overall, it can be clearly seen that S2 is suggested to locate in the downtown
area of Canterbury, whereas S1 is recommended to be sited in the northeast
countryside area.
According to the map, S2 is planned within the town centre surrounded by
housing complex which will be more convenient for the majority of students
to get access to their new school. Furthermore, being located in the non-
traffic zone, it will be safer for the students to walk to school with no threats
of cars or public buses. There is also a main road that connects S2 with
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Chartham, a town 7km away from the city centre and home to 4,500 local
residents.
S1, on the other hand, lies in the countryside of Canterbury and is only 5km
away from Sturry which is populated by 7,000 people. While the main road
is within easy reach of S1, the 2nd choice is also relatively close to the
town’s University in the North End compared to its alternative option.
185 words
oomm
MODEL ANSWER 2:
.c.c
ss
The map gives information about two expecting locations for the new school,
rr
which is intended to be built in Canterbury.
ttttee
Overall, the first location (S1) is planned to be in the suburb in the north-east
area, which may be a disadvantage for people from the other side and from
aa
Chartham, whereas the second site (S2) which is in the town centre seems to
be beneficial for residents in the housing area and students from both Sturry
and Chartham.
SSMM
Although the first site is located on the outskirt of the housing area, it is quite
near to the main streets which lead through the town centre from south-west
LLTT
to north-east. Therefore, students from Sturry with the population of 7,000,
that is only 5km away from Canterbury and residents in this vicinity would
probably benefit from this project. By contrast, people from Chartham with
IIEE
4,500 people that are 7km far from the south-west of the town centre and
those who live on the west side of Canterbury are more likely to travel longer
distance by taking the main roads.
The other site is situated in the heart of the town, which makes it feasible for
students from both Sturry and Chartham to come to study. In addition, it is
far more convenient for students to access local services and the indigenous
of housing area can approach the school easier. However, it is restricted to
the no traffic zone, parents, therefore, may encounter certain problems about
travel if they want to drive their children all the way to school.
220 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 21
The charts below show the results of a questionnaire that asked visitors
to the Parkway Hotel how they rated the hotel's customer service. The
same questionnaire was given to 100 guests in the years 2005 and 2010.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The two pie charts illustrate the opinion of 100 guests about the quality of
customer service in a specific hotel in 2005 and 2010.
In general, the quality of customer service increased significantly from 2005
to 2010. The percentage of visitors who felt excellent and good went up
considerably, whereas those figures for negative answers declined.
As can be seen from the pie charts, in 2005, only 5% of guests thought that
customer service was excellent, while the proportion of satisfactory clients
was nine times higher than this, at 45%. In the following years, there was a
six-fold increase in the percentage of visitors who supposed Partway Hotel’s
client service was perfect, at nearly 30% in 2010. This number for good
reviews had the same trend, with a growth of 25% between 2005 and 2010.
As a result, the proportion of clients who felt quite satisfied with the service
decreased from half of the hotel’s guests to about 17% in 2010.
Over the same period, over one-third of visitors chose the word “poor” or
“very poor” to evaluate the client service in 2005. By contrast, those figures
declined significantly to 4% and 12% respectively in the year 2010.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
198 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The pie charts depict the results of an opinion poll of 100 guests asked to rate
the customer service at the Parkway Hotel in the years 2005 and 2010.
In general, the outcomes of the customer satisfaction survey revealed a
oomm
significant change in guests' viewpoint over half a decade, as a growing
amount of positive feedback on this issue was received.
.c.c
As can be seen from the charts, the percentage of guests satisfied with the
ss
service took up 45% as the most proportion in 2005. However, it was the
rr
good category to be reviewed most by respondents in 2010, with 39%.
ttttee
Furthermore, the number of guests who regarded/considered the service as of
excellent rank dramatically rose from 5% in 2005 to 28% in 2010.
aa
In contrast, nearly half of 21% of customers in 2005 still held an unfavorable
opinion of the service, accounting for 12% in 2010. Also, the number of
MM
hotel's guests criticizing the service to be of very poor quality decreased by
4% in 2010, considerably less than those of 15% in 2005.
176 words
SS
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 22
The pie graphs show greenhouse gas emissions worldwide in 2002 and
the forecast for 2030. The column chart shows carbon dioxide emissions
around the world.
Source: https://www.testbig.com/essay-categories/ielts
The graphs compared major air pollution sources in 2002 among economy
groups and distinct sectors as well as the forecast emission levels for 2030.
Overall, it can clearly be seen that transition economies and developing
countries were and will continue to be the largest contributors of global
greenhouse emissions in 2002 and 2030. Another worrying feature is that
most of the principal sectors are predicted to double their amounts of carbon
dioxide emissions in 2030.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
According to the pie charts, it is evident that OCED transition economies and
developing countries accounted for 52% and 38% of the world’s greenhouse
emissions in 2002 respectively. However, it is anticipated that developing
countries will outmatch their pollution fellows to become the biggest culprits
of Mother Earth’s air pollution with 48%, whereas OCED transition
economies are projected to plausibly reduce their proportion to 43% in 2030.
oomm
With regards to worldwide carbon dioxide emissions by sector, it is
noticeable that in 2002, the industry released the biggest amount of polluted
.c.c
air with over 6 billion tons, followed by consumer and transportation with
approximately 4 and 2 billion tons respectively. Correspondingly, the
rrss
hierarchy is forecast to remain the same in 2030. To be more precise, the
industry is expected to surge to nearly 11 billion tons, consumer sector is
ttttee
predicted to spike to over 8 billion tons, and most remarkably, transportation
is foreseen to triple its amount to around 6 billion tons. Meanwhile, waste
combustion and other sectors are hoped to control their polluted figure at less
aa
than 2 billion tons throughout the given period.
220 words
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 23
The line graph shows visits to and from the UK from 1979 to 1999, and
the bar graph shows the most popular countries visited by UK residents
in 1999.
The two graphs depict the number of tourists to and from the UK over a 20-
year period, from 1979 to 1999 and the favorite destinations of people in
England in the year 1999.
Overall, there was a sharp increase in the number of visits (both) to and from
the UK over the period surveyed. Moreover, France is the most popular
country among British people.
As is illustrated, the figure for journeys overseas hold by UK residents
remarkably rocketed, increasing from over 10 million in 1979 to roughly 52
million in 1999 (a rise of 42 million). Similarly, England welcomed a
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
significantly larger number of foreign visitors, with approximately 28 million
in the year 1999, compared to nearly 10 million in the year 1979.
In terms of the destinations preferred by UK residents in 1999, France took
the lead with 13 million, followed by Spain with about 9 million. On the
other hand, the figures for the remaining countries including America,
Greece, and Turkey were relatively small with under 4 million for each
country in 1999.
176 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 24
The two pie charts below show some employment patterns in Great
Britain in 1992.
Employees and self-employed: by sex and occupation, 1992
The graphs compare the percentages of employment patterns of women and

men, which are divided into manual and non-manual occupations in Great
Britain in the year 1992.
Overall, there was a huge difference between two genders. Most women were
employed in clerical work while men were less likely to work in the same
profession. By contrast, more men were occupied in manual occupations than
women were.
In manual employment, the percentage of females employed in craft or
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
similar jobs was 3%, whereas that figure was eightfold (24%) in the opposite
gender. Women who worked as general laborers made up only 1%, which is
the smallest percentage in the two pie charts. The figure for men stood at 2%.
In non-manual jobs, 36% of men worked in managerial and professional
positions, which made up the highest number in both graphs, compared to
29% of women. Remarkably, nearly a third of the total number of females
oomm
(31%) were in clerical work, while only 6% of men worked as clerical
workers. The proportion of females worked in other non-manual jobs was
c.c
slightly higher than that of males, at 9% and 6%, respectively.
.
ss
189 words
rr
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 25
The diagrams below are existing and proposed floor plans for the
redevelopment of an art gallery.
The diagrams indicate the existing and proposed layout of the building
namely Parkinson Court.
Overall, there are sustainable renovations to Parkinson Court in the proposal
with an extension of exhibition areas and the establishment of more
permanent exhibiting space.
The most considerable alteration to Parkinson Court is expanding the
permanent area for exhibiting by replacing temporary exhibition space. After
walking through the lobby which is located in the West Wing of the building,
visitors pass via two temporary space before arriving in the permanent
exhibition area at the present. The proposed change enhances to open space
for permanent exhibition. The suggested alteration upgrades the lobby to
become an education facility with an adjacent store and plant.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Presently, the West Wing of the Parkinson Court is not being as part of
existing gallery although the proposed plan includes special exhibition area.
This space features an attached store for exhibiting.
151 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 26
The given data depicts the expense for dining over the period from 1970 to
2000. It is noticeably recognized that the expenditure for eating out increased
through decades.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
As can be seen, the year 1970 witnessed the dominant tendency in home
cooking vis-a-vis merely 10% outgoings spent on restaurant meals. The
upward eating-out trend is reflected by a half rise in 1980 and then it jumped
to 35% in 1990 before burgeoning to 50% in 2000.
In the two options of the restaurant, holistically they both drew an uplift trend
throughout the times but there were some marked dichotomies. Takeaway
oomm
meals inclined slowly from 20 meals in 1970 to roughly 30 meals in 1980
and thereafter, it increased sharply to almost 90 meals sold in 2000.
.c.c
By contrast, traditional restaurant showed a modest sales year after years. The
ss
only highlight appeared in 1980 with about 10 meals higher than takeout
rr
meals. Afterwards, it crawled up to 30 in 1980, 40 in 1990 and eventually
ttttee
ended up with 50 meals sold in 2000.
172 words
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 27
The line graph compares the amount of electricity produced using four
different sources of power from 1980 to 2010 in France.
Overall, it is clear that thermal power was the main means of electricity
generation over the period of 30 years. Renewables provided the lowest
amount of electricity.
In 1980, thermal power stations were by far the most important source of
electricity, generating about 120 terawatt hours. Nuclear power and
hydroelectric power plants produced under 75 terawatt hours of electricity
each. However, renewables provided a negligible amount. Just one year later,
nuclear power overtook thermal power as the primary source of electricity
generation.
Electricity production from nuclear power increased sharply to a peak of 430
terawatt-hours in 2005, after which it fell slightly to 410 terawatt hours by
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
2010. In contrast, the figure for thermal power fell to 50 terawatt hours in
1985 and remained at this level for the rest of period. Hydroelectricity
electricity generation remained stable, at between 60 and 70 terawatt-hours
over the 32-year period. Meanwhile, renewable electricity production saw an
increase to 30 terawatt hours at the end of the period.
185 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 28
The table below shows information and predictions regarding the change
in the percentage of the population aged 65 and above in three countries.
The table illustrates the data and prognostication for the people who are in the
age from 65 in Canada, Germany, and the UK in 1988, 2000 and 2030.
Overall, the populations of the age 65 increase by time in all three countries.
From 1988 to 2030, in comparison to Canada and Germany, UK maintain its
lowest percentage of old people. On the other hand, Germany has the greatest
number of population aged 65 and above.
For more specific information, from 1988 to 2000, the percentage of aging
people in Canada and Germany rose evenly/steadily by about 5% for each
period, from 16.32% to 20.67% in Canada and from 20.45% to 25.32% for
Germany, while the UK did not witness any significant rise until 2030.
By 2030, all the three mentioned European countries will reach the
percentage of over 20% of the old population, in which Germany is the leader
at 30.42%, followed by Canada with 26.35% and the UK with 20.35%.
161 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 29
The pie graphs below show the result of a survey of children's activities.
The first graph shows the cultural and leisure activities that boys
participate in, whereas the second graph shows the activities in which the
girls participate.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
The pie charts provide the information about the preference of children
towards entertaining activities. The first chart illustrates the data on the
proportion of boys who take part in the cultural and leisure activities, while
activities.
LLTT
the second chart presents the percentage of girls who are engaged in such
IIEE
Overall, while boys are favor of Computer games, girls prefer Dancing to
other activities, and equal quantities of genders enjoy listening to music.
According to the data from the first graph, a majority of male children
chooses Computer games as their leisure activity, over one-third of the total,
compared to Basketball’s figure, at 26%. This is followed by Soccer and
Skateboarding activities, accounting for 17% and 11% respectively. On the
contrary, reading only makes up the modest rate, at 2%.
Taking a closer look at the second chart, 27% of female children love
Dancing, making it become the most popular activity, whereas Reading gains
a slightly lower figure, at exactly 21%, which is significantly higher than that
of male children. Additionally, Netball and Computer games are chosen at a
www.zandienglish.ir

similar level, around 15% and a noticeable feature is that Listening to music
comes as the least popular leisure, with a proportion of 10%, equal to the
figure on the first chart.
210 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 30
The graph below shows waste recycling rates in the U.S. from 1960 to
2011.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
The given line chart indicates the U.S recycling rates between 1960 to 2011
IIEE
measured by percentage and tonnes.
It is clear that the overall trends were upwards. In the 1960-1995 period, there
was a gradual increase in the rates of rubbish recycled. Nevertheless, during
the remainder of the year, both figures climbed dramatically.
From 1960 to 1975, the recycling rate in the U.S remained steady at 7.3%.
However, in the following decade, the percentage of waste recycled rose
slightly to 10.1%. During the same period, the amount of trash recycled was
5.6 million tons in 1960, whereas that figure increased more than threefold, at
16.7 million tons in 1985.
The amount of garbage recycled rose significantly from 33.2 million tons in
1990 to 79.8 million tons in 2005 before reaching its highest point at 86.9
www.zandienglish.ir

million tons in 2011. Similarly, the recycling rate continued to increase
sharply and peaked at 34.7% by the end of the period.
157 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 31
The map below shows the development of a seaside village between 1995
and present.
Write a short report for a university lecturer describing the information
shown below.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
The maps illustrate the transformation of a city from 1995 until now.
Overall, the city has been significantly/noticeably developed during the
mentioned time. The number of houses and apartments increase significantly.
Some types of services and entertainments have been expanded.
During the period of time from 1995 up to now, the number of houses has
been grown up considerably in the northwest of the city. Additionally, in the
northeast, the area of large farmland and forest park were replaced by golf
and tennis courts.
In the southeast of the city, the shop was converted into a restaurant. Along
www.zandienglish.ir

the coast, the fish market was turned into the ocean apartments. In addition,
the fishing port disappeared completely during the time of 1995 up to now.
There is not much difference in the southeast between two maps with the
hotel and café still remaining in the location. Only a new car part was built
next to the hotel.
156 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 32
The charts below show the percentage of monthly household income
spent on various items by two different groups in one European country.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
The given charts compare the differences in the shares of seven items which
comprise the monthly expenses of two distinct groups in a European country.
Overall, while the food and fuel represent the largest proportions in the low-
income group’s expenditure, the wealthier tend to spend most on
www.zandienglish.ir

miscellaneous and social activities.
It can be seen from the first chart that food products account for the most
significant share of expenditure (29%), which is slightly higher compared to
the figure of fuel (25%). Miscellaneous and entertainment activities hold
rather minuscule shares, constituting 18% and 11% respectively. The
proportions of restaurant and hotel, transport, and clothing in total are
responsible for less than a fifth of all family spending. To be more specific,
the expenses on garments and luxury diners are approximately 5% and 4%
each, the sum of which equates/is equal to the amount spent on the
conveyance (9%).
Regarding to the given second chart, while miscellaneous activities assumes
the largest contribution with nearly a fourth of all expenses (23%), followed
by the budget spent on recreational and cultural activities (21%), the figure of
food and beverage is negligible at 15%, slightly overtake the restaurant and
hotel proportion (12%), however, still rank at fourth place as 16% is the share
of transportation. The fuel and clothing share the smallest consumptions,
occupied 7% and 6%, respectively.
219 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 33
The table shows the average length of video advertisements on the
Internet and the average length of time viewers spend watching them.
1-15/
oomm
Source: http://www.ielts-writing.info/index.php/academic/ielts-writing-task-
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
The table illustrates the average time of video advertisements on the Internet
and the average time of the time viewers spend watching them.
IIEE
It is clear that the largest time of average viewed went on financial services
advertisement. On the other hand, the Public service has the lowest time on
the table.
Out of all types of advertisement, financial services held the highest rate of
each advertisement video, at 16.3 seconds compared with 20.5 seconds, the
average length of advertisement. In the same position, the proportion of
viewed of Travel was also high at 13 seconds, a difference of 5 seconds with
the length of video at 18 seconds.
It can be seen that the smallest seconds was held by Public service, which the
viewer only saw 18.5 seconds of the original duration on the average, at 45.8
seconds. Other retails also took a bottom position in the table, they got 4.5
www.zandienglish.ir

seconds while the video has 22.4 seconds.
159 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 34
The bar chart below shows the percentage of unemployed graduates,
aged 20-24, in one European country over a two-year period.
oomm
1/1943-academic-ielts-writing-task-1-sample-152-the-percentage-of-
unemployed-graduates
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
A glance at the chart provided reveals the proportion of graduates lacking job
in both sexes between January 2008 and October 2009.
Overall, there was a general upward trend in the data of jobless graduates of
both genders. Moreover, the figure for male graduates was by far more
significant.
At the beginning point, the rate of idle men finishing school was precisely
10%. From April to July 2008, it experienced a stability at nearly 7%, which
was followed by a surge to 16% in October. After a relative constant in the
first seven months of 2009, the percentage of men being underemployed
peaked at approximately 23% at the end of the period.
www.zandienglish.ir

The starting point of unemployed women was about 2.5% less than the one of
the men. The tendency of the figure for women until October 2008 was
similar to the pattern of men. From this to April 2009, the data of female
decreased by 6%. Throughout the remainder of the period, it witnessed a
marked increase and reached its highest point of 14 %.
176 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 35
The charts below show the percentage of food budget the average family
spent on restaurant meals in different years. The graph shows the
number of meals eaten in fast food restaurants and sit-down restaurants.
Write a report for a university lecturer describing the information in the graph
below.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
The given bar charts illustrate the proportion of money that an average
household allocated for meals at restaurants and at homes in specific years
www.zandienglish.ir

from 1970 to 2000. The line chart demonstrates the number of meals
consumed in fast food and sit down restaurants during the same period.
Overall, it can be noticeably seen that food budget spent on restaurant meals
increased dramatically in 30 years. In a meantime, there were upward trends
in the consumption of meals at fast food and sit down restaurants.
Regarding the allocation of the food budget, there was only 10% of total
budget spent on restaurants in 1970. In 1980, after which it saw a 5-fold
increase to register for half of the total share at the end of the period.
According to the line chart, the number of eaten meals in fast food and sit
down restaurants both began at 20 meals per year in 1970. Although both
figures increase gradually, the number of fast food meals started exceeding
those of sit down restaurant meals in the mid of 1980. Since then, while the
number of fast food meals rocketed and reached a high of 90 meals by 2000,
the figure of sit down restaurants experienced a smaller increase from 30
meals in 1980 to nearly 50 meals in 2000.
217 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 36
The figure shows the results of a survey of 1000 adolescents in five
different countries. The participants were asked at what age they
believed certain rights and responsibilities should be granted to young
people.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
The bar chart given shows the results of the interview of 1000 teenagers’
opinion in terms of suitable age for marriage, voting and being responsible
for their crimes in five selected countries.
Overall, the appropriate ages for certain rights and responsibilities in
Japanese participants’ thought were the highest while Mexico people
believed the very young people could completely get married and elect.
In the belief of Japanese interviewees, people from about 20 to 22 years old
should be granted the rights to form their family and vote and 18 years old
would be the right age for criminal responsibilities. In contrast, Americans
thought that just 12-year-old and could stand trial and 18-year-old people
could decide their marriage and voting.
www.zandienglish.ir

Interestingly, stand trial. The UK also saw the similar thought as Mexico in
the age granted voting right and responsibilities but they believed the suitable
age for marriage should be at 22 years old. In addition, adolescents in Egypt
assumed that stand trial.
162 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 37
The graph below shows four countries of residence of overseas students
in Australia.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
The line graph illustrates the nationality of overseas students in Australia
from 1982 to 2000
Overall, there was an upward trend in the quantities of students from four
selected countries: Indonesia, Hong Kong, Malaysia, and Singapore.
However, the change of Malaysia is the most modest.
There were no foreign students in Australia coming from Indonesia and
Singapore in the first five-year stage. Throughout the remainder of the period,
the figure of Indonesia experienced some significant fluctuations, while there
was a gradual increase in the number of Singapore. In 2000, both Singapore
and Indonesia reached just below twenty thousand students, but the number
www.zandienglish.ir

of Singapore was slightly higher.
Hong Kong shared the mutual starting point with two mentioned countries,
while the quantities of Malaysian travelling to Australia for education in 1982
was nearly five thousand. The figure of Hong Kong witnessed a dramatic rise
by 1998. After a peak of more than fifteen thousand students, stand trial
underwent a sudden decrease, which was followed by a moderate increase.
There was a stability in the statistic of Malaysia during the period of ten
years. It fluctuated slightly in the last two years of the period and had the
lowest point among the four countries in 2000 despite having the highest
beginning point.
210 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 38
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
The bar chart gives information about the proportion of means of
transportation that schoolchildren use to go to school in Australia, the USA,
IIEE
and the UK.
It is clear that in all countries, car and school bus are the most popular modes
of transport compared to remaining four types
In terms of using a car to go to school, while the figures for American and
UK students are almost the same, at 40% and 39% respectively, the
percentage of Australian schoolchildren is just 25%. 37% of American
children go to school by school bus, followed by 31% of Australian children
and 24% of UK students.
American students tend to not pay attention to four remaining transport
forms, with only under 5% of each type used. This situation also occurs in
Australia and UK students in term of Bicycle and other forms. Meanwhile,
www.zandienglish.ir

Walking is quite popular in Australia, with 19% of students, compared to the
UK (15%) and the US (5%).
161 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 39
The map below shows three proposed sites for a new hypermarket (A, B
and C) in the city of Pellington.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
The map illustrates 3 potential sites including A, B, and C for a new
hypermarket in a city called Pellington.
LLTT
Overall, the main difference between the proposed sites is that B and C lie in
the countryside whereas A is located in the residential area.
IIEE
The first location (A) has the advantage of proximity to the residential area in
the centre of the city and the western industrial zone that have a potentially
large number of customers. Moreover, the hypermarket can attract consumers
in the northern-west town of Hanford which is only 15 km from there and has
a population of 30,000 people. However, a traffic-free zone and a park in the
centre can be inconvenient for travellers parking cars.
The second plan (B) lies in the countryside to the north-east of the city. It is
considerably far from the residential area and 2 industrial zones, even though
there is a motorway connecting to the site. The remaining site (C) is situated
in the southern countryside, having the advantage of being surrounded by the
residential area and the southern industrial zone. Besides, an existing railway
connecting the 2 industrial zones passes through the 2 sites A and C. An
www.zandienglish.ir

airport in the southern-west area doesn’t affect the 3 sites.
209 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 40
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The first chart illustrates data on the amount of CO2 emission per passenger
in various kinds of transportation while the other provides information about
www.zandienglish.ir

average proportions of the national budget are spent on several modes of
transport in EU.
Overall, the majority of EU’s expenditure is allocated to road transportation.
However, it is obvious that airline travel accounts for the highest amount of
CO2 emissions.
Regarding the bar chart, flying by air produces by far the greatest CO2
emissions at approximately 380 grams CO2 per passenger per kilometer, By
contrast, the minority of just a sixth of that proximity is reported in types of
coaches, maritime and rail travelling system. Moreover, buses and private
cars both have a number of over 50 grams of CO2, which is emitted in each
kilometer and estimated for each individual.
Looking to the other chart, it is noticeable that over a half of the budget
would be spent on the road travelling, followed by the figures of railways and
public transportation categories, which are about 31% and 10%, respectively.
On another hand, the remaining kinds of transports have received an
inconsiderable amount of the national fund, at the rate of merely 1 or 2%.
200 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The bar chart illustrates the volumes of Carbon dioxide emissions from some
main sorts of transportation in the European Union (EU) while the pie chart
gives information about EU expense on various methods of transport.
Overall, among the six means of transport, the proportion of air pollution
from Air travel accounts for the highest and the EU allocates the largest
budget on road transport.
First of all, it can be clearly seen from the bar chart that traveling by air
produces the majority of carbon dioxide emissions, approximately 380 grams
per passenger per kilometer, much higher than the total volumes of CO2
emissions of the remaining transport forms. Indeed, the airplane is followed
by passenger cars which make up nearly 140 gram of CO2 per passenger
each kilometer, doubling the amount of CO2 released by buses, and tripling
that of maritime, rail and coaches.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
A look at the pie chart reveals that the funds spent on roads take up the
largest proportion, more than 50 percent while the budgets for the land
waterway, airport and intermodal occupied merely minor amounts at 1
percent. The proportion of spending on railway ranks at the second place at
nearly one-third of the total fund, followed by public transport with 10
percent.
208 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 41
The figure illustrates the working process of a refrigerator.

From the diagram, it can be seen that the process begins with the evaporator
heat from food inside the machine and ends with the emission of the heat into
the air.
When food is put into the cabin of the refrigerator, its temperature is lowered
and the heat from the food is evaporated by the high-pressure liquid within
the capillary tube. This results in the creation of warm low-pressure gas
inside the tube. The gas then flows in the tube and goes through a
compressor.
In the compressor, the temperature and the pressure of the gas are heightened.
Next, the hot, high-pressure gas follows the line of the tube to the condenser,
where its heat is transferred to the atmosphere around the refrigerator. The
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
gas becomes cool high-pressure liquid from which the working cycle of the
refrigerator continues again.
151words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 42
The graph below shows the population change between 1940 and 2000 in
three different counties in the U.S. state of Oregon.
The line chart compares the differences of numbers of people from 1940 to
2000 in Columbia, Yamhill, and Washington.
As we can see from the graph, all data experienced the similar increasing
trends whereas, the volume of people in Washington was the highest by far
compared to the others.
In 1940, there were 75.000 people living in Washington while approximately
30000 people settling down in Yamhill and Columbia. After 30 years, that of
Yamhill and Columbia slightly increased to 45.000 and around 35.000
thousand people respectively. Meanwhile, a dramatic increase was recorded/
witnessed in the volume of people living in Washington from 75000 to over
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
12000, about three times higher than those of the others.
Throughout the remainder of the period, that of Washington continued
increasing dramatically and reach a peak of over 240000 inhabitants. Both
figures of Yamhill and Columbia shared the same trends and soared greatly
by around 45.000 people/ citizens. Over the next 30 years, the gap between
the figure for Washington and two other places widen larger.
171 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 43
The bar chart below shows the results of a survey conducted by a
personnel department at a major company. The survey was earned out
on two groups of workers: those aged from 18-30 and those aged 45-60,
and shows factors affecting their work performance.
The bar chart compares different employees of two age groups in terms of the
level of many working factors affects their working productivity in a survey
which is conducted by human resources department.
Overall, these factors had more influences on younger groups than the older
one except for respect and managers.
The most difference between 2 generations of workers was the expectation of
working in a relaxing environment and individual development opportunity.
While the numbers of young employees in these 2 categories were around 80,
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
these figures of the older ones/ counterparts equaled approximately a half.
On the other hand, there were 2 aspects that the numbers of people were
exactly the same. In each group of employees, the numbers of people who
were impacted by the environment at work and team spirit were
consecutively around 25 and 60. Lastly, the expectations of the older working
people to be capable of managers and have the colleagues’ respect were
170 words
oomm
slightly higher than the younger group at respectively about 50 and 60.
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 44
The first chart below gives information about the money spent by British
parents on their children’s sports between 2008 and 2014. The second
chart shows the number of children who participated in three sports in
Britain over the same time period.
The line graphs illustrate the average monthly money that British parents
spent on their children’s sports and the number of children engaging in three
different sports during the period from 2008 to 2014.
Overall, it is clear that the amount of money that parents spent on their
children’s sports increased each year. Football was by far the most popular
sport that children took an interest in.
UK parents had to spend 20 pounds per month in the first year. During the
period, that figure continued rising considerably and finally stood at around
33% by the year 2014.
Between 2008 and 2010, the number of children who participated in athletics
did not change much. It remained relatively constant at around 0.6 million
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
before increasing dramatically to approximately 4.5 million in 2014.
On the other hand, in 2008, the number of kids engaging in football was five
times higher than that of going swimming, at around 8.5 million and 1.7
million, respectively. Six years later, there were 9.3 million children playing
football, compared to 3.9 million of swimming participators.
177 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 45
The bar charts below give information on the ages of people when they
got married in one particular country in 1996 and 2008.
The two bar charts illustrate the proportion of people who go into the
marriage life in the years 1996 and 2008 in six age groups.
Overall, the percentage of married individuals in both genders experienced a
small decline with a notable exception of females in 25-29 age group, where
it remained stable. It is also clear from the graph, men were not having a
married when they were 16-19 although female had.
As is shown from the charts, there was a small decrease in the percentage of
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
women getting married, especially the proportion for those who in the 20-24
ages which were half in 2008 compared to 1996. Regarding the aged 16-19,
just around 3% and 1% of female married in 1996 and 2008, respectively.
The married rate in women in 25-29 remained unchanged in both years
(nearly 12%), start a new sentence so that you can go deeper.
With regard to the older groups, both of genders experienced a decline, in
oomm
1996, around 7% (male) and 9% (female) married, following by exactly 8%
in men and 11% in women in 2008. For the remaining two groups, the
.c.c
percentage of females in both years were just around under 4%. The rate for
men went up in 1996 and 2008, at 7% and 9% and 5% to slightly over 6%,
respectively.
rrss
ttttee
219 words
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 46
The diagram below shows the number of houses built per year in two
cities, Derby and Nottingham, between 2000 and 2009.
below.
The bar chart illustrates the overview of Derby and Nottingham in terms of
the number of new houses set up every year, from 2000 to 2009.
Overall, the number of new residences in Derby had a generally increasing
trend. While the figure for those new buildings in Nottingham fluctuated
regularly over the period.
It can be seen that in 2000 and 2001, the local in Derby just created under 50
new constructions per year. This number rose 1.5 times in the next year.
From 2003 to 2007, the rate remained stable, hovered around 120 to 125 new
houses each year. Suddenly in 2008, the number of new houses soared
sharply over two times and continued to increase steadily then reached a peak
of nearly 350 in 2009.
Regarding the constant changes in Nottingham, the number of new
constructions was around 50 in the first two years. This rate decreased
slightly in 2002 before a gradually rising tendency happened from 2003 to
2005. After that, the figure of new houses went up and down incredibly; it
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
went downed to 5 in 2006 then rocketed to nearly 200 in 2007; moreover,
there was a sudden downward trend in 2008 before emerging/ rocketing/
soaring by 250% (namely 250 new houses per year) in 2009.
211 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 47
The graph below shows the different modes of transport used to travel to
and from work in one European city in 1950, 1970 and 1990.
The bar chart compares the percentage of travelers using different modes of
transport to commute to and from offices in one European city in the years
1950, 1970 and 1990.
Overall, the chart indicates the growing use of a car from being the least
favorite transport in 1950 to the most popular in 1990. On the other hand, the
preference for walking and riding a bike experienced a significant decline
over the period.
In 1950, the percentage of people using cars to travel to and from work was
the lowest, at around 7%. By contrast, the rate for those who walked on foot
was at the highest point of exactly 35%. Approximately 27% of people
travelled by bikes, compared to precisely 20% of bus commuters.
The proportion of people traveling by car reached its highest point of the
whole bar chart at around 37% in 1990, after a significant increase of about
18% in 1970. In 1990, the figures of people riding bikes and walking on foot
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
decreased to about 7% and exactly 10% respectively. Commuters using buses
increased by around 7% in 1970 before dropping slightly in 1990, to at 18%.
192 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 48
The flow chart illustrates the process of making compost from recycled
organic waste.
The process contains five stages, beginning with the construction of a plastic
container and ending with the produced fertilizer being ready to use for
gardening.
Firstly, a plastic container is needed with the volume of 2m3 and several
holes around the body, allowing the air to move between inside and outside
of it. Next, the waste food is poured into the container until it is 15cm thick.
After that, a 15cm layer of grass is put above the waste food layer and then
all will be covered by some newspapers on the surface.
In the third step, nitrogen is poured into the container, and only if the weather
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
is hot, water will be added with the nitrogen. The top of the container is
sealed in step four in order to let the heat vapour. Six months later, the
fertilizer is formed and taken out to be used in the garden.
163 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 49
The chart below gives information about Someland's main exports in
2005, 2015, and future projections for 2025.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The figure illustrates data on primary exports of Someland in 2005, 2015 and
predictive stats for 2025.
Overall, it seems international tourism made the highest profit in the group.
In contrast, meat products see a gradual decline throughout the year, while
there is a fluctuation, on the stats of dairy products.
Products from meat had its biggest revenue in 2005, at 4 billion USD.
However, there was a slight drop in its profit in 2015. Decreasing
approximately 0.5 billion USD. It could be even worse for non-vegetarian in
2025, nearly 3.5% if the prediction is correct. In contrast, tourists brought
more than 6 billion USD to Someland income in 2005. Moreover, the profit
of travel industry continued to grow in 2015, increasing about 1 billion USD
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
compared to that in 2015 and it is likely to grow to nearly 8 billion USD in
2025.
Speaking of dairy products, its profit was around 4.5 billion USD in 2005.
Afterwards, there was a rapid rise in milk-related supply income, reaching
almost 8 billion USD in 2015. However, the trend seems unstable, as the
experts predict a small reduction in 2025 in the total profit of dairy
consumption, about 7.5 billion USD.
199 words
oomm
MODEL ANSWER 2:
.c.c
rrss
The bar chart compares three different sectors of Someland in terms of vital
ttttee
commodities sold abroad in 2005, 2015 and 2025.
It is clear that dairy products and international tourism have occupied the
aa
majority of exports turnover among the three categories. In addition, money
from selling meat products abroad has declined gradually, while international
over the period shown.
SSMM
tourism tends to increase dramatically and dairy products fluctuate steadily
Meat products got export sales of 4 billion USD in 2005, then fell gradually
LLTT
to over 3.5 billion in 2015. This area is predicted to reach only 3 USD billion
in 2025. By contrast, there is a dramatic rise in the amount of money earned
from dairy exports by approximately 3 USD billion in 10 years. However,
IIEE
this sector is anticipated to go down to over 7.5 USD billion in 2025.
International tourism is likely to become the dominant industry with steady
growth over the time surveyed. It stood at over 6 and 7 USD billion in 2005
and 2015 respectively. 10 years later, it is expected to reach a peak of under 8
USD billion.
184 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 50
The diagram shows how fruit is canned.
The diagram illustrates the process of producing canned fruit.

Overall, there are several steps in the manufacturing of canned fruits starting
from picking and ending with dispatching.
Looking at the first stage of the process, fruits on the trees are picked by hand
before being transported by trucks to the factory. At this place, these fruits
are washed under fresh water and checked carefully for the quality. Next, the
high-quality fruits will be stored at a cold temperature below 0oC to prepare
for the next step. Secondly, people grade and peel fruits before slicing into
smaller pieces and putting them into cans.
At the final stage, the cans at the previous step are sealed (tightly) before they
were cooked on the fire. After that, they are labelled to become fully-
constituted products and stored to prepare for dispatching to distributors.
152 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 51
Plan A below shows a health centre in 2005. Plan B shows the same place
in the present day.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
L TT
The maps illustrate some changes of a health centre in present day compared
to it was in 2005.
L
IIEE
It is clear from the maps that the most significant change can be seen is the
appearance of a room for minor operations and also two consulting rooms. In
addition, the car parking has been extended to more places.
In plan A, the entrance situated to the south of the health centre has been
moved to the southwest corner. As a result, the consulting room 3 at this
place before has been demolished and replaced by children’s play areas and a
reception desk which was in the centre. Another outstanding development of
this health centre is that consulting room 1 and 2 have been built at the
position of the entrance in 2005, leaving the places for consulting room 3 and
4. These changes make central of this building become much larger, which
means more seats have been put in front of each room.
www.zandienglish.ir

Apart from physiotherapy room that has remained unchanged, the office has
not been touched although that it is now smaller. In addition, a minor
operations room has been erected at the northwest corner of the health centre.
The garden was decreased a half in size, allowing more spaces for car parking
(up to 30 spaces), which extended to the west side.
219 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 52
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
The given bar chart depicts a survey of 500 customers about their Levels of
aa
contentment in four different ways for shopping.
MM
Overall, consumers felt good with all the given methods while there were a
large number of people dissatisfying with them and a small pattern had a
neutral attitude.
SS
LLTT
As can be seen from the chart/diagram, it is evident that presents gifted by
friends or family brought receivers the most happiness, with the rate of nearly
80% and just about 13% of individuals were discontented. In addition,
IIEE
approximately two-thirds of buyers had optimistic opinions when they went
shopping in local shops (over two-thirds) but it saw a huge figure of over a
fifth of customers who reported bad feelings.
On the other hand, shoppers were not really interested in purchasing goods
from the supermarket and the internet. The proportions of unsatisfied
shoppers for these two shopping methods are around 30% and 40%
respectively. However, both ways still attracted big purchasers (55% and
nearly a half) whose attitudes towards them were positive. In neutrality, there
were just about 10% of clients feeling normal with four shopping ways.
185 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 53
The given pie charts compare the expenses in 7 different categories in
1966 and 1996 by American Citizens.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The graphs compare the percentage of spending on stuff in the USA from
1966 to 1996.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Overall, spending on food and cars accounted for the largest proportions in
two years. Whereas other patterns including petrol, restaurants, furniture,
computers, and books varied insignificantly.
At first glance, the figure for food expenditures made up 44% in 1966, but
unfortunately, it declined to exactly 14% in 1996. People in the US spent
23% of their expenses on cars in the first year. This figure climbed to 45% in
oomm
1996, which was the highest rate in the two pie charts.
In terms of petrol, it dropped from 9% in 1966 to 8% in 1996. However, the
.c.c
proportion of restaurant expenditures made up 7% at the beginning of the
ss
year, compared to the figure for that in 1996, at 10%, while the figure for
rr
spending on computers was 1% in 1966 and 10% in 1996 respectively. The
ttttee
percentage of outlay on books went down from 6% to 1%. Similarly, the
outlay on furniture fell, from 10% in 1966 to 8% in 1996.
177 words
MODEL ANSWER 2: aa
SSMM
The bar chart illustrates the proportion of average spending of an American in
two separate years 1996 and 2006.
LLTT
Overall, food occupied the highest percentage of an American’s spending in
1966; while most of the expenditures in 1996 were of cars.
IIEE
In 1966, an American spent 44% of their income on food, followed by cars,
which accounted for nearly a quarter. One – tenth of an American’s expenses
went on furniture, while the percentage of petrol was 9%. The proportions are
nearly the same in terms of restaurants and books, while only 1% of the
expenditures were for computers.
Thirty years later, car comprised nearly a half of the spending of a US citizen.
Food and restaurants shared the same proportion, 14%, and the same status
can also be found in the other two categories: furniture and petrol, with 8%.
While the expenses on computers increased ten times after thirty years, by
contrast, the expenditures of books reduced to only 1%.
160 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 54
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The six pie charts reveal the differences in the proportion of water consumed
for specified purposes in six regions of the world: North America, South
America, Europe, Africa, Central Asia and South East Asia.
Overall, agriculture has the highest demand for water, which is in contrast
with domestic use worldwide. Noticeably, there are changes in patterns of
every different region.
The agriculture industry water consumption accounts for more than half of
the total in developing regions, such as South America, Central Asia, and
South East Asia. Noticeably, it is in Central Asia that water demand for
agriculture is the highest proportion with 88%, followed by Africa, Southeast
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Asia, and South America with 84%, 81%, and 71% respectively. Relatively,
the need of waterfalls significantly back to 39% in Europe and even lower,
32% in North America.
As can be seen from the charts, there is a striking difference in the
distribution of water for the industrial and agricultural purpose. In developed
countries, the industrial purpose is the most dominant compared to others. As
oomm
an evidence, this purpose takes the first place in total, with the contribution of
53% in Europe and 48% in North America. However, it is the agriculture that
.c.c
is the main purpose in developing ones, consequently, makes the industrial
pattern plunge wildly to no more than 12%. Domestic use doesn’t have the
South America) and 7% (in Asia).

rrss
outstanding disparity between regions, slightly fluctuate between 19% (in
218 words
aa
The six pie charts illustrate the water usage rates for 3 goals including
SSMM
industry, agriculture and domestic use in 6 different areas over the world.
Overall, water is used mostly in agriculture in Asian areas, Africa and South
TT
America whereas the biggest water consumption in North America and
Europe is industrial zones.
LL
Agriculture accounted for the vast majority of over 80% of the total water
IIEE
utility in Africa, Central Asia, and South East Asia. Meanwhile, over two-
thirds of South America’s consumption comes the second in this field,
compared to one-third of the total usage in Europe.
The percentage of water used for industrial purpose makes up the major of
roughly 50% in North America and Europe, coming second in South East
Asia with 12%. In contrast, it occupies the minor proportion in the remaining
of areas, with around 10% of the total consumed water. People in all six areas
use water least in the domestic application in two American areas and
Europe, accounting for about 15% of water there, and under 10% in 3
remaining areas.
176 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 55
1971 to 2007.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The line graph illustrates the number of cars used by different families in the
UK between 1971 and 2007.
As can be seen from the data, there seemed to be an increasing number of
people with more than one car while there were fewer people without any car
for commuting.
At the beginning of the period, about nearly a half of families in Britain did
not have a car, while over 40% of the population used one car. Only a small
minority of the residents owned three or more cars at that time. However,
there was a remarkable increase in the number of households possessing two
cars, growing from just 9% in 1971, overtaking the proportion of people
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
without cars in 2004 and ending the period at 25% of the population. In
contrast, those who did not buy any car halved in numbers and accounted for
around 25%.
There is a slight fluctuation in the number of people with one car and this
figure hovered around 45% over 36 years. On the other hand, there is a
gradual improvement in the number of people who used the most number of
cars in Britain.
193 words
oomm
MODEL ANSWER 2:
.c.c
rrss
The line graph provides the information about the number of cars per
ttttee
households in Britain over a period of 36 years.
Overall, car ownership in Britain increased, with the number of households
aa
without a car falling and that of families owning two cars rising between
1971 and 2007.
SSMM
In 1971, almost a half of all British households did not have regular use of a
car. Meanwhile, the percentage of households with a car was about 43 %,
five times greater than that of families having two cars. It is uncommon for
LLTT
British families to own three or more cars, with under 2% of households
falling into this category.
IIEE
The one-car households were the most common type from late 1970’s
onwards, reaching around 42% of all households, which was the highest final
figure. The biggest change was seen in the proportion of households without
a car, which fell steadily to over 25% by 2007. In contrast, the figure for two
cars increased steadily to under 25%, and after some minor fluctuating
increases, the percentage of households with more than two cars rose by
about 5% over the 36-year period.
188 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 56
The chart below shows the changes that took place in three different
areas of crime in New Port city center from 2003-2012.
The line graph compares the number of incidents in terms of three different
areas of crime, namely burglary, car thief and robbery in Newport city
Overall, burglary experienced a downward trend during the period of 9 years.
However, the number of incidents of both car thief and robbery remained
relatively stable during that period.
From 2003 to 2008, the number of incidents of burglary was highest at the
beginning, at 3400 incidents. After reaching a peak of 3800 incidents in 2004,
it saw a sudden decline, hitting the bottom at 1200 accidents in 2008. At that
time, there was a dramatic decrease in the number of accidents in car theft;
however, which/ this figure was higher than that of burglary, at 2100
incidents. The number of robbery after rose rising to a peak at 900 incidents,
it fell gradually and accounted for 500 incidents, which was the least point of
the line graphs.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Between 2008 and 2012, although there was a steep increase, the number of
car theft and robbery cases was similar to their beginning point, at 2800 and
700 incidents, respectively. By contrast, there was a significant plunge in the
number of incidents of burglary by 2000 incidents in 2012.
206 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 57
The graph below shows a survey result of 4000 participants who
expressed what important aspects they have learned from the internship
they have completed.
The given pie chart illustrates information about the percentage of responders
in a survey of what they have experienced from their internship.
Overall, practical knowledge and communication skills were the most
common experience/ treasure/ asset gained from the internship. Meanwhile,
only a few people participating in the survey believed that only a few people
participating in the survey acknowledge the value of teamwork.
As can be observed from the graph, there was about 15% of participants
expressing that they could practice their knowledge in their internship period.
In addition, the proportion of participants improving communication skills
and understanding industry were almost 14%, 10% respectively.
The pie chart also shows that time management, work operation, real work
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
experience and planning future career path had the similar percentage/ rate/
ratio at precisely 7%. Finally, only 4% of people taking part in the survey
think they have learned work environment as the most experience.
152 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 58
The given table compares how soil degradation by different causes left
consequences in certain areas whereas the pie chart illustrates reasons for this
recent global issue during the 1990s.
Overall, it can be seen from the table that land in Europe was the most
degraded of all nations/areas/ continents surveyed while North America was
least affected by this matter. Meanwhile, over-grazing appeared to be the
major cause for this degradation throughout the world.
A more detailed look at the figures reveals that while the proportion of
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
deforestation for Europe seemed to overtake the remainders (at 9.8%), that of
North America stayed insignificantly at 0.2%. In terms of over-cultivation,
once again the rate of 7.7% made Europe take the lead compared to 0% in
Oceania. In contrast, when it comes to over-grazing, the highest percentage of
11.3% belonged to Oceania while that of North America only accounted for
the smallest of just 1.5%.
oomm
Furthermore, it was widely perceived that 35% of land degradation was due
to over-gazing. Clearly, over-cultivation and deforestation made up for
.c.c
similar percentages of 30% and 28% respectively. Meanwhile, other factors
were responsible for only 7% of the world degraded land.
193 words
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 59
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart shows data about the proportion of players of both genders in
nine different sports in New Zealand in 2002.
Overall, it is clear that not as many as boys and girls who took part in most of
these sports. However, in terms of basketball and tennis, the figure for boys
and girls was similar.
Among girls, it is noticed that netball was the most common sports in New
Zealand, at over 25% while in second place, the percentage for swimming
was slightly lower, at around 22%. The figures for basketball, tennis, and
soccer were similar, at approximately 6%, 7% and 5% respectively. Around
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
4% and 3% girls took part in athletics and martial arts respectively while the
proportion of cricket was lowest at only 2% in total. The percentage of girls
who played unspecified sport totaled/ accounted for around 10%.
In contrast, only 1% of young male played netball, which was at least 24
times less than girls. However, almost 25% of males played soccer which
was the highest participation figures. Followed that, the number of boys who
oomm
played swimming and martial arts was at about 13% and 12% respectively
while the figures for tennis, basketball and athletics were lower, at around
sports.
.c.c
7%, 6%, and 4% respectively. Approximately 17% of males played other
217 words
rrss
ttttee
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The bar chart compares the data about the most preferred sports which were
aa
played by both boys and girls in New Zealand in 2002.
MM
Overall, boys were more active than girls in most of the sports except for
athletics, netball, and swimming. While the proportions of both genders
SS
played basketball and tennis were similar, the figures were dramatically
LLTT
different between boys and girls who participated in different sports.
Among girl, netball was the most common sport which accounted for a
quarter followed by swimming with 22%. By contrast, the percentage of
IIEE
girls/ females who enjoyed basketball and tennis were much lower, at 6% and
7% respectively. These were followed by soccer, athletics and martial arts
which all had figured of between 2 % and 5%. Cricket was the least popular
kind of sports among girls with only 1% of them participated in it. Finally,
participation in other, unspecified, sports made up around 10%.
In contrast, among male counterparts, only 1% played/ preferred playing
netball. The sports with the highest participation were soccer, swimming,
cricket and martial arts with 25%, 13%, 11% and 10% respectively. The
percentage of boys who took part in basketball and tennis were slightly
higher than that of the girls with 7% and 8%. In addition, there was 18% of
boys who played other sports.
www.zandienglish.ir

218 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 60
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
MODEL ANSWER 1:
LLTT
The line graph provides information about how many Internet users visiting
IIEE
two new music websites namely Music Choice and Pop Parade on fifteen
days.
It is noticeable that the figures for both websites fluctuate violently during
this period. However, a much larger number of people visiting Pop Parade
compared to Music Choice.
On the first day, the number of users choosing Pop Parade stands at precisely
120000 people, which is three times higher than that of Music Choice with
40000 users. Later, the figure for Pop Parade experiences a considerable and
rapid decline to a low of approximately 35000 people on the seventh day
while the number of Internet users accessing Music Choice oscillates slightly
around 30000 people until day 11.
www.zandienglish.ir

In the latter half of this period, the number of visits to Pop Parade soars up
suddenly to approximately 150000 people on the eleventh day before falling
abruptly and remains relatively constant until day 13. On the other hand, after
4 days remaining at less than 40000, the figure of Music Choice recovers to
120000 and stabilizes at 120000. On the last day, the number of the former
doubles and peaks at around 170000 visits and the gap between two websites
in question is widened significantly.
207 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The given graph illustrates the number of visitors to two different Internet
websites about music in the 15-day period.
Overall, the number of people visited both Pop parade and Music Choice
increased remarkably over the period shown. Although the two trends were
similar in terms of a gradual growth, the figure for visitors who visited Pop
Parade was higher in most days.
In the first 9 days, there was a dramatic fluctuation in the number of visitors
visiting Pop Parade, although it always remained above 25000 people. In the
next 4 days, Pop Parade witnessed a noticeable variation in the number of
users, which fell to exactly 80000 people on the 13th day. Throughout the
remainder of the period, there was a slight increase in the number of people
visiting Pop Parade, climbing to approximately 170000 people by the 15th
day.
Over the same period, the figure for people who visited Music Choice varied
less significantly than that of Pop Parade. In the first 2 days, Music Choice
experienced a large reduction in the number of users to precisely 20000
people. Between 2nd and 11th, there was a considerable variation, before
reaching its peak of 120000 people, on the 12th day. By contrast, Music
Choice saw a remarkable fluctuation, falling to nearly 70000 people on the
15th day.
218 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

Legal & Disclaimer
cause of action.
book.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION
SAMPLE 1
SAMPLE 2
SAMPLE 3
SAMPLE 4
SAMPLE 5
SAMPLE 6
SAMPLE 7
SAMPLE 8
SAMPLE 9
SAMPLE 10
SAMPLE 11
SAMPLE 12
SAMPLE 13
SAMPLE 14
SAMPLE 15
SAMPLE 16
SAMPLE 17
SAMPLE 18
SAMPLE 19
SAMPLE 20
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 21
SAMPLE 22
SAMPLE 23
SAMPLE 24
SAMPLE 25
SAMPLE 26
oomm
SAMPLE 27
.c.c
SAMPLE 28
rrss
ttttee
SAMPLE 29
SAMPLE 30
SAMPLE 31
aa
SAMPLE 32
SAMPLE 33
SSMM
SAMPLE 34
SAMPLE 35
LLTT
SAMPLE 36
SAMPLE 37
SAMPLE 38
IIEE
SAMPLE 39
SAMPLE 40
SAMPLE 41
SAMPLE 42
SAMPLE 43
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 44
SAMPLE 45
SAMPLE 46
CONCLUSION
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
INTRODUCTION
oomm
provide you over 45 high-quality sample essays to help you easily achieve an
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
MM
SS
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 1
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The line graph indicates the number of people listening to music on two
different kinds of websites.
Overall, the number of visitors to both sites continuously fluctuated over the
period of 15 days. Although the two trends were similar in terms of a general
variation, the number of visits to Pop Parade in most years is higher than that
to Music Choice.
In the first to ninth day period, Pop Parade sees a gradual and considerable
decrease in the number of listeners from 120 thousand to 40 thousand,
respectively. However, in the following two days, the figure for Pop Parade
increases significantly to over 150.000 people, which was one of the highest
points during the 15-day period before it had a sharp fall to below 80.000 in 2
days later. Throughout the remainder of the period, there is a rapid growth in
the number of people visiting the Pop Parade, which goes up to nearly
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
170.000 by the 15th day.
Over the same period, the number of visitors to Music Choice varies less
significantly than to Pop Parade. It fluctuated over 20.000 people for the first
eleventh eleven days before reaching its highest point of the whole line
graph, 120.000, on the twelfth day. Then, it still had the slight fluctuation in
two days later. In contrast, in the last two days, the number of visits to Music
on the 15th day.

oomm
Choice decreased noticeably by over 20.000, falling to approximately 70.000
219 words
.c.c
MODEL ANSWER 2:
rrss
ttttee
The line graph shows the differences in the number of daily visits to two new
music websites named Music Choice and Pop Parade in a 15-day period.
aa
Overall, it is clear that the number of visitors to both sites fluctuated over the
period shown. However, Pop Parade website got higher views than that of
SSMM
Music Choice, except for the 12th and 13th days.
As pointed out in the graph, Pop Parade music website had about 120000
visits in the first three days, which is 3 times higher than that of Music
LLTT
Choice. After that, the figure decreased to 40000 from the third day to the
ninth day. Over the last six days, the figure for Pop Parade experienced an
upward trend and reached a peak of 175000 on the fifth day.
IIEE
In contrast, the number of hits of Music Choice fluctuated between 20000
and 60000 during the first 11 days. In the next 4 days, the number of users
soared and peaked at day 14 (at 120000) and then went down dramatically to
over 70000 on the last day of the period.
182 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 2
2002.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The chart compares the total amount of time spent by UK people on three
categories of telephone calls namely local-fixed line, national and
international-fixed line and mobiles during a 7-year period.
Overall, the total number of minutes spent on national and international-fixed
line and mobiles increased during the research period. In contrast, the figure
for local-fixed line experienced a slight increase in the first half and then it
decreased in the second half of the period.
In 1995, the amount of time spent on local-fixed line was highest, at around
72.5 billion minutes, while the quantities of mobiles were lowest, at only
approximately 3.3 billion minutes. At the same time, around 36.6 billion
minutes of the national and international-fixed line were spent by UK people.
Interestingly, from 1995 to 1999, there was a significant increase in the
number of minutes spent on all of three kinds of telephone calls.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
The period between 1999 and 2002 saw a dramatic growth in the amount of
time spent on mobiles, rising from around 13.3 billion minutes in 1999 to
around 45 billion minutes in 2002. After reaching a peak of 90 billion
minutes in 1999, the figure for local-fixed line suffered a drastic decline to
about 72.5 billion minutes in 2002. Meanwhile, there was a slight surge to
around 61 billion minutes in national and international-fixed line.
218 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
oomm
.c.c
The bar chart indicates that people in the UK spent on three types of phone
calls between 1995 and 2002.
rrss
ttttee
Overall, time spent on national and international fixed line calls as well as
mobile calls increased over the period shown, while the number of minutes of
local fixed-line calls decreased. However, this type of call was still the most
popular from 1995 to 2002.
aa
MM
In 1995, residents in the UK spent the vast majority of their time making
local fixed-line calls, at over 72 billion minutes, in comparison with the two
SS
remaining categories. This figure almost doubled the number of minutes for
TT
national and international fixed line calls, at about 37 billion minutes.
Mobiles were the least common phone call type in the UK, with just under 5
LL
billion minutes in the year.
IIEE
The number of minutes was spent on local fixed-line calls still remained the
same in 2002 after the highest rise up to 90 billion minutes in 2000. UK
inhabitants spent more 24 billion minutes on making national and
international fixed line calls in 2002, compared to this figure in 1995.
Likewise, there was a considerable growth in mobile calls, and this number
went up tenfold over a period of seven years.
204 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 3
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart compares average house prices during the 12 year period from
1990 to 2002 with those in 1989 in five different cities of five different
countries.
Overall, there were upward trends in the house prices, with the notable
exception of Tokyo’s house cost. While the costs of dwelling in Western
countries namely the USA, Spain, Germany, the UK increased in general,
that in an Asian country, Japan, decreased over the period of 12 years.
During the first period from 1990 to 1995, the average of house prices in
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
three cities reduced significantly by 5 % in New York (USA) and 7.5 % in
both London (UK) and Tokyo (Japan). In contrast, the accommodation costs
went up slightly in Madrid (Spain) and Frankfurt (Germany) to 1.5 % and 2
% respectively.
Throughout the second period from 1996 to 2002, the average of house prices
increased dramatically in most of the cities except Tokyo where the
oomm
residential prices continued falling down to exactly 5%. While the price of
houses in London grew rapidly to approximately 12 %, considered as the
.c.c
greatest variation, the rate changes in 3 cities increased steadily to 5% in New
York (USA), 4 % in Madrid (Spain) and 2% in Frankfurt (Germany).
206 words
rrss
ttttee
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The bar chart provides an overview of average house price changes in five
aa
cities (namely New York, Madrid, Tokyo, Frankfurt, and London) between
1990 and 2002 versus 1989 data.
SSMM
Overall, it can clearly be seen that Madrid and Frankfurt witnessed growth in
average house prices; while the other cities experienced fluctuations of prices
LLTT
over the 13-year period.
According to the data source, in the first 6 years of the period, Frankfurt and
Madrid residents paid approximately 2% to 3% more for housing spending
IIEE
compared with 1989. The other three cities, on the other hand, saw a drop in
the average cost of housing – to be 5% cheaper for New York, and 7%
cheaper for Tokyo and London equally.
By contrast, when it comes to the second half of the period, there were
upward trends for all cities except Tokyo, with 2% for Frankfurt, 4% for
Madrid and 5% for New York. London average house prices, surprisingly,
surged exponentially by almost 12%, becoming the strongest growing cities
in average house prices among the groups. People living in Tokyo, despite
the rising trends in other metropolitans, kept benefiting from a decline in
average house prices, is 5% less expensive than 1989.
199 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 4
The diagram below shows the water cycle, which is the continuous
movement of water on, above and below the surface of the Earth.
The provided flow chart demonstrates the movement of water circuit from the
Earth’s surface to under the ground.
The process includes five main stages, beginning with the evaporation of
ocean water and ending with the return of the water to the oceans through the
underground paths.
Firstly, 80% of the total water vapour in the air is provided by the ocean
water after the evaporation in the sunshine, resulting in the formation of
clouds after the condensation of the steam. Next, the clouds pass to higher
and colder areas, starting the precipitation to make rain. As the result, rain fall
to the ground. Besides, the rain water can be also accumulated in lakes.
Subsequently, the amount of water runoff from the surface and from the lakes
continuously absorbs and stops at the impervious layer, where water is not
allowed to keep doing down. At this time, the absorbed water becomes
underground one. Ultimately, the groundwater transports along the ways to
the oceans and after the intrusion of salt, it turns to the salt water in the
oceans.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
177 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 5
The graph below shows the consumption of fish and some different kinds
of meat in a European country between 1979 and 2004.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The line graph compares the consumption of 4 different types of protein
sources (chicken, beef, lamb, and fish) in a European nation from 1979 to
2004.
Overall, it is clear that there was an upward trend in the consumption of
chicken while that of others decreased.
In 1979, beef was the most popular meat in that country, standing at 220
grams per person per week. However, this figure was in terms of general
decline to approximately 100 grams per person by 2004 after fluctuating over
the period. By contrast, fish was one last choice in 4 categories of protein
sources, and fish consumption remained relatively constant over the period of
25 years, at around 50 grams per person.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Finally, Chicken and lamb consumption started at the similar levels in 1979,
around 150 grams per person per week. While the figure for lamb reduced
significantly to just above 50 grams per person, the figure for chicken rose
dramatically to exactly 250 grams per person weekly by the year 2004 before
reaching its highest point as well as the greatest figure at all.
181 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
oomm
.c.c
The given line graph compares the expenditure on chicken, beef, lamb and
fish in a European nation surveyed from 1979 to 2004.
rrss
Overall, the consumption of chicken increased significantly whilst that of
ttttee
other types of meat decreased over the period. In addition, the fish amount
was always the least during 25 years.
aa
A close look at the graph reveals that the demand for beef was at the highest
mark of 220 grams per person per week in 1979. By contrast, the figure for
MM
fish took the lowest, at only 65 grams in the same year. Meanwhile, the
expenditures on lamp and chicken were in similar quantities (around 10
grams).
SS
LLTT
However, over the 25-year period, the country experienced considerable
declines in the consumption of beef and lamb to approximately 60 grams and
100 grams, respectively. On the same trend, the demand for fish also went
IIEE
down but falling negligibly to just below 50 grams. By contrast, there was a
sharp growth to 250 grams in the amount of chicken in 2004.
170 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 6
The two pie charts below show the online shopping sales for retail sectors
in Canada in 2005 and 2010.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The pie charts illustrate data on the virtual transactions of each retail
categories in Canada in 2005 and 2010.
Overall, electronics and appliance and food and beverage accounted for the
largest proportion in 2005 and 2010 respectively. Additionally, there was a
marked reduction in the figure for online sales in home furnishings,
electronics and appliance whereas video games, food and beverage witnessed
an increase.
In 2005, electronics and appliance was the primary kind of online shopping
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
sale, at 35%; however, its percentage experienced a slight fall by 5% to 30%,
which was the second point in the year 2010. Over the period of 5 years, the
number of home furnishings sales decreased remarkably, from 25% to 15%
in 2005 and 2010 respectively.
In terms of food and beverage, its figure saw a considerable growth of
precisely 10%, which remained at the highest point in the year 2010.
oomm
Accounting for the lowest point in 2005 of exactly 18%, however, after 5
years, there was a small rise in the amount of video games sales in online
shopping, climbing to 23% in 2010.
.c.c
ss
181 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
rr
ttttee
The chart compares the online sales between 2005 and 2010 in terms of four
separate retail sectors.
aa
Overall, it is clear that sales in video games and food and beverage sector
MM
experienced a rise in the proportion during the 5-year period. Whereas, the
percentage of sales recorded in two other sectors were lower in 2010 than in
2005.
SS
LLTT
In terms of home furnishings, there was a substantial decline in proportion
from 25% in 2005 to 15% in 2010. It was, therefore, the category which had
the lowest from and to the UK in 2010. Similarly, the percentage of
at 30%.
IIEE
electronics and appliance category moved down to the second place in 2010,
Regarding food and beverage sector, in 2005, its figure only ranked third
compared to other categories. Yet, after 5 years, it reached 32%, claiming its
first place. The last sector, video games, accounted for the lowest proportion
in 2005 at only 18%. In 2010, sales in this sector left the home furnishing
category far behind, ending at 23% of the total online sales.
175 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 7
The two maps illustrate the changes of a school campus from 1985 to
2012.
The maps show the changes in the layout of a school campus between 1985
and 2012.
As can be seen, the campus area became more modernized with better
educational and recreational facilities over 27 year period.
In 2012, it was estimated about 2300 students enrolling in the school, this
quantity nearly doubled that in 1985 (with only 1500 students). Therefore, the
classroom block was made/ constructed higher, turning into a 3-storey
building. There are two more classes built up next to the Resource area which
used to be a library. In addition to the classrooms’ establishment, recreational
amenities such as swimming pool and fitness club were also built/
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
constructed.
Due to the development of new facilities, the playing field was narrowed to
be smaller in the size in order that swimming pool and health club were made
way for. The car park which was located near the library in 1985 was
removed/ demolished and then, they planted trees to replace it.
161 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 8
The pie charts below show the changes in annual spending by a
particular UK school in 1981 and 1991.
The pie charts provide information about how the annual expenditure by a
particular UK school changed over a period of a decade starting from 1981.
Overall, the percentage of spending on teachers’ salaries was by far highest
during the researched period. The data for furniture and equipment and other
workers’ salaries decreased, while there was a fall in those for teachers’
salaries, resources e.g books, and insurance.
In 1981, the figure for teachers’ salaries was highest, at 40%, which was
followed by that for other workers’ salaries, at 28%. The same proportion of
15% was spent on furniture and equipment as well as resources such as
books. Meanwhile, only 2% of the total school spending was spent on
insurance.
In 1991, the data for teachers’ salaries climbed significantly to 50% and
remained the highest figure, while there were considerable declines to 5%
and 22% in the figures for furniture and equipment and other workers’
salaries respectively. Lastly, the percentages of expenditure on resources e.g.
books and insurance went up to 3% and 20% correspondingly.
174 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 9
The diagrams below show the life cycle of the silkworm and the stages in
the production of silk cloth.
Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main features,
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

MODEL ANSWER 1:
The first diagram illustrates the living loop of silkworm beginning from eggs
while the second one indicates the stages in silk cloth manufacture.
Overall, the life cycle of the silkworm consists of four distinct stages;
meanwhile, there are five main steps required to make silk cloth.
In the first phase, the process starts from egg-laying that takes place on a
suitable mulberry leaf and is carried out by a female silkworm. Then, it takes
ten days for the eggs to transform into larvae catered by the mulberry leaf.
After a 4-6-week duration, the larvae cover themselves by threading silk
shells. Moving on to the final stage, in a 3-8-day period, an oval cocoon
surrounding and protecting the worm is created. After 16 days, the cocoon
then converts into a moth which is fully-grown and ready for the next
breeding season.
However, the process of producing silk cloth begins with cocoon selection. In
the subsequent stage, selected cocoons are heated at a high temperature.
Boiled cocoons are then unwound to the thread until a length of between 300
and 900 meters each is reached. In the final stage, stretched cocoons can be
dyed to make the end/final products/outcomes after being twisted and woven.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
202 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The diagrams illustrate the various stages in the life of a silkworm and the
production of silk cloth from cocoons.
It is clear from the diagrams that there are 4 main stages in the development
oomm
of the silkworm. Meanwhile, 5 major steps are required to make silk cloth.
The life cycle of the silkworm begins when a moth lays a multitude of tiny
.c.c
eggs on a mulberry leaf. These eggs hatch into silkworm larvae after 10 days,
ss
and it takes around 4 to 6 weeks for the larva to cover half of its body with its
rr
own silk thread. This process is not complete until 3-8 days later when the
ttttee
larva is fully inside an oval cocoon. Lastly, the cocoon grows into a mature
moth after a period of 16 days.
aa
The first step of making silk cloth is selecting the cocoons. The qualified
ones are then boiled in water before the process of unwinding the threads.
MM
Around 300-900m of the thread is separated from the boiled cocoon, which
afterward is (next) twisted, weaved and finally dyed (to make the final
product).
SS
182 words
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 10
The table illustrates the proportion of monthly household income five
European countries spend on food and drink, housing, clothing, and
entertainment.
The table provided compares the difference in expenditure on consumption of

goods such as food and drink, clothing and entertainment activities of 5
nations in Europe, namely France, Germany, UK, Turkey and Spain.
It’s evident that while Turkish spend most their budget to pay up for eating,
British preferred buying houses and Germans tend to seek out entertainment
activities.
The figure indicates that residents in 2 countries Turkey and the UK use a
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
majority of their income to serve necessary demands such as eating and
housing. In the UK, people spend over a third of the total money earned to
purchase for housing aim. Food and drink turn into the top concern of
Turkish, accounting for 36% of their shopping activities.
Besides, the data shows that Germany is the country that in there, buying
clothes and paying for entertainment occupy the most proportion of local
oomm
people income. Particularly, the rate of spending on clothes in Germany
stands at top of five countries (15%), followed by Turkey (12%) and the UK
.c.c
(11%). Recreational activities in Germany also quite attract people, as
evidenced by its proportion accounting for a fifth in German’s income, a
remarkable rate.
rrss
ttttee
194 words
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 11
The two maps below show an island, before and after the construction of
some tourist facilities.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The two pictures compare the layout of an island after some modifications
made to attract tourists.
It is clear that people made many changes to this island to provide tourists
with several services. The main development is that visitors have huts to stay.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Originally, the island contains no buildings or houses but a few trees. After
the construction, a reception was added to the structure of this island. Around
the reception building, they constructed/built a restaurant and a large number
of small huts to accommodate the visitors to the island.
Besides, a site for swimming was designated on the western corner of the
island and a pier was included where a boat can dock. There are also short
oomm
footpaths linking the swimming area with the accommodating area and the
vehicle track linking pier, the reception, and the restaurant.
150 words
.c.c
MODEL ANSWER 2:
rrss
ttttee
The ways in which a wild island changed after the prominent development of
tourist facilities are revealed in the maps.
aa
Overall, it is evident that the inhabitant island was transformed from a largely
green to an attractive tourist landscape.
SSMM
On the west side of the island, accommodations sprang up around some palm
trees with footpaths connecting it with each other and another footpath was
made to access the seashore which/where swimming was allowed for
LLTT
swimming in the far west. To the east of the island, another set of houses
were also built around a circle and connected via the footpath. Interestingly,
most of the palm trees were not cut down to build these tourist’s facilities.
IIEE
Looking at the centre of the island, the most noticeable construction was the
appearance of the reception in the south of the island and it was surrounded
by the vehicle track with the restaurant at the far north. Further development
was the construction of a pier at the south coast of the island.
170 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 12
The diagram below shows how coffee is produced and prepared for sale
in supermarkets and shops.
The given process illustrates the coffee manufacture and preparation for sale
in the marketplace.
It is clear that there are eleven distinct stages in this process, beginning with
picking the coffee beans and ending with packing them into jars.
To begin with, the coffee beans are picked from the farm and dried under the
sun. After that, the coffee beans/ they are roasted on fire before cooling
rapidly. Following, these raw coffee beans are ground through a manual
machine. Next, they are mixed with hot water and strained the mixture.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
The process of manufacturing and preparing coffee continues with freezing
this mixture and putting it into a grinder machine to grind the frozen liquid.
The step after this is drying it in a vacuum to water being able to escape
outside. Subsequently, they are packed into jars which have the appropriate
size to easily transport. Finally, the jars are labeled and delivered supermarket
as well as shops which are ready for sale.
162 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 13
The graph below compares changes in the birth rates of China and the
USA between 1920 and 2000.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The line chart illustrates the changes in the natality between China and the
USA from 1920 to 2000.
Overall, the US tends to have higher birth rate than its counterpart during the
whole period except for 2 years, 1935 and 1950, when China’s natality
overtakes the US’s.
It is clear that the birth rates of the USA rose by 5% in the period between
1920 and 1935, then fell sharply from 15% to just exactly 5%. After that,
while there was a dramatic climb to reach a peak of 20% in 1950, this figure
experienced a gradual decline to 2 % in the final year-2000.
Meanwhile, although the trends were similar in both nations, the fluctuations
in the birth rates of China were less wide than the USA. The birth rate of
China fluctuated around 10% in the first 10 years of the period, after which it
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
experienced a sudden increase to 15% in 1935 and a sharp decrease to a
negligible 5% in 1940. Thereafter, in the following 5 years, after remaining
at the previous level, China natality saw an exponential growth to the peak of
20%, leaving behind the rate of the US in the same year. Finally, the birth
rate made a steady fall to/dropped gradually to 7% in 2000.
213 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
oomm
to 2000.
.c.c
The line graph illustrates the birth rates of America and of China from 1920
rrss
Overall, the birth rates of both nations declined over the period of 80 years
ttttee
and the America birth rate in most years was higher than that in China.
In the 1920 – 1935 period, the birth rate in America fluctuated and remained
aa
at over 10%. In the following decade, there was a dramatic decrease in the
birth rate which was at a low of under 5%. In the 1950s, the figure for the
MM
USA increased significantly to exactly 15% which was the highest point
during the period of 80 years. After that point, there was a stable decline in
SS
the America birth rate, which fell to 7% by the year 2000.
LLTT
During the same period, the birth rate in China varied more significantly than
in the US. From 1920 to 1935, it fluctuated at around 10%, then dropped
quickly to a dip of 5% before reaching the highest point of the whole line
IIEE
graph, at a peak of 20% in 1950. However, there was a plummet to
approximately 7% over the next five years and falling down steadily to 2% at
the end of the period.
210 words
MODEL ANSWER 3:
The line graph compares China and the USA in terms of birth rates over a
period of 80 years from 1920 to 2000.
Overall, the rates of birth declined over the period shown. In addition, the
year 1950 saw the highest birth rates in both countries.
www.zandienglish.ir

In 1920, the USA’s birth rate was nearly 11%, it then fluctuated slightly.
After reaching the lowest level at only 5% in 1945, the figure recovered and
peaked at 15% in 1950. After that, there was a steady decrease in the birth
rate of the USA by about 8% in 2000.
The China’s birth rate also saw slight fluctuations between 1920 and 1935.
The figure then fell dramatically to 5%, nearly the same point as the US
lowest figure, and remained stable for 5 years. The birth rate in China rose
dramatically and reached the highest point at 20%, before falling significantly
to only 2% in 2000, which was much lower than the figure for the USA at the
same time.
167 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 14
The three pie charts below show the changes in annual spending by a
particular UK school in 1981, 1991 and 2001.
Summarise the information by selecting and reporting.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
MODEL ANSWER 1:
LLTT
The three pie charts reveal information about the percentages of different
IIEE
expenditures of a school in the UK in 3 years 1981, 1991 and 2001.
Overall, although there were some changes in several spending categories,
the payment for teachers always occupied the largest proportion of the
expenditure and the school spent least on insurance.
From accounting for 40% of the total spending in 1981, teachers’ salaries
increased to 50% in 1991 before slightly decreased to 45% in 2001. Non-
academic staffs’ salaries were the second largest spending which was
accounted for 28% of the expenditure in 1981 and 22% in 1991 but dropped
to 15% after a decade. Consequently, that position was altered taken over by
the spending on furniture and equipment in 2001.
In 1991, furniture and equipment were responsible for 15% which was equal
www.zandienglish.ir

to resources’ proportion. 10 years later, while the school increased their
spending on resources, the proportion of furniture and equipment was just
5%. The reserve trend was found in 2001 when 23% and 9% were the figures
for furniture and equipment and resources respectively. During the 20 years
period, insurance payment was always the smallest spending which
contributed 2% in 1981, 3% in 1991 and 8% in 2001.
203 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The given pie charts compare total expenditures of an unknown UK school
among 3 separate years 1981, 1991, and 2001.
Overall, it can be seen that employees’ salaries made up the largest
proportion of total spending in all 3 years. Meanwhile, insurance came last in
the annual expenditures of the school.
As can be seen in the first chart, 68% of total school expenditures went to
staff salaries in 1981, including 40% paid for teachers and 28% allocated to
other workers. After 10 years, the spending on teachers’ salaries increased to
50%, while the figure for other employees’ salaries fairly dropped to 22%.
Total salaries then accounted for only 60% of the 2001 school expenditures.
Insurance expenses were recorded at under 10% in all 3 given years,
specifically 2% in 1981, 3% in 1991, and 8% in 2001. Other categories,
namely resources and furniture and equipment, varied unpredictably during
the given period.
152 words
MODEL ANSWER 3:
The three pie charts illustrate the changes in annual spending in a UK school
in 1981, 1991 and 2001.
It is noticeable that the largest proportion of school spending went to
teachers’ salaries. In contrast, insurance accounted for the smallest
percentage of school expense.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
In 1981, 40% of the money was spent on teachers’ salaries. This figure
increased significantly by 1991 to 50%, which was the highest figure on the
three charts shown but dropped to 45% in 2001. By contrast, the percentage
of money paid for other workers decreased steadily each decade by 6 % and
7% over two periods 1981-1991 and 1991-2010 respectively. As a result, the
proportion of spending on workers’ salaries was the third largest, at 15 % in
2001.
oomm
Of five categories, the figure for insurance was lowest, at 2% and 3% in 1981
.c.c
and 1991 respectively. However, by 2001, the figure inclined to 8%, which
was just 1% less than that in resources. Besides, it can be seen that resources
rrss
along with furniture and equipment made up 15 % each field in 1981.
However, resource spending had a significant rise with 23% by 2001,
ttttee
compared to 9% of furniture and equipment expenditure.
198 words
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 15
The table below presents the number of children ever born to women
aged 40-44 years in Australia for each year the information was collected
since 1981.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
A glance at the table provided reveals the different rates of children who were
born by 40-44 year-olds female in Australia since 1981.
One particularly interesting fact highlighted by the figure is that people tend
to have fewer children than they used to.
In all years, the most popular preference was two children with 29 percent in
1981 to 38.3 percent in 2006. Decreasing from 27.4 percent to 21.5 percent,
three children was the second choice. A family with four or more children
used to be common in 1981 with approximately 27.6 percent. However, until
2006, it was the lowest rate just 11 percent.
While more than two children group fell in its figure, the percentage of no
child and one child group rose over these years. Beginning at relatively small
percentages in 1981 and 1986, they increase rapidly to 12.8 and 11.3
respectively in 1996 and finally end up with about 15.9 and 13.2 in 2006.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
157 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The table compares the percentage of whose mothers aged 40-44 years old in
1981, 1986, 1996 and 2006.
Overall, it is clear that the largest proportion of five categories was two
oomm
children. On the other hand, the trends of women having 3 or more children
in this age decrease steadily while there is a gradual climb in under 3 children
born per year.
.c.c
ss
It can be seen that the percentage of two children born was highest in 1981
rr
with 29% and continuously soared every year with 35.6%, 38.2% and 38.3%
ttttee
in 1986, 1996 and 2006. Following this trend, none and one child born also
rose to 15.9% and 13.2% in 2006, while these were 8.5% and 7.6% in 1981.
aa
In contrast, Australian women having 3 children saw a steady drop during 25
years. The data of three children born was 27.4% in 1981 and then went
MM
down by 5.9% in 2006, which was 21.5%. Similarly, four or more children
given birth by 40-44-year-old women also sank from 27.6% to 11% in 1981
and 2006.
SS
174 words
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 16
The graph below shows the amount of money spent on books in
Germany. France. Italy and Austria between 1995 and 2005.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The line graph compares the quantities of money spent on books in four
separate countries namely Germany, France, Italy, and Austria during the
period from 1995 to 2005.
Overall, all four nations witnessed an upward trend in the expenditure on
books and the figure of Germany always remained above 80 million.
In 1995, Germany was by far the country with the largest
expenditure/spending on books at 80 million. The figures of France and Italy
were almost similar at 55 million and 50 million, respectively. Austrian
people spent the least money on books at, just over 30 million.
During this 10-year period, the figure of Germany and Italy fluctuated and
increased significantly to 95 million and 63 million, respectively. However,
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
the amount of money spent on books in France rose steadily to 75 million in
2005. Meanwhile, in Austria, there was a slight increase in the expenditure on
books to 40 million in 2001 before this figure rose sharply to over 70 million
in 2005, overtaking that of Italy.
168 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
oomm
The line graph illustrates the amount of money that four countries spent on
c.c
books over a period of 10 years from 1995.
.
ss
Overall, the amount of money spent on books by four countries all grew up,
rr
especially Germany spent the biggest amount of money on books over a
ttttee
period.
In 1995, Germany spent precisely 80 on books while France and Italy paid
aa
for that about 55 and 50 respectively. Furthermore, the amount of money
spent on books by Austria was about as a third as Germany’s. From 1995 to
MM
1999, the book spending of all countries except to Italy ascended slightly, to
nearly 10. However, that of Italy fluctuated around 50.
SS
From 1999 to 2005, the figure for France and Italy also rose gradually, at
LLTT
about 75 and nearly 65 respectively compared with a double went up
consumed on books by Austria at nearly 75. In contrast, Germany
experienced a slight reduction in books spent to approximately 85 before
IIEE
peaking at its highest point at about 95 in 2005.
169 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 17
The charts below show reasons for travel and the main issues for the
travelling public in the US in 2009.
The charts illustrate the five different reasons for travel and six main
purposes of travelling by using public transport in the US in 2009.
It is noticeable that the main reason for travel was commute to and from
work, and price of travel played a key issue of American’s choices for the
traveling public.
Looking at the bar chart, commuting to and from work received by far the
highest percentage of American’s choices for travelling public, at 36%.
However, personal reasons and shopping just accounted for 19% and 16%
respectively. Social/recreation and visit friends/relatives just made up 10%
and 6%.
Regarding the pie chart, the primary concern of Americans when they made
the trips, was the cost of travelling, with 36%. By contrast, access to public
transport and space for pedestrians saw the small percentage of American’s
choices, at 6% and 8% respectively. Finally, safety concerns, aggressive
drivers, and highway congestion were just under 20% of main issues for
travelling public.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
161 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 18
The table below gives information about the underground railway
systems in six cities.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The graph compares the percentage of residents at the age of 65 and above in
three different countries, namely Japan, Sweden and the USA from 1940 to
2040.
Overall, it is obvious that the proportion of people whose age is 65 or older
increases over the period shown. Of the three countries, Japan undergoes the
most considerable change throughout one century.
In 1940, Japan accounted for the lowest percentage of the population aged 65
and above with 5% in comparison with 7% in Sweden and 9% in the USA.
The figure for 60-and-over people in Japan witnessed a rapid fall to only
2.5% and remained unchanged until the 1990s while the elderly people in the
other two countries increased gradually to nearly 15%.
By 2020, the proportion of these elderly people in the USA will remain the
same to nearly 14%. These residents will comprise nearly 19% in Sweden
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
and 8% in Japan until the 2020s. In the next 10 years, the percentage of
Japanese aged people is predicted to go up continually to 10% before it
experiences a significant growth to reach the peak at 25% in the late 2030s.
Although the USA and Sweden will also see a rise throughout the remainder
of the year, to 24% and 26% respectively, those figures will be much lower
than Japan, which will jump slightly 3% more.
219 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
oomm
.c.c
The table illustrates the data about the underground railway networks in six
rrss
cities in terms of their age, size and the number of travelers every year.
ttttee
Overall, it is obvious that there is a much larger amount of the length of the
route and passengers in the three oldest railways in comparison with the
newer ones.
aa
Being built firstly, the London underground railway system moves the most
MM
with 394 kilometers, and carries 775 million people per year. However,
despite being half of the previous route in length, about 199 km, the Paris
SS
network serves nearly twice more than the London, with 1191 million
TT
customers. In addition, while the network in Tokyo makes up the third rank
in age and size, it carries the highest number of passengers which is 1972
million people.
LL
IIEE
Turning to the three newer networks, Washington DC is the largest in size
and in the number of passengers with 126 km and 144 million people.
Besides, the youngest system, Los Angeles, serves 50 million passengers
with the route of 28 km compared to 45 million passengers transported in 11
km by the Kyoto railway.
187 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 19
The chart below shows numbers of incidents and injuries per 100 million
passenger miles travelled (PMT) by transportation type in 2002.
writing-task-1-chart-without-years-essay.html
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart illustrates the number of incidents and injuries for every 100
million passenger miles travelled by five different means of transportation in
2002.
Overall, it is noticeable that the figures for demand response of both incidents
and injuries were significantly higher than the remaining types of
transportation in 2002. By contrast, commuter rail by far accounted for/
occupied the least number of incidents and injuries in the graph shown.
We can see that a total of 255 incidents and 173 injuries, per 100 million
PMT, took place when people used demand response vehicles. These figures
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
were roughly three times as high as that of the bus, with 76 incidents and 66
injuries in the year 2002.
When it comes to rail service, the number of incidents and injuries caused by
light rail were 76 and 39 respectively. In addition, the injuries made by heavy
rail were nearly the same as the light one (35), and there were 51 incidents for
this heavy rail. Finally, commuter rail was the safest one for travelling, with
only 20 incidents and 17 injuries occurred.
182 words
oomm
MODEL ANSWER 2:
.c.c
rrss
The chart compares the number of passengers who were injured and involved
ttttee
in incidents when traveling by means of transportation at 100 million miles in
2002.
aa
Overall, it is obvious that commuting by rail accounted for the least incidents
and injuries whereas the largest amount made up for travelers who engaged
SSMM
in demand responsive vehicles.
Suburban rail experienced the least problems with only 20 for incidents and
17 for injuries. However, the demand response category was far higher than
LLTT
all of the other vehicles, caused 225 incidents and 173 injuries.
Rail services could be safe means of transportation which caused fewer
IIEE
problems. While the passengers witnessed 51 purely incidental and 35 injured
cases by using heavy rail, there were 76 incidents and 39 injuries. Besides,
the bus also perceived not much difference in comparison with the two
previous opponents. Specifically, 76 customers were in incidents and 66 were
injured when moving by bus.
153 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 20
The graph below shows the Alcohol-related deaths in 7 different
countries and the average beer consumption in 2005.
The table compares data on the number of deaths related to alcohol in 7

separate countries in 2005 and the average amount of beer drunk in 2002.
Overall, Germany and the Czech Republic accounted for the highest number
of deaths. The figures for death cases in male citizens were generally higher
than that of their female counterparts in all 7 nations.
In 2005, Czech Republic was the country that had the highest rate in alcohol
related-deaths out of all, at 1,369,000 respectively due to the greatest beer
consumption of this country. This country was followed by Germany with
1.185.000 cases in which four-fifths of that was male’s deaths. The figure for
Austria, however, showed a slightly lower data of 913 thousand.
Meanwhile, only 125.000 deaths were caused by alcohol in Lithuania despite
its higher beer expenditure than Canada. Additionally, Ireland and Canada
had/ accounted for a similar data on alcohol-related deaths in 2005, that
582,000 compared to 580,000 even the beer utilization of Canada was
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
steadily lower, a difference of 18 liters.
172 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 21
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The line graph illustrates information on the percentage of people aged 65
and older in three countries (Japan, Sweden, the USA) from 1940 to 2040.
Overall, three country groups experienced/witnessed/underwent a steady
increase in the aging rate during period given. At the start of the period, the
USA had the highest aging rate, but the figure has been outstripped/overtaken
by this for Sweden from 2000 and the trend is expected to continue until
2020. Subsequently, Japan is anticipated/expected/projected/forecast to
account for the highest record of senior citizens.
With regards to the aged percentage of American, it began at around 9% and
then rose steadily to 15% in 1980 before peaking at 23% in the last year.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Meanwhile, the aged population of Swedish stood at approximately 7% in the
beginning and is projected to rocket to about 25% in 2040.
Besides, the increase in age of the Japanese started in 1940 at 5%. This figure
dropped by 3% in 60 years later and the expectation is that it will climb
gradually in the final years before growing dramatically to about 27% in
2040.
182 words
oomm
MODEL ANSWER 2:
.c.c
ss
The given line chart compares current and predicted the percentage of the
rr
elderly population aged 65 and more in three different countries over a 100-
ttttee
year period.
Overall, it can be seen that all three surveyed countries experienced an
aa
upward trend in their senior population. However, their increasing patterns
slightly differed from one another.
SSMM
In 1940, only 9% of total US population were aged 65 and over. The figure
for Sweden was somewhat lower, at around 7%. Their elderly percentage
subsequently rose to almost 15% in the next 40 years, and eventually reached
100 years.
LLTT
under 25% at the end of the period, an increase of approximately 20% during
IIEE
In contrast, Japan’s population aged 65 and over accounted for only 5% of
the total Japanese population in 1940. The figure then even witnessed a fall in
the following 40 years. From 2000, Japan saw an expansion in aged-65-and-
over population which hit over 25% in 2040, surpassing those of USA and
Sweden in the same year.
164 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 22
The graph below shows UK acid rain emissions, measured in millions of
tones, from four different sectors between 1990 and 2007.
writing-task-1-line-graph-exercise.html
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The line graph illustrates the amount of gas outflow from acid rains from four
sectors in the UK from 1990 to 2007.
Overall, three out of four industries experienced a fall in the amount of
emission from acid rains over the 17-year period, resulting in a dramatic
decrease in the total figure of gas waste in the UK. The domestic segment
was always the least significant contributor to the gas released from acid rains
in the UK at the same time.
In 1990, electricity, gas and water supply industry released around 3.3
million tonnes of gas waste while other industries contributed about 2.1
million tonnes. Six years later, the two sectors ejected equally, at around 1.7
million tonnes of gas, before continuing to decline. 17 years later, the amount
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
of gas waste from utility suppliers was at its lowest point, around half a
million tonnes while that figure for other industries was 1.2 million,
becoming the highest among four different sectors.
Transport and communication industry’s gas amount fluctuated around its
starting number of 0.7 million tonnes, and never exceeded a million tonnes
before finishing at 0.7 million tonnes in the year 2017. In comparison, there
oomm
was a gradual fall in emissions from acid rains from the domestic segment.
The amount of emission from household activities cut it in slightly more than
.c.c
half over 17 years, starting from approximately 0.6 million in 1990 to just
around a fifth of a million tonnes in 2007.
220 words
rrss
ttttee
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The line graph illustrates changes in the amount of acid rain emission of four
aa
sectors in the UK over a 17 year period.
MM
Overall, there was a decrease in the amount of acid rain emission in the UK
from 1990 to 2007.In particular, the acid rain emissions produced by
SS
electricity, gas and water sector experimented the most significant decrease.
LLTT
In 1990, the electricity, gas and water sector was responsible for around 3.3
million tonnes of acid rain emissions. The figures for transport and
communication sector and domestic sector were about 0.7 and 0.6 million
rain emissions.
IIEE
tonnes respectively. The other industries caused over 2 million tonnes of acid
In 2007, the amount of acid rain emission came from electricity, gas and
water sector fell rapidly to 0.5 million tonnes, while gradually decreases were
seen in the domestic sector and other industries. At the same time, the
transport sector saw a slight increase in the amount of emission, shooting up
to a peak of 1 million tonnes in 2005.
168 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 23
The bar chart illustrates the proportion of Malaysian and Singaporean who
have science certificates in four different degrees.
Overall, the percentage of residents in both countries who do not have a
qualification in science is far greater than the other categories.
First of all, it can be clearly seen that the higher degree in Singapore is more
popular than Malaysia. Indeed, the number of people in master level holding
science qualifications is the lowest, just accounting for 3 percent of each
country. Then, followed by Bachelor’s degree, the Malaysian who owned
science certificates in this level occupies for 10 percent when the figure of
Singaporean is twice higher.
On the other hand, in the last two groups/ categories, the percentage of people
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
who graduate from school in Malaysia is higher than that of Singapore by 5
percent in each level. Indeed, there is 60 percent of Singaporeans who do not
have a qualification in science and the number of people in school leaving
exams level accounts for a half.
169 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 24
The charts show the world traffic volume measured in passenger-
kilometer-miles.
Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the mam features, and
The given pie charts illustrate the traffic volume of automobiles, buses, trains
and high-speed transport every thirty years from 1990 to 2050, which has
been measured in passenger- kilometer-miles.
Overall, the percentage of high-speed transport is expected to increase
sharply until 2050 while that of other vehicles will have a downward trend.
Additionally, it is predicted that the volume of traffic will almost double
every 30 years and can reach up to 103 trillion pkm in 2050.
The proportion of trains and high-speed transport started at 9% in 1990, but
after that, the trends of these kinds of vehicles seem to be opposite. The
Traffic volume for railways is anticipated to decrease to 6% in 2020 and just
4% in 2050. By contrast, it is expected to see a dramatic rise in traffic volume
of high-speed transport, climbing to 25% in 2020 and then reaching to just
over 40% in 2050.
Regarding automobiles, its proportion was 53% in 1990. According to the pie
chart, the figure will decline by 10% and 8% in 2020 and 2050 respectively.
Similarly, the traffic volume for buses stood at 29% in 1990 and is expected
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
to drop gradually to 20% in 2050.
198 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 25
The graph below shows the average number of UK commuters travelling
each day by car, bus or train between 1970 and 2030.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The line graph gives information about the average number of people using
car, bus or train as transportation in the UK during a 60-year period.
On the whole, the tendency of travelling by car and train is higher than that of
travelling by bus over the period of 60 years. Especially, in term of
transportation, commuters express a preference for using cars rather than
trains.
In the 1970-2030 period, the number of UK daily travelers constantly rise
from 5 million to 9 million. Although this figure was stagnant in the first
decade, it increased dramatically to 7 million. The 2000-2010 period, which
saw the same trend in the first 10 years, was followed by a rapid acceleration
throughout the remainder of the period.
From 1970 to 2000, there was a slow-growing tendency for people using
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
trains, which remained stable in the next ten years. Afterwards, this figure
suddenly rocketed to 5 million, which was the most dramatic change during
the whole period.
162 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
transport in the UK from 1970 to 2030.

oomm
The line graph illustrates how many people travelling by three means of
.c.c
Overall, the average of people using car and train tended to go up while this
ss
figure for bus decreased during the period from 1970 to 2030. The number of
rr
car commuters was highest all the time surveyed.
ttttee
In 1970, around 5 million of people traveled by car compared to 4 million
and 2 million of commuters using bus and train (every day) respectively. 30
aa
years later, the number of car commuters soared significantly to 7 million
people, while the number of train users also rose to 3 million. However, there
over 30 years.
SSMM
was a slight decline of 0.5 million in the number of bus commuters each day
In 2030, the number of car users is predicted to increase to 9 million.
LLTT
Likewise, the number of people who travel by train will see a dramatic
growth of 2 million people, compared to this data in 2000. By contrast, it is
expected that the number of bus commuters went down to 3 million in 2030.
184 words
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 26
The graph below shows female unemployment rates in each country of
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart compares the percentage of females who are unemployed in
four nations of the UK between 2013 and 2014.
Overall, the unemployment rate of females in most of the 4 countries in 2013
was higher than that was in 2014. Also, the percentage of females who did no
jobs was much higher in England and Scotland than in Wales and Northern
Ireland.
In 2013, exactly 6.8% of females in England were unemployed which was
the highest figure of the whole chart. Also, in Scotland, the percentage of
female unemployment was nearly equal to that of England, about 6.1%. But
then in 2014, the rank changed and Scotland became the one which
accounted for the highest rate of women without job possession, at 6.7%, just
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
1% lower than that of England in 2013, while there was a decrease in the
figure for unemployed females living in 2014 to 6.5%.
In the same year, 2013, the percentage of unemployed females was the
lowest, 5.4%. In the next years, both Northern Ireland and Wales’s rate of
female unemployment continued to decline. Meanwhile, Northern Ireland
turned out to be the country having the lowest rate of females having no jobs,
209 words
oomm
4.6% in 2014, compared to the highest proportion, 6.7% in Scotland.
MODEL ANSWER 2:
.c.c
rrss
The bar chart compares the number of unemployed women in the UK in 2013
ttttee
and 2014.
Overall, the percentage of women without a job in 2013 was higher than that
aa
in the following year, with the exception of that in Scotland. It is also clear
that the female unemployment rates in England and Scotland were higher
SSMM
than those in Wales and North Ireland.
In 2013, the unemployed females in England made up the largest proportion
at 6.8%, compared to the second position 6.1% in Scotland. Meanwhile, the
LLTT
rate of women who were out of work in Northern Ireland was 5.6%, which
was slightly higher than that in Wales (5.4%).
IIEE
In the next year, the rate of jobless women in England fell to 6.5% while this
figure rose to 6.7% in Scotland. Both Wales and North Ireland saw a decrease
in the percentage of females without work, from 5.4 to 5.0% and 5.6% to
4.6%, respectively.
155 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 27
The bar chart gives information about the number of hot dogs and buns eaten
in 15 minutes by the winners of the annual ‘Nathan’s Hot Dog Eating
Contest’ in Brooklyn from 1980 to 2010.
Overall, the highest number of hot dogs and buns consumed rose
dramatically over the period shown and most winners came from either the
USA or Japan. Moreover, only one woman won the competition.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Americans dominated the contest from 1980 to 1996, and the record of hot
dogs and buns consumed had an upward trend from only 8 to around 21
during that time. However, there were some exceptions in 1983 and 1984
when a Mexican won the contest with 19 hot dogs and buns in 1983 and a
year later German female was a winner, with 8 hot dogs and buns.
Six champions came from Japan from 2001 to 2006 with around 22 and 54
oomm
hot dogs and buns eaten, which increased more than twofold compared to the
first year. However, the win returned American from 2007 to 2010 when
c.c
American Joey Chestnut set a new record of 68 hot dogs and buns in 2009.
.
ss
189 words
rr
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 28
The graph below shows the rate of smoking per 1000 people in Someland
from 1960 to 2000.
The given line graph compares the smoking rates in male and female in
Someland and how these rates changed between 1960 and 2000.
Overall, there was a gradual decline in the smoking rate in men over the
period of 40 years. By contrast, the figure for women tended to increase in a
long time before falling slightly. Although two trends were contrary, the
smoking rate in men in Someland was higher than that of the women in all
years.
In the 1960 -1975, the smoking rate in women in Someland rose significantly
before reaching the highest stage, over 300 per 1000, in 5 years from 1975 to
1980. Throughout the remainder of the period, this rate declined slowly,
falling to approximately 200/1000 in 2000.
Over the same period, the smoking rate in men in Someland decreased
steadily although it was always above that of women over time. 1960 saw the
highest point of the whole line graph, at 600/1000, and then the rate (of men
smokers) dropped by more than half in 2000. The result was that in 2000 the
rate of smoking in men and women in Someland was almost equal at around
200/1000 each.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
196 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 29
The table below shows the proportion of different categories of families
living in poverty in Australia in 1999.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The table illustrates the information about 6 different family types who were
classed as poor in Australia in 1999.
Overall, it is noticeable that Australian single parent and single people with
no children accounted for the largest proportions of those who are poor.
However, single and couple aged person households were less popular that
compared with other family types.
Single parent accounted for 21% (232,000) which received by far the highest
proportion of household types. Followed by the figure for a single with no
children, at about 19% (359,000). By contrast, the aged couple was/ occupied
the smallest proportion of people from each house living below the poverty
line, at 4% (48,000).
While the percentage of couples with children was 12%, the proportion of
couples with no children was a bit smaller than that, at 7% (211,000). The
single aged people made up 6% (54,000) and had the fifth ranking of
household types living in poverty. Finally, the total proportion of poor family
was just 11% (1,837,000).
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
167 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The table depicts the percentage of different of Australia families living in
poverty in 1999.
Overall, the table shows that the Sole parent and single, no children type had
o
lowest percentage among the family displayed.
omm
the highest proportion of poverty in family types, while aged couple saw the
.c.c
As the table shows, the proportion of the Sole parent type was the highest, at
ss
21%, whereas aged couple category saw the lowest proportion in household
rr
type living in poverty, at 4%. The percentage of couple, no children type,
ttttee
with 7%, was lower than that of simple, no children field, by 12%.
Similarly, the proportion of couple, no children type was lower than nearly a
aa
half compared to the figure of couples with children. The single aged person
stood in the second lowest in household types, with 6%. The proportion of all
152 words
SSMM
household types living in poverty accounted for 11 % (1,837,000) in 1999.
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 30
The table below gives information on consumer spending on different
items in five different countries in 2002.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The table compares the information about the proportion of consumers from
5 different countries, namely Ireland, Italy, Spain, Sweden, and Turkey in
terms of expenditure on 3 separate categories. Figures were given in 2002.
Overall, it is clear that the percentages which 5 nations spent on food, drinks,
and tobacco, was highest, whereas leisure/ education accounted for the least.
In terms of food/drinks/tobacco, Turkey had/ occupied the highest
percentage, about 32.14% and the consumption of leisure/education of
Turkey was also the highest while the figure for Ireland was slightly lower
than that in Turkey, approximately 29%. And the proportion for 3 other
countries: Spain, Italy, and Sweden were above 10% lower than that in both
Ireland and Turkey, 18.80%, 16.36%, 15.77%, respectively.
The figures for those in terms of clothing/footwear and leisure/education
were by far low, under 10%. While 9% Italian consumers went on
clothing/footwear which was the highest rate we can see a similar proportion
of it in Ireland, Spain, and Turkey, around 6.50%, compared to 5.40% in
Sweden. Additionally, just approximately 2% Spanish consumers used
budget on leisure and education and it was the lowest percentage/ figure/
proportion in the rate of 5 nations.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
196 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The table illustrates the proportion of the consumer expenditure on various
products and services in five nations in 2002
Overall, food, drinks, and tobacco accounted for the largest proportion
oomm
whereas the expenditure on leisure and education represented the
insignificant figures in all of these countries.
.c.c
In terms of food, drinks, and tobacco, the year saw a considerable change in
ss
the spending on these products and services in five countries. In detail,
rr
Turkey made up the highest percentage (32.14%) for these products, which
ttttee
was approximately twice that corresponding figure for Sweden (15.77%).
Meanwhile, people in other countries, including Ireland, Spain, Italy
allocated 28.91%, 18.8%, 16.36% to the budget respectively for these
aa
purposes, which were much less than the figure for Turkey.
MM
By contrast, the year 2002 witnessed fewer considerable variations in the
expenditure on clothing/footwear as well as leisure/education among these
SS
nations. Specifically, the percentage of clothing and footwear varied between
TT
5.4% and 9%, with the highest figure for Italy and the smallest figure for
Sweden. Closely following the spending on clothing/footwear was the
LL
percentage of expenditure on leisure and education. People in these nations
IIEE
allocated the least budget for these purposes, which ranged from 1.98% to
4.35%.
197 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 31
The chart below shows the amount of leisure time enjoyed by men and
women of different employment status.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart compares the engagement/involvement in free/spare time
between males and females in terms of employment status including/namely
full-time employed, part-time employed, unemployed, retired and
housewives.
Overall, men experience a higher amount of spare time than women.
However, there is no data for men in terms of part-time status and
housewives.
Regarding full-time employed, unemployed and retired status, the figures for
males tend to be slightly greater than those for females. Specifically, the full-
time employed group enjoys the smallest percentage of leisure time, with/at
45% for men and roughly 35% for women. However, unemployed and retired
groups of males and females enjoy/have the relatively similar amount of free
time, at about 85% for men as against over three-quarters for women,
accounting for/registering for the greatest proportion.
As for part-time employed women and housewives, the percentage of leisure
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
time for the latter is higher than the former by 10%, which are 50% and 40%,
respectively.
155 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The bar chart compares males and females of five different employment
1999.
oomm
status in terms of their spending on leisure time per week between 1998 and
.c.c
It is clear that the overall amount of leisure time enjoyed by women was
ss
higher than that by men for all status. In addition, people of both genders
rr
spent the most leisure time in a typical week for unemployment and
ttttee
retirement among the five employment status.
Males working full-time spent nearly 50 hours a week on their leisure time,
aa
but the figure for females in the same status was 10 hours lower, at just under
40 hours. Meanwhile, the amount of leisure time enjoyed by women for
MM
employed part-time and housewives statuses were roughly 40 hours and 50
hours respectively. By contrast, it can be predicted that men who belonged to
SS
these categories did not have any free time because no figures were given for
LLTT
this status from 1998 to 1999.
Furthermore, more than 80 hours in a week for leisure time was enjoyed by
unemployed and retired males, which was also the highest figure shown on
IIEE
the chart. However, the figures of these job categories for females were
lower, at around 75 hours for both ones.
203 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 32
The pie charts show the main reasons for migration to and from the UK
in 2007.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The pie charts illustrate the major reasons why people emigrated from and
immigrated to the UK in the year 2007.
Overall, there were many differences from the purpose of migration for
inhabitants in the UK. While the factors of having a stable job and looking
for a job are universal reasons of migration, other possible reasons were taken
as the considerate purposes.
The factor for having long-term/stable job was the highest in both
immigration and emigration in the UK, at 30% and 29% respectively. About
a quarter of individuals surveyed moved to and left the UK for
accompanying. The proportion of people migrating from the UK to look for a
job was about 22%, double that of people immigrating to this region.
While the percentage of people who emigrated to the UK for the formal study
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
was over a quarter, the figure for immigration was 3 times less than that
amount. In contrast, the proportion of people emigrating for no reason stated
was 18%, whereas the immigration percentage was just 6%. Finally, the other
reason for both emigration and immigration were 14% and 11% respectively.
185 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
oomm
The two pie charts illustrate why British do the migration to and from the UK
during a question period.
.c.c
ss
Overall, there were many differences from the purposes of migration of
rr
inhabitants in the UK. It can be said that the main reason for both
ttttee
immigrating to and emigrating from the UK was to find a definite job which
accounted for the largest percentage in both pie charts.
aa
The first pie chart reveals the largest proportion of immigration of people to
the UK belonged to the definite job with 30%. In addition, a formal study
MM
came as the second most popular purpose of entering the UK for twenty-six
percent, compared to 15% and 12% of accompanying and looking for work
SS
respectively. The percentage of people coming to the UK for no reason or
TT
other reason constituted the smallest proportion in the first pie chart which
was 6% and 11% respectively.
LL
Turning to the second line chart, a definite job was the one that had the
IIEE
highest percentage among all reasons with 29% which was followed by 22%
of looking for work. The figures for no reason, other and accompany/join
amounted to 18%, 14% and 13% namely. In contrast to the reasons for
immigration, a formal study was the least popular reason for people to leave
the UK with only 4% compared to 26% in the first chart.
219 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 33
The line chart provides information on the amount of electricity produced in

France from four types of sources namely Thermal, Nuclear, Hydroelectric,
and Renewables over a period of 32 years.
As can be seen from the chart, Nuclear by far was the most important means
of electricity generation over the period shown. Renewables provided the
lowest amount of electricity in each year.
In 1980, the amount of electricity produced by Thermal was the highest,
generating around 120 Terawatt hours of power. Nuclear and Hydroelectric
produced approximately 75 terawatt hours of electricity each, and
Renewables provided a negligible amount. Just one year later, Nuclear
overtook Thermal as the primary source of electricity.
From 1980 to 2005, the amount of electricity produced by Nuclear rose
dramatically to a peak of 420 terawatt hours. By contrast, the figure for
Thermal power fell to only 50 terawatt-hours in 1985 and remained at this
level for the rest of the period. Hydroelectric power production remained
relatively stable between 50 and 80 terawatt hours. On the other
hand/Surprisingly renewables electricity generation saw a small rise to
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
approximately 25 terawatt-hours in 2012.
185 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 34
The charts below show the levels of participation in education and
science in developing and industrialized countries in 1980 and 1990.
The three bar charts illustrate data on the average years of schooling, the
number of scientists and technicians and the money spending on research and
development in developing countries as well as industrialized countries in
1980 and 1990
Overall, the levels of participation in education and scientists in these types
of countries went up over a 10-year period. However, the figures for
industrialized countries were much higher than developing countries
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
In 1980-1990 period, the levels of participation in the education of both types
of the nation grew. The average years of schooling in the industrialized
nation rose from 9 years to 12 years while the figures for developing
countries just increased slightly over the period. People in developing
countries attended school for an average of around 2 or 3 years.
The number of scientists and technicians in industrialized nations rose
oomm
dramatically to 70 per 1000 people in 1990. By contrast, the number of
science workers of developing countries always remained below 20 per 1000
.c.c
people. In term of spending on research and development, while there was a
dramatic increase in industrialized, which reached to $350 billion in 1990, the
billion in 1990.
rrss
development countries saw a decrease from $500 billion in 1980 to $200
204 words
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 35
The pie charts below show the average household expenditures in Japan
and Malaysia in the year 2010.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The two pie charts compare the proportion of expenses of five different
categories between householders in Japan and Malaysia in 2010.
Overall, housing, food and other goods and services accounted for the largest
part of citizens’ budget of both countries. In addition, the percentage of
Japanese householders spending on transport and health care were double
those for Malaysian.
In Malaysia, housing accounted for the biggest percentage of expenditure, at
34% while the figure for Japan was just over a fifth. Japanese families spent
29% of total expenses on other goods and services which was 3% higher than
that of Malaysian families. Spending on food in both countries saw a similar
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
pattern, which represented 24% and 27% in Japan and Malaysia respectively.
Expenditure on health care was not common in Malaysia, which accounted
for only 3% of total spending. In contrast, the rate for Japanese household
was 6%. In terms of transport, while Japanese spent 20% on that category,
the figure for Malaysian householders was only half of that, at 10%, a
difference of 10%.
174 words
oomm
MODEL ANSWER 2:
.c.c
ss
The pie charts compare Japan and Malaysia in terms of different categories of
expenditures in 2000.
rr
ttttee
Overall, spending on housing and other goods and services accounted for the
largest proportions of expenses in both Japan and Malaysia. In addition, the
aa
proportion of money spent on health care was the smallest in both nations.
The percentages of spending on transport and health care in Japan were 20%
SSMM
and 6%, which were twice as much as the figure for Malaysia, just 10% and
3%, respectively. In terms of food, the figure for Malaysia was slightly more
than that of the Japan, at 27% compared to 24%.
L TT
In Japan, the largest expenditure is for other goods and services, at 29%,
L
while the figure for Malaysia was just 26%. Finally, the Malaysian spent 13%
IIEE
more on housing than their counterparts in Japan.
151 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 36
The charts below show the main reasons for study among students of
different age groups and the amount of support they received from
employers.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The first bar chart gives reasons why students of five age groups study and
the second one illustrate support including time and fees provided by
employers to these students. Both charts are measured in percentage.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Overall, as people get older, they are less likely to study for their career.
Instead, studying for interest is increasingly preferred among these groups. In
addition, most supports from entrepreneurs are allocated to the young.
Regarding reasons for study, the three youngest groups prioritize their career
over their interest. In particular, the biggest difference can be seen among
people aged under 26, with precisely 80% of whom learn mainly to serve
oomm
their career and only 10% do this for interest. Also, the gaps decrease to
approximately 55% and 25% for 26-29-year-olds and 30-39-year-olds,
.c.c
respectively. Interestingly, there was an equality in the figure for 40 – 49 age
group, at just over 40%, and there is even an opposite trend among students
rrss
whose age is over 49 with about 70% of them consider interest more
important, compared to under 20% who value career.
ttttee
With respect to support, while more than 60% of learners younger than 26
receive time off and fees from their company, the figure is only 30% for
aa
those from 30 to 39. About 50%, 45% and 36% of learners from three other
age groups including 26-29, over 49 and 40-49 in turn, are helped by their
employers.
220 words
SSMM
MODEL ANSWER 2:
LLTT
The pie charts give information about expenses per household in Japan and
IIEE
Malaysia in 2010.
Overall, while Malaysian families spent the most on housing, the
expenditures of households in Japan were highest on food in 2010. Also,
families in both Japan and Malaysia spent the lowest amount of money on
health care.
In 2010, the spending of Malaysian households was highest on housing,
making up 34% of their budgets, which was 13% higher than the figure for
Japan. Meanwhile, food accounted for 24% of household expenditures in
Japan while Malaysian spending on this category was slightly higher, at 27%.
29% of budgets of Japanese families went to other goods and services,
compared to 26% of families in Malaysia.
www.zandienglish.ir

Japanese households spent 20% of their budgets on transport, which was
twice times as much as the figure for Malaysia. Expenditures of families in
both Japan and Malaysian were lowest on health care, with 6% and 3%
respectively.
156 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 37
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
The graph portrays the proportion of consumer durables in Britain for a 10-
LLTT
year period starting from 1972.
Overall, Britain witnessed a rise in the percentage of household items. Also
IIEE
notably, video and dishwasher at first did not appear on the list and
dishwasher accounted for the lowest figure at the end of the period.
Despite a marginal increase by 5% during the period, the figure for television
was the highest at more than 90%. This was followed by vacuum cleaner for
most years but in 1983, no data for this item was recorded. Instead, the
refrigerator moved to the second place on the list after enjoying a
considerable growth of 21%. The percentage for washing machine showed
similar trends, ending at 80%.
Before 1978, both central heating and telephone accounted for the lowest
figures. Yet, after a rise by more than 50%, they were replaced by video and
dishwasher in later years. To be more specific, only 18% of households had
www.zandienglish.ir

video while the figure for the dishwasher was much lower, at 5%.
173 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 38
The tables below give information about sales of Fairtrade*-labelled
coffee and bananas in 1999 and 2004 in five European countries.
oomm
essays/tables-below-give-information-about-sales-fairtrade-4
.c.c
Sales of Fairtrade-labelled coffee and bananas (1999 & 2004)
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The two tables illustrate the revenue of Fairtrade-labelled coffee and bananas
in 1999 and 2004 in five (different/distinct) countries, namely UK,
www.zandienglish.ir

Switzerland, Denmark, Belgium, and Sweden.
Overall, the sales of coffee were relatively low in all five countries in 1999
while these figures were much higher in 2004. In addition, the data for
Switzerland‘s revenue on bananas reached the highest point in both 1999 and
2004.
As can be seen from the first table, in Switzerland, the sales of coffee in 2004
were twice as much as that in 1999. Noticeably, the figure for the UK was 20
million euros, comparing to just 1.5 million euros in the first year of the
surveyed period. However, both the years 1999 and 2004 saw no significant
change in the sales of Denmark, Belgium, and Sweden, ranging from 0.2 to
0.7 million euros.
The year 2004 experienced a noticeable rise in the sales of bananas in
Switzerland, which reached to 47 million euros, the highest figure in five
nations. Furthermore, profits from selling bananas underwent a dramatic
increase in the UK and Belgium between 1999 and 2004 by 4.5 and 3.4
million euros respectively. However, there was a slight reduction in the sales
of bananas in Sweden and Denmark, ranging from 0.8 to 1.1 million euros.
213 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The tables give information about sales of labelled coffee and bananas in 2
separate years 1999 and 2004, in five European countries, namely the UK,
Switzerland, Denmark, Belgium, and Sweden.
Overall, the five countries witnessed an increase in the total amount of sale of
coffee as well as bananas.
Regarding coffee, in the UK, the amount of sale rose sharply, with the
biggest growth of 18.5 million. In Switzerland, the amount of sale went up to
6 million in 2004, which was double the amount in 1999. Similarly, there was
a marginal rise of 0.2 million in the amount of sale in Denmark and Sweden.
Likewise, Belgium saw the amount of sale climbed, rising from 1 million to
1.7 million between 1999 and 2004.
As for bananas, in Switzerland, the amount of sale went up dramatically to 47
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
million, is about threefold the amount in 1999. Similarly, the UK and
Belgium experienced a climb in their sales of bananas, rising by 4.5 million
and 3.4 million, respectively. In contrast, there was a fall of 0.8 million and
1.1 million in the amount of sale in Sweden and Denmark in order.
190 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 39
The table shows the worldwide market share of notebook computer
market manufacturers in the year 2006 and 2007.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The table illustrates data on the share of various notebook computer
companies on the global market between 2006 and 2007.
Overall, over the years, the biggest proportion of the market belonged to HP
while Fujitsu-Siemens took up the smallest one. Additionally, most of the
manufacturers had their sales decrease in this 2-year period.
To begin with, the figure for HP commenced with 31.4 percent in 2006, then
increased to 34 percent in the following year. Likewise, the share of Dell
greatly developed by nearly 4 percent from 16.6 percent to 20.2 percent over
the same time. In contrast, the number of other computer companies whose
names are not listed experienced a decline of about 3 percent; dropping from
22.8 percent in 2006 to 19.3 percent in 2007.
Regarding other brands, the sales of Acer and Lenovo accounted for,
respectively, 11.6 percent and 6.6 percent of the market share in the year
2006, and followed by an insignificant decrease after one year. Similarly,
there was a more noticeable drop of around 2 percent in the figure for
Fujitsu-siemens over the period. By contrast, the world saw the market
proportion of Toshiba grow by about only 1 percent during the time.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
199 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The table illustrates the proportions of various computer companies of the
market share in 2006 and 2007.
Overall, HP dominated the group while Fujitsu-Siemens accounted for the
oomm
smallest share in both years. Moreover, most of the manufacturers
experienced a decline in their sales over the period.
.c.c
To begin with, in 2006, HP made up for 31.4 percent as opposed to only 4.8
ss
percent hold by Fujitsu-Siemens. Just above 6 percent more other enterprises
rr
sold than Dell; the figures were 22.8 percent and 16.6 percent respectively.
ttttee
The market share percentage of Toshiba and Lenovo was relatively similar, at
around 6.5 percent. In comparison, Acer occupied 11.6 percent of the market.
aa
In the next year, the percentage of HP increased to 34 percent whereas that of
Fujitsu-Siemens fell by more than half to 2.3 percent. Other corporations
MM
experienced a noticeable decrease in their sales dropping to 19.3 percent
compared to a marked growth of 3.6 percent in the figure of Dell.
SS
Additionally, 2007 saw a similar downward trend in the figures for Acer,
percent respectively.
185 words LLTT
Toshiba, and Lenovo which shrank to 10.7 percent, 7.3 percent and 6.2
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 40
The table below shows the figures (in thousand) for imprisonment in five
countries between 1930 and 1980.
below.
The bar chart compares five different nations in terms of a number of people
who were imprisoned from 1930 to 1980.
Overall, there was a general fluctuation in the number of prison population in
five countries. Meanwhile, there was a significant increase in the number of
prisoners in the US over the time surveyed.
In 1930, the figure for British prisoners was only 30.000, which was lower
than other countries. Nonetheless, this figure/ proportion increased
dramatically, reaching over 80.000 in 1980. By contrast, Canada had the
highest number of prisoners in/ among five countries with 120.000 inmates in
1930. Despite fluctuations, the figure witnessed a rapid decline to 90.000 in
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
1980.
Prisoners numbers in the US were high, although the figure fluctuated, they
rose from 10.000 in 1930 to 130.000 in 1940, they reached a peak of
approximately 140.000 in 1980. The number of prisoners in New Zealand fell
steadily from 100.000 in 1930 to 42.000 in 1950, followed by an increase to
over 80.000 in 1980. Finally, there were 70.000 prisoners in Australia in
oomm
1930; they fell down to about 41.000 in 1950. By 1980, Canada had the
lowest prisoners in other countries, with 50.000 inmates.
197 words
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 41
The bar chart shows the scores of teams A, B and C over four different
seasons
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar graph compares the points of three groups, namely A, B, and C
during four distinct seasons from 2002 to 2005.
Overall, the trends of team A and team C were almost similar in raises in the
middle of the period while the trend of team B was completely opposite.
However, the score of team B always remained at a high level over the period
shown.
In 2002, the point of team B was by far the highest point, at 82pt. By
contrast, the figures of team A and team C were much less than that of team
B, at just 5pt and 10pt, respectively.
Throughout the remainder of the period, there was a sharp decrease in the
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
score by team B to 43pt in 2004 before this figure rose significantly to 55pt in
2005. The point of team C increased slightly to 15pt in 2003 then declined
moderately to 5pt in 2005. Meanwhile, the figure of team A rocketed and hit
its peak of 35pt in 2004 before decreasing dramatically to 8pt in 2005.
176 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
oomm
The chart compares the data on scores of three teams over a 4-year period.
.c.c
Overall, team B always scored the highest. In addition, the results of team A
ss
and C fluctuated over the same period.
rr
In 2002, team B gained 85 points, which was also the highest score in 4
ttttee
seasons, while team A and C only scored 5 and 10 points respectively. The
following year saw a sharp fell of team B by 22 points. By contrast, team A
aa
rose by 6 points and team C increased a little less just by 5 points.
Between 2004 and 2005, after decreasing rapidly from 60 to 43 points, team
SSMM
B’s score recovered strongly at 55 points. On the other hand, team A rose
significantly to 35 points and then experienced a sudden drop of 8 points a
year later. Finally, there was a gradual fall of team C. 12 points and 5 points
159 words
LLTT
were their results from 2004 to 2005.
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 42
The graph below shows the average time spent by four car
manufacturers to produce vehicles at their US factories.
The line graph compares the amount of time which four different car
manufacturers used to produce vehicles at their US industries from 1998 to
2005.
Overall, it is clear that all four companies experienced a decline in time used
for manufacturing cars. In addition, the figure for Ford was the highest
almost all time surveyed.
In 1998, General Motor spent about 35 hours to produce one vehicle,
compared with 28 hours spent by Ford. However, the figure for Toyota and
Honda was the lowest and the same, at 22 hours. The period of time from
1998 to 2001 saw a dramatic increase in the amount of time spent by Ford to
approximately 32 hours. By contrast, the figure for General Motor fell
sharply to under 28 hours in 2001.
There was a gradual reduction in the average production time per car for
Toyota and Honda from 22 hours in 2001 to 20 hours in 2005. The figure for
the other manufacturers also saw/ witnessed a decrease by 2005. The time of
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
manufacture fell steadily over the period to 22 hours in case of General
Motor. Meanwhile, when it comes to Ford, the time spent fluctuated, falling
to under 22 hours in 2005.
202 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 43
The map below is of the town of Garlsdon. A new supermarket (S) is
planned for the town. The map shows two possible sites for the
supermarket.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The map illustrates the schedules to build a new supermarket in the town of
Garlsdon which is inhabited by 65,000 residents.
Overall, there are two potential sites for the new supermarket. They are
expected to dwell in locations with less traffic and vehicles, near the railway
and far from housings.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
The first option is that the supermarket is likely to be located in the
countryside, in the northwest ward of the industry. It is a 12 km distance from
the industry to Hindon which has 10,000 local living residents. It will partly
face to the industry and the railway on the other side. This location would be
ideal for the Hindon people for shopping but the people of Crandon and
Brandon, which have great more population, would be far away from this
supermarket.
oomm
The second option is that it should be projected to be built in the town centre,
.c.c
all surrounded by factories. Although it has no vehicles, it is convenient to
stay next to the railway, which supports to carry and deliver goods easily. It
rrss
is 16 km long to go to Brandson from the industrial area in the
southwestward, which is populated by 15,000 residents. Also, it is 25 km far
ttttee
from the southeastward of this area to the Cranston which is more populated
than two other towns with 29000 local habitants.
219 words
aa
M
MODEL ANSWER 2:
S M
The map depicts the two different places where a new supermarket (S) is
S
potentially built in the town called Garlsdon.
LLTT
Overall, the shopping mall is considered between constructing in the center
(S2) or in the outside (S1). In addition, these two sites can be compared in
IIEE
terms of the ease to access to the railway, the main road, and 3 other smaller
towns.
Looking at the details, S1 is located in the northwest of Garlson where is
quite near to 10,000 people of the town Hindon, even so, it is more difficult
for 15,000 people from Bransdon and 29,000 people from Cransdon to come.
Moreover, this area is run along by the railway connecting Hindon and the
southeast- located town, named, Cransdon and the main path from the center
of Garsdon to Hindoa.
In comparison with S1 which is convenient for Garsdon’s inhabitants in the
west only, S2 could approach with no effort by all citizens, regardless of their
locations as it is surrounded by the residential area and the industrial zone.
Although there are main roads from Hindoa, Branston and Cransdon to S2,
www.zandienglish.ir

this is a no traffic zone area and therefore, cannot be reached by vehicles.
198 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 44
The chart shows the number of mobile phones and landlines per 100
people in selected countries.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
The bar chart compares seven different countries in terms of the number of
MM
phones and landlines per 100 people.
SS
Overall, Italy comes top in the number of mobile phones per 100 people,
while in terms of landlines, the first place belongs to Denmark. In addition,
LLTT
most of the countries surveyed in the graph have more mobile phones
subscribers than landlines.
IIEE
In Canada, the US and Denmark, there are more people using landlines than
mobile phones. Specifically, the number of landlines is about 60 out of 100
people for Canada and just under 70 in 100 people for the US, which both
exceed their mobile phone counterparts by practically 20 per 100 people.
However, there is a slight difference in the figures for both categories in
Denmark, with 88 landline users and 81 mobile phone users per 100 people.
By contrast, mobile phones gain more popularity in Germany, the UK,
Sweden, and Italy. 90 out of 100 Italians own a mobile phone, which nearly
doubles the figure for landlines. While in Germany, the figure for mobile
phones is merely ahead of that for landlines by a narrow margin, 70 phones
for the former as against 60 phones to the latter.
199 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 45
The charts below show the results of a survey about what people of
different age groups say makes them most happy.
The two pie charts illustrate the proportion of factors that make people in
different ages happy/ feel satisfied.
Overall, there are two groups of age, which are people under 30 and people
over 30. In addition, there are 4 prominent features as well as other minor
factors that make different ages happy.
Both age groups proposed that being successful in their career brings them
happiness most, with a relatively corresponding proportion of 31% and 32%.
Furthermore, many individuals under and over 30 also stated that doing
hobbies also gives them happiness/ satisfaction with a 22% and 24%
respectively.
However, instead of being with your family brings people happiness as 14%
of elderly people said, most younger individuals favor travelling with a
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
proportion of 15%. Finally, most people under 30 prefer having a good
appearance as it also grants them happiness/ delight while older people prefer
having their finance secured. In addition, a minor portion of people stated
that features that give them happiness are not listed.
166 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 46
The line graph compares the percentage of various methods of

communication favored by teenagers in the USA from November 2066 to
September 2009.
Overall, there were significant changes in youngsters’ ways of interacting
with each other over a period of 3 years. In particular, the usage of email
declined while the reverse was true in the proportion of other means.
The percentage of text messaging was 30% in November 2006 and then
gradually rose to around 40% in February 2008, and continued to increase
rapidly to become the most popular means of communication among US
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
teenagers. Meanwhile, the proportion of talking face-to-face fluctuated
between 30 and 40%.
In sharp contrast, the figure for cell phone calls remained fairly stable with a
gradual rise from around 35 to 38%. While a negligible drop was seen after a
period of stability in the number of young adults who uses emails as their
ways to contact other people, at approximately 10% in September 2009.
161 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

50 High Quality Samples for Your Reference to Gain a High Band Score
8.0+ In 1 Week (Book 9)
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Legal & Disclaimer
o mm
o
.c.c
ss
rr
ttttee
aa
M
SS M
TT
LL
IIEE
cause of action.
book.
www.zandienglish.ir

www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION
SAMPLE 1
SAMPLE 2
SAMPLE 3
oomm
SAMPLE 4
.c.c
SAMPLE 5
SAMPLE 6
rrss
SAMPLE 7
ttttee
SAMPLE 8
SAMPLE 9 aa
SAMPLE 10
SSMM
TT
SAMPLE 11
SAMPLE 12
LL
IIEE
SAMPLE 13
SAMPLE 14
SAMPLE 15
SAMPLE 16
SAMPLE 17
SAMPLE 18
SAMPLE 19
SAMPLE 20
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 21
SAMPLE 22
SAMPLE 23
SAMPLE 24
SAMPLE 25
SAMPLE 26
SAMPLE 27
SAMPLE 28
SAMPLE 29
SAMPLE 30
SAMPLE 31
SAMPLE 32
SAMPLE 33
SAMPLE 34
SAMPLE 35
SAMPLE 36
SAMPLE 37
SAMPLE 38
SAMPLE 39
SAMPLE 40
SAMPLE 41
SAMPLE 42
SAMPLE 43
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 44
SAMPLE 45
SAMPLE 46
SAMPLE 47
SAMPLE 48
SAMPLE 49
oomm
SAMPLE 50
.c.c
CONCLUSION
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

INTRODUCTION
Writing Task 1 Samples: 50 High Quality Samples for Your Reference to
Gain a High Band Score 8.0+ in 1 Week (Book 9).”
provide you 50 high quality sample essays to help you easily achieve an 8.0+
in the IELTS Writing Task 1 (Academic), even if your English is not
practical IELTS WRITNG TASK 1 sample essays that will help you become
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 1
The pie charts below give information about world population in 1900
and 2000.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
The pie charts illustrate changes in the percentages of the population of
different areas of the world between 1900 and 2000.
Overall, there was a significant rise in the total number of the world
population, from 1.6 billion to 6 billion over a century. Moreover, it is
evident that the highest population rate belonged to nations in Asia in both
years shown.
In 1990, Asia accounted for 60% of the world population which was the
highest portion compared to the remaining. This was followed by Europe
(including Russia) with a quarter (25%). Latin America and others each
accounted for 3% of the total of world population rate.
www.zandienglish.ir

Although this number dropped by 6% in 2000 to 54%, Asia still represented
the largest population of the world. At the same time, the proportion of the
population in Europe (including Russia) also showed the remarkable
downward trend to just roughly 15%. By contrast, Africa and Latin
experienced a significant growth in the number of inhabitants to 10% and 8%
respectively. Meanwhile, over the period from 1900 to 2000, the percentage
of the population in North America and other regions remained consistently
unchanged at around 5% and 3%, while the figure for the Middle East and
North Africa constituted a slightly higher portion of 6% which was just
referred in 2000.
218 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 2
The chart below shows global sales of the top five mobile phone brands
below.

oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
MODEL ANSWER 1:
IIEE
The bar chart compares five cell phone companies in terms of their
worldwide sales volume in the three consecutive odd years, 2009, 2011 and
2013.
Overall, Samsung and Nokia were the two dominant companies in the mobile
phone industry. It is also evident that different trends in sales had been
experienced by the five featured brands.
In 2009, Nokia had the highest international sales with approximately 430
million units sold, followed by Samsung, whose figure was only half that
number, at around 230 million units. LG came third with about 120 million
www.zandienglish.ir

phones while sales of ZTE and Apple were at a negligible/paltry number.
Two years later, both Samsung and Apple managed to boost their sales to 330
and 90 million units respectively. Incompatible with the established trend,
Nokia and LG experienced a slight decrease in their sales volume.
2013 marked another dramatic rise of 100 million units in Samsung sales;
meanwhile, Nokia suffered a fall of nearly 200 million phones and lost its
dominant position to Samsung. Apple came third with its sales almost
doubling the 2011 figure to 150 million phones. There had only been little
changes in the sales volume of LG and ZTE.
197 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The bar chart illustrates the number of the cell phone from top five
companies sold out around the world in 3 years 2009, 2011 and 2013.
Overall, all three band Samsung, Apple and ZTE increased their sale volumes
while both Nokia and LG had a decline over the same period. In addition,
Samsung and Nokia were the two biggest companies in the world by sale.
In 2009, the number of the cell phones sold out from Nokia was the highest at
around 450 million units. By contrast, the figure for Apple was at the lowest
point of about 20 million units. Approximately 240 million cell phones sold
out by Samsung, compared to 120 million units of LG and 50 million of ZTE.
The sale volume of Samsung increased dramatically to around 450 million
units in 2013, this brand now took over as Nokia as the biggest companies
according to sale volume in the world. Similarly, Apple saw a significant
growth in sales, the number for the year 2013 was 7.5 times more than that of
2009, from 20 million to 150 million phones. On the other hand, Nokia’s
global sale fell sharply by 200 million units, which was 250 million phones in
2013 and was just a half of the Samsung’s sale volume. There was also a
sharp decline in LG’s global sale by 60 million units, falling to 70 million
phones in 2013. The number of the phones sold out by ZTE generally
remained stable at around 55 million over the period.
220 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 3
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
The graph illustrates the process of generating electricity using geothermal
energy in a power plant.
It is clear that there are five distinct stages in the process, beginning with
pumping cold water down into the ground. In the final step, electricity
produced is sent to the grid for the delivery.
At the first stage, cold water stored in a tank is pumped down into the
injection well, which leads the liquid to the depth of 4.5 km below the
ground. Cold water is then quickly warmed up by hot rocks while flowing
www.zandienglish.ir

through the geothermal zone. In the next step, hot water is brought back to
the ground into the condense where the steam is stored.
The fourth stage of the process involves turning the turbine. The turbine,
powered by the steam deriving from the condenser, rotates around an axis. As
the generator is connected directly to the turning axis, it converts the
movement power into electricity. At the last stage of the process, electricity is
transferred to the grid to reach the users.
174 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 4
The diagram below shows the average hours of unpaid work per week
done by people in different categories. (Unpaid work refers to such
activities as childcare in the home, housework, and gardening.)
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
The bar chart illustrates data on the number of hours people spend on their
unpaid work weekly, which is categorized by their gender and the number of
children they have.
Overall, it is obvious that women spend more time doing housing activities
rather than men. Moreover, the more children the households have, the more
hours women spend on housework.
According to the chart, while non-child women spend approximately 30
hours per week, the figures for mothers with children are significantly higher.
To be precise, about 50 and 60 hours spent on childcare, housework, and
www.zandienglish.ir

gardening are allocated to women who have 1-2 and above 3 children,
respectively.
Meanwhile, men have a much smaller number of hours for home tasks, being
halved of those of women in all three kinds of families. Besides, it is
noticeable that the data shows a similar amount of 20 hours/week are spent
on daily routine activities for males, regardless of the number of children they
have.
161 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 5
The chart and graph below give information about sales and share prices
for Coca-Cola.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
The pie chart presents data on how many bottles of Coca-cola were
consumed by 5 different areas during 2000, while the line graph illustrates
aa
the share price changing over 6 years from 1996 to 2001.
MM
In general, by far the highest expenditure of drinking Coca-cola came from
North American country. The line graph shows the fluctuation of share- price
of a soft drink.
SS
LLTT
It was clearly indicated from the pie chart that American nation consumed a
large amount of beverage, which accounts for more than a half out of the total
with 17.1 billion bottles and being divided into two areas from North
IIEE
America and Latin America which was 30.4 and a quarter respectively. In
contrast, Africa and the Middle East saw a very small number of bottles, 7
percent. Of the remaining of this chart, the proportion of Coca-Cola's unit
was sold in Europe and Asia respectively.
The line graph shows that the share price began at over 30 dollars then
reached the highest peak at 80 dollars in the first 3 initial years. After that,
there was followed by a period of stability decline before climbing again at
the end in 2001.
194 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 6
The graph below shows the amounts of waste produced by three
companies over a period of 15 years.
The graph illustrates data on how much waste was made by three
organizations from 2000 to 2015.
Overall, company A and company B had the tendency to reduce their waste
over the years while company C was likely to produce more waste during the
given period.
Of the three companies, company A produced the largest amount of waste at
accurately 12 tonnes in 2000. However, this figure fell constantly to reach its
lowest point of approximately 8 tonnes in 2015. On the contrary, company C
made about 4 tonnes of waste in 2000 followed by a swift increase by around
6 tonnes towards the end of the period.
Looking at the chart in more detail, 8 tonnes of waste was made by company
B in 2000. After peaking at 10 tonnes in 2005, the amount of waste produced
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
by company B plummeted to precisely 3 tonnes, making it the one with the
smallest waste production in 2015.
157 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 7
The following pie charts show the results of a survey into the most
popular leisure activities in the United States of America in 1999 and
2009.
The pie charts compare the most American favorite recreations in two years
1999 and 2009.
It is obvious that walking and playing football accounted for the greatest
percentage in both years.
In 1999, the percentage of walking, which was chosen as the favorite activity
by the majority of American was 29%, while the rate for yoga was lowest, at
only 5%. Besides, the figure for soccer was significantly lower, at 17%,
followed by aerobics and bicycling at 13% and 12% respectively.
Meanwhile, there was not much difference among the figure for jogging,
camping and swimming from 7% to 9%.
In 2009, the rate of soccer was still highest, at 31%. After the period of 10
years, the proportion of American choosing swimming raised doubled to the
same as football’s figure, at 18%. Meanwhile, there was a rapid decrease seen
in the percentage of people went jogging, rode bicycles and did aerobics.
Especially, yoga was replaced by weightlifting and one in ten American
people preferred weightlifting as a new leisure activity.
170 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 8
The pie chart below shows information on the highest level of education
of women in Someland in 1945 and 1995.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
The given figure illustrates the changes regarding the highest educational
level that females in Someland could reach in the year 1945 and 1995. The
chart is measured in percentage.
Overall, while most women in Someland did not go to school or stopped their
education before getting their first degree in 1945, half of the women in
Someland managed to finish tertiary education while some even proceeded to
a master degree.
www.zandienglish.ir

In 1945, the number of women who did not attend school and dropped out of
school after third grade each accounted for 35% of the total number of female
citizens, making them the two most common education level of females at
that time. In addition, the figure for female learners reaching sixth grade was
only 15% and those who completed year 9, year 12 and obtained their first
degree were just 10%, 4%, and 1%, respectively. Interestingly, none of them
acquired post-graduate certificates.
However, in 1995, the trend completely changed with a sharp increase in the
percentage of female school goers that were capable of achieving higher
levels of education. Particularly, there were no female students who stopped
their education at grade six and half of them successfully graduated from
university. Also, compared with 1945, there was the same ratio of female
ninth graders in 1995, at 10% and those who completed high school and post-
graduate program each comprised one-fifth of the total number.
219 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 9
The table shows the worldwide market share of the mobile phone market
for manufacturers in the years 2005 and 2006.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
M
A glance at the table provided illustrates data on the mobile phone producers
SS M
in terms of their share of global market in the years 2005 and 2006
Overall, it is apparent that Nokia was the largest market share in both years.
LLTT
While the percentage of market share of Nokia, Motorola and Sony Ericson
increased, that of the remainder companies fell.
IIEE
As can be seen from the table, the most striking feature is that Motorola
experienced the highest growth which rose by 3.4% from 17.7% in 2005 to
reach 21.1% in 2006. Also, there was a slight increase in the percentage of
market share of Nokia and Sony Ericsson which went up from 32.5 % and
6.3% in 2005 to 35% and 7.4% in 2006, respectively.
In a stark contrast, BenQ Mobile witnessed a sustainable decline which
decreased from 4.9% in 2005 to 2.4% in 2006, a fall of 2.5% from the
previous year. Similarly, Samsung and LG went down minimally from 12.7
% and 6.7% in 2005 to 11.8% and 6.3% in 2006 in that order. Finally, there
was a dip in the market share of other companies by 3% to 16.2% in 2006.
194 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 10
The diagram shows the changes that have taken place at West Park
Secondary School since its construction in 1950.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The maps illustrate how a secondary school called West Park Secondary
School changes considerably over a period of 60 years from 1950 to 2010.
Overall, though the main building itself remained the same, the school
witnessed significant alterations in construction with the emergence of new
facilities/amenities.
From 1950 to 1980, while the main building and the playground were still
there, the houses were demolished to make way for an additional block of the
school and a new car park whereas a sports field replaced the old farmland.
By 2010, the science block and the school had been stayed unchanged. The
car park was widened a replaced the area of the sports field, leading to the
sports field being diminished and moved into a small part of the playground
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
area. As a result, the playground was reduced in size.
150 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The above diagrams provide information about West Park Secondary
School’s architectural transformations with three milestones: 1950, 1980 and
2010.
oomm
Overall, it can clearly be seen from these sources that the building complex
.c.c
had witnessed numerous changes in layouts since its original structure in
ss
1950.
rr
According to the first diagram, West Park Secondary School located next to
ttttee
three blocks of houses which had a farmland attached at the back in 1950.
The school had a pretty large playground which neatly lied at the rear of its
aa
main building. However, in 1980, the school expanded itself on the left-hand
side, converting the farmland into a new sports field and right in front of the
of the housing blocks.
SSMM
sports field, a new car park and science block were built on the original land
The year 2010 showed that the school layout kept being modified into a
LLTT
somewhat more modern architecture, where the car park tripled its size &
took a large portion of land from the sports field which had been relocated to
become a small part of the playground as a result. The school’s main building
IIEE
and science block, despite all these modifications, remained exactly the same
in location & size compared to the 1980 structure.
205 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 11
The two graphs show the main sources of energy in the USA in the 1980s
and the 1990s.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The two pie charts illustrate data on percentages of several main energy
sources, varying from the 1980s to 1990s in the USA.
Overall, there were predominant proportions allocated to oil during the 1980s
as well as 1990s. Moreover, the rates of the remaining sources were obvious
to remain relatively unchanged over the period.
During the 1980s, approximately 42% of total main energy sources were
reported to be oil, whereas the minority of 5% of nuclear power was utilized
for generating energy. However, a decade later, there was a reduction of 9%
in the proportion of oil usage, at 33%. Meanwhile, the figure doubled to 10%
for nuclear energy in the 1990s.
Apart from that, the rest 3 power sources were noticeable to maintain
balanced or inconsiderably increase during those years, which was estimated
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
about 25% for natural gas and 5% for hydrodynamic power. Moreover, a
slight increase of 5% was reported in coal utilization, at 27% in the 1990s.
159 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The two pie charts compare the percentage of energy consumption from five
different in the USA between 1980 and 1990.
oomm
Overall, oil and natural gas were the major sources of energy in the USA in
.c.c
both 1980 and 1990. Hydroelectric power in both years constituted the lowest
ss
figure for energy used in the USA.
rr
It can be seen the most popular energy used in the USA was oil, at 42% in
ttttee
1980. This was slightly higher than the oil consumption rate in 1990, at 33%.
Following the coil usage, 26% of natural gas was consumed in 1980. After 10
aa
years, the figure for natural gas almost remained unchanged, at 25%. There
was a significant increase in the percentage of coal production from 22% in
1908 to 27%in 1990.
SSMM
Hydroelectric power and nuclear power accounted for the lowest figures in
the energy consumption rate with 5% in both years and an increase of 5%,
respectively.
154 words
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 12
The chart below shows how frequently people in the USA ate in fast food
restaurants between 2003 and 2013.
The bar chart illustrates the variation of eating at fast food restaurants among
American residents/ citizens from 2003 to 2013.
It is clear that the rate of consumption of fast food rose steadily from
frequency in every day to peak of roughly once a week and once or twice a
month and then tailing off to never. On the other hand, it was a temporal
variation into each group during the period of 2003 – 2013.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
We can see that the general trend is for the number of people who have never
or daily eaten at fast food restaurants to decrease and stable from 2003 to
2013 (under 5 percent). The figure for people who sometimes ate/chose fast
food, namely several times and once times a week, showed/saw/witnessed a
similar trend, rising to 20% and 32.5% respectively in 2006 before falling to
around 16% and 27% in turn, in 2013.
oomm
The rate of people who ate fast food at restaurants once or twice a month,
however, dipped to 25% in 2006 and then jumped dramatically to around
.c.c
33% in 2013. Moreover, a group of people who consumed a few times a year
went up/rose /increased by 2.5% from 2003 to 2006 and remained around
15% in 2013.
rrss
ttttee
206 words
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 13
graph.
The line graph illustrates the number of the audience of Channel One News at
different times of the day over a 12-month period.
Overall, the number of viewers at different times, except for the figure/the
data for 1 pm (News), experienced/underwent considerable fluctuations
during the period shown.
Initially, the figure for viewers at 9.30 pm increased minimally before
reaching the peak of just under 4 million in May, but it later declined
exponentially to 1 million after 3 months in August. However, a remarkable
recovery to 2.5 million in following month/ one month later was recorded,
which was followed by a small growth of half a million until the end of the
year.
Starting from May, the number of viewers at 11 pm experienced a substantial
rise, hit its highest point of 4 million in August, but the figure witnessed a
dramatic fall of 3 million in the remaining months (of the year)/ in the
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
remainder of the year. There was a downward trend with fluctuations
between 5 and 3 million in the figure for watchers at 6 pm in this year/in the
whole/entire year. Meanwhile, the number of people watching the Channel at
1 pm stayed relatively stable/steady during the year, at slightly over 1
million.
207 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 14
The graph below shows average carbon dioxide (CO2) emissions per
person in the United Kingdom, Sweden, Italy and Portugal between 1967
and 2007.
Source: https://baysideielts.wordpress.com/2017/05/25/task-1-line-graph/
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The line graph illustrates the average number of carbon dioxide which was
emitted by each resident in four different countries from 1967 to 2007.
Overall, there was a downward trend in the United Kingdom and Sweden,
which reversed the trend of two other nations. While the emission of carbon
dioxide in the UK always stayed at the highest figure, Portuguese people
produced the lowest carbon dioxide rate over a period of 40 years.
To be more specific, in the 1967-1977period, the average amount of carbon
dioxide in the UK remained relatively constant, at about 11 metric tonnes,
whereas the figures for Sweden, Italy, and Portugal increased moderately to
around 10.5, 6.5 and 2.5 metric tonnes, respectively.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Between 1997 and 2007, British saw a slight decrease in the amount of
carbon dioxide, at about 2 metric tonnes. Likewise, there was a dramatic
decline in the amount of carbon dioxide on average in Sweden from
approximately 10.5 metric tonnes to just above 5 metric tonnes, a drop of
around 5.5 metric tonnes during 30 years. By contrast, at the end of this
period, the Italian sent out the average amount of carbon dioxide with 1
mm
metric tonnes more than they did in 1977. Although the emission of carbon
dioxide in Portugal in 2007 reached the highest point at over 5 metric tonnes,
oo
this number was the lowest in comparison with the United Kingdom and Italy
in the final year.
.c.c
220 words
rrss
ttttee
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The chart surveys the average amount of carbon dioxide emitted by a person
in five different European countries from 1967 to 2007.
aa
Overall, while the amount of CO2 emissions in Sweden and UK were
S MM
downward, those figures for Italy and Portugal became significant. After 40
years, however, UK still emitted the largest amount of CO2 and despite the
S
remarkable increase, Portugal had the smallest amount of emissions.
LLTT
On the one hand, in the initial year, the figure for the UK was about 11 metric
tonnes of CO2 emissions which was approximately 7 metric tonnes more
IIEE
than that of Italy. However, the amount of emissions in the UK plunged
gradually to around 8.5 metric tonnes by 2007. Meanwhile, the figure for
Italy leaped remarkably by about 3.8 metric tonnes in 1997 and then levelled
off throughout the last ten years.
On the other hand, the figure for Sweden was about 8.2 metric tonnes
compared to 1.8 metric tonnes of CO2 released in Portugal in 1967. In the
next twelve years, the amount of emissions in Sweden peaked at about 10.5
metric tonnes and then plummeted dramatically to over 6 metric tonnes by
2007. However, regarding Portuguese figure, there was an augment in the
amount of emissions in this country which was as same level as Swedish
figure in 2007.
218 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 15
The chart below shows what science graduates from Sometown
University after graduating.
Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main comparisons
where relevant.
The pie chart compares the percentage of job opportunity of graduates who
have studied Science in Sometown University after a year of finishing the
school.
Overall, most of the science graduates had/ were able to seek a job that
related to their study, whereas just a small amount/ number of students after
graduation were become unemployed as well as having a job that was not
their specialization.
Teaching was the most common choice for graduates. This accounted for
nearly a half of the total, with a quarter of graduate students worked at the
universities or college and nearly 20% worked with secondary-school
students. In terms of research, 18% of graduate students preferred working in
the industry instead of government (6%), tripled than those shown in the
others.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
In contrast/ by contrast, the figures for University leavers who worked in both
non-science and science-related job were 17% and 13% respectively. While
most of the students who graduated from Sometown University found a job, a
small percentage of just only 2% graduates was unemployment after a year of
leaving the higher-education.
179 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 16
The graph shows the income of four cafes in New York in last year.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The line graph illustrates/ compares the income trends of four cafes in the
past year.
Overall, the figures for sales of almost all cafes experienced a fluctuating
increase except for the Tea Room.
Regarding the Tea Room, the figure fluctuated wildly and then dropped
sharply in winter, falling significantly from almost $160,000 to just under
$50,000 in December.
On the other hand, the income of the Cafe Cool from lowest sales about
$30,000 rocketed suddenly. By contrast, there was a sudden increase in the
percentage of the Café Cool from around $30,000 to $120,000 in the last
month of the year. Furthermore, the income for both Internet Express and the
Wifi Cafe also ended the year up. The former experienced a gradual fall to
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
June of Internet Express, also Wifi Cafe in September. But after that, The
Internet Express and Wifi Cafe had sales up more or less to $100,000 and
$190,000.
152 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
monthly earnings in the previous year.

oomm
The line graph compares four different cafes in New York in terms of
.c.c
Overall, the three cafes, namely internet Express, Wi-fi Café and Café Cool,
ss
saw an upward trend in sales at varying degrees, while The Tea Room’s
rr
income, albeit at the highest level for almost the whole year, experienced a
ttttee
decrease over the period.
Earnings for The Tea Room was the largest at the beginning of the year, at
aa
160,000$ in January, and remained above any other’s until November, when
Internet Express and Wi-fi Café respectively overtook its position. In the last
MM
two months, the Tea Room’s sales fell suddenly from $135,000 in October to
as low as $50,000 in December, ending the year with the lowest level.
SS
In January, Internet Express’s revenue came second, at about $95,000, which
LLTT
was almost twice as much as that of Wi-fi Café, at approximately $50,000.
However, the latter witnessed a higher increase in sales over the next eleven
months, reaching a peak of around $190,000 in December, followed by the
IIEE
former, at $135,000. Finally, Café Cool commencing the year with the
modest sales of only $30,000 and continuing with a steady rise until
November, its sales then rocketed to $120,000 in December.
206 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 17
building purposes.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The two diagrams illustrate the steps and equipment are involved in the
cement-making process and how to use cement in the concrete production for
building purposes.
It is clear that cement is a combination of limestone and clay which have to
go through several stages, beginning with crushing and ending in packaging.
Besides, cement is one of four main ingredients to make concrete.
In cement production, limestone and clay are crushed on the first step.
Afterward, these powders are mixed and transferred to the rotating heater at
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
which they are heated directly by fire. Finally, they are ground to produce
completed cement, which is packaged in bags.
In the concrete-producing process, cement is combined with 3 other
ingredients. Gravel is the largest contribution, at 50%, doubled the figure for
sand (25%). Cement contributes only 15%, followed closely by water, at
10%. At the last stage, all four ingredients are combined by a concrete
mixture to become finished concrete.
158 words
oomm
MODEL ANSWER 2:
.c.c
rrss
The diagrams depict the steps and required tools in the process of making
ttttee
cement, and concrete.
The process of producing cement includes 5 stages, starting from crushing
aa
the raw material to packing the final product. And concrete production
involves 4 different ingredients.
SSMM
At first, limestone and clay, which is the raw material used to make cement,
is crushed in powder form and mixed in a mixer. And after that, the mixed
powder is transferred into a rotating heater, in which the mix is burnt before
LLTT
being put into a grinder. After the mix is ground, it turns into cement. At the
end of the process, the cement is stuffed into individual bags.
IIEE
There are 4 different materials needed to create concrete. Gravel, which is
also known as small stones, constitutes half of concrete. Other ingredients
include sand (25%), cement (15%) and water (10%). The concrete is
produced by mixing all the ingredients together in a concrete mixer.
157 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 18
A survey conducted for the places in which people gain access to the
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart provides information on different locations where people
connect to the Internet between 1998 and 2004.
Overall, the proportion of connectors at home and in the library remained
relatively unchanged over the period while there was a downward trend in
that at work and college. In addition, home by far was recorded to be the
most popular place for getting online.
In 1998, more than a half of users gained access to the Internet from their
house, which was almost double in comparison to its follower – connectors at
work with about 27%. The number of citizens accessing the Internet at
college constituted precisely 20%, whereas only 10% was shown to get a
connection in the library.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
In 2004, the home still maintained as the most common place to access the
Internet with approximately 54% after falling moderately by nearly 10% in
2000. On the other hand, the library saw an increase to around 15% of
connectors in 2000 before decreasing slightly to around 12% in 2002 and
holding steady in 2004. The percentage of users connecting to the Internet at
college, which stabilized in the first four years, declined marginally in 2004
mm
to nearly 17%. At the end of the period, this figure at work became the
smallest with exactly 10% after going down sharply since 2002.
oo
219 words
.c.c
ss
MODEL ANSWER 2:
rr
The bar chart illustrates the proportion of different places accessing the
ttttee
Overall, the rates of Internet users gaining access to the Internet at home
aa
increased during the period of time, while those of people getting online at
work and colleges decreased. Meanwhile, the number of ones accessed at
library fluctuated.
SSMM
From 1998 to 2004, the choices of gaining access at home still ranked the
TT
first with the maximum point nearly 55% in 2014, which was about 10%
higher than in 2000. By contrast, the percentage of gaining Internet access at
LL
work decreased significantly, from about 28% in 1998 to nearly 10% in 2010.
IIEE
In the same period, the proportion of accessing the Internet at colleges had a
slight decrease about 2%, from 20% to 18%. By contrast, access in the library
experienced a fluctuation with the maximum point about 15% in 2000.
151 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 19
The graph below shows the unemployment rates in the US and Japan
between March 1993 and March 1999. Write a report for a university
lecturer describing the information shown below.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The given line graph compares the percentages of unemployed people in the
USA and in Japan and how these rates changed from March 1993 to March
1999.
Overall, whilst the unemployment rate in America decreased, the figure for
Japan increased over the period of 6 years. Additionally, the percentage of
the unemployed workforce of the USA in most years was higher than that of
Japan.
In March 1993, the USA’s unemployment rate stayed at a high level, 7%.
The figure, however, began dropping slowly since March 1993 to 5% in the
year 1996. Throughout the remainder of the period, there was a slight
fluctuation around 5% in the unemployment rate in America.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Regarding the unemployed proportion in Japan, in March 1993, it started at
2.5% mark, which was one-third of that in the USA. However, the Japan’s
unemployment rate grew to approximately 4.5% by 1996. After that, the ratio
of unemployed workforce in Japan kept rising and reached a peak of 5.1% in
1998, before falling negligibly to 5% in 1999.
171 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
oomm
.c.c
The line chart illustrates the percentage of unemployed people in two
different countries namely the US and Japan over a 6-year period from March
1993 to March 1999.
rrss
ttttee
Overall, there was an inverse trend/tendency/pattern between the
unemployment rates of the two countries with an upward pattern for Japan
and downward for the US. As shown by the graph, the gap between the 2
aa
lines was being narrowed by the time.
MM
Starting at the peak of 7%, the proportion of unemployed people in the US
went through a period of sharp fluctuations from March 1993 to March 1996.
SS
And the trend was obviously downward. In the following years, the figures
March 1999.
LLTT
for the US hovered around 5% before standing at the same level of Japan in
Over the same period, Japan’s unemployment rate went up steadily from the
IIEE
lowest point of 2.5% in March 1993, although there were minor ups and
downs in the percentage of the unemployed workforce. From March 1996 to
the end of 1997, the figures for Japan leveled off at nearly 4.5%, except for a
sharp dip to just under 4% in the end of 1996. From 1998 on, the rate of
unemployed people in Japan soared to the highest point throughout the period
of just over 5% before stabilizing at this level until the end of the 6-year
period.
219 words
MODEL ANSWER 3:
The graph reveals the level of unemployment in two specific countries, the
United State and Japan through a 7-year-period, from 1993 to 1999.
www.zandienglish.ir

Overall, there was a complete contrast in the pattern of the two nations, with
a downward trend in the US and an increasing rate of unemployed labours in
Japan.
Starting from 7% in the beginning of 1993, the level of unemployed
workforce in the USA experienced a constant decrease and hit slightly below
5.5% in 1995. Following that was a quite stable year in which the rate
remained at somewhere between 5.5% and 6%. From 1996 and afterward, the
rate of unemployment continued declining steadily and ended up at just
above 4% in 1999.
Japan, on the contrary, witnessed a significant rise in the proportion of
unemployment. From just below 2.5% in 1993, the rate grew ceaselessly to
reach 3.5% in 1998 before surging up to above 4.5% in 1999, making it
almost double the percentage seen in the beginning of the period. It is
interesting to note that between 1998 and 1999, the percentage of labours that
were out of work in the two countries was equal to 4.5%, however, in the
end, the rate in Japan outweighed its counterpart.
204 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 20
The line graph below shows the percentage of tourists to England who
visited four different attractions in Brighton.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
MODEL ANSWER 1:
LLTT
IIEE
The line graph compares the proportion of people to England visiting four
various attractions in Brighton over a period of 30 years.
Overall, art gallery experienced the fast decline in the percentage of tourists
to England over the period shown. In addition, while the numbers of visitors
to festival and art gallery decreased, the figures for Pavilion and Pier
increased.
In 1980, Festival was the most popular attractions, at about 30% of visitors.
While the proportions of tourists travelling to Pavilion and Art Gallery were
nearly similar, at 24% and 21% respectively, only 10% of tourists visited
Pier, which was much lower compared to the other three attractions. In the
following 15 years, Pavilion witnessed a dramatic growth and reached a peak
www.zandienglish.ir

of just below 50% of visitors- the highest figure recorded on the line graph.
In Pavilion, after increasing significantly in the percentage of tourists in
1995, its figure declined suddenly to just over 30% in 2010. While the
proportion of visitors to Festival remained relatively stable over the 30-year
period, Art Gallery’s figure saw a significant fall to about 8% in 2010. By
contrast, there was a noticeable rise in the percentage of visitors to Pier with
over 20%.
201 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
A glance at the graph provided reveals the proportion of visitors who came to
see four certain Brighton tourist attractions over a given period.
It is evident that in 1980 and in 2010, Pavilion and Festival attracted more
people than the other two.
It is apparent from the information supplied that the ratio of tourist coming to
Art Gallery increased exponentially over a ten-year period and reached the
peak at approximately 39 percent in 1985. This was followed by a period of
dramatic decline to the bottom at less than 10 percent in 2010. In a similar
pattern development, the proportion of visitors to Pavilion soared from 24
percent in 1980 to peak at 48 percent in 1995. Since then, the percentage saw
a sharp fall to 35 percent in 2000, and it continued to steadily lose another 5
percent over the next ten years.
The proportion of tourists to Pier experienced high and low over the same
time period; however, it was always lower than the percentage of tourists to
other three attractions. Not until 2005 did the Pier rise above the Art Gallery
to become the third popular tourist attraction in Brighton. Meanwhile, the
ratio of tourists visiting Festival dipped under 30 percent since 1980 and
reached a plateau ever since.
213 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 21
The graph shows Underground Station Passenger Numbers in London.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
The line graph figures out the number of Underground Station passenger in
LLTT
London regarding different time slots from 6:00 to 22:00.
Overall, the number of people significantly fluctuated over the period of 16
IIEE
hours in a day. Besides, the rate of office hours was much higher than other
time patterns.
From 6:00 to 9:00 and 16:00 to 19:00, the passenger numbers in London
fluctuated identically. At 6:00 and 16:00, the number of passengers was 100,
but it increased steeply to 200 for an hour, at 7:00 and 17:00 respectively.
After that, it continued to ramp up to the highest volume at 8:00 and at 18:00
with around 400 passengers before falling down to around 200 passengers at
9:00. There were a little bit lower passengers at 20:00, approximately 145.
From 9:00 to 16:00, the number of passengers kept changed gradually, started
around 190 at 9:00. In the following time slots, it increased sharply and
reached 300 passengers at 14:00. The number was down about 200 and spot
at 100 passengers at 16:00. Also, the trend in the period of 20:00 to 22:00
www.zandienglish.ir

remained the same. In particular, it slightly changed from 175 at 21:00 to 145
at 22:00, and made a decline in the number of passengers to 145 at the end of
the line.
215 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 22
The diagrams below give information on transport and car use in
Edmonton.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
The pie chart illustrates the proportion of means of transportation use in
Edmonton, whereas the table explains different reasons why people need cars
in the city.
Overall, it can clearly be seen that car takes the lion’s share among all given
transportation forms. This is because cars seem to be the most convenient
road vehicles that can facilitate people to get to work, complete their business
trips or drop their children to school.
According to the pie chart, it is noticeable that car is widely preferred in
Edmonton with 45% usage of all transportation forms available. The second
www.zandienglish.ir

largest choice is Light Rail Transit with 35%, indicating that 3 out of 10
Edmonton townsmen travel by train. By contrast, bus and taxi equally share
moderate proportions of 10% each, being the least used vehicles in the list.
With regards to the purpose of car utility, 55% people respond that cars serve
the purpose of travelling to work. Business and taking children to school rank
next, with 45% and 40% respectively. By contrast, only 15% people in
Edmonton report that they use cars for shopping or leisure activities.
187 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 23
The diagrams show a structure that is used to generate electricity from
wave power.
mm
Generating electricity from sea waves
oo
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The given figures illustrate how electricity is generated from taking
advantage of sea waves.
Overall, the process involves a structure constructed on a cliff or sea wall. In
www.zandienglish.ir

particular, this structure consists of a large chamber which has one side
opening to the sea while the other leads to a vertical column opening to the
atmosphere. A turbine is installed inside the column in order to create the
electricity in two phases different situations.
The first diagram represents phase one the 1st situation occurring when the
sea wave rises into the chamber and applies pressure on the air inside the
system, forces forcing it to go through the turbine. This move encourages the
turbine to rotate, from which electricity is generated.
The second diagram indicates the next phase 2nd situation of the process
when the wave falls. As the water level declines, the air from outside is
sucked back in the column through the turbine. As a consequence, electricity
is constantly created. Remarkably, the turbine always rotates in one direction
regardless of the direction of the air flow.
178 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The diagrams illustrate how electricity is produced in two cases when sea
waves rise and fall.
Overall, the key difference between the diagrams is that they show the
opposite ways of air contribution. In either case, there is the same structure to
create electricity, which is installed on the side of a cliff or sea wall. This
structure consists of a large chamber. One end is open to the sea, and the
other leads into a vertical column, which is open to the atmosphere.
The first diagram indicates that when a wave approaches the device, water is
forced into the chamber, and then applying pressure on the air within the
column. This air escapes to atmosphere through the turbine, which is placed
inside the column, thereby producing electricity.
When the level of seawater falls, as shown in the second diagram, the air
from outside the column is sucked back in. In this case, with the same
direction and production mechanism of the turbine, electricity continues to be
generated.
168 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 24
The bar chart below shows the employment of all male and female
workers by occupation in the UK in the year 2005.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
The chart shows data about the proportion of employees in both genders by
IIEE
professions in the UK in 2005.
Overall, there are many differences in choosing a career of men and women
workers. It is clear that women tend to work in service occupations, while
men prefer to perform managerial or professional jobs.
In 2005, the proportion of females working in administrative and secretarial
position was highest, at about 22%, compared to only over 5% of men doing
in this area as well as customer service. Likewise, personal service
occupations were attracting more women than men, with almost 15% of
women. Men, on the other hand, preferred to work in skilled trades. This
figure was exactly 20%, while only about 2% of women joining in this field.
Also, only approximately 11% of female employees worked in managers and
senior officials, as well as professional jobs, these figures for men, were
www.zandienglish.ir

roughly 17% and 14%, respectively.
The percentage of females who associated with professional and technical
trades was precisely 15%, which was a bit higher than male, a difference of
2%. There were a similar proportion of both genders in elementary jobs with
the average about 11%. However, in terms of process, plant and machine
operatives, men enjoyed working in this field much more than women with
12%.
217 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 25
The charts below show the results of a survey of adult education. The
first chart shows the reasons why adults decide to study. The pie chart
shows how people think the costs of adult education should be shared.
Write a report for a university lecturer, describing the information shown
below. You should write at least 150 words.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The charts illustrate data on different reasons for adult’s further study and the
people who are believed to be responsible for the tuition.
Overall, being interested in subject and getting qualifications are two major
reasons for further study. Besides, the majority of tuition fees are thought to
be paid by individuals.
www.zandienglish.ir

It can be seen from the first chart that the largest proportion of the adults
continuing their study because of their favor of the subject and the
qualifications they will obtain, at 40% and 38% respectively. By contrast, the
smallest percentage runs into the ability to change the jobs and making
acquaintance, 12% for the former and only 9% for the later. The three
remained reasons share the similar figures which are mostly a half of the first
one, 22% for helpful for the current job and each 20% for promotion and
study enjoyment.
It can be seen from the second chart that individuals themselves have to pay
the most for their study, at 40% of the costs. However, the amount of money
that employers and taxpayers are believed to be responsible for is slightly
lower, 35% and 25% respectively.
191 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The first chart illustrates some reasons for adults’ academic decisions, and the
second chart reveals participants’ perception on how to share the cost of adult
education.
It is clear that subject interest accounted for the largest proportion of
academic decisions while the demand for people meeting remained as the
least choice. Out of three categories of course price sharing, individual
responsibility in academic fee payment had the highest percentage.
The figure for subject attractiveness was highest with 40% [registered the
greatest proportion of 40%] and qualification achievement nearly stood at
that amount with 38%. While the data for meeting people and job alteration
ability was at around one-fourth of that amount, 9% and 12% respectively,
benefits for current jobs, promotion improvement and learning interest
remained at around one half of that amount.
It can be seen that there was not much difference between the three groups of
the cost-sharing survey. Although individual was most likely to pay for their
own studying with the percentage of a substantial 40%, employer and
taxpayer were not far different from that number with an insignificant 35%
and an appreciable 25% respectively.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
187 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 26
The table below gives information about changes in modes of travel in
The table illustrates the proportion of miles travelled by a British person in

terms of 8 kinds of transportation in Britain over two separate years, 1985
and 2000.
Overall, car accounted for the greatest number of miles in both years.
Additionally, it is obvious that there was a reduction in the figure for miles
seen in walking, bicycle, local bus whereas car, local distance bus, train, taxi
and other means of transportation witnessed an increase.
In 1985, car was the primary use of commuting by British citizen at precisely
3155 miles, after 15 years, its figure experienced a significant growth by
1607 miles to reach 4806 miles, which was also the highest proportion in
2000. Over the period of 15 years, there was a dramatic increase in the
number of miles travelled by local distance bus, from 54 miles to 124 miles
in 1985 and 2000 respectively. During the 15-year period, train saw a
noticeable increase, climbing to 366 miles in 2000. Taxi covered for exactly
13 miles in 1985, however, after 15 years, its section went up dramatically to
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
42 miles, which was the second position in 2000. Also, there was an increase
in the number of miles seen in other kinds of transport of 135 miles, rising to
585 miles in 2000.
In the figure for miles commuted by walking, its portion experienced a slight
decrease, which fell to 237 miles in 2000 from 255 miles in the year 1985.
Accounting for only 51 miles in 1985, there were 10 miles fall over the 15-
oomm
year period to 41 miles, remaining as the lowest point in 2000. Over the same
period shown, local bus saw a reduction, from 429 miles to 274 miles in 1985
and 2000 respectively.
.c.c
ss
220 words
rr
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 27
The line graph compares the percentage of people in three countries who
used the Internet between 1999 and 2009.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The line graph compares the percentage of the population who used the
internet in the USA, Canada, and Mexico between 1999 and 2009.
Overall, the proportion of internet users in three countries increased over the
period of 10 years. Although the three trends were similar in terms of a
general growth, the percentage of people who used the internet in Mexico
was lower than that in both the USA and Canada.
In the year 1999-2001, internet users as a percentage of the population in
three countries rose steadily. The figure for Mexico was lowest, at about 5%.
The figures for the USA and Canada were higher, at about 12% and 22%
respectively. In 2005, the proportion of people who used the internet grew
significantly in both USA and Canada, at around 75%, while the figure for
Mexico just reached 30%.
Throughout the remainder of the period, there was a stable increase of
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
internet users of the population in three countries. The figure for Canada was
highest at almost 100%. The percentages of the Canada and Mexico were
181 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
three countries from 1999 to 2009.

oomm
The line graph illustrated the figures for residents using the internet in the
.c.c
Overall, the three countries saw an increase in internet usage over a 10 year-
ss
period. The percentage of the population in the USA and Canada who had
rr
access to the Internet was much larger than that in Mexico.
ttttee
In 1999, the proportion of Mexicans who used the internet was lowest, at
about 5%. In comparison, the figures for Canadians and Americans were
aa
higher, at about 10% and 20% respectively. By the year 2005, the percentage
of people having the internet access in both nations, Canada and the USA,
25%.
SSMM
reached around 70% while the internet usage in Mexico rose to just over
By 2009, the majority of people in the USA and Canada used the internet, at
LLTT
about 80% and almost 100% respectively. Meanwhile, a much smaller
percentage of Mexicans used the Internet, at only 40%.
IIEE
155 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 28
The diagram below shows the typical stages of consumer goods
manufacturing, including the process by which information is fed back
to earlier stages to enable adjustment.
Write a report for a university lecturer describing the process shown.
The diagram describes the process in which consumer goods are produced as
well as how feedback is transferred to the earlier stage for modification.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Overall, the goods manufacturing is a complex operation chain, which
includes two main processes: the flow of producing and flow of the feedback,
from the initial storage to the eventual selling.
At the first stage, raw materials and other components are stored. Results
from both product and market researches are collected as input for designing.
Then, the layout and earlier accumulated elements are used in production
oomm
planning. Together with this step, feedback is sent to the storage stage.
Next, the process continues with assembly, inspection, and testing stages,
.c.c
sequentially. Feedback from the testing stage is sent back to design stage. If
ss
the products are qualified after testing, they, then, are packaged in accordance
rr
with information from market research. This information is also used for
ttttee
advertisement. The procedure concludes with dispatch and sale stages.
157 words
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 29
The maps below show how the town of Harborne changes from 1936 to
2007. Summarize the information by selecting and reporting the main
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The maps describe the development of the Harborne town between 1936 and
2007.
Overall, this town transformed significantly. While some of the natural
beauties were cut out, the residential area was expanded and more options for
shopping and leisure activities became available.
From 1936 to 2007, there were more residents living by the river in the north-
east of the town. In this period, a noticeable number of trees in the north-west
were chopped down. In the center of Harborne, a new shopping center was
constructed. While the post office, bank, and library remained, the sweet shop
and butchers were rebuilt into a brand-new supermarket. Opposite the post
office, where a flower shop used to be, they built a travel agency.
The cycle path, which was situated in the south-west of the town, was
redesigned as a road. In the south-east, the government offices were
converted into a museum and a golf course took over the place of an old
farmland.
160 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The diagrams illustrate the development of Harborne town in 1936 and 2007.
Overall, there was a significant development in town between 1936 and 2007.
Most of the natural landscapes were taken away and replaced by extending of
a residential zone and variety of options for shopping and entertainment.
increasing of populations.
oomm
These significant changes might be due to the effect of industrialization and
.c.c
From 1936 to 2007, a number of plants in northeastern fall sharply to one-
third. In addition, the beautiful river located in the northwest region was
rrss
replaced by a large area of the residential zone.
ttttee
Over 7 decades, locations of the post office, bank and library still stayed the
same. However, in 2007, the adjacent to the bank was travel agent instead of
the flower shop in 1936. In addition, the area of sweet shop and butchers was
aa
redesigned into a supermarket. Additionally, natural cycle path was replaced
by modern road in the southeastern part of the city. Opposite to that direction,
S MM
in the southwest region, the occurrences of museum and golf course replace
for the disappear of government offices and farmland, respectively.
S
185 words
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 30
The graph below gives information from a 2008 report about
consumption of energy in the USA since 1980 with projections until 2030.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The line graph shows data about energy consumption in the USA between
1980 and 2030.
Overall, the consumption of Hydropower, Solar/Wind and Nuclear energy
remained relatively constant throughout a period of 50 years. While there was
a gradual increase in consumption of 5 other kinds of fuel, Petrol and Oil
were used the most in both the past and projections for the future.
In 1980, around 35 quadrillions of energy consumed was Petrol and Oil.
Natural Gas energy commenced at 20 quadrillions while the figure for Coal
energy began at about 16 quadrillions. The 3 other kinds of fuel were
consumed at the same figure, which was at around 3 quadrillions in the first
year.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
The amount of Petro and Oil consumption grow gradually from 1980 to 2030
and is predicted to peak at approximately 50 quadrillions in the final year.
The figure for Coal energy rises steadily throughout the period, which will be
responsible for around 30 quadrillions in 2030. Likewise, the prediction for
Natural Gas energy consumption is at about 25 quadrillions. The trend for
Nuclear power, Solar/Wind, and Hydropower doesn’t change much
throughout the period.
188 words
oomm
MODEL ANSWER 2:
.c.c
from 1980 with predictions to 2030.
rrss
The line graph illustrates the changes in consumption of energy in the USA
ttttee
Overall, the use of fuel in American has an upward trend over the period.
Petrol and Oil were consumed in the largest amount between 1980 and 2015,
aa
and they are forecasted to keep this trend until 2030.
MM
It can be seen from the graph that the consumption of Solar/Wind fluctuated
from 1980 to 2010 and then remained stable at 5 quadrillion units before
SS
increasing slightly to about 7 quadrillion units in 2030. It was also the case
TT
for Hydropower though it was used averagely 2 quadrillion units less than
Solar/Wind and was predicted to reach nearly 4 quadrillion units in the last
LL
year. Nuclear always saw a gradual growth in utilization during the period,
IIEE
rose from 3 quadrillion units in 1980 to 9 quadrillion units in 2030.
In the first 35 years, the use of Coal jumped at various rates while that of
Natural Gas went up and down. At the end of the period, they are believed to
reach the relatively high levels (30 and 25 quadrillion units). In terms of
Petrol and Oil consumption, there was a slight variation in the early years and
a sharp rise to 45 quadrillion units by 2015. It is thought that this figure will
approximately reach 50 quadrillion units in 2030.
219 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 31
The chart below shows the number of travelers using three major
airports in New York City between 1995 and 2000.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar graph gives information about the number of tourists using three
primary airports in New York City in the period of time from 1995 to 2000.
Overall, both LaGuardia and Newark saw an increase in the number of
passengers, with the exception of that at John F. Kennedy.
In 1995, only 15 million travellers used Newark airport, which was 20
million smaller than the number of LaGuardia. These two figures continued
to rise in the next three years and reached 42 million and 46 million,
respectively. After that, the number of Newark remained constant for the
coming years, while that of LaGuardia kept rising and reaching its peak at 68
million, the highest number recorded in the chart.
The number of passengers of John F. Kennedy airport was 26 million in 1995
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
and climbed gradually to 46 million in 1997. This figure decreased to 36
million in 1998 and 32 million in 1999 and then considerably rose to 44
million in 2000.
163 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
oom
terms of the number of users from 1995 to 2000.m
The bar chart provides information about three major airports in New York in
.c.c
It is noticeable that LaGuardia experienced a gradual increase in the number
ss
of visitors using this airport over the period. On the other hand, the figures
rr
for John F. Kennedy airport fluctuated variously during the period between
ttttee
1995 and 2000.
In 1995, the number of travelers served by LaGuardia airport was highest
aa
with around 35 million passengers, followed by John F. Kennedy with
approximately 26 million people. Later, the figures for LaGuardia climbed
MM
steadily and slightly to nearly 42 million users in 1997 while the number of
visitors choosing John F. Kennedy soared and reached a peak of around 45
SS
million passengers. In contrast, there was a tripling in the number of
TT
passengers of Newark from 15 million in 1995 to nearly 40 million users in
1997 but this airport was by far the lowest point during this period.
LL
In the latter half of the selected period, the figures for LaGuardia rocketed
IIEE
and peak at 70 million people and made LaGuardia become the most popular
airport in New York in 2000. On the other hand, the number of visitors using
John F. Kennedy dropped minimally before rising considerably in 2000. The
figures for Newark remained relatively constant.
219 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 32
The chart below shows the amount spent on six consumer goods in four
European countries.
The bar chart compares data on the amount of money that people living in
four countries Germany, Italy, France and Britain used to buy six different
products.
Overall, it is clear that Britain was by far the country spending the most
money on every single item. It is also noted that the one which people tended
to buy was photographic film, compared to other kinds of goods.
On the one hand, people in Britain spent about over $170.000 on
photographic film which is the highest number amongst four nations, whereas
the figure for Germany was just under $150.000 – the lowest overall for all
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
six items. Meanwhile, CDs and Toys were the second most consumed
products by people in these separate countries. While there was a similar
pattern for Britain and Germany, the amount spent by the other two nations
were between $150.000 and $158.000
However, there were some differences in the expense that each country spent
on personal stereos, tennis racquets and perfumes. Italians used almost the
the least on all three kinds of good.

oomm
same amount of money - $150.000 on those items. French, in contrast, spent
188 words
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 33
The bar chart below shows the percentage of adults of different age
groups in the UK who used the Internet every day from 2003-2006.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart compared the five different age groups of people who accessed
the internet on daily basis in the UK between 2003 and 2006.
It is clear that 16-27 age group in the UK accounted for the highest points of
the whole graph over the four-year period. Also, aged 25-44 and 55-64 saw
the largest rises in Internet users over the same period.
In 2003, the percentage of people from 16-24 age groups was exactly 80%,
compared to precisely 50% of people aged 25-44. The figures for the
youngest group and aged 25-44 saw only a small increase of a full 10%. In
2006, people accessing the internet from aged 16-24 were by far the highest
in terms of users in the UK, and the second one was the older age group, 25-
44 age group.
The proportion of Internet users gaining access from three other age groups,
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
45-54, 55-64, 65 and oversaw a relatively small rise in users between 2003
and 2004 in the UK. In 2005, these age groups used exactly 50%, 40%, and
approximately 15% respectively. In2006, the figure for aged 45-54 reached
nearly 55%, while 55-to 64-years-old age groups’ users figures increased
dramatically and the percentage of the oldest age group fluctuated slightly,
65-years-old and over.
210 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
oomm
.c.c
The diagram highlights the proportion of daily adult Internet users in terms of
5 age groups from 2003 to 2006.
rrss
ttttee
Overall, it is self-evident that the use of internet decreased with age
throughout the period. Also notably, 2005 and 2006 witnessed a rise in the
percentage of Internet users.
aa
Adults aged less than 25 tended to use the Internet the most. For example, in
MM
2003, around 80% of users were below 25 years old while there were no
users aged more than 65. In 2006, though the gap between the 16-24 and 25-
SS
44 age group was minor, only 10% of users were recorded to be above 65
years old.
LLTT
Furthermore, the last 2 years of the period accounted for the highest figure in
most age groups. In the youngest group, the percentage figures for the year
IIEE
2005 and 2006 were 90% and 85%, leaving two remaining years behind. The
only exception was among adults aged above 45 and below 54. Starting at
45% in 2003, the figure managed to peak in 2004 at 60%, ending at 55% in
2006.
179 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 34
The chart below gives information about global population percentages
and distribution of wealth by region.
The bar chart compares eight major regions in terms of global population and
wealth distribution worldwide.
It is clear from the bar graph that North America has the highest percentage
of global wealth distribution, but the second lowest figure for the population.
China, on the other hand, has the largest population, but second lowest
proportion of distributed wealth.
Looking at the chart in details, global wealth accounts for nearly 35% in
North America, compared to 30% in Europe and approximately a quarter in
Rich Asia-Pacific. However, the percentages of global population in these
regions are quite low, at about 5% for both North America and Rich Asia-
Pacific and 15% for Europe, which is half of its proportions of wealth
distribution.
In other regions, the figures for population seem to be much higher than those
for wealth. 15% of the world population can be noticed in China, while
global population accounts for around 15% in Other Asia Pacific region and
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
India. Africa and India have negligible figures for distributed wealth globally,
at just 1%, whereas Latin America & Caribean region only makes up 4% of
the distribution of wealth worldwide.
189 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 35
The graph shows oil production capacity for several Gulf countries
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The graph compares changes in oil production in millions of barrels per day
in six Gulf countries over the period from 1990 to 2010.
Overall, it is clear that oil production increased in all countries except for
Qatar over the period shown. However, Saudi Arabia experienced the most
significant rise and produced the largest amount of oil in each year.
In 1990, Saudi Arabia produced well over 8 million barrels per day, followed
by a huge rise by 4 million barrels per day in 2005 before soaring to just
above 14 million barrels per day in 2010. In contrast, Qatar was the country
with lowest oil production which was stable under 1 million barrels per day
over the period.
Oil production capacity in Iran increased gradually from about 3 million
barrels per day in 1990 to well over 4 million barrels per day in 2010.
Although the production of oil in three countries including Iraq, Kuwait and
UAE witnessed a sustainable rise, they still remained under 4 million barrels
per day by the year 2010.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
175 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The provided bar graph illustrates the amount of estimated oil production in
six countries starting from 1990 to 2010, measured in millions of barrels per
day.
oomm
Overall, oil produced in all nations tended to rise over a period of 20 years. In
addition, the highest amount of oil production was Saudi Arab, while Qatar
was the lowest figure in these countries.
.c.c
ss
There was a dramatic increase in the oil production capacity in Saudi Arab
rr
from slightly over 8 million barrels per day in 1990 to over 14 million barrels
ttttee
per day in the year 2010. In contrast, oil production in Qatar fluctuated and
slightly rose throughout the given years with less than 1 million barrels per
day.
aa
The other countries saw a stable rise between 1990 and 2010. The oil
MM
production in Iran was higher than in the rest of countries with approximately
3 million barrels in 1990 and just over 4 million barrels per day in 2010.
SS
Meanwhile, Iraq, Kuwait, and UAE were the places where only around 2
TT
million barrels of oil was produced in 1990 and this figure grew to nearly 4
million barrels per day at the end of this period.
195 words LL
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 36
The charts below show what UK graduate and postgraduate students
who did not go into full-time work did after leaving college in 2008.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The charts give information about the destination of UK graduate and
postgraduate students with the exception of full-time work after graduation in
2008.
Overall, further study was the unanimous choice for both graduate and
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
postgraduate students, as opposed to the option of minority-voluntary work.
Additionally, the numbers of graduate students in four sectors were far from
that of postgraduates.
In one hand, higher education was participated in by 29,665 graduates in
comparison with only 2,725 postgraduates. In addition, the figure for
graduate students doing part-time jobs was roughly six times higher than that
oomm
of postgraduates which were 17,735 and 2,535 students respectively.
On the other hand, there were 345 postgraduate students working as
.c.c
volunteers after their study. This number was about nine times less than that
ss
of further study in the same education level, and 10 times when compared
rr
with this number of graduate students. Moreover, the unemployed figure for
ttttee
postgraduates was 1,625 people compared with 16,235 graduates. Those
figures were approximately a half of the number of higher education in its
chart.
173 words
aa
MODEL ANSWER 2:
SSMM
The two bar charts illustrate the figures of UK graduate and postgraduate
2008.
LLTT
students in terms of employment excluding full-time work after graduation in
Overall, the highest number of graduate students pursued to study further,
IIEE
whereas further study and part-time work were the two most common choices
of postgraduates in the same year.
Looking at the first graph, graduate students studying further took the lead,
holding exact 29,665 students of the total surveyed. Following this, 17,735
students choosing part-time work, which was marginally higher than that of
students who are unemployed (16,235). However, the least common choice
was voluntary work with just 3500 students.
Turning to the second graph, the greatest figure of postgraduate students was
represented by further study, followed by part-time work with the figures of
2725 and 2535 respectively. The number of unemployed students was just
over half of that of further study, at 1625 compared to 2725. Lastly, there
www.zandienglish.ir

were only 345 students joining voluntary work, which made it the least
popular choice among four groups.
170 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 37
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
The table reveals the number of cars joining the traffic on four main bridges
aa
in New Stratford in five different time frames.
SSMM
It is evident that 8 a.m., 12 noon and 4 p.m. are the three points of time
attracting more cars than two remaining ones.
TT
The traffic on the Harbour Bridge is the heaviest at 8 a.m. with 12,500 cars,
while 4 p.m. is the second busiest time with 11,750 cars. Likewise, traffic on
LL
the River Bridge is the most crowded at 8 a.m. and 4 p.m. with 8,300 and
IIEE
8,500 cars respectively. However, in the evening, traffic density is reduced
considerably for both two bridges. In particular, the total traffic volume at 8
p.m. and midnight of Habour and River Bridge is about 9,000 and 6000 cars
respectively.
As for two remaining bridges, at 6,800 cars, the City Bridge is used the most
at noon, whereas 4 p.m. is the busiest time for the Smith Bridge with 3,330
cars. At night, the number of cars crossing/passing these two bridges reduced
significantly, with lower-than-600 cars for each. What is also noteworthy is
that/It is also noteworthy that in terms of usage, the Harbour, River, City and
Smith bridge is the first, second, third and last respectively.
207 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 38
The graph below shows the quantities of goods transported in the UK
between 1974 and 2002 by four different modes of transport.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The line graph provides information about the quantities of products
transported in the UK from 1974 to 2002 by four different types of transport.
Overall, there was a gradual rise in the quantities of goods transported for all
transport despite some fluctuations. It is also clear to see that transporting by
road accounted for the highest proportion of the quantities of product over the
period of 28 years.
In the year 1974, the quantity of goods transported by road was about 71
million tonnes. Throughout the remainder of the period, there was a
fluctuation in products transported and then it rose to approximately 98
million tonnes in 2002. The quantities of goods transported by both water and
rail had the same starting point at 38 million tonnes in the year 1974.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Furthermore, despite having different patterns from 1978 to 1983, both
showed the same trend afterward but the figures for water were always higher
than those for rail. By 2002, the quantities of water and rail increased to 62
and 41 million tonnes, respectively.
There was a gradual rise in good transported by pipeline which was always
the lowest figure at under 20 million tonnes from 1974 to 2002. Specifically,
oomm
in 1974 the quantity was about 4 million tones and it increased to 21 million
tonnes in 2002 after two stable periods from 1983 to 1990 and from 1994 to
2002.
.c.c
ss
220 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
rr
ttttee
The line graph compares the number of consumer wares transported by four
major means of transport in the UK from 1974 to 2002.
aa
Overall, road played a key role in the transportation of commodities, whereas
MM
pipeline experienced an opposite side in the UK during the given period. As
can be seen that, the number of goods transported by road, water and pipeline
SS
saw a significant rise while the figure for rail remained stable.
LLTT
From 1974 to 1978, the quantities of goods delivered on road fluctuated,
although it always remained above 70 million, which was the highest figure.
At the same time, pipeline experienced a slight upward trend in the number
IIEE
of goods transportations, rising between 5 and approximately 15 million
tonnes. Over the next two decades, the figure of using roads for transporting
reached a peak rocketed to the high of almost 100 million. Likewise, the
number of wares transported by pipeline increased significantly, leaping to
over 20 million at the end of the period.
From under 40 million tonnes, the quantities of commodities delivered on
water was steadily lower than the figure for rail, at 40 million in 1974. After
4 years, of goods transported by ships climbed to 40 million then rocketed to
the high of above 60 million. In contrast, there was a fluctuating trend of
using rail to transport goods during the given period but came back at 40
million in 2002.
www.zandienglish.ir

219 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 39
The line graph shows the sales of children’s books, adult’s fictions and
educational books between 2002 and 2006 in one country.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
The graph gives information about the amount of money people get from
IIEE
selling three different kinds of books in a country from 2002 to 2006.
Overall, the sales of children’s books and educational books were similar in
terms of a general increase over the period of 5 years, while the figure for
adult’s books experienced a moderate decline. In addition, among three
different kinds of books, children’s books were by far the most popular.
In the 2003 – 2004 period, the revenue from both books for kids and books
for education went up significantly, from about 33 to 42 million dollars and
exactly 25 to 32 million dollars respectively. In contrast, there was a
considerable decrease in the number of adults’ fiction, which dropped to
around 37 million dollars.
The remainder of the period witnessed a gradual growth of 10 million dollars
www.zandienglish.ir

in the sales of children’s books. Likewise, there was a sharp rise from 25 to
approximately 33 million dollars in the sales of educational books in the year
2006 after a slight decrease of 7 million dollars between 2003 and 2005. On
the contrary, after rising from nearly 37 to 40 million dollars in the year
2004, the figure for adults’ fictions went down noticeably, falling to 30
million dollars in 2006.
213 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 40
The line graph below gives information about the number of visitors to
three London museums between June and September 2013.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
MODEL ANSWER 1:
LLTT
IIEE
The chart compares the number of people coming to visit three different types
of museums in London from June to September 2013.
Overall, British Museum was the most popular museum in London, which
serviced the largest number of visitors in summer 2013. In contrast, the
number of people visiting Science Museum ranked the lowest figure but it
had an increasing trend in the end of summer.
Over the period from June to July, there was a dramatic growth in the number
of British museum’s visitors reaching a peak at approximately 750 thousand.
However, the trend of visiting this museum saw a rapid fell, reaching the
lowest data at exactly 500 thousand people. Finally, from August, the number
of visitor coming to British museum rose significantly, at about 650 thousand
www.zandienglish.ir

in the end of summer.
Natural History museum experienced a sharp decrease in the number of
visitors from June to July then this figure grew slightly, at about 500
thousand in September. The number of Science museum‘s visitor dropped
rapidly between Jun and August, but it had an upward trend, at 450 thousand
visitors.
183 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The graph shows data about how many people visited the three London
museums from June to September 2013.
Overall, the number of visitors to the three different Museums fluctuated
widely during a period of four months. However, most visitors went to the
British Museum while the other Museums received fewer visitors.
It is clear from the graph that the number of visitors to British Museum rose
sharply from 600 thousand to around 750 thousand within a month. After
that, it fell rapidly to just under 500 thousand before growing again to about
650 thousand.
When it comes to the Natural History Museum, the number of people visited
this place declined significantly from just under 500 thousand to around 370
thousand in the first month the survey conducted then climbed slightly to
around 470 thousand within the next two months. It can be seen from the line
graph that there was a similar trend for Science Museum. Starting at 400
thousand people, it decreased steadily to just over 300 thousand over a two-
month period before climbing suddenly to 450 thousand in the next month.
183 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 41
The graphs below show a comparison of the expenses in the UK and the
US.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
The pie charts compare the percentages of expenditure in terms of six
different categories: DVDs, Books, Going out, Transport, Food and Rent in
LLTT
two countries UK and US.
It is clear that people spend the most money on Rent and Food in both
IIEE
countries. By contrast, the expenses for DVDs is the least.
The percentage of spending on DVDs is 10%, while the figure for Books is
slightly higher, at 12%. At the same time, spending on going out and
transport in the UK each makes up 15% of the total expense. Meanwhile,
expenditure on Food accounts for 18% of the total money spent by British
people. By contrast, the rate of spending on Rent stands at 30%, which was
the highest figure.
In the US, the proportion of expense on DVDs is as high as the figure for the
UK, at 10%. People in America spend an analogous percentage of its budget
on three categories: Books, Going out, Transport, standing at 15%. At the
same time, money spent on Food makes up a quarter of the total expenditure
in this country, which is the highest compared to other five categories.
www.zandienglish.ir

Meanwhile, 20% is spent on Rent, which is 2 times higher than the
percentage of DVDs.
207 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 42
The graph below shows radio and television audiences of United
Kingdom throughout the day in the year 1992.
below.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
The line graph compares changes in the daily proportion of people who listen
IIEE
to the radio or watch television in 1992 in England.
Overall, the rate of British users in both media fluctuated wildly over 22
hours in 1992. Besides the completely different trends, the percentage of
television audiences in most years was higher than that of radio.
From 1.00 to 2.00, TV viewers rate fell quickly although it was still higher
than radio audiences rate at that same time (7% fell closely to 3%) in the
UK. Nevertheless, in the 2.00-8.00 period, the quantity of those who watch
televisions improve modestly to approximate 6%. From 8.00 to 13.00, the
figure for television had a slight trough and then recovered to above 15%.
Throughout the remainder of the period, there was a slide-back change in the
television watchers ratio, which reached the maximum rate at 45% but then
www.zandienglish.ir

fell sharply back to 15% at the end of the day.
Over the same period, the rate of radio audiences vacillated less outrageously
than that of television watcher rate. It remained almost constant over the first
five-hour period before peaking at above 25%, its highest point, in the next
short two hours. By contrast, there was a gradual drop (from over 25% to
under 5%) during the rest of the day in the number of people who listen to the
radio in the UK in 1992.
233 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 43
The charts below show UK and USA energy consumption in 2000 and
2006.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
The charts compare the energy expenditure in the UK and USA by the years
2000 and 2006
www.zandienglish.ir

Overall, oil was the most used energy source in both countries, and the
energy consumption in the UK was generally greater than in the USA over
the period
In 2000, the energy consumption in both countries derived primarily from oil
and coal. These figures, however, were slightly higher in American, at around
35% in the USA and 30% in the UK. By contrast, the British consumed
steadily more energy than American in the remainder of energy sources
including gas, nuclear power, and other sources.
Six years later, oil still remained relatively to be the most popular fuel
generation in the USA with precisely 40% in consumption, while the amount
of gas used increased considerably in both countries and was highest in the
UK, at nearly 40% in 2006. Coal consumption experienced a significant
decrease in the UK and UAS, accounting for extremely 15% and 255
respectively, while the expenditure of nuclear power and other sources
declined slightly throughout the period.
177 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 44
The chart below gives information on the percentage of British people
giving money to charity by age range for the years 1990 and 2010.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
The bar chart illustrates data on the proportion of Britons donating money to
charity by five different age groups in 1990 and 2010.
Overall, the percentage of British citizens giving money to charity in 3 age
groups 18-25, 26-35 and 36-50 in 1990 was higher than that in 2010 while
the figures for 2 other groups in 1990 were lower than the rates in 2010. The
highest point of the year 1990 was at the age of 36-50 and the one of the year
2010 was the 51-65 age group.
In 1990, the proportion of Britons at the age of 18-25 spending money on
charity was the lowest, at around 17%. By contrast, the figure for the group
36-50 was the highest, at about 42%. Approximately 31%, 35% and 32%
British people donated money to charity in 3 age group 26-35, 51-65 and
over 65, respectively.
www.zandienglish.ir

In 2010, the proportion of British citizens spending money on charity at the
age of 51-65 was the highest, at around 39% while the figures for 2 groups
36-50 and over 65 were the same. The rate for the 18-25 age group was the
lowest.
191 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 45
The charts below show the number of Japanese tourists travelling
abroad between 1985 and 1995 and Australia's share of the Japanese
tourist market.
oomm
c.c
essays/charts-below-show-number-japanese-tourists-travelling-2
.
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
The bar chart compares the quantity of Japanese tourists who travelled abroad
and the line graph gives information about Australia’s share of the Japanese
tourist market over the ten-year period from 1985 to 1995.
It is clear that the number of Japanese tourists travelling abroad increased
www.zandienglish.ir

gradually over the period shown. Meanwhile, there was an upward trend in
the percentage of Japanese tourists visiting Australia.
In 1985, there were about 5 million individuals travelling overseas in Japan.
From 1985 to 1990, there was a gradual rise in the number of Japanese
tourists to 11 million. Then this figure experienced a slow drop to just under
11 million in 1991. After that, the number of tourists rose steadily and
reached a peak at more than 15 million in 1995.
The percentage of Japanese visitors coming to Australia was 2% in 1985.
This figure kept rising for the next four years and reached 5% in 1989. After
that, there was a slight decline in the proportion of tourists to more than 4%
in 1990. From 1990 to 1994, Australia’s share of the Japanese tourist market
increased dramatically and reached the highest point of over 6% in 1994.
Then this figure witnessed a slight drop to 6% in 1995.
206 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 46
The charts below give information on the ages of the population of
Yemen and Italy in 2000 and projections for 2050.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The charts given demonstrate the data on three age groups of ages in Yemen
and Italy over 50 years from 2000 to 2050.
Overall, Italy had a more aging population than that of Yemen throughout the
period shown. It is also noticeable that people in both countries become older
over 50 years.
In 2000, while juveniles under 14 accounted for half of Yemen’s population,
www.zandienglish.ir

only one-third of that amount was the proportion of children under 14 years
old in Italy. Meanwhile, the middle age group of ages ranging from 15 to 59
years old in Yemen took up over 46% of the population, while that figure in
Italy was around 15% more. Besides, the elderly aged 60 and over in Yemen
had a tiny percentage at 3.6%; however, in Italy the elderly comprised up to
about a quarter of its population.
By 2050, the population of both countries will have experienced the aging
process. Specifically, in Yemen, the figure for juveniles will decrease by
13%, and that for the middle group will rise to almost 60% simultaneously.
Nonetheless, the old group aged over 60 will show a modest increase of only
2%. On the other hand, in Italy, the young group witnessed just a slight
decline in percentage, whereas the middle group will fall to 46% and the
figure for old people will rise by around 20%. As can be seen, Yemen is
predicted to undergo a slower aging process than that of Italy.
220 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The pie charts provide information on the aged groups of citizens of Yemen
and Italy in 2000 and predictions for 2050.
Overall, the most significant age group is from 15-59 years, which accounts
for over half the national ages, while other groups generated the least
statistics in Yemen and Italy.
In 2000, with the age group from 15-59 years, Yemen people took 46.3% less
than those of Italian with 61.6%. When it comes to 0-14 years group, the
figures for Yemen and Italy were 50.1% and 14.3% respectively. Meanwhile,
the 60-year group represented 3.6% of Yemen population and 24.1% of Italy
citizens.
With regards to the projections for 2050, the labor aged 15-59 years in
Yemen will significantly increase to 57.3 % while in this group, the
percentage of the ages in Italy is anticipated to fall dramatically to 46.2%.
The figure for people in the 0-14 group is forecast to drop to 57% in Yemen
and 11.5% in Italy. However, the eldest aged group in Yemen and Italy is
expected to rise to 5.7% and 42.3% respectively.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
178 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 47
The pie charts compare the percentages of average spending of two different
U.S. families in 1970 and 2004.
Overall, U.S. families tended to spend more on mortgage in both years.
While mortgage saw a drastic increase from 1970 to 2004, the relative
amount of total household spending for other categories either remained
unchanged or dropped.
In 1970, mortgage made up 26% of average household expenditure. The
figure for this category doubled in 2004, taking up half of household
spending. Food held the second place in 1970, at 25%. However, the relative
amount of food significantly dropped to 12% in 2004.
Similar to food, clothing, and transport experienced a decrease in the relative
amount of average household expenditure, from 22% and 13% to 10% and
5% respectively. The percentage of spending for entertainment remained the
same at 13%. By contrast, the proportion of childcare spending rose 10 times,
from 1% to 10%.
152 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 48
The pie charts below give information about the composition of
household rubbish in the United Kingdom in two different years.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
The pie charts show the data on different components of household rubbish in
aa
MM
Overall, the percentage of most components of household rubbish remained
stable from 1985 to 2002 apart from kitchen/organic waste and paper.
SS
Moreover, dust and cinders were disappeared and miscellaneous were added
in 2002.
LLTT
The percentage of kitchen/organic waste jumped from 28% in 1985 to 44% in
IIEE
2002, which represented the biggest increase in that period of time. By
contrast, paper waste was significantly reduced from 36% to 16% in 1985
and in 2002, respectively.
The proportion of plastic waste remained the same in both years, at 7%. The
UK’s household rubbish in 1985 saw a similar figure for wood with 5% and
textile with 3%. The miscellaneous which did not appear in 1985 represented
17%, while dust and cinders which were at 8% in household rubbish in 1985,
disappeared in 2002.
151 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 49
The graph and table below give information about water use worldwide
and water consumption in two different countries.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The charts show the comparison between the amount of water consumed for
Agriculture, Industry, and homes, all over the World from 1900 to 2000, and
water used in Brazil and Congo in 2000.
Overall, the common trend for global water consumption was upward.
Moreover, a much larger amount of water was used for Agriculture in
comparison with Industry and Domestic use, and Brazilians consumed more
water than people living in Congo.
In 1900, water was used mainly for agriculture with about 500 km3 when
Industrial use and homes made up for over 10 km3. By 2000, the amount of
water for agricultural consumption soared significantly by 3,000 km3 which
were approximately 2,000 km3 more than that in Industrial use. The
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Domestic use experienced the same trend through the period shown with a
gradual rise by around 400 km3 in 2000.
It is easily seen that there was a huge gap between the population of Brazil
and Democratic Republic of Congo which was 176 million compared with
5.2 million respectively. The agricultural land in Brazil was approximately
twenty-seven times more than that in Congo. Therefore/Correspondingly, the
oomm
figure for water consumption per person in Congo was 45 times less than
Brazilian residents used which were 8 m3 and 359 m3 respectively.
209 words
.c.c
MODEL ANSWER 2:
rrss
ttttee
A glance at the charts provided reveals the amount of global water used for
agriculture, industry, and home from 1900 to 2000 and water use in two
countries namely Brazil and Democratic of Congo in 2000.
aa
It is apparent that agricultural purpose was responsible for the largest
MM
proportion of water globally used which rose dramatically during the 20th
century. It can be also seen from the table that Brazilian utilized more water
SS
significantly than Congolese.
LLTT
In 1900, there were approximately 500 km3 of water used in agriculture
which was more five times more than that in domestic and industry. Although
the amount of water used in three areas all witnessed a remarkable growth in
IIEE
the surveyed period, water consumption in agriculture was still the highest
with 3,000 km3 in 2000. By contrast, domestic sector, which consumed
nearly 500 km3 of water, stood at the bottom of global water use while 1,000
km3 was the amount of water for the industry in 2000.
In the same year, the population of Brazil and Congo were 176 million and
5.2 million respectively. As a result, water consumption per person in Brazil
at 359 m3 was much higher than in Congo at only 8 m3. It can be easy to
understand it because the former had more 265 times irrigated land than the
latter.
220 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 50
The pie charts below show units of electricity production by fuel source
Australia and France in 1980 and 2000.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The pie charts compare the amount of electricity produced by different
sources of fuels in Australia and France in 2 separate years 1980 and 2000.
Overall, it is clear that there was a rise in the total amount of electricity
production in both 2 countries in 2000. The majority electricity was produced
by coal and hydropower in Australia, and by nuclear power in France in
2000.
As can be seen, in 1980 in Australia, coal accounted for the highest figure, at
50 units, whereas hydro and nuclear power had the similar number, at 20
units. However, these figures are much higher than the amount of electricity
produced by oil, at only 10 units. The year 2000 witnessed an increase in the
amount electricity produced by coal at 130 units, compared to 36 units of
hydropower.
In France, the main sources produced electricity in 1980 were coal and
natural gas, at 25 units, whereas oil’s figure was slightly lower by 5 units. In
2000, there was a dramatic increase in the amount of electricity by nuclear to
126 units. Meanwhile, oil and coal had the same figures, at 25 units. The
figures for hydropower and natural gas fall significantly, at 2 units for both
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
categories.
204 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The pie charts demonstrate the electricity amount produced from five
different sources of fuel in Australia and France in 1980 and 2000.
oomm
Overall, both countries experienced a dramatic increase in total electricity
production from 1980 to 2000. Also, coal and nuclear power were the main
.c.c
fuel sources to produce electricity in Australia and France respectively in
ss
2000.
rr
In 1980, only 50 units of coal were used for electricity producing in
ttttee
Australia, but the number remarkably jumped to 130 units in 2000. This
country also witnessed a gradual rise in the electricity units using
aa
hydropower. In contrast, producing electricity from oil and natural gas
dramatically dropped from 10 and 20 units respectively in 1980 to only 2
units each in 2000.
SSMM
In France, while electric power generated from coal and oil sources was
constant at around 25 units during the 20-year period, the amount derived
LLTT
from nuclear power predominated with 126 units in 2000. However, there
was a significant decrease in electricity production from natural gas from 25
to only 2 units in 2000.
173 words
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Legal & Disclaimer
o mm
o
.c.c
ss
rr
ttttee
aa
M
SS M
TT
LL
IIEE
cause of action.
book.
www.zandienglish.ir

www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION
SAMPLE 1
SAMPLE 2
SAMPLE 3
oomm
SAMPLE 4
.c.c
SAMPLE 5
SAMPLE 6
rrss
SAMPLE 7
ttttee
SAMPLE 8
SAMPLE 9 aa
SAMPLE 10
SSMM
TT
SAMPLE 11
SAMPLE 12
LL
IIEE
SAMPLE 13
SAMPLE 14
SAMPLE 15
SAMPLE 16
SAMPLE 17
SAMPLE 18
SAMPLE 19
SAMPLE 20
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 21
SAMPLE 22
SAMPLE 23
SAMPLE 24
SAMPLE 25
SAMPLE 26
SAMPLE 27
SAMPLE 28
SAMPLE 29
SAMPLE 30
SAMPLE 31
SAMPLE 32
SAMPLE 33
SAMPLE 34
SAMPLE 35
SAMPLE 36
SAMPLE 37
SAMPLE 38
SAMPLE 39
SAMPLE 40
SAMPLE 41
SAMPLE 42
SAMPLE 43
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 44
SAMPLE 45
SAMPLE 46
SAMPLE 47
SAMPLE 48
SAMPLE 49
oomm
SAMPLE 50
.c.c
SAMPLE 51
rrss
ttttee
CONCLUSION
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

INTRODUCTION
provide you over 50 high-quality sample essays to help you easily achieve an
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 1
The maps below show the village of Stokeford in 1930 and 2010.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
The two maps illustrate changes that happened in Stokeford during an 80-
LLTT
year period, from 1930 to 2010.
Overall, it can clearly be seen that all of the original farmlands have been
IIEE
gone, mostly were changed into newly built houses. In 2010, a retirement
home and a number of roads were also constructed in the village of
Stokeford.
According to the maps, Stokeford was largely occupied by farmlands in
1930. River Stoke was bordered by the first farm area whereas the second
one located in the North East End of the village. However, in 2010, both
farmland areas were replaced with a housing complex along the main road.
While the post office remained the same throughout 80 years, the shopping
zone became residential housing estate as well. Four secondary roads were
therefore constructed conveniently to connect the houses with the village’s
main road.
Although the primary school was sited at the same location, it was noticeably
www.zandienglish.ir

expanded in 2010. The gardens which once were seen opposite to the first
farmland were divided into two different sections: one for residential
purposes and the other half became a retirement home with trees and shelters.
Stokeford’s major transportation facilities, which includes a main road and a
bridge across River Stoke kept unchanged despite all of the transformation
was witnessed over the period of 80 years.
220 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 2
The pie charts below shows the comparison of different kinds of energy
production of France in two years.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
France in 1995 and 2005.
SSMM
The pie charts illustrate the amount of energy in 5 different categories used in
LLTT
Overall, coal accounted for the largest proportion in both years. Additionally,
there was an increase in the figure for using gas, nuclear, coal and other kinds
of energy, whereas petrol witnessed a marked decrease.
IIEE
In 1995, coal was the primary source of energy in France, at 29.80%;
however, after 10 years, its number increased slightly by nearly 1% to
30.93%, which was also the highest point in the year 2005. During the period
of 10 years, the amount of gas used by French inhabitants rose smoothly from
29.63% in 1995 to 30.31% and remained at the second point in 2005. Over
the 10-year period, nuclear witnessed a marked growth of precisely 3.50%,
climbing to 10.10% in the year 2005. In addition, there was a considerable
rise in the percentage of other kinds of energy to 9.10%, which was the
lowest point in 2005.
In terms of petrol, French citizens used less than they did previously, which
means there was a remarkable fall in the percentage from 29.27% to 19.55%
www.zandienglish.ir

in the year 1995 and 2005 respectively, over the period.
198 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 3
The charts below show household spending patterns in two countries
between 1980 and
2008.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
MODEL ANSWER 1:
LLTT
IIEE
The pie charts given compare 5 main categories of household expenditure in
the UK and New Zealand in two separate years, 1980 and 2008.
It is clear that the UK and New Zealand families spent most of their budgets
on the utility bills and leisure. Additionally, both countries saw a decrease in
transport, food and drink spending but a slightly rose for other patterns.
In 1980, UK households spent 26% of their budgets on utility bills and 23%
for food and drink. Meanwhile, New Zealand counterparts experienced
higher percentages, 27% for utility bills and 29% for food and drink.
However, in 2008, both the UK and New Zealand witnessed a drop in food
and drink spending to 13% and 25% respectively.
There was a 7% growth in terms of leisure cost in the UK and 1% fall in New
www.zandienglish.ir

Zealand throughout the 28-year period. Likewise, transport payment was
reduced slightly to 14% for the UK and 16% for New Zealand. By contrast,
the other patterns rose to 11% for both nations.
171 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The Pie chart illustrates the percentage of different categories that each
family paid in the UK and New Zealand in two years, 1980 and 2008.
Overall, the proportion of Leisure was the highest in the UK while in New
Zealand it belonged to Utility bills. In the UK, there was a significant change
in the percentage of Leisure and Food and Drink whereas it was Food and
drink and Utility bills in New Zealand. The remaining categories had a small
difference.
In 1980, Leisure accounted for the largest proportion in the UK with 27%
while in New Zealand, Food and drink were by far much more than the others
with 29%. At the same time, household spending on Transport and Utility
bills in New Zealand was more than those in the UK (15% and 26% in New
Zealand with 17% and 27% in the UK). Other patterns in both countries were
in the same proportion with 9%.
In 2008, Leisure kept the highest percentage in the UK with 34% while there
was a significant change in New Zealand that made Utility become the largest
proportion of 31%. It was also shown on the chart that the percentage of Food
and drink in the UK decreased dramatically and it just accounted for 13%
while the figure for New Zealand was 25%. In terms of Transport, Household
in New Zealand spent 2% more than their counterparts in the UK. Finally, the
percentage of two countries in other patterns was at the same number with
11%.
220 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 4
The Table below shows the results of a survey that asked 6800 Scottish
adults (aged 16 years and over) whether they had taken part in different
cultural activities in the past 12 months.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
The table gives information about the proportion of people in/ belonging to
three groups of age joining cultural activities within the last 12 months and
the general trend of these activities in Scotland.
IIEE
Overall, it is noticeable that adults aged from 16 to 24 tend to be more
engaged in almost every fields of culture, while those aged from 25 to 44
seem to be interested in entertaining performance. Similarly, people aged
from 45-74 participated more in craft activities which require less energy and
are suitable for them.
It is apparent that 16 to 24-year-old adults had the dominant proportion of
almost activities, particularly performance and visual art with the highest
percentage among three groups, at 35% and 30% respectively. For the group
aged from 25 to 44, cultural performance activities were also the most
appealing within the group, although the percentage of adults who
participated in this field was slightly lower than the figure for the group aged
www.zandienglish.ir

16 to 24, at 22%. In addition, merely 6% of the participants from this group
joined cultural writing.
By contrast, the group of adults aged 45 to 74 had the lowest proportion of
adults participating in most of the activities. However, 22% of the participant
from this group taking part in craft activities, which was the highest number,
compared to groups aged from 25 to 44 and from 16 to 24, at 17% and 11%
accordingly. For the overall proportion of participant in all fields,
performance received the most attention with 22% of adults of all ages,
whereas a mere of 6% of participant joined the computer based activity.
220 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 5
The charts below show the proportions of British students at one
university in England who were able to speak other languages in
addition to English, in 2000 and 2010.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The pie charts illustrate 6 different categories in terms of language which
were spoken by British students at a UK university in 2000 and 2010.
Overall, Spanish only accounted for the greatest proportion in both years
respectively. Additionally, it is obvious that there was an increase in the
www.zandienglish.ir

number of students speaking Spanish, another language and two other
languages whereas German only, French only and no other language
witnessed a reduction.
In 2000, Spanish only was the primary source of language with precisely
30%, after 10 years, its figure went up to 35%, which was also the highest
point in 2010. Over the 10-year period, there was a marked rise in the figure
for students who spoke another language by 5% to reach 20%, remaining as
the third position in the year 2010. Covering for 10%, after 10 years, the
proportion of students who were able to speak two other languages increased
slightly, climbing to 15% in the year 2010.
In terms of French only, its percentage experienced a smooth decrease, from
15% to 10% in 2000 and 2010 respectively. Furthermore, there was a
considerable fall in the figure for students who were not capable of speaking
any other language besides English, falling to 10% in 2010 from 20% in the
year 2000. With a notable exception of having no change, German only
remained the same figure throughout the period of 10 years, at 10%.
219 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The pie charts compare the changes in the percentages of monolingual, four
groups of bilingual and trilingual in an English university in two years: 2000
and 2010.
Overall, people who can speak Spanish besides English accounted for the
largest proportions while German spoken students made up for the smallest
percentages in two years surveyed.
On the one hand, in 2000, the proportion of students speaking Spanish
additionally was largest with 30%, which was 10% more than the second
group-English only. As the same proportion of students who spoke both
French and English as another language bilingual students with 15%.
Analogously, German only and two other languages showed the same
percentages with 10%.
On the other hand, in 2010, the proportions of bilinguals who could speak
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Spanish, another language and two other languages increased 5% further for
each category which were 35%, 20%, and 15% respectively. Consequently,
the percentage of monolinguals and French speakers remained a half and
10% respectively while the percentage for German only leveled off at 10%.
169 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 6
The bar chart below shows shares of expenditures for five major
categories in the United States, Canada, the United Kingdom, and Japan
in the year 2009.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart illustrates data on the percentage of the living expenses of
people in the US, the UK, Canada, and Japan; which falls into 5 different
categories, namely Food, Housing, Transportation, Healthcare, and Clothing.
These figures were recorded in 2009.
Overall, housing was the most common expenditure among these 4 countries.
In contrast, people spent the really small amount of money on healthcare and
clothing.
In terms of food purchasing, Japanese spent more money than three
remaining countries. Food bought by UK citizens was less than Japanese by
5%, whereas the United States and Canada stood at around 14% and 15%
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
respectively. According to the second consumption category, the United
States had the greatest proportion of people whose purchases were mainly on
accommodation, and Canada was at the lowest point in this category.
Additionally, Canada had the highest number of people spending on means of
transportation (precisely 20%) whereas Japan is half of that in Canada.
In connection to healthcare, the United States had the most people to put
oomm
money in (approximately 7%), however, the number of that in the United
Kingdom was noticeably minimal with less than 3% of people. The purchases
.c.c
of these for countries were slightly different, which the UK’s citizens and
Canada spent a little bit higher than 5% while two remaining countries stood
rrss
at the relatively same rate at around 4%.
ttttee
218 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
aa
The bar chart compares the amount of money spent on different categories in
five countries during the year 2009.
SSMM
Overall, it is clear that housing and transportation were by far the most
common expenditure in the five countries.
LLTT
In terms of housing, the figure for the US was 26%, which was 2% higher
than that of the UK and the percentage of Canada and Japan’s spending on
this category were almost the same, at 22% and 24% respectively. In contrast,
IIEE
around 28% of Japan’s expenditure used on food, followed by the UK with
20%, Canada with 15% and the US with 14%.
The amount of money spent on transportation in Canada was exactly 20%,
doubling the figure for Japan (10%) and a little higher compared to the US
(18%) and the UK (15%). However, there were no significant differences in
the proportions of the outgoings in health care and clothing, with the
approximate figures of 3-8 % and 4-7% respectively.
160 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 7
The illustrations show how chocolate is produced.
The diagram provides information about the process of producing chocolate.

Overall, there are ten stages in the whole chocolate producing process,
beginning with the growing of cacao tree and ending with the production of
chocolate.
Firstly, cacao trees are grown in South America, Africa, and Indonesia until
they have ripe red pods. At that time, the pods are harvested and the white
coca beans are taken out before being fermented. At the next stage, they are
placed in a large tray to dry by the heat of the sun. After coca beans are
packaged in big sacks, they are delivered by train and lorry to the factory.
Those beans are then roasted at a high temperature of 350 Celsius degrees at
the seventh step. Next, they are crushed by the grinder to get rid of the outer
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
shells. In the final stage, the inner part of the beans is pressed and the entire
process concludes with liquid chocolate generated.
159 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 8
The diagrams below show the life cycle of a species of large fish called
the salmon.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The flow chart indicates the information on the life cycle of salmon which is
a species of large fish.
Overall, there are three primary stages in the life of salmon, starting from a
newborn salmon called “salmon eggs” and ending with the “adult salmon”
The adult salmons travel from the ocean into the slow-moving upper river in
order to give birth to their offspring, which lie under reeds and small stones.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
After 5 to 6 months, the salmon eggs become “fry”. The fries, which are 3-8
centimeters long, live in the lower river where the flow is fast in
approximately 4 years.
After that, the fries grow up and transform into “smolt” which is 12-15 cm
long. Smolts travel to the ocean and live there in another 5 years, then
become the adult salmon which is 70-76 cm in length. The new cycle starts
birth to the new generation.

oomm
when the adult salmon come back to the river where they were born and give
164 words
.c.c
MODEL ANSWER 2:
rrss
ttttee
The picture illustrates the biological life cycle of salmons.
Overall, fry, which emerges from eggs in the water of the river, pass through
aa
a number of phrases to mature into adult salmons.
Initially, adult salmons lay eggs at the bottom of stones and reeds at the upper
SSMM
rivers that have slow currents before these salmons die. After about from 5 to
6 months, eggs hatch and become fry, which has 3 cm to 8 cm long. The
second stage is the moving of fry from Upper River to Lower River through
LLTT
the waterfall. These fries spend approximately 4 years living in here to grow
as smolts with the length between 12 cm and 15 cm.
IIEE
After that, smolts follow along with fast currents of lower rivers and go ahead
to the open sea. Subsequently, it takes about 5 years for smolts to mature as
adult salmons before these trouts move back to Upper River to prepare for a
new life cycle.
161 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 9
The chart below shows the proportions of graduates from Bluesky
University in 2006 entering different employment sectors.
The pie chart gives information about the percentages of different working
areas involving by Bluesky University’s graduates in 2006.
Overall, service industries were the sectors that were chosen by most of the
graduates. Likewise, people did not often work in sport, charity, and civil
services with a small percentage in these areas.
In 2006, students who graduated from Bluesky University rarely worked in
the sport with only 0, 1 percent. Besides, the charity also witnessed the nearly
smallest figure for employee choosing working in this sector. On the other
hands, civil service, the arts/entertainment/ media, and science & technology
accounted similar small portion.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Looking back at the chart, it was obvious that service industries and
manufacturing industry were sectors which were the highest proportions with
33 percent and 16.3 percent, respectively. Nevertheless, 12.1 percent
graduates worked in politics and government sector. More importantly, it was
education that attracted a lot of graduates with 14.7 percent.
155 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 10
The graph below gives information from a report in 2010 about the use
of energy in Australia since 1980 with projections until 2030.
The line graph illustrates change energy consumption in Australia between

1980 and 2030. The energy is divided into 5 types and it has different trends.
Overall, 5 types of energy have upward trend during the period 1980-2010
and it can be seen that this trend is predicted to continue to increase until
2030.
In 1990, both natural gas and oil have trend gradual decline in turns was 30
billion units and 28 billion units. Coal has trend rose slightly was about 28
billion units. Solar and nuclear have equal was about 4 billion units. It can be
seen that in 2010 natural gas dropped to 2 billion compared to in 2000, 4
types other rose slightly.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
In 2030, projections show the usage oil energy will hit about 48 billion by
2030. Although, coal starts the graph much lower was about 16 billion units
and natural gas was about 20 billion units but they hope that 2 this types will
rise 31 and 25 billion units respectively. Meantime they expect that solar and
nuclear reach 7 and 8 billion unit respectively.
180 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 11
The process gives information about how milk is produced involving about
eight major steps.
It is clear that the first stage takes place on the farm while others are taken
mainly at the dairy.
It is necessary that cows be fed on the large glass in order to produce milk.
Then, in the initial stage, people utilize a kind of milking machine with the
intention of milking cows, which usually happens twice a day. After this
stage is completed, milk is often cooled and then preserved in refrigerators so
that it can remain fresh for longer time. The following step is when drivers
deliver milk tankers to dairy on a regular basis.
By this stage, workers have two options of producing milk to serve users. On
the one hand, milk can be made into a variety of products such as cheese,
cream, and butter; on the other hand, it could also be pasteurized and
carefully packaged for the purpose of drinking. The final stage is when
supermarkets as well as shops display milk and sell it to customers.
178 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 12
Process: Life cycle of a frog
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
MM
In general, the process includes a series of stages like a life cycle of a frog.
SS
There are seven steps involving in the process which begins with the laying
of eggs and finishes with the adult frog.
LLTT
Initially, a female adult frog lays a lot of eggs into the water where they will
hatch into small embryos at the next stage. These little creatures, which are
IIEE
called tadpoles afterward, will start appearing tails and grow bigger and
bigger after a period of time. At the fourth stage, the tadpoles begin having
small front legs after a breakthrough.
Subsequently, after having fully developed the remain behind legs and the
respiratory system, these tadpoles can now breath in the water and move to
live on land at the sixth phase. Finally, after going through an appearance
transformation, the tadpole frogs lose their tails and become the adult frogs.
151 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 13
The flowchart illustrates the production of colored plastic paper clips in
a small factory.
Write a report for a university tutor describing the production process.
The diagram shows the process of producing colored plastic paper clips in a
factory.
Overall, there are four main stages in the process, beginning with the melting
of plastic and ending with the complete products are packaged and delivered
to the public.
To begin with, plastic is melted and then it is categorized into three
distinctive moulds in terms of red, blue and yellow. After being categorized,
all these three kinds of melted plastic are gone through a quality test, at which
they are checked for strength by a machine. Besides, there will be a rejection
for those which are not qualified.
The process continues with the sorting manually of three colored molten
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
plastic into separate features: mixed colors and single colors. The process
concludes with the packing and dispatching of the perfect colored paper clips
after being tested a second time about the quality of color mixture or single.
152 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 14
The table below shows the results of surveys in 2000, 2005 and 2010
about one university.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The table describes how satisfied students were with different aspects of a
university in three years 2000, 2005, 2010.
Overall, most aspects gained increasing satisfaction among students over ten
years. It was print resources that consistently ranked first in the number of
students giving good ratings.
To be specific, print resources had the most positive evaluation with figures
varying from 87% to 89% during the period. Likewise, students were quite
happy with teaching quality, giving increasingly good ratings from 65% in
2000 to a high of 69% at the end of the period. Strikingly, the most
significant improvement was noticed in electronic resources. For example,
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
while only 45% of students giving thumbs-up in 2000, roughly half of the
figure for print resources, the percentage almost doubled and equaled that of
print resources at a high point of 88% in the final year.
In contrast, the university witnessed a gradual drop in students’ satisfaction
for a range of modules offered from 32% to 27% over the decade,
representing a difference of 5%. It is noticeable that only in buildings or
of 77%.
oomm
teaching facilities did the figures remain unchanged at a relatively high point
193 words
.c.c
MODEL ANSWER 2:
rrss
ttttee
The table illustrates the consequences of surveys about different fields of a
university in 2000, 2005 and 2010.
aa
Overall, while the print resources were given the highest points during the
period given, the number of modules were offered for students had the lowest
points.
SSMM
As can be seen on the table, 65% of students agreed about the good quality of
education in the university in 2000 while there were around 87% and 45% of
LLTT
students gave good points on print and electronic resources respectively. The
proportion of students considered the good ratings on educated quality and
print resources rose slightly during the periods and reach 69% and 88% in
IIEE
2010 in the order. Compared to electronic resources which increased
significantly from 2000 to 2005 and scored 88% at the end of 2010.
The range of modules offered was recorded as the lowest rate counting by
students which was at 32% in 2000, the figure dropped slightly from 2000 to
2010 which was precisely at 27% in 2010. Meanwhile, the proportion of
student gave good rates on building and teaching facilities remained as
constant at 77% throughout the periods.
188 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 15
The two figures below show the rate of criminal convictions among men
and women of different ages in the UK and the proportion of male and
female prison inmates in the British prison system.
The two chart provided represent the status of prison inmates in the UK.
While the first data indicates the rate of offenders between sexes, the second
figure shows the difference of criminal convictions between man and woman
of different ages.
It is clear that in the UK, the percentages of male and female criminals
significantly differed. The rate of criminal convictions of male outweighed
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
that of females at every age.
Aged 10 to 20, the rate of convictions in the UK increases from 2% by male
and 0% by female and peaked at the age of 20, with 16% and 4%
respectively. At age 20 onwards, the convictions rate tended to fall gradually.
The subsequent decades see a dramatic decrease in the rate of the offender at
both sexes, accounting for 8% and 1% by man and woman at 45 age –
slipped to mere 2% and 0% at 60 age.
oomm
Besides, the remaining pie chart shows that 96 percent of all prisoners are
men while only 4 percent are women.
.c.c
170 words
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 16
The following bar chart shows the different modes of transport used to
travel to and from work in one European city in 1960, 1980 and 2000.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart illustrates 4 different categories in terms of means of
transportation used to reach to or from offices in a European city from 1960
to 2000.
Overall, there was a dramatic increase in the use of car whereas bus, bike and
foot witnessed a marked decrease. Additionally, it is obvious that the
proportion of people who used cars was higher than those of busé, bikes and
foot in the end of the period.
From 1960 to 2000, there was a significant increase in the percentage of
travellers using cars. In 1960, just about 7% of people used cars, however,
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
after 40 years, its figure experienced a considerable growth of approximately
34% to reach 41%, which was the peak of the whole bar chart. In terms of
buses, its proportion experienced a fluctuation during the 40-year period,
from around 18.5% in 1960 to 26% in 1980 before reaching its plateau of
nearly 17% in the year 2000.
Over the period of 40 years, the proportion of bike commuters decreased
oomm
dramatically, from exactly 30% to nearly 7.5% in 1960 and 2000
respectively. Furthermore, there was a noticeable reduction in the figure for
34% in the starting year 1960.

.c.c
people who walked, falling to nearly 10% of the total in the year 2000 from
213 words
rrss
ttttee
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The bar chart described the proportion of commuters in four type of
aa
transportation in every 20 years from 1960 to 2000.
MM
It is clear that the percentage of train and car users increased over the given
period. By contrast, that of tube and bus decreased after 40 years.
SS
In 1996, bus was the most popular transportation with nearly 38% users while
LLTT
car was rarely used with the number of users less than 8%. Two decades
later, the popularity of car soared up by approximately 15%, in contrast with
the rapid fall of that of bus to only below 28%. Throughout the remainder of
IIEE
the period, the figures for cars climbed up significantly to its peak at almost
37% and became the most popular among four types of transportation. In
contrary, the numbers of bus fell down dramatically to the bottom at only
15%.
Over the given period, the proportion of commuter of train inclined
considerably to 27 % in 1980 and felt down slightly to only 22%. That of
tube experienced conversely movement which slightly declined by nearly 5%
to 22% and recovered to 25% in the final years.
189 words
MODEL ANSWER 3:
www.zandienglish.ir

The bar chart compares the proportion of travelers commuting to work by
four separate types of transport in three years 1960, 1980 and 2000.
Overall, it is clear that there were considerable fluctuations in the percentage
of travelers commuted to work by these transports. Car experienced the most
notable increasing trend, while the other three means of transport decreased
significantly throughout the period shown.
In 1960, travel on foot was the most popular means of transport in the
European city, accounted for 33%. There was a dramatic increase in the total
number of travelers used cars to almost 23% in 1980 - compared to 5% in
1960.The proportion of commuters who preferred using bus rose steadily in
1980, standing at around 25. By contrast, the figure for cycling and walking
to go to work fell to 20% and over 15%, respectively in 1980.
In 2000, European witnessed a remarkable growth of utilizing car, reaching
the peak at 35%. Meanwhile, the proportion of those who travelled by bike in
2000 was one-fourth of that in 1980. Similarly, the figure of people using bus
was at its initial point in this year. Lastly, only 8% of people went to work on
foot in 2000.
199 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 17
The graph below shows relative price changes for fresh fruits and
vegetables, sugars and sweets, and carbonated drinks between 1978 and
2009.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
MODEL ANSWER 1:
IIEE
The line graph provided compares the price changes of each fresh fruits and
vegetables, sugar and sweets, carbonated drinks, and consumer price index
from 1978 to 2009.
Overall, it is evident that all changes increased gradually over the 30 year
period and reached their highest point by the year 2009.
Between 1975 and 1985, the price change of fresh fruits and vegetables was
www.zandienglish.ir

below 100, which was approximately equal to the change in the consumer
price index. Throughout the remainder of the period, the figure for fresh
fruits and vegetables, which was always higher than consumer price index,
grew quickly and peaked to 350.
By contrast, the change of consumer price index rose more significantly than
in both the sugar and sweets and carbonated drinks. The year 1983 saw a
steady increase to 100 for all of them and over 20 years later they grew up
continually to reach 200 for consumer price index and sugar and sweets and
150 for the carbonated drinks, these were also known as their highest points.
172 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The line graph shows changes in the price of three different food product
groups, and the overall trend for consumer price index over a period of 30
years.
Overall, prices for the three food product groups increased despite
fluctuations over the period shown. Also, only the rise in the price of fresh
fruits and vegetable was significantly higher than the increase in the general
consumer index.
It can be seen that all the lines on the graph had the same starting figure in
1979. Over this 30-year period, consumer price index increased gradually
from about 60 in 1979 to over 200 in 2009. Prices for sugar and sweets and
carbonated drinks also followed similar trends, but they were consistently
below the consumer price index after 198 1. After minor fluctuations, the
number of sugar and sweets reached 200, which was 50 higher than the figure
for carbonated drinks in 2009.
In addition, fresh fruits and vegetables experienced a much sharper rise in
price, particularly after 1985. From the same beginning of roughly 60 at the
beginning of the period, the prices finished at about 330 on the index in 2009,
which was the highest figure recorded in the chart.
199 words
MODEL ANSWER 3:
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
The line graph illustrates changes in prices of three different product groups
from 1979 to 2009, and the overall trend in the consumer-price index over the
period shown.
Overall, it is clear that prices of all groups increased during the 30-year
period, only the figure for fresh fruits and vegetables was significantly higher
than the consumer-price index for the most years.
o mm
All the lines on the graph had the same starting point in 1979. The period
o
1979-2009 witnessed a dramatic increase in the price for fresh fruits and
.c.c
vegetables from about 60 in 1979 to over 300 in 2009. The number for
ss
consumer-price index rose steadily by 150 over the period of 80 years.
rr
The trends of sugar and sweets and carbonated drinks were similar. Although
ttttee
these prices also rose, they were consistently below the consumer-price index
after 1987. The figure for sugar and sweets was 200 in 2009, which was 50
higher than that for carbonated drinks at 150.
160 words aa
MODEL ANSWER 4:
SSMM
The line graph gives information about changes in the price of three different
LL
USA from 1978 to 2009.TT
food product groups and the overall trend of consumer-price index in the
IIEE
Overall, the price for all three kinds of food and drink increased over the
period shown. However, only the increase in the price of fresh foods and
vegetable was considerably higher than that in the consumer-price index.
All the lines on the graph had the same starting figure of about 60 in 1979.
Eight years later, the price for these three types of food and drink and
consumer-price index rose slightly by 40 each. However, after the year 1987,
the price of fresh foods and vegetables overtook the consumer-price index
with the highest data for the rest of the given period, rising significantly to
330 by the year 2009.
After 1987, there was also an increase in the consumer-price index, which
rose steadily to 210 in 2009. While sugars and sweets and carbonated drinks
witnessed a growth during those years, their prices were consistently lower
www.zandienglish.ir

than the consumer-price index after 1987. In particular, after many minor
fluctuations, the figure for sugars and sweets increased to exactly 200 by
2009, higher than the final figure for carbonated drinks at around 150.
210 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 18
The table below shows the hours of leisure time spent by people in
different age groups in Someland.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
The table compares leisure time enjoyed by selected categories of 7 different
IIEE
age groups in Someland each year.
Overall, it is evident that Someland people spend a lot of leisure time on
watching TV or videos, whereas going to the cinema ranks the last. In
addition, teens had far more leisure time than people of other age groups.
To begin with, teenager spends 1200 hours on watching TV and videos,
followed by people in 70s+ group with 1100 hours per year. Time
consumption of other age groups on this activity is from 400-700 hours every
year. Besides, socializing with 4 or more people is preferred by people in 30s
or more with 1200 hours, compared to 300 hours of young people. In
contrast, young people spend 700 hours per year on socializing with 4 or
more people, in the meantime, time expenditure of the 30s and over group is
just 175 hours.
www.zandienglish.ir

Individual exercise takes up 200 hours per year of the 30s or 40s group every
year. However, people in 50s and 60s group spend the least time on this
activity with 50-75 hours. Meanwhile, ranking the first in exercise is teens
with 400 hours per year, followed by 20s, 30s, 40s age groups with 350,
200,150 hours respectively. On the other hand, just between 25-150 hours per
year is spent by all groups to go to the cinema.
220 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 19
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
The graph shows information on the percentage of people who went to the
LLTT
cinema in 4 groups in the UK between 1990 and 2010.
Overall, the figure of people went to cinema rose gradually over the period of
20 years. Although the four trends were similar in terms of a general rise, the
graph.
IIEE
rate of people aged 44-54 reached its highest point during the whole line
In 1990, the smallest number of people going to the cinema of group age 14-
24 was 15% but the biggest that one group age 44-54 was about 38%. In
2000, 4 groups fall sharply in both age 34-44 and 44-54 declined to remain
above 30% while age 14-24 and 24-34 remained below 30%.
By 2010, the percentage of attendee cinema was highest in 44-55 was about
52%. Both age 14-24 and 34-44 rose slightly in 2010. However, age 24-34
went to cinema remained unchanged about 33% compared to 2005.
156 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 20
This is a bar graph of the average age at first marriage of both men and
women in the US.
The bar graph presents the mean age when people get married for the first
time, separated by gender in the US from 1900 to 1987.
It is clear that at the first marriage, the men are much older than the women in
the shown period and these ages of men are higher than 23 years old whilst
the figure for women is almost lower than 23.
In 1990, at about 26 years old, the men decided to leave a single life. 30 years
later, the men intended to get married earlier than before, the mean age at first
marriage in 1930 is 24.2. The figure remained relatively same in the
following decade, reached 24.4 at 1940 before declined sharply in the next 10
years, falling to 23.3 in 1950. Throughout the remainder of given period, the
average age at first marriage of men saw a gradual increase, reached to 25.8
at the end of the period, 1987.
Having a relatively different trend, the mean age at first marriage for women
hardly changed from 1900 to 1930, at approximately 22. However, in the two
following decade, the figure dropped remarkably, going down to about 20.3
in 1940. At the end of period shown, there was also a quick going up about
the stated mean age, climbed nearly 26 in 1987.
219 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 21
The graph below shows the consumption of three spreads from 1981 to
2007.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
The line graph presents information on the consumption of three types of
2007.
IIEE
spreads – margarine, low fat and reduced spreads, and butter – from 1981 to
Overall, it is evident that all of three spreads saw the fluctuation in

consumption at different levels over the period of 26 years, therein, at the
outset margarine decreased slightly while butter increased inconsiderably,
and low fat and reduced spreads rose sharply.
In terms of margarine, it fell from nearly 90 grams to 80 grams in the 1981 –
1986 period prior to going up again to 100 grams in 1991. Then, the
consumption of margarine remained stable over the next 5 years and
commenced to fall steadily to 40 grams in 2007. Meanwhile, the amount of
butter experienced a small increase from over 140 grams to approximately
www.zandienglish.ir

160 grams in the first half of its decade. In the following years, it saw a sharp
decrease before reaching its lowest point at about 50 grams in 2007.
In regard to the quantity of consumed low fat and reduced spreads, it
underwent a substantial rise from about 10 grams to over 80 grams in the
1996 – 2001 period prior to declining slightly to about 70 grams in 2007.
201 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 22
The graph below shows the contribution of three sectors-agriculture,
manufacturing, and business and financial services- to the UK economy
in the twentieth century.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
TT
The bar chat illustrates data on the share of three economic sectors including
agriculture, manufacturing, business, and finance in the United Kingdom
LL
IIEE
Overall, the proportion of agriculture and manufacturing went down
significantly while the figure for business and finance witnessed a
considerable rise. In 2000, business and financial sector rose from almost
zero to the largest part of the UK economy.
In 1990, agriculture was the major contribution to the UK economy,
accounting for nearly 50%. By contrast, business and financial sectors were
at the smallest point, around 5%. Approximately 45% of economic
contribution in the UK came from manufacturing.
It is fully clear that the economic structure had changed dramatically during
the 20th century. In 2000, business and finance ranked first in the UK
economic contribution accordance with the substantial increasing throughout
www.zandienglish.ir

the century. In the meantime, manufacturing dipped rapidly to roughly 20%
by the year 2000. After a sudden surge to 52% in 1950, the percentage of
Agriculture had suffered a dramatic decline.
169 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 23
The graph shows Internet Usage in Taiwan by Age Group, 1998-2000.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
MODEL ANSWER 1 aa
SSMM
The bar chart gives information about the percentage of people using the
Internet in four age groups in Taiwan from 1998 to 2000.
LLTT
Overall, the 16-to-30-year-old using the Internet accounted for the highest
proportion, which was in contrast to the figure for those over 55 and under 15
IIEE
years old.
In 1998, 53% of the 16-30 year-olds made use of the Internet, reaching the
highest point, compared to 41% for people aged from 31 to 50. There were
2% of the youngest age group and 4% for those over 50 years using the
Internet, which were the lowest figures over the period.
In 1999, children under 15 years old and the elder had the same proportion,
which was 8%, whilst the 16-30 years old and the 31-50- year-old made up
In the next year, the figures for the 31-50 and 16-30 age groups decreased to
44% and 37% respectively in comparison with the rate of these both two age
groups in 1999. However, the percentage of Internet usage by people aged
www.zandienglish.ir

over 50 years old constituted 10%, which was 1% higher than the figure for
the youngest people.
192 words
MODEL ANSWER 2
Given is a bar chart concerning several aspects of four different age groups
which use the Internet in Taiwan from 1998 to 2000.
Overall, It is evident that adults group is most highly regarded in using the
Internet in comparison to others. It is also noted that, while adults group
followed a downward trend, children and elderly groups experienced an
upward tendency during the period.
As can be seen that, in 1998, the highest rate using the Internet was seen in
people who are between 16 and 30years old, which was 12% higher than that
of the second highest in the 31-50 age group. Additionally, the proportion of
older people in using the Internet was slightly higher than in children, with
A year later, in the different two age groups, 16-30 years old, and 31-50 years
old, the rates of people using the Internet decreased, from 53% to 45% and
41% to 39% correspondingly. Both of children and elderly groups witnessed
a significant increase in comparison to the previous time and both reached
8%.
In the last year, the figure of adult age group continued to decline, with 44%
of the age 16-30years old and 37% of the age 31-50 years old, whereas the
data of people who are less than 15 and over 50 years was a rise in using the
Internet in Taiwan, with 9% and 10% respectively.
220 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 24
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
The graphs demonstrate the percentages of men and women in full-time and
part-time jobs in 1973 and 1993.
LLTT
Overall, while part-time job proportions seemed to increase after 20 years,
the trend is opposite for full-time jobs.
IIEE
Regarding full-time jobs, the rates of boys and girls in the age group of 15-19
working full-time in 1973 at around 50%, which was higher than those in
1993, with only around one-third of males and one-fifth of females.
Subsequently, peaking at 25-29 age group with roughly four in five working
full-time, remaining stable until age 49, men percentages in both years
remarkably went down to just two in ten for the last age group. Similarly,
reaching its highest point at about 55% when being between 19 and 25 years
old, full-time female figures fluctuated and dropped to under 10% in the
oldest group.
As to part-time employment, there was a similar trend covering all age
groups in each graph. People at a part-time job in 1993 were three times in
man and almost four times in women greater than the rates of 1973. After
www.zandienglish.ir

some drops and significant fluctuations, a small minority of elderly people
above 65 in both genders worked in a part-time job in 1973 and 1993.
206 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 25
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
MODEL ANSWER 1:
aa
2001.
S MM
The line graph describes trends in average annual spending of Americans on
mobile phones and residential phone services over a period of 10 years since
S
LLTT
Overall, the figure of landline phone services expending went up dramatically
while a sharp decrease in the number of consumption of mobile phone
IIEE
services was recorded in the given period.
In 2001, Cell phone services over-whelmed residential phone services with
money spending on them were 700$ and nearly 200$ respectively. However,
over the next 5 years, the consumption of landline phone services went up
nearly twice as fast as the consumption of cell phone services went down.
The number of cell phone services witnessed a quick drop by around 150$
when the consumption of landline phone services soared up by 350$.
In 2006, United States consumer’s’ spending on both types of phone service
was equal at about 550$ per year. Since then, the figure of mobile phone
services continues to upsurge to its peak at about 760$ as the number of
residential phone services went down gradually to its bottom at 400$ in 2010.
www.zandienglish.ir

180 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The chart provides an overview of cell phone and residential phone services’
average year on by year spending from 2001 to 2010.
Overall, it can be clearly seen from the trend lines that there is an absolutely
high correlation between the developments of these telecommunication
services throughout the period.
According to the chart, cell phone services witnessed a steady increase from
200$ in 2001 to 550$ in 2006 in which year, the year in which the two trend
lines crossed. From there, the annual amount of spending on mobile phone
services kept climbing to higher milestones, marking at around 620$ in2007,
followed by 680$ and 700$ in 2008 and 2009 respectively, before peaking at
740$ at in the final year of that decade.
The consumption of residential phone services, on the other hand, showed an
unstoppable downward trend in the first decade of the 21st century from 700$
in 2001 to only around 400$ in 2010. The speed of decrease was quite a
stable year on by year, recording an average drop of 300$ annually.
175 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 26
The diagram illustrates the process that is used to manufacture bricks
for the building industry.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
The flow chart describes the production of bricks and how to deliver bricks to
the building industry.
Overall, it is clear that there are 7 main stages in the process of producing
bricks, beginning with clay excavation and ending with the delivery of the
bricks.
At the first stage, clay is dug by a digger. The process continues with getting
rid of the oversized pieces by putting clay on a metal grid so that small pieces
can drop onto a big roller. At the next stage, sand and water are added to the
www.zandienglish.ir

clay and then clay is put into a wire cutter or a mould to shape bricks. After
that, bricks are moved to a drying oven for 24 – 48 hours.
At the next step, bricks are brought into a kiln where they are heated at a
moderate temperature (200°C - 980°C). After that, bricks are continued to be
fired at a higher temperature (870°C - 1300°C). Bricks are then put into a
cooling chamber for 48 – 72 hours. At the final stage, bricks are packaged
and delivered to the customers.
182 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
Provided is the process revealing the way of how bricks are generated. All
the importantly fundamental details are listed below.
Overall, the diagram clearly shows that this process is carried out in seven
main stages, beginning with clay excavation and ending with the delivery of
the bricks to the customers.
First and foremost, clay is dug from deep under the earth by a giant digger.
After taking a certain amount of clay needed, it is sent to the factory for the
purpose of manufacturing bricks. Clay is put onto the metal grid and then
placed slowly onto the roller. At this session, clay is mixed together with
sand and water in the moulds or in the wire cutter in order to be perfectly
shaped.
Subsequently, the bricks are left in the drying ovens within approximately
from 24 hours to 48 hours. In this step, the bricks are first kilned at a
moderate temperature between 200OC to 980OC before heated one more
time at a higher temperature from 870 to 1300oC. After then, the bricks are
treated in a cooling chamber for 48 to 72 hours. Finally, the bricks are finally
usable and are ready for packing. Follow precisely these aforementioned
guidelines in order and the process will be successfully completed so as to
distribute to the buyers.
217 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 27
The graph below shows the number of university graduates in Canada
from 1992 to 2007.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
MODEL ANSWER 1:
IIEE
The line graph illustrates the figure for bachelors in two different genders in
Canada between 1992 and 2006.
Overall, the number of both male and female students graduated from
universities increased remarkably over the period shown. Although the two
genders were similar in terms of a gradual growth, the amount of graduated
female was higher than that of males.
In the 1992-1998 period, there was a wild fluctuation in the number of
females who graduated from Canadian universities, although it always
remained below 106,000 students. Throughout the remainder of the period,
Females experienced a considerable growth, climbing to nearly 150000
www.zandienglish.ir

students in the year 2006.
Over the same period, the amount of graduated male students varied less
significantly than female. From 1992-2000, Male witnessed a marked
variation from precisely 70000 students to 75000 students in 1992 and 2000
respectively, before reaching its peak of approximately 95000 students in
2006.
151 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The line graph compares the graduation rates between female and male
students of Canadian universities from 1992 to 2007.
In overall, the number of university graduates in Canada grew significantly
over the fifteen-year period. Furthermore, it can be seen that there was a
similar trend in female and male graduation rates, though the number of
women graduating was considerably higher than that of men.
Regarding the number of female graduates, it started at about 100,000 in
1995, after which it saw a slight increase by 5000 in the following five years.
Thereafter, the number dropped to the 1992’s figure in 1998 before it went up
considerably to (reach its highest level at) just under 150,000 at the end of the
period.
Turning to the number of male graduates, it witnessed similar growth pattern,
but at a slower pace. The figure for male graduates showed a small increase
from 70,000 to 76,000 in 1995. After a slight drop to 70,000 in 1998, the rate
fluctuated for a short duration in 3 years, followed by a rapid rise to its
highest peak at 95,000 in 2007.
184 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 28
The pie charts below show how dangerous waste products are dealt with
in three countries.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The charts compare the proportion of the trend in treating products wasted in
the Republic of Korea, Sweden, and the UK in terms of five different
categories.
Overall, it is clear that underground and incineration are the most popular
methods in all three countries. In addition, while the distributions of dealing
with dangerous waste products in the Republic of Korea and Sweden are
www.zandienglish.ir

represented similarly by three items, there are 4 ways to control harmful
materials in the UK.
Looking at the information in more details, it is noticeable that the most
popular way in the Republic of Korea is recycling, 69%, which ranks the
second in Sweden; however, it could not be seen in the structure of those in
the UK. Less than half as much, namely, 22%, the second option in the
Republic of Korea goes to burying waste underground. Surprisingly, in
Sweden and the UK, by far the greatest percentage goes to a method of the
underground, which make up 55% and 82% respectively.
In Sweden, the lowest figure for the decision of people to control harmful
material belongs to incineration, 20%. Likewise, there is a similar situation in
the Republic of Korea with incineration standing at 9%. Beside underground,
people in the UK choose to dump at the sea and chemical treatment, which
cannot be found in the remaining countries to deal with. The percentage of
those are exactly the same with 8%. Finally, incineration takes up 2% of the
people’s attention in the UK whenever they want to treat dangerous waste
products.
220 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The graphs give information about the different methods used to treat
harmful waste in the UK, the Republic of Korea and Sweden.
It is clear that the Republic of Korea recycles most of the dangerous waste
products. Meanwhile, the majority of hazardous materials in the UK and
Sweden are buried underground
Looking at the information in more detail, in the UK, 82 % of dangerous
waste products are buried in the ground. Meanwhile, only 22 % and 55 % of
this method are used to handle harmful waste in the Republic of Korea and
Sweden, respectively. Most of the hazardous materials in the Republic of
Korea are recycled, at 69 %, which is far more than the UK and Sweden, at
0% and 25%, respectively.
In Sweden, the proportion of hazardous materials treated by incineration
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
method was 20%, compared to 11% in the Republic of Korea and 2% in the
UK. The latter nation adopts some other measures to deal with dangerous
waste products, such as dumping at sea and chemical treatment, with the
same 8%. However, those solutions are not employed in Sweden and the
Republic of Korea.
189 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 29
The graph below shows changes in young adult unemployment rates in
The line graph compares the proportion of jobless people in London and the
rest of England over a period of 20 years, from 1993 to 2012.
Overall, while the unemployment rate of people aged 16-24 in both London
and the rest of England saw a generally increasing trend, there was a decrease
in the figures for the other two categories.
22% of people aged 16-24 in London were unemployed in 1993. Meanwhile,
the figure of the same age in the rest of England was lower by 5% at 17%. In
the first 7 years, both of them witnessed a fall by around 6%. After about
three years of remaining stable, there was a rise in both categories. In 2012,
jobless rates in London and the rest of England were 25% and 20%
respectively.
The overall unemployment rates in London and the rest of England started at
15% and 10% respectively. After a gradually decrease by approximately 5%,
the figures stabilized until 2008 when there was a slight rise. At the end of
the period, 8% of people in London were jobless, while 7% of those in the
rest of London suffered from unemployment.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
193 words
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 30
The charts show the percentage of sales and profits of a British company
by geographical area.
The two pie charts illustrate the proportion of sales and profits of a British
business in 4 different areas, including the UK, rest of Europe, the USA, and
rest of the world.
It is clearly shown that while sales and profits of USA and rest of the world
shared the same percentages, the other two showed some differences.
In the first chart, the sale in the UK is equal to that of the rest of Europe,
accounting for about 38%. Meanwhile, the profit gained in the rest of the UK
which is the highest figure compared to others is twice as much as in the UK.
In the second chart, the USA and the rest of the world together took up a
quarter of both sale and profit. While about 20% belonged to the USA, only
the percentage of sale and profit of the rest of the world was only 5%. It was
four times less than the USA and also the lowest figure.
164 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 31
The percentage of school-aged boys in two different age groups who
participated in 5 different sports in the UK in 2010.
Summarise the information by selecting and reporting the main feature and
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
MODEL ANSWER 1:
SSMM
The bar graph illustrates the portion of British schoolboys attending 5 sports
LLTT
activities in 2010, divided into 2 groups of age.
It can clearly be seen from the graph that a vast majority of boys in both two
IIEE
groups played football, whereas swimming attracted the lowest number of
participants. In addition, there are more boys of younger age group
participating in each of sports, except for swimming which is the same.
Of the five types of sports, football, cricket, and basketball, following this
order, had an obvious disproportion between the age brackets, in which the
younger played sports noticeably more than their elder brothers. In details,
just under 90 percent of boys aged from 6 to 11 chose football to join, which
nearly doubled cricket (45%) and was more than twice as much as basketball
(35%). The other age group, in all these 3 sports games had about 10% fewer
players.
Similarly, drawing the attention of a small quantity of between-6-and-11-
year-old schoolboys, the figures of swimming and rugby were slightly under
www.zandienglish.ir

and above 20%, a fourth of the highest data, and a half of the second highest.
187 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The table gives information about the popularity of various sports between
two age groups of boys in term of participant percentage in the United
Kingdom in the year of 2010.
As can be seen clearly from the table, the younger boy was more active with
the higher proportion was seen in most of categories and football was the
most favorite sport in both groups while swimming was the least.
In 2010, the vast majority of boy enjoyed taking part in football with 87% for
6 to 11 age group and 78% for the other group, respectively. Cricket was
second most enjoyed sport in both groups. It accounts for 45% of elementary
school boys and above one third for other. There was also more than one-
third of the younger age group enjoyed basketball (35%) whereas the figure
for 12 to 16-year-old boys was 25%.
Only 23% of 6 to 11 years old England boy played rugby. The number was
2% lower in the same sport for the older group. The only resemblance in two
groups was seen in swimming sector with 19% participants which were also
the least popular sport among those on the table.
194 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 32
The graph below shows the demand for electricity in England during
typical days in winter and summer. The pie chart shows how electricity
is used in an average English home.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The given line graph illustrates the electricity requisition between two
seasons. Meanwhile, the pie chart gives information about the usages of
electricity in an average English family.
Overall, people living in England use a larger amount of electricity in winter
than in summer and it is spent mostly on heating devices.
www.zandienglish.ir

According to the graph, in winter typical days, about 34000 units of
electricity is used and this figure is double the summer’s one, which is only
17000. Moreover, there is a wild fluctuation between 24 hours in a day and
this demand seems to be highest in late night.
As can be seen from the chart, heating rooms and water accounts for 52.5%
of the total electricity usages. On the other hand, the percentages of lighting,
TV, radio and vacuum cleaners, food mixers, electric tools make up only
15% of the total and they become the lowest proportions. Finally, 17.5% of
ovens, kettles and washing machines are used in an average English
household, making them the modest data.
169 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The line graph illustrates the consumption of electricity in a typical day in
cold and hot season, while the pie chart indicates the distribution of
electricity of some main domestic equipment used in a common English
home/ household.
Overall, electricity demand in the winter was much higher than summer and
the main purpose of using electricity in English home was heating.
First of all, it can be clearly seen from the line graph that the peak hours
using electricity in cold season was from 21 to 22, at approximately 49,000
units, while that of the hot season was from 13 to 14, at exactly 20,000 units.
In contrast, the time from 6 to 9 AM used the lowest amount of electricity in
English home/ family of both seasons when the figure made up of merely
15,000 units of electricity in summer and nearly doubled in winter.
According to the pie chart, there were more than a haft of electricity
consuming used for heating rooms and water. Meanwhile, the rest of pie
allocated among three categories, with 17.5 percent for ovens, kettles,
washing machines, and 15 percent equally for the two remaining forms.
192 words
MODEL ANSWER 3:
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
The provided line graph illustrates the changing patterns for the everyday
requirement of electricity in the winter and summer, whereas the following
pie chart reveals insight into the 4 main purposes for electricity utilization in
households.
Overall, as observed from the first graph, surveyees have more significant
demand for electricity in the winter than that in the summer. Meanwhile, the
heating.
oomm
second graph indicates the predominant usage of electricity intended for
.c.c
A more detailed glance at the line graph reveals sharp fluctuations in the
ss
electricity consumption in the winter, compared with that in the summer.
rr
Starting at roughly 35000 units, the winter daily requirement fluctuates
ttttee
between 30 000 and 40000 units during the period from 0 to 9 a.m. This is
followed by a steady increase before a surge to 48000 units after 21 p.m.
Meanwhile, the figure for summer demand experiences similar patterns
aa
between 10000 and 20000 units throughout the day, with an occasional rise to
20000 units at 13 p.m and 23 p.m.
SSMM
Accounting for roughly half of the reported data with 52.5%, electricity
proves to be mostly consumed for heating purpose. What’s more, a similar
TT
pattern is observed for domestic devices and entertaining equipment, in
which 15% of the surveyees admit using electricity for household necessities
LL
such as, vacuum cleaners, food mixers, electric tools and recreational
IIEE
purpose, namely lighting, TV, radio. Likewise, 17.5% demand electricity for
vacuum cleaners, food mixers, and electric tools.
219 words
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 33
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The first chart illustrates four main reasons which lead to the decrease in
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
productivity of agricultural land and the table shows causes of land
degradation in North America, Europe, and Oceania during the 1990s.
Overall, the pie chart indicates that over-grazing is the major factor that
causes the worldwide land degradation. Meanwhile, the table shows that the
highest proportion of total land degraded was in Europe.
o mm
It is clear from the percentages shown in the pie chart that over-grazing
account for the largest percentage of 35%. Deforestation and over-cultivation
o
follow closely with 30% and 28% respectively. The lowest figure is other
causes with only 7%.
.c.c
rrss
Europe headed the table for deforestation, at 9.8% whereas the other two
regions recorded the percentages of less than 2%. Besides, 7.7% of land in
ttttee
Europe was degraded due to over cultivation compared with 3.3% in North
America and zero in Oceania. Over-grazing was responsible for 11.3% of
land degraded in Oceania, which doubled the proportion of Europe. It is
aa
interesting to note that North America had the lowest total land degraded with
M
only 5%.
180 words
SS M
MODEL ANSWER 2:
LLTT
The charts illustrate various reasons for unproductive land in the world and
some specific regions namely North America, Europe, Oceania in the 1990s.
IIEE
It is clear that over-grazing was the main cause of worldwide land
degeneration. Also, the land was damaged most in Europe during the 1990s.
Excessive grazing made up 35% of land regression around the world which
was the highest figure in 4 categories. This was 5% higher than the
proportion of deforestation and 7% more than the percentage of over-
cultivation. The lowest figure for global degenerated land constituting one-
fifth of the highest rate was other reasons.
In the second chart, the percentage of total land degraded by all three reasons
was greatest in Europe (23%). By contrast, North America had the least rate
of damaged land (5%). Moreover, in each the region, a different cause would
account for the majority of land in that area. Specifically, in Oceania, the land
www.zandienglish.ir

was degraded most in comparison with other two continents by over-grazing
with 11.3%. However, in North America, the primary reason was over-
cultivation while the land of Europe was degraded mostly by deforestation.
183 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 34
The chart provides the research on the number of time the Australian
adolescents ate fast food annually in twenty-five years, from 1975 to
2000.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
MODEL ANSWER 1:
SSMM
LLTT
The graph illustrates the consumption of fast food by Australian boys and
girls over the period from 1975 to 2000.
IIEE
Overall, the popularity of fish and chips consumed by teenagers decreased
sharply while the popularity of pizza and hamburgers rose over the period.
The consumption of fish and chips suffered an erratic fluctuation between
1975 and 1985. Starting at 100 times eaten per year in 1975, the proportion of
fish and chips consumed by boys and girls reduced by a fifth in 1980 and
then increased steadily to nearly 98 times eaten per year in 1985. Over the
next 15-year period, there was a rapid fall in the consumption of fish and
chips, ending at 40 times in 2000.
In contrast, during this 25-year period, the consumption of pizza and
hamburgers followed an upward trend. After a tenth fold surge in the first 20
years of the period, the hamburger’s figure remained stable about until 2000.
Similarly, the consumption of pizza achieved an impressive rise and overtook
www.zandienglish.ir

the consumption of fish and chips in 1990. Over the next 5 five years, it
continued to rise moderately before leveling off around 82 times eaten per
year.
195 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The line graph gives information about the amount of fast food including
pizza, fish and chips, and hamburgers consumed by Australian teenagers
during a 25- year period from 1975 to 2000.
In general, the consumption of fish and chips declined over the period,
whereas the amount of pizza and hamburgers eaten increased.
As you can see from the graph, the most popular food among Australian
teenagers in 1975 was fish and chips with 100 times eaten per year. This was
far higher than the consumption of pizza and hamburgers, which was
approximately 5 times per year. However, the consumption of fish and chips
slightly decreased over 25 years and reached the bottom at 40 times a year,
apart from a small rise from 1980 to 1985.
In contrast to this, Australian teenagers began to eat more pizza and
hamburgers that made the times they eat them increased year on year. The
amount of consumption of both of them rose sharply from 1975 to 1995 and
after that, it remained unchanged for 5 years until 2000. As a result, in 2000,
pizza was eaten the most times with 100 and hamburgers were eaten around
80 times.
195 words
MODEL ANSWER 3:
The line chart compares the frequency of consuming different types of fast
food by Australian teenagers per year.
Overall, fish and chips had the lowest number of times eaten in the last year,
while hamburgers and pizza experienced the fastest growth in the number of
times consuming.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
In 1975, the consumption of fish and chips was about 100 times. The figures
for hamburgers and pizza were lower, at about 10 times and 5 times
respectively. In 1985, whereas the number of times pizza and hamburgers
eaten increased constantly, the figure for fish and chips began/witnessed a
gradual fall. Around 95 times of fish and chips were consumed by Australian
teenagers, compared to about 85 times of hamburgers and only about 30
times of pizza.
oomm
The period from 1995 to 2000, the amount of both hamburgers and pizza
.c.c
stayed unchanged. Particularly, the number of times hamburgers eaten was
highest with 100 times per year, followed by about 85 times of pizza
rrss
consumption. At the same period, there was a notable decrease in the amount
of fish and chips consumed by 48 times compared to that in 1985.
186 words
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 35
The table below shows the number of visitors to Ashdown Museum
during the year before and the year after it was refurbished. The charts
show the result of surveys asking visitors how satisfied they were with
their visit, during the same two periods.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The table compares the information about how many guests went to visit
Ashdown Museum before and after the year of renovation. In addition, the
pie charts provide comparative data on the distribution of tourist’ satisfaction
in terms of five categories.
Overall, it is clear that there is an upward trend in the total number of visitors
to Ashdown Museum during the period of renovation. Moreover, it can be
seen from the pie charts that, thanks to the renovation, the percentage of very
satisfied and satisfied visitors increased while a significant decline was
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
reported in the proportion of the remaining items except for no response.
Looking at more details, it could be noticed from the table that the figure for
people who came to visit Ashdown Museum rose considerably from 74,000
to 92,000 in the first year after the innovation.
Turning to the pie charts, before the Museum was refurbished, the majority of
o mm
the tourists said that they were dissatisfied with the experience in the
Museum at, about 40% of the total. However, only 30% clients felt satisfied
o
and 5% of them had no feedback. Whereas, after renovation, most of the
.c.c
visitors had a feeling of satisfied and very satisfied with 40% and 35% of
ss
them respectively. While the number of clients who told that they were
rr
dissatisfied went through a remarkable decrease, there was the same situation
ttttee
with very dissatisfied visitors, from 10% to 5%. The figure for people who
had no response remained stable at 5%.
220 words
MODEL ANSWER 2: aa
SSMM
The table compares the number of sightseers coming to Ashdown Museum
and the pie charts illustrate five satisfactory levels before and after the
LLTT
repairing and upgrading period of Ashdown Museum.
Overall, the number of visitors increased considerably followed by the
increases of very satisfied and satisfied sightseers. Consequently, the
IIEE
unsatisfactory visitors dropped rapidly.
On the one hand, before the refurbishment, the number of visitors was 74,000
which involved 40% of the unsatisfactory visitor followed by 30% of
satisfied people. The proportion of people who were very dissatisfied with
the museum was 10% while there were only 15% of comers meeting their
requirements. Besides, there were 5% of people having no response.
On the other hand, after the renovation, the number of sightseers increased
dramatically by approximately 30,000 people. Moreover, the percentage of
satisfied people expanded to 40% while in terms of very satisfied comers,
there was a leap of 20%. As a result, the percentage of dissatisfied people
remained at 15% in comparison with only 5% of very unsatisfactory visitors.
www.zandienglish.ir

However, the percentage of people who had no response leveled off at the
same proportion with that in the pre-refurbishment period.
191 words
MODEL ANSWER 3:
The table gives information about how many people paid a visit to Ashdown
Museum while the pie charts illustrate visitors’ attitude towards the place.
The figures were collected during the year before and the year after the
museum’s refurbishment.
It is noticeable that after being refurbished, Ashdown Museum attracted more
visitors and their attitude towards it tended to be more positive.
During the year before refurbishment, Ashdown Museum had 74000 visitors.
However, there was a difference in the number of people who visited the
museum after it had been refurbished, with 92000 visitors, an 18000 increase.
We can see that the attitude of visitors toward Ashdown Museum changed
positively after the refurbishment of the museum. A clear evidence is that
35% of visitors said they were very satisfied with their visit. This number
was twice the figure for the year before the museum was refurbished.
Additionally, there was a significant rise in the proportion of visitors who
were satisfied with their visit after people had had Ashdown Museum
refurbished, from 30% to 40%, up 10%. By contrast, after the museum’s
refurbishment, the percentage of visitors who displayed their dissatisfaction
and very dissatisfaction decreased rapidly from 40% to only 15% and from
10% down to 5% respectively. The figures for visitors who had no response
was the same, at 5%, in the two periods.
219 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 36
The charts below give information about USA marriage and divorce
rates between 1970 and 2000, and the marital status of adult Americans
in two of the years.
Summarise the information selecting and reporting the main features, and
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart illustrates data on the number of marriages and divorces in the
USA from 1970 to 2000 and marital state of mature Americans in the two
years.
www.zandienglish.ir

Overall, the percentage of marriages was higher than that of divorces over the
period. And the figure for married was the highest in four categories between
1970 and 2000.
It can be seen that the number of marriages doubled that of divorces, at 2.5
and 1 million in 1970, 2.5 and 1.4 million in 1980, 2.3 and 1.1 million in
1990, 2 and 1 million in 2000. And the figure for marriages in these years
fell slightly, in 1970 and 1980 at 2.5 million which was the highest point of
the whole bar chart, at 2.3 million in 1990 and at 2 million in 2000. Besides,
the percentage of divorces fluctuated, at 1.4 million for the highest in 1980
and at 1 million for the lowest in 1970 and 2000.
The second chart shows that the lowest number went to divorced status in
1970 and widowed mature in 2000 with about 2% and 8% respectively. From
1970 to 2000, the percentage of married status and widowed one decreased
slightly from 70 to 60 percent and 9 to 6 percent, respectively, on the
contrary, the figure for never married status rose from 14 to 20 percent.
218 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
Two bar charts illustrate the figure of married and divorced cases in the USA
from 1970 to 2000 as well as the proportion of American adults based on four
marital statuses in 1970 and 2000.
Overall, the number of marriages surpassed that of that of divorces and had a
downward tendency in the given period. In addition, married people
dominate marital status in American between 1970 and 2000.
In ten years time from 1970, while the total of marriages kept unchanged at
2.5 million, divorce rates increased by 0.5 million cases from only 1 million.
After 1990, there was a considerable reduction in both figures for marriage
and divorce. However, this decline in divorces was much lighter than that in
marriages as they nearly stood at 1 million between 1990 and 2000.
In terms of matrimonial background of American adults, in two years 1970
and 2000, married people accounted for the greatest percentage of adulthood,
which ranged from 60% to 70%. Moreover, widowed and divorced portion
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
were both under 10% in two given years. Additionally, never married status
did not boast half of proportion of married adults in the USA.
190 words
MODEL ANSWER 3:
The first graph compares the figures of marriages and divorces in the USA
Americans in 1970 and 2000.

oomm
from 1970 to 2000. The second graph compares the marital state of adult
.c.c
It is clear that there was a downward trend in the number of marriage cases.
ss
Overall, the married and widowed adult rates in 1970 were higher than in
2000.
rr
ttttee
In 1970, there was 2.5 million marriages and 1 million divorces in the USA.
The divorce figure maintained the same level in the next 10 years. This was
aa
followed by a noticeable decline to 2 million until 2000. By contrast, the
divorce rate reached a peak of approximately 1.5 million. After this, there
SSMM
was a reduction by a half of the number of marriages by the end of the period.
The proportion of people in married status in the USA stood at 70% in 1970
and decreased by 10% in 2000. There was a slight fall of divorce rate until
LLTT
2000. However, the single adult percentages which never marriage and
divorce are higher in 2000 than in 1970, one in three and two in three
respectively.
186 words
MODEL ANSWER 4:
IIEE
The bar charts reveal the changing patterns of marriage and divorce rates
between 1970 and 2000, along with the proportion of adult Americans
classified into 4 main groups: never married, married, widowed and divorced
in 1970 and 2000.
As is observed from the first chart, marriages consistently outnumbered
divorces throughout 4 years reported. Likewise, according to the second
chart, the percentage of American married grown-ups were significantly
higher than the counterparts who are either never married, widowed or
www.zandienglish.ir

divorced.
Starting at 2.5 million and maintaining this figure for the first 2 decades, the
number of marriages then experienced a steady decline in the next 20 years,
reaching the lowest point of 2 million in 2000.On the other hand, the rate of
divorces fluctuated, with a climb to roughly 1.5 million in 1980, followed by
a stable slip to 1 million in 2000. It is interesting to note that the number of
the divorced was the same in 1970 as in 2000.
Turning to the second chart, while the proportion of people without a spouse
was less than 20%, the corresponding data of the married was as high as
70%, the most exceptional data recorded in 1970. Simultaneously, a similar
pattern was observed in 2000, in which married people accounted for 60%,
while adults who were never married, widowed and divorced made up for
20%, 5%, and 9% respectively.
219 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 37
The diagram below shows the process of using water to produce
electricity.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
from water.
LLTT
The picture illustrates the process of electricity production for human use
IIEE
Overall, there are 5 main stages of producing electricity from natural water to
transforming it to daily consumption.
At the beginning of the production, a dam is built at the reservoir that has the
natural water created mostly by rain. The valve at the dame can be controlled
to close or open for water flow to the turbine. The electricity that was made
when turbine move by the effect of water flow is brought to high voltage
cables then to transformer station. At the final stage, there are underground
cable systems that distribute electricity from the transformer station to the
consumers such as households, factories, and public constructions.
At the second step, water going through turbine producing electricity then
streams a pump. The process begins with the water being pumped to the
reservoir where it begins, ending one cycle of making its electricity.
www.zandienglish.ir

155 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 38
The line graph below shows the amount of electricity generated in 3
countries using wind power.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
The line graph provided data on how much electricity was produced from
wind energy in China, Germany and the USA over the course of 10 years
IIEE
starting from 2000.
Overall, all of the three nations witnessed an upward trend during given the
period of time, especially China which saw a sharp increase since the latter
half of decade.
In 2000, Germany produced most electric power from wind with roughly 6
gigawatts, followed by China and the USA with around 3 and 2 gigawatts
respectively. The figures for three countries were in the increase for next
years until 2008 where the amount of electricity generated in the USA
surpassed that of Germany. From that time on, the volume of electricity
production of Germany went up slowly, whereas the other two countries
experienced a dramatic rise with 35 and 27 gigawatts of the USA and China
www.zandienglish.ir

respectively.
In 2010, the figure for China was the highest, compared to the remainder, at
more than 45 gigawatts. In fact, forty gigawatts of electric energy came from
the USA, compared to only around 25 gigawatts from Germany.
182 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 39
The bar graph shows the global sales (in billions of dollars) of different
types of digital games between 2000 and 2006.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
The bar chart shows how worldwide sales of video games for four different
LLTT
kinds, namely mobile phones, online, consoles, and handheld devices,
changed in the period from 2000 to 2006.
IIEE
It is clear that sales of games for three out of four platforms rose significantly
over the period shown. The figure for sales of handheld games had a steady
increase each year.
In 2000, the global sales of handheld games were nearly 12 billion dollars,
while the sale for console games was much lower, at approximately 6 billion
dollars. The figures for mobile phone and online games did not appear at that
year. In 2003, the sale of handheld games increased to around 12.5 billion
dollars, while the figure for console decreased slightly to 5 million. Sales of
both mobile phone and online games were around 3 million dollars.
In 2006, earning from handheld games was the highest when compared with
other platforms. The figures for sales of handheld, online and mobile games
reach peaks of 18, 9 and 7 billion dollar respectively. Meanwhile, revenue
www.zandienglish.ir

from console game was the lowest, at around 3 million dollars.
186 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 40
The graph compares the percentage of international and the percentage
of UK students gaining second class degrees or better at a major UK
university.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
L TT
The bar chart shows the proportion of UK students and international students
L
achieving second class degrees or higher in seven different subjects at a
IIEE
university in the UK.
Overall, the chart suggested that international and UK students had different
strengths when studying for degrees in this UK University.
Degree results were generally good for both home and international students,
with well over 50% gaining a second class degree or better in all seven
subjects except International Law. International students tended to do better
than UK students in technology-related subjects. This was particularly true of
Information Technology. Whereas over 80% of international students gained
a good degree in IT, only half of the UK students did so.
Degree results were similar for two groups in Nursing and Accounting. In
arts and Social Science-related subjects, UK students tended to do better. The
www.zandienglish.ir

biggest gap in performance was in International Law, where three-quarters of
UK students gained a second class degree or better. In contrast, fewer than
half of international students attained this level.
171 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 41
The pie charts show the reasons for immigrants to a European country
in 2009 and reasons for immigrants from a European country in 2009.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
The pie charts compare the proportion of six causes for immigration and
emigration of a European Country in 2009.
Overall, job-related, accompany/family and other reasons accounted for the
largest percentages in both charts while no reason immigrants made up the
smallest proportions.
There were 23% of immigrants to the country due to a definite job, compared
to 38% of emigrants. As a consequence, as many people who immigrated to
the country to look for a job as study whereas regarding people who left the
country, those percentages were 13% and 7% respectively.
www.zandienglish.ir

In addition, other reasons percentage of immigrants to constituted 15% in
comparison with 23% of that of immigrants from. By contrast, the proportion
of accompanying family immigrants to was considerably greater than that of
emigrants with 25% and 15% respectively. Eventually, the percentages of
both immigrants to and from showed the slight difference with 7% and 4%
respectively.
151 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 42
The graph below gives information about international tourist arrivals in
five countries.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
The line chart illustrates data on the number of international travelers in 5
countries (Brazil, Egypt, Malaysia, France, and America) from 1995 to 2010.
LLTT
Overall, the US attracted the biggest quantity of tourists over the 15-year
period while the least people went to Brazil and Egypt. Moreover, France
IIEE
experienced the most significant increase in this time.
To begin with, 40 million more travelers chose the US than France in 1995;
the figures were slightly above 70 million and 30 million respectively. In the
next 5 years, there was a double in the number of France increasing to around
60 million. Likewise, the number of tourists travelling to America noticeably
developed to just more than 80 million. After the figure for the US peaked at
slightly above 90 million in 2005, it inconsiderably dipped 5 years later. In
comparison, there was a dramatic development in the number of France
which hit the top of about 80 million at the end of the time.
Turning to the other countries, the number of comers to Brazil and Egypt
commenced with approximately 10 million which was twice less than the
www.zandienglish.ir

figure for Malaysia. These 3 numbers experienced an uninterrupted growth
over the remainder of the time, reaching the peaks of, respectively, more or
less than 15 million, precisely 20 million and well under 50 million.
219 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 43
The diagrams below give information about the manufacture of frozen
fish pies.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

MODEL ANSWER 1:
The process reveals illustration about the production of the chill fish pie.
Overall, there are three main stages starting at the process of potatoes and
cultivating in storage.
The first step involves delivery potatoes to manufacture, which takes
maximum 30 days before potatoes are washed, peeled to remove waste and
chopped into small slices. Subsequently, potatoes are cooked by boiling,
followed by freezing and then storing to prepare for moving to another chain.
The process continues with the second steps also related to delivery initially
when fresh salmon is shipped to the producer within less than a half of day.
After being added with lemon juice and salt, salmon is steamed by an oven.
The next procedure is the only one witnessing human-related activities with
two workers peeling off skin and removing bones of salmon and one another
taking responsibility as an inspector. Afterwards, having been prepared
carefully, peas and sauce are combined with salmon and potatoes in previous
stages to create an almost perfect fish pie. Finally, pies are packed and frozen
before finishing at storing or dispatching.
179 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The diagrams illustrate the process in which fish pies are produced.
Overall, the process for making fish pies contains 16 steps, beginning with
delivery and culminating in the finished fish pies being frozen. Additionally,
there are 4 principal ingredients including salmon, potato, peas and sauce in a
microwaveable container.
oomm
Firstly, potatoes are delivered by truck to the factory and they must be used
.c.c
within 1 month. After being cleaned and peeled, potatoes are sliced.
Following this, the uniform slices are boiled and chilled before being sent to
storage to wait for the next stage.
rrss
ttttee
Meanwhile, fresh salmon which is transported to the factory can be kept up to
12 hours. Subsequently, lemon juice and salt are put onto the salmon in order
to improve the salmon’s taste. Before the skin and bones are removed from
aa
the salmon and put into a waste disposal, the salmon is steamed in the oven.
Then the salmon is inspected to ensure that the previous steps have been
S MM
completed carefully. Next, all of the ingredients including the salmon,
prepared peas and sauce are combined with the potato slices. Finally, the fish
S
pies are wrapped and frozen to be stored or dispatched for customers.
198 words
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 44
The charts below show the results of a questionnaire that asked visitors
to the Parkway Hotel how they rated the hotel's customer service. The
same questionnaire was given to 100 guests in the years 2005 and 2010.
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The two pie charts illustrate the opinion of 100 guests about the quality of
customer service in a specific hotel in 2005 and 2010.
In general, the quality of customer service increased significantly from 2005
to 2010. The percentage of visitors who felt excellent and good went up
considerably, whereas those figures for negative answers declined.
As can be seen from the pie charts, in 2005, only 5% of guests thought that
customer service was excellent, while the proportion of satisfactory clients
was nine times higher than this, at 45%. In the following years, there was a
six-fold increase in the percentage of visitors who supposed Partway Hotel’s
client service was perfect, at nearly 30% in 2010. This number for good
reviews had the same trend, with a growth of 25% between 2005 and 2010.
As a result, the proportion of clients who felt quite satisfied with the service
decreased from half of the hotel’s guests to about 17% in 2010.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
Over the same period, over one-third of visitors chose the word “poor” or
“very poor” to evaluate the client service in 2005. By contrast, those figures
declined significantly to 4% and 12% respectively in the year 2010.
198 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
oomm
The pie charts illustrate the finding of a study about a hotel’s customer
service satisfaction ratings in 5 different options with the sample size of 100
customers in 2 years of 2005 and 2010.
.c.c
ss
Overall, the result of ratings had improved in 5 years with an increase in the
rr
number of people choosing “Excellent” and “Good” and opposite trends for
ttttee
the options of “Satisfactory”, “Poor” and “Very poor”.
45% of the asked customers, which accounted for the biggest part in 2005,
aa
chose the “Satisfactory” option, while that figure for 2010 decreased to only
17%. The five-year period also experienced a drop from 21% to 12% for the
MM
proportion of people rating “Poor”¬. Similarity, the figure for “Very poor” in
2005 was much less than that in 2010, at 15% and 4%, respectively.
SS
By contrast, the percentage of customers choosing “Good” approximately
LLTT
tripled after 5 years (14% compared to 39%), being the highest in 2010.
Meanwhile, there was a climb from 5% to 28 % in the result for the option of
“Excellent”.
172 words
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 45
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
The given data manifests the figures of CO2 emissions of a group of
observed means of transport in the European Union and the budgets spent on
each transportation.
Overall, air transport is the biggest emission producers but are spent the least
fund of transportation.
o mm
As can be seen from the bar chart, the emission volume of air transportation
presents the most prominent position with approximately 380 grams of CO2
o
per passenger. On the other side of the coin, coaches are the cleanest
.c.c
transport with almost 48 grams of CO2 per passenger which halves buses’
ss
and four times less than passenger cars’ emissions. Astoundingly, ships’ and
rr
trains’ CO2 emissions compose the same amount of 50 grams per passenger
ttttee
and stay at the second cleanest form of transport.
Apparently, the pie chart shows that road transports contain the highest fund
with 52% of the total fund. Railways and public transport have the second
aa
greatest and the third greatest funds with 31 percent and 10 percent
M
respectively. Intermodal, inland waterway and air transports each type
185 words
SS M
accounts for 1% of the total fun and rank at the bottom line.
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 46
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The given charts illustrate the consumption of water in six different areas of
the world for three functions including agriculture, industry and domestic.
Overall, North America and Europe consume the largest amount of water for
industrial purposes whereas other countries mostly use water for agricultural
aims.
Looking at the pie charts of North America and Europe, they have same
trends in using water for three functions. The percentage of consuming water
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
in the industry is the highest figure at 48% in North America and just over a
half of the total in Europe. They also consume water for agriculture at nearly
40%, while their domestic use of water accounts for the rest 13%.
Using water for agricultural purposes occupies the largest proportion in South
America, Africa, Central and South East Asia. It gets higher than 80%, except
for South America’s figure is at 71%. In this group of four areas, South East
oomm
Asia has the highest percentage of water in industry, while Central Asia just
uses 5% water for this aim which is the lowest number comparing with other
areas.
.c.c
ss
180 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
rr
ttttee
The six pie charts compare the proportion of water in terms of industrial use,
agricultural use and domestic use in North America, South America, Europe,
aa
Africa, Central Asia, and South East Asia.
MM
Overall, it is clear that water used for the agricultural sector is the highest in
most of the areas, except for North America and Europe. By contrast, the
SS
percentage of industrial use is unpopular in South America, Africa, Central
LLTT
Asia and South East Asia.
Regarding the water used in agriculture, Central Asia has the highest percent,
at 88%, while the figure for North America and Europe are small, at 39% and
IIEE
32% respectively. At the same time, Africa, South East Asia, and South
America spent 84%, 81% and 71% of the total water for agricultural purpose
respectively.
In addition, North America and Europe have the largest figures for industrial
use, at 48% and 53% respectively. By contrast, the other areas just use
around 10% of water for the industrial sector such as Central Asia at 5%. On
the other hand, all six areas spend a minor percent for domestic purpose.
North America, South America, and Europe have a higher proportion of
using water for domestic than Africa, Central Asia and South East Asia do.
203 words
MODEL ANSWER 3:
www.zandienglish.ir

The pie charts compare the proportion of water supplied for Industry,
Agriculture and Domestic use in particular areas in the World.
Overall, water is primarily used by Agriculture in Africa, Central and
Southeast Asia, and South America while North America and Europe spent
the largest percentages for Industrial use.
On the one hand, the industrial use made up the largest proportion of 48% in
North America compared to 53% in Europe. Those were followed by 39%
and 32% of Agriculture consumed respectively while national use occupied
for the smallest percentages in both areas with 13% and 15%.
On the other hand, in terms of water supplied for agriculture, Central Asia
spent the largest percentage with 88%. There was a trifle difference in those
proportions in South East Asia and Africa with 7% and 9% while this figure
for South America was 71%. As the result, there was 19% of water used for
Domestic purposes in this area when these figures for Asian areas and Africa
were 7% and 9% respectively. Regarding figures for Industrial use, there
were subtle discriminations in those areas which accounted for 12% in South
East Asia, 10% in South America and 7% and 5% in Africa and Central Asia
respectively.
203 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 47
1971 to 2007.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The line graph illustrates changes in the percentage of car possession in Great
Britain over the 36 years period, between 1971 and 2007.
Overall, it is clear that the proportion of households owning cars tended to
increase while the figure for households without using cars decreased over
the period.
In 1971, around a half households in the United Kingdom had no car
compared to approximately 45% of one car ownership. However, after 1971,
the proportion of car possession number went up steadily. For example, two
cars ownership climbed significantly from 6 percent to 26 percent.
Additionally, the percentage of three or more cars increased approximately 5
www.zandienglish.ir

percent which was uncommon in Great Britain.
By 2007, the proportion of families having/ using one car remained
unchanged and was the highest at 45%. While there was a steady rise in the
percentage of families owning two cars to 27%, the figure for families who
had no car was 25% in 2007. Besides, the proportion of households with the
use of three automobiles increased marginally to about 7%.
175 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The line graph compares the number of cars owned by households in Britain
over a period of 36 years.
It is clear that car ownership in Britain increased between 1971 and 2007. In
particular, there was a rapid rise in the percentage of households owning two
cars, while the proportion of families possessing no car fell dramatically.
In 1971, almost half of British households did not own any car, and over 40%
of families had one car. In the same year, the proportion of households
having two cars was around 7%. The figure for three-or-more-car households
was lower, about 2%.
In 2007, the percentage of families without cars dropped rapidly to about
25%. In contrast, a significant rise from 7% to 27% was recorded in the
group of two-car households. The proportion of households having one car
was relatively steady during the survey period. The percentage of families
possessing three or more cars slightly rose to about 7%.
158 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 48
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
MODEL ANSWER 1:
IIEE
The given bar chart illustrates the most popular kinds of sport in New
Zealand in 2002.
Overall, it is evident that there were striking differences between favorite
sports of girls and boys.
In 2002, the most common sport to girls was netball, which reached a peak at
25 percent, on the contrary, there was a plunge at 1 percent in this sport
among boys. The number of girls and boys in athletics, basketball, and tennis
were the same and percentages of those are 5%, 6%, and 7%, respectively.
Meanwhile, in cricket, the data for girls and boys were highly distinct to 10
www.zandienglish.ir

percent.
Besides, the number of boys was triple girls in martial arts and soccer,
namely, there were 10% and 25% of boys. Whereas, in swimming, the
percent of girls was double boys at approximately 23%. In other sports, there
was a 10-percent in girls, while the data of boys was under 20%.
154 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The bar chart compares the percentages of boys and girls playing 9 different
kinds of sports in New Zealand in 2002.
Overall, boys participated in more of each sport than girls, except for
athletics, netball, and swimming. Besides, the proportion of girls playing
Netball was the highest of the total figures, while the data for boys ranked the
lowest.
In 2002, boys in New Zealand played football the most, at almost 25%
compared to exactly 5% of girls. Only over 1% of boys played Netball,
whereas the percentage of girls playing this sport reached a peak, at 25%. In
terms of other sports, the percentage of boys was slightly higher than the data
for girls, at about 20% and 10% respectively.
On the other hand, the proportion of girls who liked swimming was around
21% while the figure for boys was only 13%. The percentage of girls
participating cricket was the lowest, at over 1% compared to that of boys, at
10%.
162 words
MODEL ANSWER 3:
The bar chart compares nine popular sports which were played by both two
genders in New Zealand in the year 2002.
It is clear that netball was the most common sport for girls while the majority
of boys preferred to soccer. It is also noticeable that the figures for girls and
boys in each sport tend to be different.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
There were only three sports in which girls participated more than boys.
While 25% girls played netball, the figure of boys playing that sport was only
1%, which is the least popular sport for boys. In terms of athletics, the
proportions for girls and boys were quite same, 5% and 3% respectively.
Besides that, more girls swam than boys. The figure for girls who played that
sport was 23% as opposed to just under 15% for boys.
oomm
On the other hand, more boys took part in cricket, martial arts, basketball,
tennis, football and other sports. The most considerable sports were soccer
.c.c
and cricket, which saw the large differences in two genders. The percentage
of boys in soccer was nearly 25%, which was 5 times as the figure of girls in
this was 10%.

rrss
5%. Similarly, while only 1% girls liked cricket, the number of boys liked
205 words
ttttee
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 49
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The line chart gives information about the visits to two new music websites,
namely Music Choice and Pop Parade, within 15 days.
Overall, Music Choice is more popular than Pop Parade and music sites
experienced a significant increase in the numbers of visitors towards the end
of the period.
More specifically, during the first three days, there are about 120 visits per
day to Music Choice. In the meantime, the visit number to Pop Parade
reduces by half, from 40 to 20, then triples to the 60 level. Subsequently, over
the next eight days, both figures go through a period of volatility, although
their general trends are opposite. Despite a drop to less than 40 hits, Pop
Parade Saw a huge increase in the number of hits between Days 9 and 11,
reaching a total of over 150 hits on Day 11.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
From day 11 onwards, there is an inverse relationship in both figures. The
number of visitors/ viewers to Pop Parade is higher than that of Music Choice
for about one day, hitting its peak of 120 in day 12. At the end of the fifteen-
day period the number of hits to Pop Parade peaks at around 170 views,
whereas those for Music Choice show a marked reduction to around 70 hits.
213 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
oomm
.c.c
The line graph illustrates the number of times people visited two new music
websites named Music Choice and Pop Parade over the period of 15 days.
rrss
It can be seen that there was a downward trend in the number of visits to each
ttttee
site in the middle of the period shown. Overall, Music Choice was preferred
to Pop Parade.
aa
In the first day, only 40,000 visits to the site of Pop Parade were counted.
Meanwhile, the figure for Music Choice was three times as high as that of
SSMM
Pop Parade, at slightly under 120,000.
Over the remaining days, the popularity of Music Choice dropped sharply to
a low of just approximately 30,000 on the 7th day before experiencing two
LLTT
significant increases in the 11th and 14th days respectively. This figure ended
the period at roughly 170,000, which was the highest figure in the chart. By
contrast, the volume of times people accessed Pop Parade had fluctuated
IIEE
slightly at somewhere between 20,000 and 40,000 by the 11th day. In spite of
soaring to precisely 120,000 to surpass that of Music Choice for the first time
in the 12th day, the figure for the number of visits to Pop Parade rapidly
decreased to under 80,000 on the last day of the period.
210 words
MODEL ANSWER 3:
The line graph compares the figure of visits to the Music Choice and Pop
Parade on the web in 15 days.
Overall, the figure of both new music sites increased over the period 15 days.
Although the two trends were similar in term of a general growth, the number
www.zandienglish.ir

of visits to Pop Parade site was higher than that of Music Choice site.
In the first eleven days, the number of visits to Music Choice site fluctuated,
although it remained above 20000 hits. In the following day, the figure
climbed suddenly to 120000 hits. After that, it fluctuated continually between
110 and 125 in days 12 and 14. In the last day, the number of visits to Music
Choice site fell quickly to 70000 hits, which was higher than the first day
30000 hits over all the time.
Over the same days, the number of visits to Pop Parade site varied more
significantly than that of Music Choice site. It dropped gradually from the
first day to the ninth day. In the following two days, the number of visits to
Pop Parade site increased sharply to 150000 hits. Two days later, it fell
steadily again to 80000 hits before reaching the highest figure 170000 in the
last day.
208 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
SAMPLE 50
2002.
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
MODEL ANSWER 1:
SSMM
LLTT
The bar graph compares the amount of time that people in the UK spent on
different types of telephone calls over the period of 7 years.
IIEE
Overall, the figure for the local-fixed line was the highest throughout the
surveyed period, while mobiles remained the lowest despite a significant rise
in the last years.
In 1995, over 70 billion minutes were spent on local-fixed line. Meanwhile,
there were about 38 billion minutes of the national and international-fixed
line as well as only 3 billion minutes of mobiles were used respectively.
These figures increased gradually until 1999. While the number of minutes of
local- fixed-line reached the peak of 90 billion minutes, the other two types
continuously experienced an upward trend.
From 1999 to 2002, while the local-fixed line saw a fairly decline to the same
amount of time in 1995, there was a slight rise to over 60 in the figure of
www.zandienglish.ir

national and international-fixed line. Notably, the number of minutes of
mobiles grow significantly in this period. Three-time as many minutes was
spent on this type in 2002 as in 1999.
182 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
The bar chart illustrates how much time spent by the British on different
types of telephone calls between 1995 and 2002.
Overall, the number of minutes of phone calls on local – fixed-line decreased
while the figure for the time of phone calls spent by two other categories
sharply went up from 1995 to 2002. Also, the phone calls on mobiles
remained lowest over that time.
In 1995, the time of phone calls made by local – fixed line was the highest, at
around 72 billion minutes. Besides, the figure for minutes spending on two
other types of telephone calls was so much lower, approximately 36 billion
minutes on national and international – fixed line and only 4 billion on
mobiles.
In 2002, the figure for the time of phone calls on local – fixed-line remained
the highest after going up to the highest point at precisely 90 billion minutes
in 1999 and then went down gradually from 2000 to 2002. In contrast, UK
residents consumed exactly 60 billion minutes and approximately 42 billion
when telephoning by using international – fixed line and mobiles respectively
in 2002 after a constant increase over a period of 7 years.
192 words
MODEL ANSWER 3:
The bar chart compares the usage of local fixed-line, national and
international fixed line and mobiles in the UK over the period of 8 years.
Overall, local fixed line and mobiles were consistently the most and the least
used, respectively, throughout the period, and there was an increase in terms
of usage time for national and international fixed lines and mobiles.
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
In 1995, while the local fixed line was the most popular with just above 70
billion minutes of phone calls, the usage time of national and international
fixed line was only half of that amount, at 38 billion minutes. The amount of
calling time of mobiles was below 5 billion minutes, which is the lowest
figure in that year.
From 1995 to 2002, mobiles usage saw a significant rise, reaching 45 billion
oomm
minutes in 2002. Just 15 billion minutes more than that figure was the
amount of calling time of national and international fixed line, which
.c.c
similarly experienced an increase over the period shown. The usage time of
local fixed-line rose to 90 billion minutes in 1999, before dipping to just
above 70 billion minutes in 2002.
rrss
ttttee
188 words
aa
SSMM
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

SAMPLE 51
MODEL ANSWER 1:
The bar chart illustrates the fluctuation in the average price of real estate in
five different cities from 1990 to 2002 in comparison with 1989.
Overall, most of the average house prices in five cities went down gradually
between 1990 and1995. However, with the exception of Tokyo, they
increased rapidly throughout the remainder of the 12-year period.
From 1990 to 1995, the average house price in Frankfurt rose by around 1%
compared to 1989, followed by that in Madrid with an increase by 1%.
Meanwhile, the growth of real estate price in New York, London and Tokyo
remained below 0. The house prices in London and Tokyo were both around
7.5% cheaper than they were in 1989; while the proportion of growth in the
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
real estate price of New York was 2.5% higher than those both cities.
In the last six years of the period, Tokyo was the only city where people
could still buy a house at a cheaper average price compared to 1989. The
growth in terms of average real estate price in Frankfurt was slightly lower
than it was in 1990 – 1995 period, while these in Madrid and New York
surged up significantly, 4% and 5% respectively. The average house price in
oomm
London rocketed dramatically and became the highest among five cities,
from 7.5% below 0 between 1990 and 1995 to around 12.5% from 1996 to
2002.
.c.c
ss
220 words
MODEL ANSWER 2:
rr
ttttee
The bar graph compares how much money people had to pay for a house in
five different cities from 1990 to 2002 compared with 1989.
aa
Overall, the house prices rose considerably over the period of 12 years with
MM
exception of Frankfurt in Germany and we saw the highest increase in
London of UK. In addition, the highest increase belonged to London in the
UK from 1996 to 2002.
SS
LLTT
In 1990-1995, average house prices increased slightly in Madrid and
Frankfurt to about 2% and 2.5%, respectively. At the same time, the
expenditure on house in Tokyo and London dropped to about 7.5% in
IIEE
comparison with 5% in New York.
In 1990-2002, the cost for a house in London rose significantly to around
12%, which was the highest in five cities. At the same period, home-buyers
in NY and Madrid needed to pay more for owning a new house of exactly 5%
and about 4%, respectively. By contrast, people paid less money for a house
in Frankfurt, at about 1% compared with 1989. House cost increased slightly
in Tokyo but it was still lower in comparison with that in 1989, at 5%.
190 words
MODEL ANSWER 3:
The bar chart illustrates how the average house prices changed over the
www.zandienglish.ir

period of 12 years from 1990 in New York, Madrid, Tokyo, Frankfurt, and
London.
Overall, compared with 1989, the house prices in 5 metropolitan areas were
lower between 1990 and 1995 but they increased over the following 7 years
except for Frankfurt. Also, the biggest change can be seen in London (UK).
From 1990 to 1995, on average, the cost of a home decreased around 7% in
both Tokyo and London and exactly 5% in New York. By comparison, there
was an approximately 2% increase in house prices in Madrid and Frankfurt.
Over the 7 years after 1995, we can see that average house prices had risen
significantly in New York (10%), Madrid (about 2%), and Tokyo (about 2%).
House price in London jumped to over 10%, which was the highest figure in
the chart shown. By contrast, homebuyers paid 1% less when they were in
Frankfurt.
159 words
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
CONCLUSION
Thank you again for downloading this book on “IELTS Academic Writing
Task 1 Samples: Over 450 High Quality Samples for Your Reference to Gain
a High Band Score 8.0+ In 1 Week (Box set).” and reading all the way to the
end. I’m extremely grateful.
oomm
If you know of anyone else who may benefit from the useful task 1 writing
sample essays for their reference, please help me inform them of this book. I
would greatly appreciate it.
.c.c
Finally, if you enjoyed this book and feel that it has added value to your work
r ss
and study in any way, please take a couple of minutes to share your thoughts
r
and post a REVIEW on Amazon. Your feedback will help me to continue to
ttttee
write other books of IELTS topic that helps you get the best results.
Furthermore, if you write a simple REVIEW with positive words for this
aa
book on Amazon, you can help hundreds or perhaps thousands of other
readers who may want to improve their English writing skills sounding like a
MM
native speaker. Like you, they worked hard for every penny they spend on
books. With the information and recommendation you provide, they would
SS
be more likely to take action right away. We really look forward to reading
your review.
LLTT
Thanks again for your support and good luck!
IIEE
If you enjoy my book, please write a POSITIVE REVIEW on Amazon.
-- Rachel Mitchell --
www.zandienglish.ir

Go here to check out other related books that might interest you:
Shortcut To English Collocations: Master 2000+ English Collocations In

Used Explained Under 20 Minutes A Day (5 books in 1 Box set)
https://www.amazon.com/dp/B06W2P6S22
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
MM
IELTS Writing Task 1 + 2: The Ultimate Guide with Practice to Get a
Target Band Score of 8.0+ In 10 Minutes a Day
SS
https://www.amazon.com/dp/B075DFYPG6
LLTT
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

IELTS Speaking Strategies: The Ultimate Guide With Tips, Tricks, And
Practice On How To Get A Target Band Score Of 8.0+ In 10 Minutes A
Day.
https://www.amazon.com/dp/B075JCW65G
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
MM
Shortcut To Ielts Writing: The Ultimate Guide To Immediately Increase
Your Ielts Writing Scores.
SS
TT
https://www.amazon.com/dp/B01JV7EQGG
LL
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

Common English Mistakes Explained With Examples: Over 600
Mistakes Almost Students Make and How to Avoid Them in Less Than 5
Minutes A Day
https://www.amazon.com/dp/B072PXVHNZ
www.zandienglish.ir
IELTSMatters.com
oomm
.c.c
rrss
ttttee
aa
MM
Paraphrasing Strategies: 10 Simple Techniques For Effective
Paraphrasing In 5 Minutes Or Less
SS
TT
https://www.amazon.com/dp/B071DFG27Q
LL
IIEE
www.zandienglish.ir

Ielts Academic Writing Task 1 Samples Over 450

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ielts Academic Writing Task 1 Samples Over 450

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ielts Academic Writing Task 1 Samples Over 450

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Text Copyright © by Rachel Mitchell

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

with the water runoff to the ocean again.

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

packed into jars for customers.

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

these rates changed from 1920 to 2000.

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

position in the table.

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

The pie charts give information of a UK school’s expenditure changes in five

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Turning to the 3 newer networks, Washington DC is the largest in size and in

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

a notable exception of Belgium.

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

females workers in Communications.

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

citizens in seven different countries.

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters

Instagram Channel: @IELTS_Matters Telegram Channel : @IELTSMatters